System

Programming

Tracer Summit™
Version 17

Tracer Summit Version 17 BMTX-SVP01B-EN

June 2006
BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Tracer Summit System Programming

This guide and the information in it are the property of American Standard Inc. and shall not be used or reproduced in whole or in part,
except as intended, without the written permission of American Standard Inc. Trane, a division of American Standard, Inc., has a
policy of continuous product improvement and reserves the right to change design and specification without notice.

Use of the software contained in this package is provided under a software license agreement. Unauthorized use of the software or
related materials discussed in this manual can result in civil damages and criminal penalties. The terms of this license are included
with the compact disk. Please read them thoroughly.

Although Trane has tested the described in this guide, no guarantee is offered that the system and software are error free.

Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any per-
son of such revision or change.

Trane may have patents or pending patent applications covering items in this publication. By providing this document, Trane does not
imply giving license to these patents.

™® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of American Standard: IntelliPak, TCM, Tracer Summit, Trane, Voy-
ager, Tracer, UCP2, CenTraVac, ICS, VariTrane, Horizon, and Tracker.

™® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations: Adobe and Acrobat
from Adobe Systems Incorporated; ARCNET from Datapoint Corporation; AutoCAD from Autodesk; BACnet from ASHRAE;
CorelDRAW from Corel Corporation; LonTalk, LonMark, and Neuron from Echelon Corporation; Modbus from Schneider
Electric; Paintshop Pro from Jasc Software, Inc.; Windows, Internet Explorer, and Microsoft are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Printed in the U.S.A.

© 2006 American Standard All rights reserved

BMTX-SVP01B-EN
NOTICE:
Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully:

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices

CAUTION
Indicates a situation that may result in equipment damage or property damage.

The following format and symbol conventions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual:

IMPORTANT
Alerts installer, servicer, or operator to potential actions that could cause the product or system to
operate improperly but will not likely result in potential for damage.

Note:
A note may be used to make the reader aware of useful information, to clarify a point, or to describe
options or alternatives.

X This symbol precedes a procedure that consists of only a single step.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What’s new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Tracer Summit Optional Value-added Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Things to Know Before Using this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
For More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Further References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Chapter 2 Programming Order Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Setting Up a PC Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Setting Up a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Setting Up Tracer Summit Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setting Up Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting Up Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting Up Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting Up Group Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Backing Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 3 Online and Offline Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Information Flow in Tracer Summit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Online Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Offline Programming on a New Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Offline Programming of an Existing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Programming an Existing Site Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Updating an Existing Site with Offline Programming Changes . . . 15
Replacing an Existing Site with a Site Programmed Offline . . . . . 16
Offline and Online Programming of Tracer 100 Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacing an Existing Tracer 100 Site with a Site Programmed
Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Programming Offline with Global Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

BMTX-SVP01B-EN i
Table of Contents

Chapter 4 Using Referencer Edit Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Referencer Edit Control Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Constant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Referencer Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
When a Referencer Fails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Not Used Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 5 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Viewing the Tracer Summit Electronic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Viewing an Object’s Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Viewing System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Chapter 6 Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites. . . . . . . . . 33

Creating a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Creating a New Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Uploading a Site via a Dedicated ARCNET
or Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Uploading a Site via a BACnet/IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Uploading a Site via Modem/Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Restoring a Site from the Site Creation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copying a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Selecting a Site to Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Configuring a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adding device options: Modem, I/O Module, Operator Display,
BCU Event log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Editing a BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Deleting a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Creating, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Non-Trane BACnet Devices . . . . . . 69
Creating and Deleting UCMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Configuring Communication Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Selecting the BCU Version to Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Defining Billing Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Defining Security Class Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting Up Event Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting Up Event Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting Up Control Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

ii BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Setting the Time and Date for the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Deleting a Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 7 Comm5 Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Differences Between BCUs Regarding Discovery
and Database Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW) . . . . . 94
Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX
or High Capacity BMTW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Assigning Neuron IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW). . . . . . . . . 100
Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Clearing RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Assigning Neuron IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Adding a New UCM to an Existing Comm5 Link
(BMTX or High Capacity BMTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Adding New UCMs to an Existing Comm5 Link
(Standard Capacity BMTW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Replacing a Comm5 UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for a
High Capacity BMTW BCU that has had its
Software Image Upgraded to Version 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Replacing an Existing BCU (Standard or High Capacity BMTW)
with a BMTX BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Chapter 8 Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites . . . . . . . . . . 119

Creating Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Copying a Tracer 100 or Tracker Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Selecting a Site to Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Configuring Tracer 100 or Tracker Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Entering Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Creating a Remote Unit for Tracer 100 Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Configuring a Tracker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Creating Tracer 100 Sites with Multiple Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Creating a Tracer 100 COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adding Tracer 100 Panels to a Multi-Panel Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Modifying Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Changing the Master to Remote Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Changing the Remote to Master Phone Number
(Tracer 100 Sites Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

BMTX-SVP01B-EN iii
Table of Contents

Renaming a Tracer 100 Remote Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Making a Tracer 100 Panel Unit-to-Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Removing Unit-to-Unit Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Editing the Unit Number of a Remote Unit-to-Unit Tracer Panel . 133
Editing the Password of a Remote Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Deleting a Tracer 100 Remote Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Chapter 9 Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System . . 135

Setting Up a Security Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Setting Up a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Entering User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Assigning Access to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Assigning Access to Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Assigning Access to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Assigning Access to Security Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Modifying a User Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Defining Access for Users Not Logged On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Setting Up Group Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setting Up Security for the Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 10 Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones,

and Pagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setting Up Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Adding a Printer in Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Setting Up and Selecting the Events Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Selecting Other Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Setting Up Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Accessing the Workstation Modem Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Adding a Workstation Modem in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Creating a New Workstation Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Configuring a Workstation Modem for BCU Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Configuring a Workstation Modem for Tracer 100
or Tracker Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Setting Up a Workstation Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Accessing the BCU Modem Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Creating a New BCU Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Setting Security Access for a BCU Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setting Up Cell Phone/Pagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Accessing the Cell Phone/Pager Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

iv BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Creating a New Cell Phone/Pager Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Setting Up a Cell Phone/Pager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Setting Security Access for a Cell Phone/Pager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Chapter 11 Overriding System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Setting Up the Simplified Override Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Accessing the Simplified Override Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Using the Override Control button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Using a Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Using the Simplified Override Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Overriding an Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Overriding an Analog Output or Analog Value in a Non-Trane
BACnet Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Overriding a Multi-State Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Overriding a Multi-State Output in a non-Trane BACnet Device . 181
Overriding a Binary Output or a Lighting Value for an Area
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Overriding a Binary Output or Binary Value in a
Non-Trane BACnet Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Overriding a UCM or Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Releasing Control Back to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Using the Advanced Systems Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Chapter 12 Using UCM Editors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Accessing a UCM Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Creating a New UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Setting Up a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Configuring a UCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Setting the Overrides for a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Overriding the Present Value of a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Releasing Control of a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Overriding Other Values in a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . 197
Defining Alarm and Event Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Deleting a UCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

BMTX-SVP01B-EN v
Table of Contents

Chapter 13 Creating Groups of Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Creating a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Modifying Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Using Groups to Make Global Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Sample Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Creating Scan Tasks for Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Creating Call Centers for Groups of Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Deleting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Chapter 14 Making Global Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Applying Global Changes to a Single Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Applying Global Changes to Multiple Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Viewing and Modifying BCU Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Uploading and Downloading BCU Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Accessing the Analog or Binary Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Modifying the Present Value for Analog or Binary Objects. . . . . . 209
Viewing and Modifying Calculated Analog and Binary Objects . . . . . 212
Uploading and Downloading Calculated
Binary/Analog Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Accessing the Calculated Binary or Analog Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Modifying Calculated Binary or Analog Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Releasing a Calculated Binary or Analog Object
through the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Chapter 15 Using the Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Defining the Four Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Archiving the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Backing Up Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Scanning Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Panel Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Accessing the Task Manager Schedule Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Run Immediate Scan on a Single Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Creating a Task for a Single Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Creating a Task for Groups of Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Modifying Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Editing a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Deleting a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Saving the Event Log Archive File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Specifying Where to Save a Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

vi BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 16 Message Forwarding and

Call Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
What is a Call Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Background Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Previewing the Message Forwarding Setup Process . . . . . . . . . . 232
Preliminary Issues to Consider before Creating a Call Center . . . 234
Accessing the Message Forwarding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Registering E-Mail Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Creating a Call Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Creating a Message Forwarding Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Setting a Holiday Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Selecting a Site/Group from Which Alarms Are Sent . . . . . . . . . . 245
Selecting Alarm Event Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Modifying Call Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Deleting a Call Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Registering with a Different E-mail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Chapter 17 Creating Input/Output Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Creating an Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Naming an Input and Defining the Referencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Setting Up Alarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting
an Alarm Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Creating a Binary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Naming an Input and Defining the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Setting Up Alarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting
an Alarm Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Creating an Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Naming the Output and Defining the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Setting Up Multi-State Values and Assigning Labels . . . . . . . . . . 262
Entering a Control Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating a Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Naming the Output and Defining the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Entering a Control Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs . . . . . . . 268
Modifying an Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Overriding an Analog or Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Releasing Control to Another Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

BMTX-SVP01B-EN vii
Table of Contents

Changing the Present Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Setting Security Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Deleting an Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Chapter 18 BCU Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

BMTX Binary Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Pulse Meter Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
BMTW I/O Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Creating the BCU I/O Module Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Setting Up Universal Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Accessing the BCU I/O Module Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Setting Up the BCU I/O Module UIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Setting Up System Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Setting Up Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Setting Up Pulse Metered Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Setting Up Binary Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Setting Up a Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Setting Security Access for the BCU I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Chapter 19 Chiller Plant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Accessing the Chiller Plant Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Creating a New Chiller Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Setting Up the Chiller Plant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Modifying Startup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Modifying Subtract Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Adding Chiller Objects to the Chiller Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Setting Up Individual Chiller Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Chiller UCM Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . 298
Defining Alarm and Event Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Deleting a Chiller Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

viii BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 20 Area Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Using Area Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Area Mode/Member Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Timed Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Accessing the Area Control Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Creating an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Assigning Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Setting Air Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Setting Setpoints and Differentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Setting Up Timed Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Setting Up Night Economizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Assigning Event Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Setting Security Access for the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Overriding an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Overriding the Present Value and Lighting Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Making a Timed Override Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Deleting an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Chapter 21 Comm5 VAV Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Accessing the VAS Comm5 Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating a VAS Comm5 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Assigning VAS Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Assigning Common Space VAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Setting up a Comm5 VAV Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Setting up Global References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Balancing Air and Water Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Autocommissioning VAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Chapter 22 Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Accessing the VAV Air System Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Creating a VAV Air System Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Assigning VAS Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Resetting the Votes List for VAV Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Setting Up a VAV Air System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Modifying Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Modifying Changeover Vote Setpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Modifying Overrides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

BMTX-SVP01B-EN ix
Table of Contents

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . 343

Defining Alarm and Event Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Deleting a VAS Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Chapter 23 Heat Pump Loop Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Accessing the Heat Pump Loop Control Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Creating a New Heat Pump Loop Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Setting Up the Heat Pump Loop Control Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Assigning a Loop Controller Member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Assigning a Water Source Heat Pump Member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Chapter 24 Time of Day Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Accessing the Scheduling Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Creating a New Daily Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Adding an Event to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Removing an Event from a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Changing a Schedule Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Adding a Member to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Removing a Member from a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Setting or Modifying Offsets for Schedule Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Changing a Schedule’s Effective Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Save Events as a Normal Schedule to Weekdays,
Weekends, and Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Using Tracer 100 Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Accessing Tracer 100 Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Globally Changing Tracer 100 Sites Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Deleting a Tracer 100 Schedule from the Workstation. . . . . . . . . . 365
Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Adding event information to the report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

x BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 25 Custom Programming Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Opening and Closing the CPL Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Creating or Editing a CPL Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Creating a CPL Text File From a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Creating a CPL Text File from a Blank Text Window . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Adding Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Adding Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Adding Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Assigning Objects and Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Assigning Enumerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Using Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Using Saved Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Compiling a CPL Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Creating a CPL Object in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Creating a New CPL Object in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Replacing an Existing CPL Object in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Testing a CPL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
CPL Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Chapter 26 Using the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

The Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Different Types of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Using the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Accessing the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Using the Tree Menu and Pop-up Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Accessing Sites and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Connecting to a Site from the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Disconnecting from a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Closing a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Refreshing the Navigation Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Creating Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Basic Considerations in Moving Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Cutting and Pasting Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dragging and Dropping Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Creating Nodes that Belong to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Creating Nodes Inside Site Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Grouping Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Finding a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Modifying the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Assigning Graphics to Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

BMTX-SVP01B-EN xi
Table of Contents

Editing the Graphic of a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Removing Node(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Adding Back a Removed Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Editing a Tracer 100 Keyboard Macro from the Navigation Tree . 407

Chapter 27 Connecting to Tracer 100 and

Tracker EMTK Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Background Considerations for Connecting to Tracer 100 or Tracker
EMTK Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Configuring Port Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Sites on the Navigation Tree . . . . . 411
Altering Panel Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Creating .SAV files for Tracer 100 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Creating Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Accessing the Keyboard Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Creating a Keyboard Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Selecting Predefined Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
List of Predefined Keystroke Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Miscellaneous Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Tracer 100 Predefined Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Tracker Predefined Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Chapter 28 Using the Trend Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Setting up the Trend Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Setting up Properties from Pop-up Menus in a Graphic . . . . . . . . 430
Creating a Trend Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating a Trend Viewer From the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating a Trend Viewer from a Property in a Graphic . . . . . . . . . 433
Opening a Trend Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Opening a Trend Viewer from the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Opening a Trend Viewer from a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Opening a Trend Viewer from the Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Saving a New Trend Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Adding to a Trend Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Working with the Trend Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Trend Viewer Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Trend Viewer Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Trend Viewer Main Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Historical Trends in the Audit Trail Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Viewing Historical Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

xii BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 29 Trending Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Accessing the Trend Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Creating a New Trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Setting the Members of a Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Setting Up Trend Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Harvesting Trend Objects for the Trend Viewer
or the Audit Trail Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Setting Security Access for a Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Viewing the Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Saving a Trend Object to a BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Archiving Trend Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Chapter 30 Using the Graphics Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

About Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Accessing the Graphics Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Using the Graphics Editor Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Using the Graphics Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Using the Grid to Organize Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Editing Graphic Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Changing the Background of a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Using the Locate Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Viewing a Graphic’s File Name and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Setting Up Security for a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Selecting the Context Object for a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Creating and Editing Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Inserting a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Accessing the Graphic Field Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Selecting a Property Reference for Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Editing Setup Information for a Graphic Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Setup Information for Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Editing Text Styles and Borders for Graphic Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Selecting the Destination for Target Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Selecting the Context Object for Target Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Creating Graphic Links to External Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Organizing Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Selecting a Graphic Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Selecting Multiple Fields at Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Moving a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Resizing a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Cutting and Pasting a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

BMTX-SVP01B-EN xiii
Table of Contents

Copying a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Aligning Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Making Graphic Fields the Same Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Moving Graphic Field Layers Forward or Back. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Deleting a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Saving Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File Name . . . . . 495
Saving Edited Standard Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Restoring an Original Standard Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
About Site and Global Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Creating Images for Use in Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Saving Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Window and Image Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Creating a Custom Graphic from a Blank Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Opening a Blank Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Building a Custom Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Saving Custom Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Creating Expanded Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Inserting a Template Field on a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Saving a Graphic with Template Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Editing a Graphic With Template Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Putting Permanent Information into Template Fields
on a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Deleting a Graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Using the Graphing Control Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Live Property Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Historical Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Accessing the Graphing Control Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Selecting Graph Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Selecting the Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Setting up Graph Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

xiv BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 31 Using the Calculations Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

About Calculation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Cool Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Heat Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Minimum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Meter Totalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Peak for X Minute Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Total Cooling Degree Days (CDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Total Heating Degree Days (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Total Run Hours/Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Accessing the Calculations Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Creating a New Calculation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Setting Up a Calculation Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Clearing Calculation Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Setting Security Access for a Calculation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Deleting a Calculation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

Chapter 32 Designing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Report Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Live Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Trend Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Running a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Accessing the Report Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Selecting a Standard Live Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Selecting a Standard Trend or Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Opening a Saved Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Opening a Previously Viewed Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Designing or Editing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Editing the Name or Orientation of the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Defining Report Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Defining the Members of a Standard Live Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Defining the Members of a Custom Live Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Defining the Members of a Custom Trend Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Changing the Report Member Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Adding a Blank Row in the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Entering Titles and Formatting the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Entering and Formatting the Report Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

BMTX-SVP01B-EN xv
Table of Contents

Entering and Formatting the Column Headings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Formatting the Body Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Entering and Formatting the Report Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Scheduling a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Selecting a Reporting Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Setting Up Daily Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Setting Up Weekly Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Setting Up Monthly Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Setting Up Annual Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Setting Output Options for a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Saving the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Deleting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Chapter 33 Setting System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Changing the Home Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Displaying Override Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Configuring Category Alarm Buttons and Pop-up Dialog Boxes . . . . 565
Using the Category Alarms on the Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Viewing Alarm Pop-up Dialog Boxes from the Event Log. . . . . . . 568
Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding,
and Event Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Setting Up the Events Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Setting up Message Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Setting Up Automatic Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Harvested Trend Data Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Changing Default File Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Changing Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Changing the Workstation Device ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Selecting Whether Object and Device IDs Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Selecting an E-mail Profile for Message Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . 579
Setting Connection Features of the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . 580

xvi BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 34 The BCU Operator Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Accessing the BCU Operator Display Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Creating a New BCU Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Setting Up the BCU Operator Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Operator Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Selecting a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Removing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Selecting Individual Object Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Removing Individual Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Removing Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Customizing the Operator Display Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Setup Options for the Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Enabling Security at the Operator Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Disabling Security at the Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Operator Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Disabling Non-Critical Confirmation Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Disable Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Enabling Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Enabling the Quick-Select Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Selecting Custom Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Deleting Saved Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Chapter 35 Using the Custom Screen Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

About Custom Screen Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Accessing the Operator Display Custom Screen Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Creating Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Creating a Custom Screen from Another Custom Screen . . . . . . 604
Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
The Custom Screen Toolbar and Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Using the Custom Screens Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Displaying the Custom Screen Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Configuring and Using the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Adding Status Text, Binary Text, and Setpoint Control Field(s) . . 610
Inserting an Override Control Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Inserting a Static Text Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Inserting a Custom or Standard Bitmap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Linking a Target Button Field to a Custom or Standard Screen . . 615
Saving Custom Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Switching to Run-Time (Live) Screen View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

BMTX-SVP01B-EN xvii
Table of Contents

Organizing Custom Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

Snapping a Bitmap or Field to the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Centering a Bitmap or Field Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Centering a Bitmap or Field Vertically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Editing Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Selecting a Custom Screen to Edit When You Have
Another Screen Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Selecting a Bitmap or Field to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Changing the Custom Screen Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Creating and Importing Bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Closing a Custom Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Chapter 36 Using Rover in Tracer Summit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

Starting Rover in Tracer Summit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Accessing Rover Configuration Screens from UCM Editors . . . . . . . . 622
Setting up Security for Rover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
About Using Rover in Tracer Summit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Why should I use Rover in Tracer Summit? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Do I need Rover to manage my building automation system?. . . 623
Who can access Rover from Tracer Summit?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

Chapter 37 Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices . . . . . . . . 625

Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Offline Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Setting Up Control Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Selecting Control Priority Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Modifying the Control Application for a Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Modifying the Name for a Priority Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Providing Information to Other Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Communication Flow Between Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Configuring the Modem for an EIA-232 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Defining Input/Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Running a Report of BACnet Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

xviii BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 38 Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation. 643

Restoring a Site and CPL Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Restoring Global Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Restoring Site Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Restoring a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Restoring Operator Display Custom Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Restoring a Tracer 100 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
To Restore Into an Empty Tracer Summit Database . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Restoring Into a Non-empty Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

Chapter 39 Deleting Objects and Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Deleting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Selecting Objects to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Searching for Referencers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Opening and Editing the Referencing Object Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Deleting the Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Deleting a Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Deleting a Site You Are Currently Logged Onto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Deleting a Site You Are Not Logged Onto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Chapter 40 Resetting a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

Software Method to Reset BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Hardware Method for Resetting BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Clear BCU RAM and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Clear Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Clear Comm5 database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Restoring a Tracer 100 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Reader Response Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703

BMTX-SVP01B-EN xix
Table of Contents

xx BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 1

Introduction

Welcome to the Tracer Summit System Programming guide. This guide

provides a reference for setting up and configuring the Tracer Summit
software to automate your building. Here you will find background infor-
mation and step-by-step procedures describing how to perform these
activities.

What’s new
• Trend Viewer—View trended data in graphical format (see “Using the
Trend Viewer” on page 425).
• Simplified Overrides—Override system values from a graphic using
an easy-to-use user interface (see “Overriding System Values” on
page 171).
• Display override status from a graphic—Hand icon shows when an
object has been manually overridden (see “Displaying Override Sta-
tus” on page 564).
• Category Alarms—Assign alarm categories (1-5) based on impor-
tance: categories can be assigned to alarms, workshifts, individuals,
and more (see “To set up event classes:” on page 82).
• Alarm pop-up dialog boxes—Display alarm pop-up dialog boxes with
alarm/event information for alarms (see “Configuring Category Alarm
Buttons and Pop-up Dialog Boxes” on page 565).

Tracer Summit Optional Value-added

Packages
Table 1 on page 2 lists optional features and the package with which they
are bundled. You can purchase each package separately, but you must
have Tracer Summit Version 13 or higher to start.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 1
Introduction

Table 1. Optional Value-added Packages

Tracer Critical
100/ Building Enterprise
Tracer Control
Feature/Description Tracker Manage- Manage-
Summit System
Commun- ment ment (CCS)
ication

BCU operator display

• Select objects for display in standard
screens
• Create custom screens, which display live
information and a monochrome bitmap Add-on
and links to other screens
• View alarms and acknowledge them
• Optional password protection
Call center
Operators can schedule when to forward
X X
alarms from the workstation and the recipient.
Copy site
Copy an existing site database, graphics, and
X X X X X
reports as a new site.
Event log
Filter and sort events from the local event log
of the Tracer Summit BCU. For more informa-
X X X X X
tion, see the Tracer Summit Daily Operations
guide.
Tracer 100 and Tracker alarm support X X
Shared SQL event log X X
Global changes
Using global changes, modify items in one
site and easily have those changes take effect X
at other sites within a group.
Select several similar objects in a site, modify
them, and have those changes take effect for X X X X
all the selected objects.
Groups
Define individual sites as parts of a group.
X
Assign levels of user access to the groups.
Message forwarding
Forward alarms to a user-defined e-mail
address. Users defined as on-call recipients
can receive the e-mails on PCs or or on their
cell phone/pagers.
X X X X X

2 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Tracer Summit Optional Value-added Packages

Table 1. Optional Value-added Packages (Continued)

Tracer Critical
100/ Building Enterprise
Tracer Control
Feature/Description Tracker Manage- Manage-
Summit System
Commun- ment ment (CCS)
ication

Multi-user database sharing

Handle large numbers of sites and share the
database from a central server.
* Tracer Summit has been designed to work X X
specifically with Microsoft SQL Server data-
bases.
Navigation tree
Now has Windows Explorer features such as
X X X X X
drag and drop, open, cut and paste, and find.
Task manager
• Schedule automatic scans and backups of
sites
• Start immediate scan of single remote sites
• Download off-line global changes made to X X
sites
• Automatically archive the event log as a
Microsoft Excel file, as a text file, or as both
Tracer 100 and Tracker (EMTK) Support and Tracer 100 or Tracker Configuration
• Connect to Tracer 100 and Tracker (EMTK)
panels
• Communicate with Tracer 100 and Tracker
panels using BMN-like terminal emulation
• Edit calculated binary/analog, and sched- X X
ules. Run equipment diagnostic summary
reports
• Download schedules to Tracer 100 panels
• Override calculated binary/analog (point
types 8 and 11)
Trend Viewer X X X X X
View historical trends (Audit Trail data)
X X
using the Trend Viewer

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 3
Introduction

Important Things to Know Before Using

this Guide
The following list describes important prerequisite knowledge or skills
that you should have available when programming Tracer Summit soft-
ware. This list is not exhaustive and serves to remind you of things that
Trane installation engineers have learned from years of implementing
Tracer Summit at client sites.
• Facilities—Know your facility. Know its needs and the different pro-
grammable inputs/outputs it uses, as well as the equipment that you
will be controlling.
• Infrastructure—Understand what telecommunication and local
area network/wide area network (LAN/WAN) that your facility has in
place. What are its current needs and what are its future needs? Do
you have a cell phone/pager service? What are your mail server
requirements?
• Groups—The Enterprise Management Package allows you to create
groups of sites. To group sites, have your sites organized and know
where and how they fit together. Bring this information with you
when you organize sites into Tracer Summit groups.
• Users and Security—If you are managing sites with various levels
of users, know who they are and what requirements Tracer Summit
can fulfill for them. You do not want to find yourself at a critical
moment with users whose security levels are too low or too high.
• Knowledge of Various Trane Products—If you are connecting to
Tracer 100 or Tracker panels or a BCU operator display, it is recom-
mended that you have the installation and set-up guides handy to
consult.
• Interaction with Other Software—To use certain features in the
Tracer 100/Tracker Communication and Enterprise Management
packages, Tracer Summit makes use of other software platforms.
These include various Microsoft operating systems, Microsoft SQL
Server databases, and mail servers. Have the documentation for
these other systems available.
• Naming Conventions—Spend some time thinking about how you
want to name objects in your site. Then use those names appropri-
ately and consistently throughout the system.

4 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 For More Information

For More Information

Use this guide in conjunction with the online Help system and the online
library. Descriptions of all of the fields that you will see on Tracer Summit
screens are in Tracer Summit Online Help. Press F1 on any screen to
access online Help.
For information on how to maintain and operate Tracer Summit sites on
a daily basis see the Tracer Summit Daily Operations guide. See the
Daily Operations guide for more information on event logs.
Multi-use database sharing is also an advanced feature that is discussed
in engineering bulletin BAS-PRB011-EN, Tracer Summit Best Practices.
Read the Release Notes. This is strongly recommended because this docu-
mentation has all the up-to-date information about Tracer Summit. Any
new information about Tracer Summit programming not contained in
this guide is in the release notes.
For a definition of important terms and acronyms used in this guide, see
the “Glossary” on page 671.
To fully learn about the capabilities of Tracer Summit and how they can
benefit you, consider enrolling in Tracer Summit training classes. For
more information about these classes, see the course descriptions at http:/
/www.trane.com/commercial/training/trainbas.asp#fifteen.

Further References
Tracer 100 Series Panels
• Tracer 100 Series Installation Guide (EMTF-IN-6)
• Tracer 100 Series Operator’s Guide (EMTB-OG-15)
• Tracer 100 Series Programming Guide (EMTB-PG-11)
• Tracer 100 Version 15.1 Addendum to Tracer 100 Series Literature
(EMTB-AD-4)
• T100 Version Conversion Programs (EMTB-IN-10)
• Tracer 100 Troubleshooting/Repair (EMTB-TSR-2A)
• Tracer 100i, 100L, and Chiller Plant Manager Troubleshooting/
Repair (EMTF-TSR-1)
• Tracer 100 Installation Guide (EMTB-IN-12)
• Tracer 100 Series Building Management System Unit-To-Unit Com-
munications (BAS-EB-12)
• Tracer 100 Series Software Versions (BAS-EB-25)
• Tracer 100 Series Custom Reports (BAS-EB-54)
• Tracer 100i, 100L, and Chiller Plant Manager Installation Guide
(EMTF-IN-6)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 5
Introduction

Tracker Panels
• Tracker Installation Guide (EMTK-IN-7)
• Tracker Operator’s Guide (EMTK-OG-8)
Tracer Summit
• Tracer Summit for Windows and Ethernet (BAS-EB-70)
• Commissioning Tracer Summit BACnet Projects (BAS-PRB002-EN)
• Tracer Summit Connections to LonTalk Devices (BAS-PRB003-EN)
• Tracer Summit BACnet/IP Network Installations (BAS-PRB004-EN)
• Building Control Unit Sizing for Tracer Summit Systems (BAS-
PRB005-EN)
• Tracer Summit Chiller Plant Control (BAS-EB-64)
• Tracer Summit Software Versions (BAS-PRB-006-EN)
• Tracer Summit Multisite Best Practices (BAS-PRB011-EN)
• Using Tracer Summit with a SQL Server Database (BAS-PRB012-
EN)

6 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 2

Programming Order Checklist

This chapter describes the recommended programming order. It also pro-

vides a checklist for setting up the Tracer Summit system.

Setting Up a PC Workstation
(Refer to Tracer Summit Hardware and Software Installation guide.)
1. Install one of the following operating systems: Windows NT 4.0 (SP6
or greater), Windows XP (SP1 or greater) or Windows 2000 (SP3 or
greater).
2. Install Tracer Summit using the CD.
3. Install the ARCNET or Ethernet related hardware and software.
4. Install a Trane-specified modem in the PC workstation if the PC
workstation communicates remotely with a BCU.
5. Install any additional customer software.
6. Have the building owner set up TCP/IP support, if required.

Setting Up a Site
1. Use the Site Creation/Connection Wizard to create, upload, or connect
to a site. (See Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites” and
Chapter 7, “Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites.”)
2. Define units of measure. (See Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Summit
BCU Sites.”)
3. Define devices (PC workstations, BCUs and non-Trane devices). (See
Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites” and Chapter 7,
“Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites.”)

Note:
Back up the Tracer Summit system periodically during this
process.

4. Create UCM links and addresses.

5. Set up time and date and synchronize with connected devices.
6. Set up site control priorities as follows:

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 7
Programming Order Checklist

• BACnet defaults. (See Chapter 37, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane

Devices.”)
• Tracer Summit defaults. (See Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer
Summit BCU Sites” and Chapter 7, “Defining Tracer 100 or
Tracker Sites.”)
7. Set up site security access. (See Chapter 9, “Setting Up Security—
Tracer Summit System.”)
8. Route alarms and events. (See Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Sum-
mit BCU Sites.”)
9. Set up printers in the following order:
• Set up operating system printer
• Set up Tracer Summit printer (See Chapter 10, “Setting Up Print-
ers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers.”)
10. Set up modems and cell phone/pagers (if used). (See Chapter 10, “Set-
ting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers.”)
11. Use binary and analog input/output objects to customize the system.
(See Chapter 17, “Creating Input/Output Objects.”)
12. Configure the communication settings for the site. (See Chapter 6,
“Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”)

Setting Up Tracer Summit Applications

1. Set up Chiller Plant Control, if applicable. (See Chapter 19, “Chiller
Plant Control.”)
2. Set up Area Control for HVAC, lighting, and equipment: See Chapter
20, “Area Control Application.”
3. Set up variable air volume (VAV) system, if applicable. (See Chapter
22, “Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems.” and Chapter 21, “Comm5
VAV Air Systems”)
4. Set up Time of Day Scheduling:
• Events
• Exceptions
• Holidays
(See Chapter 24, “Time of Day Scheduling.”)
5. Write custom programs. (See Chapter 25, “Custom Programming
Language.”)

8 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Graphics

Setting Up Graphics
1. Create graphics. (See Chapter 30, “Using the Graphics Editor.”)
2. Set up the navigation tree. (See Chapter 26, “Using the Navigation
Tree.”)

Setting Up Reports
1. Set up trends. (See Chapter 29, “Trending Data.”)
2. Set up calculations. (See Chapter 31, “Using the Calculations Editor.”)
3. Design reports. (See Chapter 32, “Designing Reports.”)

Setting Up Group Configuration

1. Use the Site (Creation/Connection) Wizard to create, upload, or con-
nect to a site. (See Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU
Sites.”)
2. Create groups. (See Chapter 13, “Creating Groups of Sites.”)

Setting Up Group Security

1. Create groups. (See Chapter 13, “Creating Groups of Sites.”)
2. Set up security for the groups. (See Chapter 9, “Setting Up Security—
Tracer Summit System.”)

Backing Up the System

1. Back up the Tracer Summit site database. (See the Tracer Summit
Daily Operations guide.)
2. Back up reports. (See the Tracer Summit Daily Operations guide.)
3. Move files between PC workstations.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 9
Programming Order Checklist

10 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 3

Online and Offline

Programming

Information Flow in Tracer Summit

Tracer Summit uses an object-oriented distributed database to store and
retrieve all system information. An up-to-date copy of the database is
stored in each PC Workstation and appropriate data is stored in the
BCUs that are communicating (or online). All programming (setup infor-
mation) is entered from a PC Workstation, stored in the PC Workstation
database, and tagged to be downloaded to the BCUs. The information is
then sent from the BCUs to additional workstations, if necessary.
If the PC Workstation is online (communicating with the BCU), the infor-
mation is downloaded immediately to the BCU. If the workstation is
offline, the information is stored in the workstation’s database until it
goes online with the BCU. Then, the newer information gets downloaded
from the PC to BCU.
If you have the Tracer 100/Tracker Communications package installed,
you can program Tracer or Tracker panels online and offline. The infor-
mation from these sites is uploaded to your workstation from a Tracer
100 or Tracker site when you first connect to it. Any changes that you
make online are immediately sent to the site. Offline changes download
when you connect to the site.
If you have the Building Management installed, you can schedule offline
changes using the Task Manager. You can choose to download immedi-
ately or to download in the future at a time that you specify.
You can also program changes and apply them globally to single sites. If
you have the Enterprise Management package, you can program global
changes for groups of sites. Then, using the Task Manager you can specify
when these global changes are downloaded to the groups of sites.

IMPORTANT
For the most efficient and trouble-free programming, use online pro-
gramming whenever possible.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 11
Online and Offline Programming

Online Programming
Online programming is recommended for several reasons:
• With online programming, the order in which programming occurs
determines the settings in the system. For example, if one PC Work-
station programs a setpoint at 1:00 P.M., then another PC Worksta-
tion programs the same setpoint at 2:00 P.M., the programming that
occurred at 2:00 P.M. automatically takes precedence and replaces
the earlier programming in the first PC.
• Some configuration information and internal diagnostics reside in the
BCUs. When the PC Workstation is online, all the information in the
BCUs is available.
• Some configuration information and internal diagnostics reside in the
unit controllers. When the PC is online, and the unit controllers are
connected and communicating to the BCU(s), all the information is
available.
• With online programming, you can immediately verify each step in
the process.

Offline Programming on a New Site

In some situations, you may choose to use offline programming to set up
the Tracer Summit system on a new site. For instance, when the BCUs at
a site are not yet installed but the PC Workstations are configured, offline
programming allows you to start setting up the system. Some program-
ming tasks that can be done offline include:
• Configuring the site
• Creating input and output objects
• Creating schedules
• Creating areas
• Creating VAV air systems
• Setting up site security
• Setting up UCMs (see special issues with offline programming below)
• Creating graphics and reports

IMPORTANT
Offline programming changes must be performed on a single PC Work-
station. Choose a single workstation to serve as the master worksta-
tion and perform all offline programming on that workstation only. A
master workstation prevents the loss of user program data. This may
occur when changes that have been made by one user are overwritten
by changes made by another user. The workstation keeps a copy of the
programming in its database on its hard drive. When the BCUs are
installed and online, the PC Workstation downloads this database to
the BCUs.

12 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Offline Programming on a New Site

You should test any setup functions performed with offline program-
ming after the BCUs and PC Workstations are online and the database
has been downloaded.

When performing offline programming, note the following constraints

and suggestions:
1. Using additional workstations for graphics setup. If time con-
straints require that two or more PC Workstations be used to set up
the system, dedicate one workstation for site configuration and data-
base setup. Use the other workstations to create background graphics
files and edit CPL routine text files. These items can be transferred
easily between workstations with a floppy disk or other media. Set up
one workstation completely before you connect other workstations to
the Tracer Summit system.
2. Dynamic values show as “???”. When you create graphics on a PC
Workstation that is not online, dynamic values do not show up on the
graphic until the PC Workstation is online. In place of the value, “???”
appears.
3. Applications cannot be tested. You can set up application pro-
grams offline but you cannot test them. For example, custom pro-
gramming routines can be written and compiled offline, but you must
test each routine when BCUs are online.
4. UCM-resident information cannot be accessed. Some informa-
tion, such as PCM setup information, is UCM-resident only and can
only be accessed when the BCU is online. When setting up a UCM
offline, the graphic that displays is the UCM default graphic or a
user-specified custom graphic, rather than the graphic for the specific
UCM that exists on the site. You must also select a unit type for the
UCM in the Change Unit Type field in the Setup screen of the UCM
editor. When you are programming online, the system automatically
reads the UCM type and provides the type as a display only field.
When you are programming offline, you must provide the UCM type.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 13
Online and Offline Programming

Offline Programming of an Existing Site

Offline programming modification of an existing site is not recommended.
If the BCUs are installed and communicating with the PC Workstations,
use online programming if at all possible. Any changes to Site Configura-
tion of an existing site must be done online.

Note:
If you have the Enterprise Management package, you can make
programming changes to groups of sites. Offline programming
is recommended to take full advantage of the application. For
more information, see “Programming Offline with Global
Changes” on page 18.

When you must modify an existing site offline, be sure that the following
conditions exist:
• Make sure the latest copy of the database is loaded onto the offline
computer. If the workstation or laptop has been online with the
Tracer Summit system, it will contain the latest database. If the com-
puter hasn’t been online, you can copy the database to it using Tracer
Summit’s Backup Site Database utility.
• If possible, prevent other PC Workstations from making edit changes
to the system while the offline programming is in process. When
offline programming is downloaded to the BCUs, it will overwrite any
changes made from another workstation.
For example, if the same alarm limit in an analog input is pro-
grammed to 50°F by an operator online and then to 45°F by an opera-
tor offline, the newly downloaded offline setting (45°F) will take
precedence and overwrite the online setting when the offline program
is downloaded.
To program an existing site offline, follow the steps in the section “Pro-
gramming an Existing Site Offline” on page 14.
After you have programmed the site, you need to either update or replace
the existing site. Refer to “Updating an Existing Site with Offline Pro-
gramming Changes” on page 15 or “Replacing an Existing Site with a Site
Programmed Offline” on page 16.

Programming an Existing Site Offline

1. Verify that the latest site database is installed on the offline worksta-
tion. If the database does not yet exist on the offline workstation, use
one of the following methods to transfer the site to the offline work-
station:
• Upload the existing database from the BCUs to the offline work-
station. Be certain that all of the BCUs are communicating when
uploading the site.
• Restore a recent backup of the site database as explained in
Chapter 38, “Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation.”

14 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Offline Programming of an Existing Site

2. Connect to the site and achieve database synchronization. You may

observe database synchronization status by running the Tracer Sum-
mit System Status utility described in Chapter 5, “Utilities.” Be cer-
tain that all of the BCUs are communicating while observing
database synchronization status.
3. Back up the local site database to a secure location. See the Tracer
Summit Daily Operations guide for information on backing up a site.
4. Prevent the online local workstation from making any site program-
ming changes. This can be assured by assigning read-only applica-
tions security to all of the users at the site.
In addition, do not allow a site database restore operation while pro-
gramming offline.
5. Make programming changes offline. Objects may be created, edited,
and deleted while offline.
6. When the programming changes are complete, back up the offline site
database containing the programming changes to a diskette or
another location that will be accessible by the local workstation. Also
back up graphics (objects, HTML files, and images) and reports, if cre-
ated or modified offline.
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management
package, you can back up groups of sites at scheduled times using the
Task Manager.
7. Follow the steps in either “Updating an Existing Site with Offline
Programming Changes” on page 15 or “Replacing an Existing Site
with a Site Programmed Offline” on page 16.

Updating an Existing Site with Offline Programming

Changes
1. Reconnect the offline workstation to the site and achieve database
synchronization. You may observe database synchronization status by
running the Tracer Summit System Status utility described in Chap-
ter 5, “Utilities.” Be certain that all of the BCUs are communicating
while observing database synchronization status.
2. Restore graphics (objects, HTML files, and images) and reports, if cre-
ated or modified offline.
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management
package, schedule the download in Task Manager to occur at a speci-
fied time or run an immediate scan.
3. Open the edited applications while online and verify that the pro-
gramming changes were properly downloaded to the site.
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management
package, check the error log to verify that your programming changes
downloaded correctly.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 15
Online and Offline Programming

Replacing an Existing Site with a Site Programmed

Offline
In some cases, it may be necessary to completely replace an existing site’s
database. For example, if you are unsure if programming changes were
made by an operator while the offline programming was being done, it is
recommended that the database be replaced, rather than updated.
To replace an existing site with a site programmed offline:
1. Back up the local site database to a secure location from a primary,
online workstation. See the Tracer Summit Daily Operations guide
for information on backing up a site.
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management
package, you can back up groups of sites immediately or at scheduled
times using the Task Manager.
2. Disconnect the LAN cable from any secondary workstations on the
site.
3. While online with all of the BCUs on the site from the primary online
workstation, select Clear Database Ram and Reset from the BCU
Reset/Restore utility on the Tools menu. Alternatively, you may clear
the database manually at each BCU. (See Chapter 40, “Resetting a
Device”, for information on clearing a BCU database.)
4. Immediately disconnect the LAN cable from the primary workstation.
This will prevent the BCUs from obtaining the obsolete database
from the workstation.
5. Perform a database restore operation on the primary local worksta-
tion, using the backup copy of the database containing the offline pro-
gramming changes. This backup was created in step 6 of the section
“Programming an Existing Site Offline” on page 14. See Chapter 38,
“Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation”, for information on
restoring a site database.
6. Reconnect the LAN cable or modem on the primary local workstation.
The BCUs will download the updated database. Allow the site to
achieve database synchronization with all of the BCUs. You may
observe database synchronization status by running the Tracer Sum-
mit System Status utility described in Chapter 5, “Utilities.” Be cer-
tain that all of the BCUs are communicating while observing
database synchronization status.
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management
package, schedule the download in Task Manager to occur at a speci-
fied time or run an immediate scan.
7. Restore graphics (objects, HTML files, and images) and reports, if cre-
ated or modified offline.
8. On secondary workstations you can either:
• Upload the new database from the BCU or

16 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Offline and Online Programming of Tracer 100 Sites

• Make a backup of the new database at the main workstation and

restore it on the secondary workstation following steps 5 and 6
above.
Repeat step 7 for the secondary workstation. Reconnect the LAN
cable.
9. Open the edited applications while online and verify that the pro-
gramming changes were properly downloaded to the site.
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management
package, check the error log to verify that your programming changes
downloaded correctly.

Offline and Online Programming of

Tracer 100 Sites
The information provided in the preceding sections applies to online and
offline programming of Tracer 100 sites. Read those sections before con-
sidering the following paragraphs.
If you have the Tracer 100/Tracker Communications or Enterprise Man-
agement package installed, Tracer Summit allows you to program Tracer
100 and Tracker sites online through terminal emulation. In terminal
emulation you can program objects and modify them. All programming
changes that you make online are immediately transmitted to the site.
To program offline you must first upload Tracer 100 objects to your work-
station database. This is because all Tracer 100 and Tracker objects are
created at the panel. Objects are uploaded to your workstation when you
first connect to a Tracer 100 site.
After a site’s objects are in your database, you can program some of the
site’s objects offline using the Tracer Summit editors. For example, you
can use Tracer Summit to change Tracer 100 schedules or override calcu-
lated binaries and analogs.
After you have programmed changes, the next time that you log on to the
site the programming changes download automatically. If the panel has
been changed locally, these changes are also uploaded to the database.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 17
Online and Offline Programming

Replacing an Existing Tracer 100 Site with a Site

Programmed Offline
Replacing an existing Tracer 100 site is different from the procedure for
BCUs described in “Replacing an Existing Site with a Site Programmed
Offline” on page 16. Unlike BCUs, you cannot reset the RAM or memory
of a Tracer 100 site from the Tracer Summit software. You must reset
Tracer 100 at the panel itself.
To replace an existing Tracer 100 site with a site programmed
offline:
◆ Perform the procedure described in “Restoring a Tracer 100 Panel” on
page 668.

Programming Offline with Global

Changes
If you have installed the Enterprise Management package, you can per-
form offline changes and apply those changes to multiple sites. Although
it is generally not recommended that you edit sites when offline, the glo-
bal changes functions have been designed to minimize the risk of offline
editing. Only certain objects and object properties are available for edit-
ing sites offline using global changes. For a list of these objects and more
information on making changes to sites and applying them globally, see
“Making Global Changes” on page 203.

18 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 4

Using Referencer Edit

Controls

Referencer edit control fields (sometimes called referencers) are used

throughout the Tracer Summit system to allow you to set the value of one
property equal to the value of another property. They are commonly used
for setpoints and other types of system information where you may need
to make one value dependent on another value in the system.
For example, you may want the chilled water setpoint of a chiller to use
an analog output object that can be controlled from a graphic (see Chap-
ter 30, “Using the Graphics Editor”).
Referencer edit controls are identified by the mode button located on the
left side of the field (see Figure 1).

Figure 1. Referencer Edit Control Field

Mode button

Note:
For more information on objects and properties, refer to Chap-
ter 5, “Utilities”.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 19
Using Referencer Edit Controls

Referencer Edit Control Modes

Referencer edit controls have up to three primary modes through which
you can toggle by clicking on the mode button (see Figure 1 on page 19).
The three modes are:
• Constant
• Referencer
• Not Used (if available)
Depending on which mode you choose and the current state of system
communications, one of these values displays in the referencer edit con-
trol field:
• A constant numerical analog value or binary value (92, 10.5, On/Off,
Open/Closed, etc.)
• The value of the referenced property
• ??? (referencer failed)
• Not Used (if available)
Referencer edit control modes are described in the following sections.

Constant Mode
This mode allows you to either:
• Input a constant numerical value to control the field for analog fields.
(The decimal place does not display if an integer is expected.)
• Select a constant value from a pull-down list (On/Off, Enable/Disable)
if it is a binary or a multi-state field (see Figure 2).

Figure 2. Constant Mode

20 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Referencer Edit Control Modes

Referencer Mode
This mode allows you to reference another system property to control the
field. Until you have selected a valid property in the referencer mode, the
referencer edit control field is left blank. Once you have chosen a valid
property, the property’s value displays in the referencer edit control field.
You can get to the referencer mode by clicking the mode button until the
referencer button (...) is available on the right side of the field (see
Figure 3).

Note:
Tracer Summit retains the selected property reference informa-
tion even when the mode is changed to a constant or to the Not
Used mode, but the value of the property will come from the
most recently selected mode. This affects your ability to delete
the object that contains the referenced property.

Figure 3. Referencer Mode

Mode button Referencer button

To reference a property:
1. Click the mode button in the referencer edit control field to toggle
through the referencer edit modes until the referencer mode displays
(see Figure 4).

Figure 4. Mode and Referencer Buttons

Referencer button
Mode button

2. Click the referencer button. The Select Property Reference dialog box
displays (see Figure 5).

Figure 5. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 21
Using Referencer Edit Controls

3. Select the object type you would like to reference from the Type drop-
down list.
4. Select the object you would like to reference from the Name drop-
down list. The list contains only objects of the type you have chosen.
5. Select the property that will control the field from the Property list
box. Only those properties belonging to the particular object you
chose are available in this box. Depending on the type of field you are
working with, the system automatically filters property types that
are not appropriate. For example, if you are in a field that requires an
analog entry, the dialog box displays with only analog properties to
choose from.
6. Click OK when you have made your selections. To exit without saving,
click Cancel.
Until you select a property reference, the referencer mode in the ref-
erencer edit control field is left blank. After you choose a valid prop-
erty, the property’s value displays in the referencer edit control field.
If “???” displays in the referencer edit control field, the referencer has
failed and the system cannot access the referenced property.

When a Referencer Fails

If you choose the referencer mode and the system is unable to resolve the
referenced property, “???” displays in the referencer edit control field. The
UCM continues to use the last valid value it obtained (see Figure 6).

Figure 6. Failed Referenced Property

Referencers fail when Tracer Summit cannot get the referenced value
back from the object where the property resides. This occurs when the
communications between the PC workstation and BCU are down, or
when you reference a property that is offline.

Not Used Mode

This option is available in a very limited number of fields in Tracer Sum-
mit. If this option is available and selected, Tracer Summit does not send
a value to the UCM for this field. The UCM will derive the value from an
algorithm, if appropriate (see Figure 7).

Figure 7. Not Used Mode

22 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Referencer Edit Control Modes

For example, if Not Used is selected for the occupied cooling setpoint in a
VAV UCM, the system calculates the setpoint by adding the differential
to the occupied heating setpoint.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 23
Using Referencer Edit Controls

24 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 5

Utilities

This chapter includes the following sections:

• Viewing the Tracer Summit Electronic Library
• Viewing an object’s properties
• Viewing the system connection status

Viewing the Tracer Summit Electronic

Library
Tracer Summit software includes an electronic library that contains the
following reference information:
• Object and property definitions for all UCMs and applications
• Standard graphics for UCMs and applications
• Sample reports
• Sample Custom Programming Language (CPL) files
The electronic library is located on the Tracer Summit Software Installa-
tion CD.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 25
Utilities

To view the Tracer Summit electronic library:

1. Click the Windows Start button, select Programs, then select Tracer
Summit. The list of Tracer Summit applications displays.
2. Select Library. The electronic library displays in Internet Explorer
(see Figure 8).

Figure 8. Viewing the Electronic Library in Internet Explorer

3. Click a selection on the left to view reference information.

26 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing an Object’s Properties

Viewing an Object’s Properties

Tracer Summit uses objects as the basic elements of the system. Objects
include input and output points, UCMs, and applications. When you cre-
ate an object, you set up the object’s properties, or characteristic informa-
tion. For diagnostic purposes, you can view this property information
through the Setup menu’s Objects and Properties command.
You can also view each object’s properties from its applicable editor (for
example, to view the properties of an analog input, you can access the
Analog Input editor). However, viewing the properties with the Objects
and Properties command allows you to view and compare several objects
at once.
To view an object’s properties:
1. From the Status menu, select Objects and Properties. The Object and
Properties Selection dialog box displays (see Figure 9).

Figure 9. Object and Properties Selection Dialog Box

2. In the Site field, select the site name.

3. In the Type field, select the object type to be viewed. The Name field
updates to include object names for the selected type.
4. In the Name field, select the object name.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 27
Utilities

5. Select a property from the Properties list. To select multiple proper-

ties:
• For properties listed consecutively, click the first property that
you want, then hold down the Shift key and click the last property
that you want.
• For properties not listed consecutively, click the first property
that you want, then hold down the Ctrl key and click on each
additional property.
6. Click the Add button to add the selected properties to the Selected
Properties list.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for each object’s properties you want to view.

Note:
If you have selected and added several properties and then you
select a different object name (keeping the object type the
same), those same properties are selected for the new object
name. You can simply click the Add button to add them to the
Selected Properties list. This can also be done for different
object types and site names, allowing a broad variety of infor-
mation to be displayed at one time.

8. To remove any properties, select the properties in the Selected Prop-

erties list, then click the Remove button. You can also click the
Remove All button to remove all properties from the list.
9. After you have selected the properties you want to view, click OK. The
Tracer Summit window displays the value of each property you
selected (see Figure 10).

Figure 10. Example Objects and Properties Display

10. To print the display, from the File menu, select Print. At the Print
dialog box, click OK.

Note:
The objects and properties cannot be edited or saved from the
display. To edit objects or properties, you must display the
appropriate editor from the Tracer Summit Setup menu.

11. When you are finished viewing the properties, from the File menu,
select Close Graphic.

28 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing System Status

Viewing System Status

You can view Tracer Summit’s system status to determine:
• The connection status of the PC workstation
• Whether the database of the PC workstation has been synchronized
with (or is the same as) the databases of all BCUs connected to a site
• How many alarms have not yet been acknowledged for a site
To view system status:
1. Make sure Tracer Summit is displayed on the screen. If it is mini-
mized, click the Tracer Summit button in the Windows task bar.
2. From the Windows task bar, double-click the Tracer Summit System
Status icon (see Figure 11). The Tracer Summit System Status win-
dow displays (see Figure 12 on page 30).

Figure 11. Tracer Summit System Status Icon

Tracer Summit
System Status Icon

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 29
Utilities

Figure 12. Tracer Summit System Status Window

The status fields include the following:

• Site Name: Lists defined sites with a connection status.
• Connection Status: Indicates the connection status of the PC worksta-
tion to the site. Table 2 on page 31 describes the connection status
options.
• Database Sync: Indicates whether the database for the PC worksta-
tion has been synchronized with (or is the same as) the databases of
all BCUs connected to the site.
• Unacknowledged Alarms: Lists how many alarms requiring acknowl-
edgment have not yet been acknowledged in the event log. (For more
information, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily Operations guide.)

Note:
The only sites that appear in the system status window are
those sites that the workstation is communicating with or is
attempting to communicate with.

IMPORTANT
Disconnecting without synchronizing the PC workstation and BCU
databases may cause an incomplete database, resulting in improper
system control.

30 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing System Status

Table 2. System Connection Status

Connection Description
Status

Not Connected There is no connection or pending connection with a

BCU.
ARCNET The PC workstation has an active ARCNET connection
to the site.
Ethernet The PC workstation has an active Ethernet connection
to the site.
BACnet/IP The PC workstation has an active BACnet/IP connection
to the site.
EIA-232 The PC workstation has an active EIA-232 connection to
the site.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 31
Utilities

32 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 6

Configuring Tracer Summit

BCU Sites

A site defines boundaries for communication and control within the

Tracer Summit system. A site consists of the BCUs and PC workstations
assigned to the site, the UCMs attached to the BCUs, and other equip-
ment that communicates with the BCUs.
Tracer Summit supports multiple sites. If you have a single site on the
system, it automatically becomes the default site and opens when you
start Tracer Summit. If you have multiple sites, you can define a default
site to open at start up.
The Site Configuration editor allows you to:
• Select units of measure (upon initial site configuration only)
• Create, edit, and delete BCUs, PC workstations, and non-Trane BAC-
net devices
• Select a BCU version for downloading (to support existing Tracer
Summit installations)
• Create UCMs and assign them to BCUs
• Define billing periods
• Define security class names for the site
• Set up event routing
• Set up control priorities
• Set time and date options
• Synchronize time and date for all devices
• Configure communication settings to define PC workstation connec-
tions to BCU

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 33
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Creating a Site
Tracer Summit’s Site Creation/Connection Wizard allows you to create
and configure a site entirely from your PC workstation. You can also
upload. restore, or copy an existing site with a LAN (BACnet/IP, Ether-
net, or ARCNET), modem, or direct connection.
As a part of the site creation process, the Site Creation Wizard automati-
cally takes you to the Site Configuration editor, where you finish configur-
ing your site.
This section covers:
• Creating a site
• Uploading a site
• Restoring a site
• Copying a site

Creating a New Site

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 13).

Figure 13. Select Site Dialog Box

34 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 14).

Figure 14. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Create.
4. Enter a name in the Site Name field. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of eight characters.

Note:
After you save this site configuration, the site name cannot be
modified in the Site Configuration editor. Use the backup and
restore functions, to restore the site under a new name (see
Chapter 38, “Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation.”).

5. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 15).

Figure 15. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 35
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

6. Click the type of connection for your site. Only one network connec-
tion type can be defined.
7. Click Next. Depending on the type of connection you selected, a con-
figuration dialog box specific to that connection is displayed.

Site Connection via dedicated Ethernet or ARCNET

1. From the Site Connection Wizard, select Ethernet or ARCNET as the
site connection type.
2. Click Next to display the appropriate Ethernet or ARCNET Configu-
ration dialog box (see Figure 16).

Figure 16. Ethernet Configuration Dialog Box

3. Select the Ethernet or ARCNET card to be used for communicating

with the site.
4. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
Ethernet or ARCNET each time you start Tracer Summit.
5. Click Finish to display the Site Configuration editor.
When you create a new site you must designate units of measure for
the site, and assign at least one BCU before you can save the new site
(see “Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 57 and “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations” on page 66).

Note:
Tracer Summit menus are unavailable until you save the site
or cancel the site.

36 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

Site Connection via BACnet/IP

1. From the Site Connection Wizard, select BACnet/IP as the site con-
nection type.
2. Click Next to display the BACnet/IP Configuration dialog box (see
Figure 17).

Figure 17. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click:
• Use Local Connection if your workstation is on an IP subnet that
has a BCU.
• Use BBMD if your workstation is on a subnet that does not have a
BCU.

Note:
This dialog box helps Tracer Summit determine how to connect
to the site. It allows you to connect to a BCU on a local subnet,
or connect to a remote part of the facility, or connect to another
building. The building owner’s information systems (IS) staff
can tell you if the PC workstation and the BCU are on the same
subnet.
BACnet broadcast management devices (BBMDs) are used to
facilitate low level communications. On most sites the BCU
serves as a BBMD. However, it is possible for other BACnet
devices, such as, a BACnet IP router to fill this function.

4. Click Next:
• If you selected the Use Local Connection option, the Network
Adapter Selection dialog box displays (see Figure 18 on page 38
below).
• If you selected the Use BBMD option, the BBMD Configuration
dialog box displays (see Figure 19 on page 39).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 37
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

The Select Network Adapter field displays the available network adapt-
ers on the workstation that are bound to the TCP/IP protocol (see
Figure 18). Use one of these adapters to communicate with the site.

Figure 18. Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

1. Select the network adapter. Note that the IP address shown is the
address of this Workstation adapter.
2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. This will typically be
47808.
3. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish. The Site Configuration editor is displayed.
When you create a new site you must designate units of measure for
the site, and assign at least one BCU before you can save the new site
(see“Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 57 and “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations” on page 66).

Note:
Tracer Summit menus are unavailable until you save the site
or cancel the site.

38 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

The BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

The BBMD IP address is used to connect to a site (see Figure 19).

Figure 19. BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

1. Type the IP address of the BCU (or other BACnet device acting as a
BBMD) in the BBMD Address field.
2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. The other address is pro-
vided by the building owner’s IS staff.
3. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish the Site Configuration editor is displayed.
When you create a new site you must designate units of measure for
the site, and assign at least one BCU before you can save the new site
(see “Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 57 and “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations” on page 66).

Note:
Tracer Summit menus are unavailable until you save the site
or cancel the site.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 39
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Site Connection by Modem or Hardwired

1. From the Site Connection Wizard, select Modem or Hardwired as the
site connection type. Figure 20 shows the Modem option button
selected.

Figure 20. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

2. Click finish. The Site Configuration editor displays.

Uploading a Site via a Dedicated ARCNET or Ethernet

Connection
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 21).

Figure 21. Select Site Dialog Box

40 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 22).

Figure 22. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Upload.
4. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 23).

Figure 23. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

5. Click ARCNET or Ethernet.

6. Click Next to display the ARCNET or Ethernet Configuration dialog
box (see Figure 24 on page 42).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 41
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 24. ARCNET Configuration Dialog Box

7. Select the ARCNET or Ethernet card to be used for communicating

with the site.
8. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
ARCNET or Ethernet each time you start Tracer Summit.
9. Click Finish.
10. Once connected, the system checks to see if your user name (the one
you used to log onto the current site) is defined on the site to be
uploaded:
• If your user name is not defined on the site to be uploaded, follow
steps 11–14.
• If your user name is defined on the site to be uploaded, proceed to
step 15.
11. If your user name is not defined on the site to be uploaded, the Logon
to Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 25). You must log on so
the system can verify you have the security access to upload the site.

Figure 25. Logon to Upload Site Dialog Box

42 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

12. In the User Name field, type your user name.

13. Press Tab to place the cursor in the Password field, then type your
password.
14. Click OK.
15. The Confirm Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 26). Click
Yes to continue the upload.

Figure 26. Confirm Upload Site Dialog Box

The Upload Status dialog box displays with the current status of the con-
nection and the upload (see Figure 27).

Figure 27. Upload Status Dialog Box

When the upload is complete, you are returned to the Tracer Summit
main window. The new site is now the active site.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 43
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Uploading a Site via a BACnet/IP Connection

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 28).

Figure 28. Select Site Dialog Box

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 29).

Figure 29. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Upload.
4. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 30 on page 45).

44 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

Figure 30. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

5. Click BACnet/IP.
6. Click Next to display the BACnet/IP Configuration dialog box (see
Figure 31).

Figure 31. BACnet/IP Configuration Dialog Box

7. Click:
• Use Local Connection if your workstation is on an IP subnet that
has a BCU.
• Click Use BBMD if your workstation is on a subnet that does not
have a BCU.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 45
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Note:
This dialog box helps Tracer Summit determine how to connect
to the site. It allows you to connect to a BCU on a local subnet,
or connect to a remote part of the facility, or connect to another
building. The building owner’s information systems (IS) staff
can tell you if the PC workstation and the BCU are on the same
subnet.
BACnet broadcast management devices (BBMDs) are used to
facilitate low level communications. On most sites the BCU
serves as a BBMD. However, it is possible for other BACnet
devices, such as, a BACnet IP router to fill this function.

8. Click Next:
• If you selected the Use Local Connection option, the Network
Adapter box displays (see Figure 32).
• If you selected the Use BBMD option, the BBMD Configuration
dialog box displays (see Figure 35 on page 48).

Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

The Network Adapter field displays the available network adapters on
the workstation bound to the TCP/IP protocol (see Figure 32). Use one of
these adapters to communicate with the site.

Figure 32. Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

1. Select the network adapter.

2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. This will typically be
47808.

46 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

3. The Open on Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish.

Note:
The system checks to see if your user name (the one you used to
log onto the current site) is defined on the site you are trying to
upload.

5. The Confirm Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 33). Click
Yes to continue the upload.

Figure 33. Confirm Upload Site Dialog Box

The Upload Status dialog box displays with the current status of the con-
nection and the upload (see Figure 34).

Figure 34. Upload Status Dialog Box

When the upload is complete, you are returned to the Tracer Summit
main window. The new site is now the active site.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 47
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

The BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

The BBMD IP address is used to communicate with the site (see
Figure 35).

Figure 35. BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

1. Type the IP address of the BCU (or other BACnet device acting as a
BBMD) in the BBMD Address field.
2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. The other address is pro-
vided by the building owner’s IS staff.
3. The Open on Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish. Tracer Summit begins to upload the site (refer to steps
four and five of the IP Address Configuration Dialog Box section).

48 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

Uploading a Site via Modem/Direct Connect

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 36).

Figure 36. Select Site Dialog Box

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 37).

Figure 37. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Upload.
4. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 38 on page 50).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 49
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 38. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

5. Click Modem, then click Finish:

• For a new system with no sites configured, you will need to add a
PC workstation modem to Tracer Summit. Proceed to step 6.
• If your site already has a modem, proceed to step 8.
6. At the Modem Configuration dialog box, type the modem name in the
Workstation Modem Name field (see Figure 39).
7. In the Connect By field, click down arrow to select the modem type.
Selecting the modem type should fill in the rest of the information,
except for the modem name.

Figure 39. Modem Configuration

50 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

8. Click OK. The Connection Manager dialog box displays (see

Figure 40).

Figure 40. Connection Manager Dialog Box

9. In the Connect Using field, select a modem or port to use.

Note:
If there is a modem that is being used for another site, click
Current Connections. At the Current Connections dialog box,
select the site currently using the modem/port and click Discon-
nect. When the site has disconnected, click OK to return to the
Connection Manager.

10. In the Phone Number field, select the telephone number for the
remote connection.
11. If there is no phone number, add one in the Phone Book. Click the
Phone Book button to display the Phone Book dialog box (see
Figure 41 on page 52).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 51
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 41. Phone Book Dialog Box

12. Click the Add Phone Number button to display the Add Phone Num-
bers dialog box (see Figure 42).

Figure 42. Add Phone Numbers

13. Enter a phone number in the Phone Number field and select the Use
Dialing Prefix or Use Calling Card # check box as necessary.
14. Click OK to close the Add Phone Numbers dialog box, then click OK
to return to the Connection Manager dialog box.
15. In the Connection Manager dialog box, click OK. The system dials
and connects to the site.

Note:
The system checks to see if your user name (the one you used to
log onto the current site) is defined on the site you are trying to
be upload.

16. The Confirm Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 43 on
page 53).
17. Click Yes to continue the upload.

52 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Site

Figure 43. Confirm Upload Site Dialog Box

The Upload Status dialog box displays with the current status of the con-
nection and the upload (see Figure 44).

Figure 44. Upload Status Dialog Box

When the upload is complete, you are returned to the Tracer Summit
main window. The new site is now the active site.

Restoring a Site from the Site Creation Wizard

Select the Restore button when you want to restore a site, instead of cre-
ating or uploading one (see Figure 45). This option is only available when
the Tracer Summit database has no sites in it.
◆ From the Site Creation Wizard, click Restore, then click Finish. The
Restore Location dialog box displays. (For instructions on how to
restore a site, see Chapter 38, “Restoring into the Tracer Summit
Workstation.”)

Figure 45. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 53
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Copying a Site
Copy Site helps you create sites that are similar or identical to each other.
If you have a large number of sites, Copy Site can eliminate much of the
repetitive work that goes into configuring sites that have more similari-
ties than differences.
Copy Site is available with all Version 13 packages (Tracer 100/Tracker
Communication, Building Management, and Enterprise Management).
Copy Site reproduces objects from an original BCU site and transfers
them to a new site of the same type. Copy Site functions like the Restore
function (see “Restoring a Site and CPL Files” on page 643), except that
with Copy Site you can copy BCU graphic objects and report objects to a
new site.
Copy Site does not copy workstation or global objects from the original
site. This means that the new site will have the same information as the
original from which it was copied but not the following items:
• Workstation modem objects
• Message forwarding objects
• Global graphics
• Sample values in calculation objects (samples are cleared in the new
objects)
• Sample values in trend objects (samples are cleared in the new
objects)
• CPL text files
• Report text files (*.rpt files)
• User-defined standard live reports

Copying a Tracer Summit BCU Site

1. From the Tools menu, select Copy Site. The Copy Site dialog box
appears (see Figure 46 on page 55).
2. Type the name of the new site in the Name of New Site field.
The new site name must be unique, one that does not exist in the
database.
3. Select BCU from the Site Type to Copy list.
4. Click Site to Copy. The list displays the name of all the BCU sites in
the database.
5. Select whether or not to copy graphics and report files:
• If you want to copy graphics and reports from the original site,
click OK. The default is to copy these objects, so Copy Graphics
and Copy Reports are already selected.
• If you do not want to copy graphics and reports, click to clear the
Copy Graphics and Copy Reports check boxes and click OK.

54 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Selecting a Site to Configure

Figure 46. Copy Site Dialog Box

Tracer Summit copies the information that you selected from the orig-
inal site. The new BCU site node appears in the navigation tree.

Selecting a Site to Configure

If your Tracer Summit system has a single site, it is the default site and
will open when you start Tracer Summit. If you have multiple sites, you
can select the site to open at log on. When you select Site Configuration
from the Setup menu, the current site is highlighted in the Select Site
dialog box.
To select a site:
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 47).

Figure 47. Select Site Dialog Box

2. Click the site you wish to edit.

3. Click OK to display the Site Configuration editor for the selected site
(see “Configuring a Site” on page 56).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 55
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Configuring a Site
To configure a new site on your PC workstation or to modify parameters
of an existing site, follow the steps in this section.

Note:
When you create a new site, the Site Configuration editor opens
with the Units screen active. You can select units of measure
only when you are creating a new site. Once the site is saved,
the Units screen becomes status only.

Selecting Units of Measure

1. When creating a new site, the Units screen is automatically displayed
after completing the Site Connection Wizard (see Figure 48).

Figure 48. Site Configuration Editor Units Screen

2. In the Setup Options field, select the units of measure for the site.
3. If you select Customize from I-P or Customize from SI, click the first
item in the Physical Quantity list that you wish to customize. A choice
of units for that item is displayed in the Units list.
4. Click the desired unit in the Units field.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each item in the Physical Quantity field you
wish to customize.
6. Follow the instruction in the section “Creating, Editing, and Deleting
Devices” to add a BCU and a PC workstation to the new site before
you can save it.

56 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

When creating a new site you must create at least one device before you
can save the site. Once a device is created, you can edit or delete the
device.

Creating a Device
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 49).

Figure 49. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the Create Device button to display the Create New Device dia-
log box (see Figure 50 on page 58).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 57
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 50. Create New Device Dialog Box

3. Type a name in the Device Name field. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
4. Select a device number in the Device ID field.

▲IMPORTANT
Once you save the site configuration the Device ID field is fixed and you
cannot change it. Additionally, once you save the site configuration you
can not delete the Device in site configuration. Use the Delete Object
function from the Tools menu.

Note:
Tracer Summit provides a default device ID. The first BCU cre-
ated is ID 1. Each additional BCU is given the next available
ID. To change the suggested ID, type a new ID number in the
field.

5. Leave the network number at the default value of 1.

Note:
The network number for the device is edited only when there
are multiple networks on a site, typically on a BACnet job with
non-Trane equipment. Contact Trane GCC Product Support for
details.

58 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

6. From the Panel Type list box, select a device type: Enhanced BCU
(BMTX), Modular BCU (BMTW) or BCU (BMTS).
• For the BMTW, select capacity cards; 1 for standard and 2 for
high.
• For the BMTX the communication links are fixed, for example,
the comm5 link can only be set up as comm5 or Undefined (not
used), it can not be changed to comm4 or comm3 (see Figure 51).
7. For the standard capacity BMTW, if you select Comm5 as a communi-
cation link, two Comm5 mode options become available: Install a new
link and Add to or discover existing link.
• Select Install new link to enable the auto-install mode to commis-
sion Comm5 devices. In this mode, the BCU discovers Comm5
devices. Select this option if you know that a service tool (Rover,
for example) has not been used to bind devices (custom bindings)
together. This option is faster than the Add to or discover existing
link option.
• Select Add to or discover existing link for existing Comm5 or Lon-
Talk networks. Initial installation takes longer with this option.
However, all existing (custom) bindings and link information are
preserved.

Figure 51. BMTX Communication Links

IMPORTANT
Selecting the Install new link option for a network that has existing
device bindings will result in removing those device bindings.

Adding device options: Modem, I/O Module, Operator

Display, BCU Event log

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 59
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Adding a BCU Modem

1. If the device has a modem, click Add button in the Modem box to dis-
play the Create New Modem dialog box (see Figure 52 on page 60).
For the BMTW or BMTS only, if the BCU will use an EIA-232 BACnet
connection, you must add a BCU modem, which will later be config-
ured as hardwired. Note that for a BMTW or BMTS, the BCU may
not have both a modem and an EIA-232 BACnet connection.

Figure 52. Create New Modem Dialog Box

2. Type a name in the Modem Name field. Make the name as informa-
tive as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
3. To change the default security access for the modem, click Security
Classes (see “Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site” on
page 90).
4. Click OK to close the Modem dialog box.

Adding a BCU I/O Module object

◆ Refer to Chapter 18, “BCU Inputs and Outputs.”

Adding an Operator Display object

◆ Refer to Chapter 34, “The BCU Operator Display.”

Adding a BCU Event Log object

The BCU Event Log stores up to 5,000 events in the BCU. Add a BCU
event log object to:
• Dial up a BCU remotely to view alarms and events (refer to Tracer
Summit Daily Operations guide, “Viewing the BCU Event Log”)
• View alarms and events at the BCU operator display.

Note:
To view alarms and events at the operator display, you must
save the BCU event log object to the same device as the opera-
tor display object.

To Add a BCU Event Log

1. Click the Add button in the BCU Event Log box. The BCU Event Log
dialog box displays (see Figure 53 on page 61).

60 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 53. BCU Event Log Dialog Box

2. Type a name in the event log name field. Make the name as informa-
tive as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
3. To change the default security access for the BCU Event Log, click
Security Classes (see “Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site” on
page 90).
4. Click OK to close the BCU Event Log dialog box and to return to the
Create Devices dialog box.

Note:
The BCU Event Log object is not created until you click Save on
the Devices screen.

5. From the Events Routing tab, set up event receiver routing for the
newly created event log object. Alarms in the event log object show up
in the newly created operator display (see “Setting Up Event Classes”
on page 81).

Editing a BCU
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 54 on page 62).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 61
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 54. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the device you wish to edit in the Devices list.
3. Click Edit Device to display the Edit Device dialog box (see Figure 55
on page 63).

62 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 55. Edit Device Dialog Box

4. Modify the Device name, the network number, or the communication

links, as desired. The Device ID cannot be changed at this point (after
the device configuration has been saved).

Note:
Once you add a UCM on a selected communication link on the
BMTW, the link designation cannot be changed: You cannot
modify the link when it is in use. To change the link type, you
must first delete all UCMs on the link. On the BMTX BCU each
of the links is predefined and can’t be changed except to set it
“Undefined” (not used).

5. If you select Comm5 as a communication link, two Comm5 mode

options become available (standard capacity BMTW only):
• Select Add to or discover existing link to have the BCU discover all
Comm5 devices on the link, along with their custom bindings the next
time RAM is cleared in the BCU.

Note:
Select this option to preserve any custom bindings.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 63
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

• Select Install a new link to have the BCU discover all Comm5 devices
on the link but to ignore their custom bindings the next time RAM is
cleared in the BCU.

Note:
• Select this option if you know that there are no custom
bindings on the link, or if you wish to remove all of the cus-
tom bindings on the link.

IMPORTANT
Selecting the Install new link option for a network that has existing
device bindings (custom bindings) will result in removing those device
bindings.

6. In the Modem group, click the Add button to display the Create New
Modem dialog box (see Figure 56).
7. If a modem was previously added to the device, the Add button
becomes unavailable, and the Edit button is now available. Click the
Edit button to display the Edit Modem dialog box. (See Figure 56.)

Figure 56. Create New Modem and Edit Modem Dialog Boxes

8. To modify the modem name, type a new name in the Modem Name
field.
9. Click OK to display the Edit Device dialog box.
10. To delete the modem, click Delete.
11. Add or Edit the BCU I/O Module, the Operator Display or the BCU
Event Log by the same procedure described above for the Modem.
12. To modify the security classes for the Device, click Security Classes
(see “Changing Security Access for Objects in a Site” on page 17).
13. Click OK to close the Edit Device dialog box and display the Devices
screen.

64 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Deleting a Device
Note:
If the device has been saved in site configuration, you cannot
delete the device from the Site Configuration editor (the Delete
Device button is unavailable). Instead, use the Delete Object
utility from the Tools menu to delete a Device (see Chapter 39,
“Deleting Objects and Sites.”).

To delete a Device during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 57).

Figure 57. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the device in the Devices list that you wish to
delete.
3. If the Device has not yet been saved and no UCMs have been created,
the Delete button will be highlighted, Click Delete Device.

Note:
Once the device has been saved it can only be deleted using the
Delete Object function from the Tools menu.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 65
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Creating, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations

Creating a PC Workstation
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 58).

Figure 58. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click Create Workstation to display the Create New Workstation dia-

log box (see Figure 59).

Figure 59. Create New Workstation Dialog Box

3. Type a name in the Workstation Name field.

66 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

4. Select a device number in the Workstation Device ID field. Once you

save the site configuration, the Workstation Device ID field becomes
status only and you cannot change it.

Note:
Tracer Summit provides a default Workstation Device ID based
on the number assigned during the software installation. Gen-
erally, the first workstation created is ID 80. Each additional
workstation number is increased in increments of one. To
change the default ID, enter a new ID number in the field.
Typical workstation addressing is as follows:
• 80 – 100 for on-site workstations
• 101 – 120 for remote workstations
• 121 – 140 Trane-reserved addressing

5. To change the default security classes settings for the workstation,

click Security Classes (see “Setting Security Access for Objects in a
Site” on page 90).
6. Click OK to close the Create New Workstation dialog box and display
the Devices screen. The name of the workstation you just created
appears in the Workstations list.

Editing a PC Workstation
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 60).

Figure 60. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 67
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

2. Click the name of the workstation you wish to edit in the Worksta-
tions list.
3. Click Edit Workstation to display the Edit Workstation dialog box
(see Figure 61).

Figure 61. Edit Workstation Dialog Box

4. Modify the workstation name, if desired.

5. To modify the security classes, click Security Classes (see “Setting
Security Access for Objects in a Site” on page 90).
6. Click OK to close the Edit Workstation dialog box and display the
Devices screen.

Deleting a PC Workstation

Note:
If the workstation has been saved in site configuration, you
cannot delete the workstation from the Site Configuration edi-
tor (the Delete Workstation button is unavailable). Instead, use
the Delete Object utility from the Tools menu to delete a Device
(see Chapter 39, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”).

To Delete a PC Workstation during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 62 on page 69).

68 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 62. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the workstation in the Workstations list that you
want to delete.
3. Click the Delete Workstation button.

Creating, Editing, and Deleting Non-Trane BACnet

Devices
Tracer Summit has the ability to communicate with non-Trane devices
using standard BACnet protocols. When the non-Trane device is operat-
ing in a client application (providing data to Tracer Summit), you must
create the device in the Site Configuration editor (see Chapter 37, “Using
BACnet for Non-Trane Devices.”).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 69
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Creating a Non-Trane BACnet Device

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab to display
the Devices screen (see Figure 63).

Figure 63. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click Create Non-Trane BACnet Device to display the Create New

Non-Trane BACnet Device dialog box (see Figure 64).

Figure 64. Create New Non-Trane BACnet Device Dialog Box

3. Type the name and the device ID for the BACnet device.

Note:
The device ID is provided by the device manufacturer. Each
device on a network must have a unique device ID. Contact the
manufacturer for instructions, if necessary.

70 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

4. Select the object type from the Object Types field. The default selec-
tion is All Types.
5. Click the Scan button to display a list of all the available objects in
the non-Trane device.
6. From the Available Objects list, select the objects that you want to
view. Then, click the Add button to add the items to the Selected
Objects list.
7. Click Okay to save the changes and return to the Devices tab.
8. Click the Communications tab and check the Disable Automatic
Updates box (see Figure 65).

Figure 65. Disable Automatic Update

Editing a Non-Trane BACnet Device

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 66).

Figure 66. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the non-Trane BACnet device you wish to edit in
the Non-Trane BACnet Devices box.
3. Click Edit Non-Trane BACnet Device to display the Edit Non-Trane
BACnet Device dialog box (see Figure 67 on page 72).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 71
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 67. Edit Non-Trane BACnet Device Dialog Box

4. Modify the name and object type. Or, manually add new objects, if
desired.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Non-Trane BACnet Device dialog box and
display the Devices screen.

Deleting a Non-Trane BACnet Device

Note:
If the non-Trane BACnet device has been saved in site configu-
ration, you cannot delete the device from the Site Configuration
editor (the Delete Non-Trane BACnet Device button is unavail-
able). Instead, use the Delete Object utility from the Tools
menu to delete the device (see Chapter 39, “Deleting Objects
and Sites.”).

72 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

To delete a non-Trane BACnet device during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 68).

Figure 68. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the non-Trane BACnet device in the Non-Trane

BACnet Devices list that you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete Non-Trane BACnet Device button.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 73
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Creating and Deleting UCMs

After you create a device, create the UCMs you wish to assign to the
device. You can create multiple UCMs of a particular type simultaneously.
To modify a UCM after you create it, use the UCM editor to change the
settings.

Note:
The UCMs in Selected Device list can be sorted alphabetically
by each column. To sort the list, click the column header.

Creating UCMs
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 69).

Figure 69. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the device in the Devices list to which you wish to
assign UCMs.
3. Click Create UCM to display the Create UCMs dialog box for the
selected device (see Figure 70 on page 75).

Note:
Tracer Summit communication links and devices have a limit
to the number of UCMs they can support. Tracer Summit
checks the number of UCMs per link and per device and allows
you to enter only the appropriate number of UCMs.

74 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 70. Create UCMs Dialog Box

4. In the BCU Link field, click the type of communication link the UCMs
will use.

Note:
The BCU Link field displays the names of the links you defined
in the BCU setup. To add a new communication link, see “Edit-
ing a BCU” on page 61.

5. Click the arrow to the right of the UCM Type field to select from a list
of available UCM types for the particular communication link
selected in the BCU Link field.
6. Type a name in the UCM Address Name field.

Note:
If you are creating multiple UCMs, Tracer Summit will use the
name you enter as the base name followed by numbers for the
communication link and the address. For example if you enter
Rooftop Unit as the name for three UCMs on Link 1, the system
would name the units Rooftop Unit-01-033, Rooftop Unit-01-
034, and Rooftop Unit-01-035.

7. Click the arrow to the right of the Address field to select an address
for the UCM from the list of available addresses. If you are creating
multiple UCMs, the address you select will be the first address

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 75
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

assigned. The address for each additional UCM will increase in incre-
ments of one.
8. Enter the number of UCMs of the particular type that you wish to
create in the Number to Create field.
9. To modify the security access to the UCMs, click Security Classes (see
“Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site” on page 90).
10. Click Create to create the UCMs. The Create UCM dialog box closes
and the Devices screen displays. The name of the new UCMs appear
in the UCMs in Selected Device list.

Deleting a UCM

Note:
If you have created the UCM but have not saved it in site con-
figuration, clicking Delete UCM clears the UCM from the site.
If the UCM has been saved in the site, you cannot delete the
UCM in the Site Configuration editor. Instead, use the Delete
Object utility in the Tools menu to delete the UCM. (See Chap-
ter 39, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”)

To delete a UCM during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 71 on page 76).

Figure 71. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

76 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

2. Click the name of the UCM in the UCMs in Selected Device list that
you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete UCM button.

Configuring Communication Settings

The Communications editor allows you to configure a site’s connection
type after a site has been created. If the No Connection option was
selected during site creation or an incorrect connection type was defined,
use this editor to define the appropriate site connection type.

To Configure a Connection Type:

1. Click the Communications tab from the Site Configuration editor to
display the Communications screen (see Figure 72).

Figure 72. Communications Screen

2. Click the Configure button to display the Connection Wizard dialog

box (see Figure 73).

Figure 73. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

3. To change connection type, follow the instructions for connecting to

the following sites:
• “Site Connection via dedicated Ethernet or ARCNET” on page 36
• “Site Connection via BACnet/IP” on page 37

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 77
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

• “Site Connection by Modem or Hardwired” on page 40

Note:
BMTX does not support ARCNET communications.

4. After you are finished defining the connection for the site, Tracer
Summit returns you to the Communications screen, where current
network settings are displayed in the Current Communications Set-
tings fields.

Selecting the BCU Version to Download

Tracer Summit stores several versions of BCU software code on the PC
workstation. When a BCU is connected to a workstation and requests
code, the workstation sends the code to the BCU based on the version
selected in site configuration.
To select the BCU version:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Setup screen (see Figure 74).

Figure 74. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

78 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

2. Click the arrow to the right of the Enhanced BCU (BMTX) Version
field or the Modular BCU (BMTW) Version field to select the version
for downloading.

Note:
On sites containing a mix of different model BCUs:
• BMTS BCUs must be at image 6.11
• BMTW BCUs (when mixed with BMTX BCUs) must be at
Version 16.00 or higher.

Defining Billing Periods

Tracer Summit allows you to define billing period names and switches for
calculation objects. For example, calculations for power consumption,
water consumption, and gas consumption are tied to the utility company’s
billing signal so that the Tracer Summit calculations are reset simulta-
neously as the utility company’s.
To define the billing period:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Setup screen (see Figure 75).

Figure 75. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

2. Type the name for the first end of billing switch in the End of Billing
1 name field.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 79
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

3. Select a referencer in the Switch field. For detailed information on

referencing a property, see Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit Con-
trols.”
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for End of Billing 2 and End of Billing 3, if
desired.

Defining Security Class Names

You define names for the security classes used throughout the site in the
Site Configuration editor. The security classes allow you to control which
operators have access on an object-by-object basis. Each user’s level of
access is set in Site Security editor. See Chapter 9, “Setting Up Security—
Tracer Summit System.”
To define security class names:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Setup screen (see Figure 76).

Figure 76. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

2. Type the name for the first class in the Class 1 field.
3. Repeat the previous step for each class you wish to name.

80 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Setting Up Event Classes

The Event Classes page lets you set up alarming options for each event
class.
You can specify the following for each event class:
• Workstation beeps when an event is received.
• Operator acknowledges that an event message has been received.
• Forward an event to a different event class
• Attach expanded messages to specific event classes.
• Associate an event class with an alarm category.
Table 3 describes predefined event classes and shows recommended noti-
fications.

Table 3. Predefined Event Classes and Recommended Notifications

Audible Acknowledgment
Event Class Event and Alarm Types Beep Required

System Print None No No

System Log Power Failure, Operator Log On/Off, UCM Diagnostic No No
Alarm*, UCM Diagnostic Alarm Restore*
System Alarm UCM Communication Failure*, UCM Yes No
Communication Restore*
System Critical BCU Communication Failure, BCU Communication Yes Yes
Alarm Restore, Watchdog Time-Out
Comm5 NVM File Corrupted Yes Yes
BACnet Comm5 Database Mismatch Yes Yes
* If the alarm class is set to “No Notification” in the UCM editor.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 81
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Example of User-Defined Event Classes

Figure 77 shows an example of user-defined event classes. Class 5 is
named Pager Alarm, and Class 7 is named Event Alarm Class. When an
event using the MOBILE ALARMS Class 6 is received, the system beeps
and requires acknowledgment within 30 minutes or the alarm is re-
routed to the Pager Alarm class. The PC workstation receives all events.

Figure 77. Example of User-Defined Event Classes

To set up event classes:

1. Click the Event Classes tab from the Site Configuration editor to dis-
play the Event Classes screen (see Figure 77).
2. Click the Event Classes field to Select the field.
3. Enter a label for the class in the Event Class field.

Note:
Labels for event classes one through four are pre-defined and
cannot be altered.

4. To make the receivers beep when an event of that class is received,

click the Beep check box.
5. To require acknowledgment of event messages, click the Ack Reqd
check box.
6. To set the delay before an event is forwarded if it is not acknowledged,
change the value in the Delay Minutes field to increase or decrease
the delay.
7. Click the Forward To Event field to display an arrow to the right of
the field. (See Figure 77.)
8. Click the selection arrow to display a list of event classes.
9. Select an event class from the list to forward the event message to.
10. To assign an expanded message, click in the field to display an arrow
to the right of the field.
11. Click the selection arrow to display a selection of expanded messages.

82 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

12. Select an expanded message for the event class.

Note:
The analog input and binary input allow an expanded message
to be associated with their event class. That setup takes prior-
ity over this setting.

13. To assign an alarm category, click in the field to display an arrow to

the right of the field.
14. Click the selection arrow to display a list of category alarms.

Note:
You can assign categories (1–5) based on level of importance of
the alarms, work shifts, individuals, or whatever you want (see
Figure 77).

15. Select a category for the event class.

16. Click Save.

Setting Up Event Receivers

From the Event Receiver screen, you can set up event routing for event
classes (see Figure 78). Event messages are generated at the BCU and
sent to every workstation, cell phone/pager, BCU event log, or Non-Trane
BACnet device defined in the site.

Figure 78. Event Receiver Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 83
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Non-Trane BACnet Devices

When a non-Trane BACnet device is selected as the active event receiver,
the Process ID column displays (see Figure 79).
◆ Type the process ID for the BACnet device.

Note:
The process ID that you enter here must agree with the process
ID determined for the BACnet device.

Figure 79. Process ID Column

84 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

To set up event routing for event receivers:

1. Click the Event Receivers tab from the Site Configuration editor to
display the Event Receiver screen.
2. Click the selection arrow to the right of the Event Receiver field to
select an event receiver (see Figure 80).

Note:
Every workstation, cell phone/pager, and BCU local event log
defined in the site appears in the Event Receiver list.

3. Click in an Event Class field to select the field.

4. Click in the Receive Events field to display an arrow to the right of
the field.
5. Click Always, True, or False for each class to select the conditions
under which an event message is sent.
6. Click the arrow to the right of the Event Receiver Switch field to
select True or False, or enter a referencer.

Note:
For information about referencers, See Chapter 4, “Using Refer-
encer Edit Controls.”

7. Repeat for all event receivers.

8. Click Save.

Figure 80. Event Receiver Switch

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 85
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Setting Up Control Priorities

Control priorities identify the levels at which Tracer Summit applications
control an object. Normally, control priorities are set to the Tracer Sum-
mit defaults. For information on setting up control priorities for non-
Trane BACnet devices, see Chapter 37, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane
Devices.”

Setting the Time and Date for the Site

The time and date options in the Site Configuration editor allow you to:
• Set the workstation time
• Synchronize all devices on the site to the workstation time
• Synchronize all devices on the site to another device
• Automate daylight savings start and stop in the BCUs

Setting the Workstation Time and Zone

1. Click the Date/Time tab from the Site Configuration editor to display
the Date/Time screen (see Figure 81).

Figure 81. Site Configuration Editor Date/Time Screen

2. Click Adjust Date/Time to display the Date/Time Properties dialog

box (see Figure 82 on page 87). The Date & Time tab displays.

86 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 82. Date/Time Properties Dialog Box

3. Click the arrow to the right of the month field to select the month.
4. Click the arrows to the right of the year field to select the year.
5. Click the date in the calendar.
6. To set the time, click the hour, minute, or second field and then click
the arrows up or down to adjust the time.
7. To set the time zone, click the Time Zone tab to display the Time Zone
screen (see Figure 83).

Figure 83. Time Zone Screen

8. Click the arrow to the right of the time zone field to select the correct
time zone.
9. To change the default setting, click the Automatically Adjust Clock
for Daylight Saving Changes box.
10. Click OK to close the Date/Time Properties dialog box and display the
Date/Time screen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 87
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Setting Site Daylight Savings/Standard Time

1. Click the Date/Time tab from the Site Configuration editor to display
the Date/Time screen (see Figure 84).

Figure 84. Site Configuration Editor Date/Time Screen

2. Click the Configure button to display the Site Daylight Savings Time
dialog box (see Figure 85).

Figure 85. Site Daylight Savings Time Dialog Box

3. If the Site Daylight Savings Time fields are unavailable, click the
Enable Daylight Savings Time check box to enable the fields.
4. In the Daylight Savings Time Start fields, click the week of the month
and the day of the week on which you want daylight savings time to
start.
5. Click the arrow to the right of the Month field to select the month in
which you want daylight savings time to start.
6. In the Standard Time Start fields, click the week of the month and
the day of the week on which you want daylight savings time to end.

88 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

7. Click the arrow to the right of the Month field to select the month in
which you want daylight savings time to end.

Note:
Only the BCU selected as the time synchronization device
should implement Daylight Savings Time adjustment.

Setting Device Time Synchronization

Tracer Summit automatically synchronizes the time on all devices from a
master device at 2 a.m. each day. Typically, a BCU is chosen as the master
device because a PC workstation may be turned off from time to time. You
can also force synchronization of time to a PC workstation by using the
Synchronize Now button at the Site Configuration editor’s Date/Time
screen.
To set device time synchronization:
1. Click the Date/Time tab from the Site Configuration editor to display
the Date/Time screen (see Figure 86).

Figure 86. Site Configuration Editor Date/Time Screen

2. To automatically align the time of all BCUs on the site with a particu-
lar device, click the Automatic Time Synchronization Enabled check
box.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Time Synchronization Device field
to select a device to which you want to synchronize all other units.
The current time on this device will be used for synchronization when
you select Automatic Time Synchronization Enabled.
4. To synchronize devices immediately, click Synchronize Now to set all
times on the BCUs on the site (if they are communicating) to the
workstation time. A dialog box displays showing devices that have
been synchronized (see Figure 87 on page 90).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 89
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Note:
Automatic time synchronization is conducted in the early morn-
ing each day. If you want to force synchronization immediately,
click the Synchronize Now button. This process will not, how-
ever, set the time of other workstations on the site. You must
set the time for the workstation individually.

Figure 87. Synchronization Status Dialog Box.

Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site

The default security access for any object allows access for all classes. You
can change the default security access settings for any object you create
in a site. To change access, click the Security Classes button from the dia-
log box of the object for which you want to change access. For a complete
discussion of security classes, see Chapter 9, “Setting Up Security—
Tracer Summit System.”
To change security class access to an object:
1. Click Security Classes from the dialog box for the object you wish to
modify to display the Change Security Classes dialog box (see
Figure 88).

Figure 88. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

90 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting a Site

2. Click the access check boxes to allow or deny access to the object. The
security class names are defined in the Setup screen of Site Configu-
ration editor (see “Defining Security Class Names” on page 80).
3. Click OK to close the Security Classes dialog box and display the pre-
vious screen.

Deleting a Site
A site cannot be deleted from the Site Configuration editor. Use the
Delete Object utility in the Tools menu to delete a site object. (See Chap-
ter 39, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 91
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

92 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 7

Comm5 Links

This chapter describes how to:

• Install a new Comm5 link on a Tracer Summit building control unit
(BCU).
For a BMTX BCU or a high capacity BMTW BCU, see page 94. For a
standard capacity BMTW BCU, see page 100.
• Add a new UCM to an existing Comm5 link on a Tracer Summit BCU.
For a BMTX BCU or a high capacity BMTW BCU, see page 107. For a
standard capacity BMTW BCU, see page 109.
• Replace a UCM on an existing Comm5 link on a Tracer Summit BCU
(see page 112).
• Upgrade Comm5 database storage in a high capacity BMTW BCU
that has had its software image upgraded to Version 16 (see
page 115).
• Replace an existing BCU (standard or high capacity BMTW) with a
BMTX BCU (see page 118).

Differences Between BCUs Regarding

Discovery and Database Storage
BMTX BCUs and high capacity BMTWs are different from a standard
capacity BMTW BCU in terms of:
• Comm5 link discovery
• Comm5 database storage in non-volatile memory (Flash)
The BMTX BCU and the high capacity BMTW BCU do not automatically
discover the Comm5 link. While setting up a site, a user will discover the
Neuron ID and the bindings on a Comm5 network by using Site Configu-
ration. When Site Configuration is completed, the Comm5 database is
saved into non-volatile memory (Flash). The BMTX BCU and high capac-
ity BMTW BCU use this Comm5 database after a power failure, reset,
clear RAM, clear database, and clear code.
The standard capacity BMTW BCU discovers its Comm5 link automati-
cally on initial power-up of the BCU or after a clear RAM. The Comm5
database is stored in volatile memory (RAM). If RAM is cleared, this
database is recreated from the devices the BCU finds on the link. The
Comm5 database is not stored in non-volatile memory.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 93
Comm5 Links

Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or

High Capacity BMTW)
Before getting started, use the Rover service tool to verify that all devices
on the Comm5 link have been configured and operation verified. Then
remove the Rover service tool from the link and follow this procedure:
1. Select Setup from the Tracer Summit main menu, then Site Configu-
ration.

Note:
If this is a new site, choose the correct units, add your BCU and
PC workstation, and then save your site (see “Creating, Edit-
ing, and Deleting Devices” on page 57). Then proceed to step 2.

2. Select the Devices tab.

3. Highlight the BCU that you want to add devices to. Then, click the
Edit Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 89 on page 95).
If the BCU is a BMTX, proceed to step 5.

Note:
After migrating from either a BMTS or BMTW to a BMTX, you
must download the database to the BMTX before the PC Work-
station will allow you to do anything to either the Comm5 or
UCMs.

4. For a high capacity BMTW BCU, in the Communication Links group,

choose a link and use the drop-down arrow to access the list of com-
munication links. Select the Comm5 link. (The BMTW BCU can have
only one Comm5 link.)
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Devices tab.
6. Click Save and create Comm5 UCMs as described in “Creating
Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX or High Capacity BMTW” on
page 95.

94 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

Figure 89. Edit Device Dialog Box

Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX or High

Capacity BMTW
1. In Site Configuration, select the Devices tab.
2. Highlight the BCU that has the Comm5 link.
3. Click the Create UCM button. The Create UCMs dialog box displays
(see Figure 90).

Figure 90. Create UCMs Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 95
Comm5 Links

4. Select the option next to the Comm5 link (Link 4 in Figure 90).
5. From the UCM Type drop-down list, select the type of UCM you want
to add.
6. Type a name in the UCM Address Name field.

Note:
If you are creating multiple UCMs, Tracer Summit software will use
the name you enter as the base name and follow it with the communi-
cation link number and the device number. For example, if you use
the default name “SCC” as the name for three UCMs on Link 4, the
system would name the units SCC-1-4-1, SCC-1-4-2, and SCC-1-4-3.
When doing assignments later, use the default base name if you plan
to use the location label of the device (that was set up using Rover
service tool) as the UCM object name.

7. In the Number to Create field, type the number of UCMs you want to
create.
8. Click the Create button to create the UCMs and return to the Devices
tab.
This step creates one UCM object for each of the Comm5 devices. The
list of UCMs in the UCMs in Selected Device window shows all of the
UCM objects (Figure 91). In this example, six SCC were created. Ulti-
mately, each UCM object will be connected to a Comm5 UCM through
assigning a Neuron ID.

Figure 91. UCMs in Selected Device Window

96 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

9. Click the Create UCM button to add other Comm5 UCMs.

10. When you are finished, click Save to add these new objects to the
Tracer Summit database.

Assigning Neuron IDs

Follow this procedure to discover Comm5 devices and bindings and to
assign Neuron IDs to the UCM objects. Automatic discovery is initiated in
standard capacity BMTWs (for more information, see “Differences
Between BCUs Regarding Discovery and Database Storage” on page 93).

Note:
BMTX and high capacity BMTW BCUs will preserve bindings
only under the following conditions:
• Comm5 devices have not been installed on this BCU.
• All of the devices which have custom bindings were
either wired together at the time the bindings were
made, have always been wired together when communi-
cating with Rover since the bindings were made, and
are now all wired to the BCU.

1. In Site Configuration, click the Devices tab.

2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation determines whether
Comm5 activity is occurring in the BCU. When there is Comm5 activ-
ity, a progress bar displays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box. When all activity ends, the com-
mand buttons are available again.
3. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. In this phase of discovery, the
BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a list of Neuron IDs
Unassigned to UCM Objects.

Note:
Before proceeding, look at the Comm5 Object and Neuron
ID Summary on the right side of the dialog box to confirm
that the BCU found devices (Figure 92).

4. Click the Discover Binding button, only if bindings exist on the site.
(Since this phase of discovery can take time on a large link, it is more
efficient to omit this step if bindings don’t exist.)
In this phase of discovery, the BCU discovers bindings, verifies that
all devices have unique network addresses, and determines that there

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 97
Comm5 Links

are no critical link errors. After discovery is complete, the Comm5

Status field changes to the Normal mode and the dialog is activated.
Note:
The Discover Bindings button is available only during initial
installation. If devices are added later to the existing link, their
bindings must be recreated using the Rover service tool, after
they are installed on the BCU.

Figure 92. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—After Discovery of Neuron IDs

5. To view the Discovery Details window to see if errors exist, click the
Discovery Details button (Figure 93 on page 99). If errors exist,
detailed information about them will appear in this window. If the
errors are non-critical, such as Duplicate DSNs (domain, subnet,
node) or incomplete bindings, the Fix button will be available.
6. To allow the BCU to resolve non-critical errors, click the Fix button
(see Help for more detailed information about actions taken by the
BCU). To manually resolve non-critical errors, click Help for sugges-
tions.
If critical errors exist, contact technical support and provide them
with the critical error message number to get help with resolving
them.

Note:
All errors must be resolved before installation to ensure
that bindings are saved.
If errors existed and were fixed, you will have to run the
discoveries again. After viewing the Discovery Details win-
dow, proceed to the next step.

98 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

Figure 93. Discovery Details Dialog Box—With Errors

7. Click Save to File to save the report to a file for future reference, or
click Close to exit the Discover Details window and return to the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
8. After all Neuron IDs are found and errors corrected, you can begin
assigning Neuron IDs to UCM objects. From the UCM Type drop-
down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog box, select the appropriate
UCM type.
9. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name to give an unassigned Neuron ID to.

Note:
If you are using the location label as the object name, use the
default name that appears in the Unassigned UCM Object
Name field. For example, Figure 92 on page 98 shows
SCC-4-4-1 as the object name.

10. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
11. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the Neuron
ID that you want associated with the UCM object displayed in the
Unassigned UCM Object Name field.
12. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list.
13. Repeat the process for the other UCM objects.
14. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCMs in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 99
Comm5 Links

15. Click Save and close Site Configuration.

You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard

Capacity BMTW)
Before getting started, use the Rover service tool to verify that all devices
on the Comm5 link have been configured and operation verified. Then
remove the Rover service tool from the link and follow this procedure:
1. Select Setup from the Tracer Summit main menu, then Site Configu-
ration.

Note:
If this is a new installation, choose the correct units, add your
BCU and PC workstation, and then save your site (see “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 57). Then proceed
to step 2.

2. Select the Devices tab.

3. Highlight the BMTW that you want to add devices to. Then, click the
Edit Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 94).

Figure 94. Edit Device Dialog Box

100 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

4. In the Communication Links group, choose a link and use the drop-
down arrow to access the list of communication cards. Select the
Comm5 card. (The BCU can have only one Comm5 card in any com-
munication link slot.)
5. Select a Comm5 Mode option:
• Install a new link—Select this option if you don’t have custom
bindings or don’t care if they are destroyed.
• Add to or discover existing link—Select this option if you want to
preserve custom binding.

Note:
The standard capacity BMTW BCU will preserve bindings only
under the following conditions:
• Comm5 devices have not been installed on this BCU.
• The Comm5 Mode is set to Add to or Discover existing
link.
• All of the devices which have custom bindings were
either wired together at the time the bindings were
made, have always been wired together when communi-
cating with Rover since the bindings were made, and
are now all wired to the BCU.
• RAM is cleared prior to clicking the Discover button on
the Assign Neuron ID dialog box, or pressing a service
pin on one of the new devices. Existing custom bindings
are only discovered on a RAM clear. Trane recommends
clearing RAM immediately after configuring the BCU
(see “Clearing RAM” on page 103).

6. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Devices tab.
7. Click Save and create Comm5 UCMs as described in Creating Comm5
UCMs Objects below.

Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects

1. In Site Configuration, select the Devices tab.
2. Highlight the BMTW BCU that has the Comm5 link.
3. Click the Create button. The Create UCMs dialog box displays (see
Figure 95 on page 102).
4. Select the option next to the Comm5 link (Link 4 in Figure 95 on
page 102).
5. From the UCM Type drop-down list, select the type of UCM you want
to add.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 101
Comm5 Links

Figure 95. Create UCMs Dialog Box

6. Type a name in the UCM Address Name field.

Note:
If you are creating multiple UCMs, Tracer Summit software
will use the name you enter as the base name and follow it with
the communication link number and the device number. For
example, if you use the default name “SCC” as the name for
three UCMs on Link 4, the system would name the units SCC-
1-4-1, SCC-1-4-2, and SCC-1-4-3.
When doing assignments later, use the default base name if you
plan to use the location label of the device (that was set up
using Rover service tool) as the UCM object name.

7. In the Number to Create field, type the number of UCMs you want to
create.
8. Click the Create button to create the UCMs and return to the Devices
tab.
This step creates one UCM object for each of the Comm5 devices. The
list of UCMs in the UCMs in Selected Device window shows all of the
UCM objects (see Figure 96 on page 103). In this example, six SCCs
were created. Ultimately, each UCM object will be connected to a
Comm5 UCM through assigning a Neuron ID.

102 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

Figure 96. UCMs in Selected Device Window

9. Click the Create UCM button to add other Comm5 UCMs.

10. When you are finished, click Save to add these new objects to the
Tracer Summit database.
11. Click Close to exit Site Configuration.

Clearing RAM
In order to initiate discovery by the BCU of the devices on the link and
their bindings, you need to clear RAM. Bindings will be preserved only if:
• These are the first Comm5 devices installed on the BCU.
• The Comm5 Mode in the Edit Devices dialog box is set to Add to or
discover existing link (see Figure 94).
• RAM is cleared after connecting the Comm5 link wire to the BCU.

To clear RAM:
1. From the main menu, select Tools.
2. Choose BCU Reset/Restore (see Figure 97 on page 104).
3. Choose the BCU with the Comm5 card.
4. Choose Clear Ram and Reset.
5. Click the Reset button.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 103
Comm5 Links

Figure 97. BCU Reset/Restore Dialog Box

Assigning Neuron IDs

After a clear RAM and reset, allow the BCU about 60 seconds to finish
resetting.
1. From the Setup menu, open Site Configuration and click the Devices
tab.
2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation performs discovery of
Comm5 devices. When there is Comm5 activity, a progress bar dis-
plays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper right-hand corner of
the dialog box.
As a result of clearing RAM, discovery is automatically initiated.
There are two phases to discovery:
• Phase 1: the BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a
device list.
• Phase 2: the BCU discovers bindings and verifies Comm5 net-
work configuration. A phase 2 discovery only occurs after a clear
RAM.
When all activity ends, the command buttons are available again, and
devices that have been discovered appear in the Neuron IDs Unas-
signed to UCMs Objects window (see Figure 98 on page 105). If
devices do not show up on the list, you can click Discover Neuron IDs
to initiate a discovery.

104 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

Figure 98. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—After Discovery

3. To view the Discovery Details window to see if errors exist, click the
Discovery Details button (Figure 99 on page 106). If errors exist,
detailed information about them will appear in this window. If the
errors are non-critical, such as Duplicate DSNs (domain, subnet,
node) or incomplete bindings, the Fix button will be available.
4. To allow the BCU to resolve non-critical errors, click the Fix button
(see Help for more detailed information about actions taken by the
BCU). To manually resolve non-critical errors, click Help for sugges-
tions.
If critical errors exist, contact technical support and provide them
with the critical error message number to get help with resolving
them.

Note:
All errors must be resolved before installation to ensure
that bindings are saved.
If errors existed and were fixed, you will have to run the
discoveries again. After viewing the Discovery Details win-
dow, proceed to the next step.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 105
Comm5 Links

Figure 99. Discovery Details Dialog Box—With Errors

5. Click Save to File to save the report to a file for future reference, or
click Close to exit the Discover Details window and return to the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
6. From the UCM Type drop-down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog
box, select the appropriate UCM type.
7. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name give an unassigned Neuron ID to.

Note:
If you are using the location label as the object name, use the
default name that appears in the Unassigned UCM Object
Name field. For example, Figure 98 on page 105 shows SCC-4-
4-1 as the object name.

8. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
9. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the Neuron
ID that you want associated with the UCM object displayed in the
Unassigned UCM Object Name field.
10. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list.
11. Repeat the process for the other UCM objects.
12. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCMs in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.
13. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU

106 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Adding a New UCM to an Existing Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-

stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

Adding a New UCM to an Existing

Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity
BMTW)
To add a new UCM to an existing Comm5 link:

Note:
When you add a device to an existing link, you will not be able
to preserve bindings between any of the new devices that are
added. You will, however, be able to preserve existing bindings.
If additional bindings are required, create them using the
Rover service tool or Rover in Tracer Summit software, after
the device has been added. Then remove the Rover service tool
from the link and follow this procedure.

1. Start your installation at the new UCM. Configure and verify opera-
tion of the new device in stand-alone mode, without the communica-
tion link connected, using the Rover service tool.
If this device was previously installed, push the service pin for 15 sec-
onds until the red service LED flashes.
2. Connect the UCM to the communication link on the BCU. Move ter-
mination resistors, if necessary.
3. At the PC workstation select Setup from the Tracer Summit main
menu and open Site Configuration.
4. From the Devices tab, click the Create UCM button. Then follow the
procedure for “Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX or High
Capacity BMTW” on page 95. If you created the UCMs during the ini-
tial installation, you can skip this step.

Note:
Unassigned UCMs show up in the UCMs list on the Devices
tab with the default name and no Neuron ID assigned.

5. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation determines whether
Comm5 activity is occurring in the BCU. When there is Comm5 activ-

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 107
Comm5 Links

ity, a progress bar displays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box. When all activity ends, the com-
mand buttons are available again.
6. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. In this phase of discovery, the
BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a list that appears in
the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects. Confirmation that the
BCU found devices also appears in the Comm5 Object and Neuron ID
Summary on the left side of the dialog box.
7. From the UCM Type drop-down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog
box, select the appropriate UCM type.
8. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name to give an unassigned Neuron ID to.
9. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
object name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
10. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the Neuron
ID that you want associated with the UCM object displayed in the
Unassigned UCM Object Name field.
11. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list (see
Figure 100).

Figure 100. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—Adding a New Comm5 UCM

to an Existing Link

108 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Adding New UCMs to an Existing Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

12. Repeat the process if there are more UCM objects to assign.
13. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCM objects in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.
14. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

Adding New UCMs to an Existing

Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity
BMTW)
To add a new UCM to an existing Comm5 link:

Note:
When you add a device to an existing link, you will not be able
to preserve bindings between any of the new devices that are
added. You will, however, be able to preserve existing bindings.
If additional bindings are required, create them using the
Rover service tool or Rover in Tracer Summit software, after
the device has been added. Then remove the Rover service tool
from the link and follow this procedure.

1. Start your installation at the new Comm5 device. Configure and ver-
ify operation of the new device in stand-alone mode, without the com-
munication link connected, using the Rover service tool.
If this device was previously installed, push the service pin for 15 sec-
onds until the red service LED flashes.
2. Connect the UCM to the communication link on the BCU. Move ter-
mination resistors, if necessary.
3. When you have completed the installation of the new units on the
link, push the service pin on all of the units. This broadcasts the Neu-
ron ID of the new devices on the link. The BCU will discover only the
new devices on the link.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 109
Comm5 Links

4. At the PC workstation select Setup from the Tracer Summit main

menu and open Site Configuration.
5. From the Devices tab, click the Create UCM button. Then follow the
procedure for “Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects” on page 101. If you
created the UCMs during the initial installation, you can skip this
step.

Note:
Unassigned UCMs show up in the UCMs list on the Devices
tab with the default name and no Neuron ID assigned.

6. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation performs discovery of
Comm5 devices. When there is Comm5 activity, a progress bar dis-
plays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper right-hand corner of
the dialog box.
After the BCU checks for Comm5 activity, it conducts a phase 1 dis-
covery. In phase 1, the BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a
device list. You will not see a phase 2 discovery because you are not
preserving any bindings.
Once discovery is complete the command buttons become available
again and new devices will show up on the Neuron IDs Unassigned to
UCM Objects list. If devices do not show up on the list, you can click
Discover Neuron IDs to initiate a discovery.
7. From the UCM Type drop-down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog
box, select the appropriate UCM type.
8. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name to give an unassigned Neuron ID to.
9. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
object name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
10. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects field, select the Neu-
ron ID that you want associated with the UCM displayed in the Unas-
signed UCM Object Name field.
11. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list
(Figure 101 on page 111).

110 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Adding New UCMs to an Existing Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

Figure 101. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—Adding a New Comm5 UCM

to an Existing Link

12. Repeat the process if there are more UCM objects to assign.
13. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCMs in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.
14. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 111
Comm5 Links

Replacing a Comm5 UCM

The most obvious reason to replace a UCM is because of circuit board fail-
ure. But boards are also commonly replaced as a troubleshooting tech-
nique, to determine if the problem is with the controller.

Note:
When you add a device to an existing link, you will not be able
to preserve bindings between any of the new devices that are
added. You will, however, be able to preserve existing bindings.
If additional bindings are required, create them using the
Rover service tool or Rover in Tracer Summit software, after
the device has been added.

Begin the process at the Tracer Summit PC workstation. First you need
to remove the UCM that is being replaced from the assignments list in
the BCU. This tells the BCU not to look for this UCM on its Comm5 link.
To replace a Comm5 UCM:
1. Select Setup from the Tracer Summit main menu, open Site Configu-
ration and click the Devices tab.
2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button. The Assign
Neuron ID dialog box displays (see Figure 102).

Figure 102. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box Showing Assigned UCMs

112 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Replacing a Comm5 UCM

3. From the Neuron IDs Assigned to UCM objects list, choose the UCM
that is to be replaced.
4. Click the Unassign button. The UCM appears in the unassigned list
(see Figure 103).

Figure 103. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box Showing the UCM to be

Replaced in the Unassigned List

5. Click OK. Tracer Summit returns to the Devices tab.

On the Devices tab, the UCM object shows all zeros for the associated
Neuron ID.
6. Save and close Site Configuration.
7. After the yellow communication LED stops flashing, disconnect the
comm link from the UCM. Also, remove any other wiring.
8. Replace board, rewire inputs and outputs, and connect power. Do not
connect your communication wires yet.
9. Connect with Rover and configure the UCM.
10. Remove Rover from the UCM.
• If the UCM has been on another link, you will need to unconfigure
its network configurations, go to step 11.
• If this is a new UCM from the factory, go to step 12.
11. Hold the service pin down for at least 15 seconds. The red service
LED flashes, signaling the UCM is unconfigured.
12. Reconnect the communication link to the UCM.
13. Return to the PC workstation to complete the replacement.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 113
Comm5 Links

14. Re-open Site Configuration, Devices tab, and the Assign Neuron ID
window.
15. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. Discovery of Neuron IDs is ini-
tiated.
16. From the UCM Type drop-down list, select the UCM type. The unas-
signed UCM displays in the Unassigned UCMs field.
17. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the new
Neuron ID.
18. Click the Assign button to assign the Neuron ID to the unassigned
UCM.
19. Click OK. Tracer Summit returns to the Devices tab.
20. In the UCMs in Selected Device window, verify that new Neuron ID is
in the list.
21. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

114 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for a High Capacity BMTW BCU that has

Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage

for a High Capacity BMTW BCU that
has had its Software Image Upgraded
to Version 16
A high capacity BMTW BCU must have its software image upgraded to
version 16 in order to store its Comm5 database in non-volatile (Flash)
memory rather than volatile memory (RAM).
You must create and save the Comm5 database to the non-volatile mem-
ory in your Version 16 BCU before you can add new devices to the existing
link. Perform the upgrade first to keep Neuron ID assignments. Then
install the new devices as instructed in “Adding a New UCM to an Exist-
ing Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)” on page 107.

Note:
This upgrade procedure does not apply to a standard capacity
BMTW BCU, because it can store its Comm5 database only in
RAM.

If the software image has been upgraded, you will be prompted to redis-
cover the Comm5 network Neuron IDs and bindings when you log on the
PC Workstation (see Figure 104).

Figure 104. Prompt to Rediscover the Comm5 Network after Upgrading

BCU Software Image

1. From the Setup menu, open Site Configuration and click the Devices
tab.
2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 115
Comm5 Links

When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation determines whether
Comm5 activity is occurring in the BCU. When there is Comm5 activ-
ity, a progress bar displays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box. When all activity ends, the com-
mand buttons are available again.

Note:
Figure 105 shows the Neuron IDs Assigned to UCM Objects list
populated. The location label column is blank because the BCU
has not discovered the actual devices on the link yet and cannot
associate the correct location label with the Neuron ID and
UCM object name. After the discovery of Neuron IDs and bind-
ings is initiated, the appropriate Neuron ID location labels will
appear.

Figure 105. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—Before Discovery of Devices

Step 3

Note that no
location labels
are assigned.

3. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. In this phase of discovery, the
BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a list of Neuron IDs
Unassigned to UCM Objects. Confirmation that the BCU found
devices also appears in the Comm5 Object and Neuron ID Summary
on the left side of the dialog box (Figure 98 on page 105).
4. Click the Discover Bindings button, even if you have no bindings on
the site. In this phase of discovery, the BCU will find old BCU bind-
ings, and re-establish assignments to Neuron IDs found on the link.

116 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for a High Capacity BMTW BCU that has

Notice that the location labels now appear in the Neuron IDs
Assigned to UCM Objects list (see Figure 106).

Figure 106. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—After Discovery of Devices

Step 4

Step 7 Note that location

labels are now
assigned

The Discovery Details window will automatically appear after discov-

ery is complete (see Figure 107). To view the window again after clos-
ing it, click the Discovery Details button.
If errors exist, detailed information about them will appear in the
Discovery Details window.

Figure 107. Discovery Details Dialog Box—Without Errors

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 117
Comm5 Links

5. Click Save to File to save the report to a file for future reference, or
click Close to exit the Discover Details window and return to the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.

IMPORTANT
If errors exist and you click either the Cancel or the Discover Neuron
IDs button, the Comm5 database will be reset and all Neuron ID
assignments and custom bindings will be lost. If you want to con-
tinue with the upgrade, you will have to reassign all Neuron IDs and
recreate custom bindings. If you want help resolving this error, do
not click either button. Contact technical support and provide them
with the error message.

6. If errors do not exist, click OK to install the devices on the BCU.

7. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

Replacing an Existing BCU (Standard or

High Capacity BMTW) with a BMTX
BCU
For cases in which a BMTS or BMTW are replaced by a BMTX, you must
create a Comm5 database in the BMTX. To do this, use the procedure
given for “Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for a High Capacity
BMTW BCU that has had its Software Image Upgraded to Version 16” on
page 115.

118 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 8

Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker

Sites

Tracer Summit communicates with Tracer 100 or Tracker panels and

allows you to create sites with these legacy products. When you install
the Tracer 100/Tracker Communication package, you can:
• Define phone modem or hardwired connection parameters for Tracker
and Tracer 100 panels
• Define single- and multiple-panel Tracer 100 sites
• Type site names up to 32 characters long
• Treat a Tracer 100 and Tracker panel like a site device rather than as
a site

Note:
Tracer Summit will connect to Tracer 100 sites Version 14.4 or
higher and with Tracker sites Version 5.0 or higher. If you have
Tracer 100 or Tracker sites that predate these versions,
upgrade them with current software. Then you can communi-
cate with them using Tracer Summit Version 13 or higher.

You can communicate with Tracer 100 panels, whether they are config-
ured as unit-to-unit or not. For more information about unit-to-unit com-
munications, see Section 8 of the Tracer 100 Installation guide (EMTB-
IN-12).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 119
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Creating Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Use the following procedure to create a Tracer 100 or Tracker site and to
define how the Tracer Summit workstation connects to the remote unit.
To create Tracer 100 or Tracker sites:
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box appears (see Figure 112 on page 124).
2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 108).

Note:
If the database is empty, the Restore button appears as an
option in the Select Action group. For more information on
restoring remote sites, see “Restoring a Site from the Site Cre-
ation Wizard” on page 53.

3. Select a site type:

For Tracer 100 sites, select the Tracer 100 Series button
•
For Tracker sites, select the Tracker button
•
4. Type a name for the site in the Site Name field.

Figure 108. Site Creation Wizard

5. Click Next. The Site Connection Wizard screen appears (see Figure
109 on page 121).

120 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

6. Click the Modem or Hardwired button for the connection type.

The Tracer Summit workstation must use a serial connection to com-
municate with a Tracer 100 or Tracker site. You can make a serial
connection in two ways: hardwired or modem.
• Hardwired connections are made using a 25-foot (or less) EIA-232
cable that connects the workstation to the Tracer 100 or Tracker
panel.
• Modem connections are made using modems and an analog phone
line. Hardwired and modem connections to Tracer 100 and
Tracker panels use the BMN protocol.
To communicate with Tracer 100 and Tracker panels, you must define
a workstation modem object. If this object is not defined in the work-
station database, you must create one before you can connect to a
Tracer 100 or Tracker site. For more information about creating
workstation modem objects, see “Configuring a Workstation Modem
for Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites” on page 156.

Figure 109. Site Connection Wizard

7. Click Finish. The Tracer 100 or Tracker Configuration editor appears

(see Figure 113 on page 125).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 121
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Copying a Tracer 100 or Tracker Site

If you have a large number of sites that are similar or identical to each
other, Copy Site can eliminate much of the repetitive work involved in
configuring sites with more similarities than differences. Copy Site repro-
duces objects from an original Tracer 100 or Tracker site and transfers
them to a new site of the same type.
Copy Site is available with all add-on packages (Tracer 100/Tracker Com-
munication, Building Management, and Enterprise Management).
Copy Site does not copy workstation or global objects from the original
site. This means that the new site will have the same information as the
original from which it was copied but not the following items:
• Workstation modem objects
• Message forwarding objects
• Report text files (*.rpt files)
• Tracer 100 objects (calculated analog, calculated binary, normal
schedules, exception schedules, and holidays)

Copying Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

1. From the Tools menu, select Copy Site. The Copy Site dialog box
appears (see Figure 110).

Figure 110. Copy Site Dialog Box

2. Type the name of the new site in the Name of New Site field.
The new site name must be unique, one that does not exist in the
database.
3. Select Tracer 100 or Tracker from the Site Type to Copy list.
The Copy Graphics and Copy Reports check boxes are unavailable
because these items do not apply to Tracer 100 or Tracker sites.
4. Click OK. The Copy Site: Rename Panels dialog box displays (see
Figure 111 on page 123).

Note:
For Tracker sites, the New Panel Name list has one panel to
rename. Tracer 100 sites can have up to eight panels to rename.

122 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

5. Type new names for the panel(s) of the new site in the New Panel
Name field.

Figure 111. Copy Site: Rename Panels Dialog Box

Note:
New panel names must be unique. They cannot duplicate oth-
ers in the original site or be panel names that are in other
Tracer 100 and Tracker sites.

6. Click OK.
Tracer Summit copies the database from the original site to the new
site. The navigation tree displays the new site node, as well as any
macros associated with the original site.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 123
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Selecting a Site to Configure

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box appears (see Figure 112).

Figure 112. Select Site Dialog Box

2. Select the desired site you wish to edit.

3. Click OK to display the site configuration editor for the selected site
(see Figure 113 on page 125).

Configuring Tracer 100 or Tracker Panels

After you complete configuring the Tracer 100 or Tracker panel using the
Site Creation and Connection Wizards, use the Tracer 100 or Tracker Site
Configuration editors to establish the identity of the Tracer 100 or
Tracker site.
If your workstation will connect with the Tracer 100 or Tracker panel
using a modem, you must define telephone numbers for the site, as well
as configure a remote unit. If your workstation will connect with the
panel using a hardwired connection, you only define the Tracer 100 or
Tracker panel as a remote unit.

Entering Phone Numbers

Use the following procedure to enter the phone number that your work-
station will call to connect to the Tracer 100 or Tracker panel. You can
also configure a phone number for Tracer 100 sites that call out to a work-
station to send alarms, for example.
To enter phone numbers:
1. When creating a new Tracer 100 or Tracker site, the Setup screen is
automatically displayed after completing the Site Connection Wizard
(see Figure 113 and Figure 116 on page 127).

124 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Configuring Tracer 100 or Tracker Panels

Figure 113. Site Configuration Editor for a Tracer 100 Series Site Screen

2. In the Master to Remote Phone Number field, type the telephone

number of the site.
3. If required, select the Use Dialing Prefix or Use Calling Card Number
check box.
When you select these check boxes, Tracer Summit uses the prefix or
calling card number you entered when you set up the workstation
modem (see “Setting Up the Phone Books” on page 163).
4. Tracer 100 sites only: If the Tracer 100 panel will dial out to the
Tracer Summit workstation, type the Remote to Master Phone Num-
ber using no more than 24 characters.
The actual number dialed can consist of the numbers 0 through 9, the
# symbol, the letters w, p, and t, a single quote (for a two-second
pause), spaces, and hyphens.

Note:
The workstation uploads the remote to master phone number
from the Tracer 100 panel the first time that the Tracer 100
panel is scanned, either as part of normal processing or by Task
Manager (see Chapter 15, “Using the Task Manager”). Subse-
quent scans download the number to the panel.

Creating a Remote Unit for Tracer 100 Sites

Use the following procedure to configure a single Tracer 100 panel that
does not have unit-to-unit communication capabilities. A Tracer 100
panel that is not a unit-to-unit Tracer can have only one remote unit
defined for it.
To create a Tracer 100 remote unit:
1. From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab
(see Figure 114).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 125
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Figure 114. Devices Screen

2. Click the Create Remote Unit button. The Create New Device dialog
box appears (see Figure 115 on page 126).

Figure 115. Create New Device Dialog Box

3. Type the name of the Tracer 100 panel. This is the same name as you
would see in BMN’s Remote Unit Setup or in the file name of the
panel backup.

Note:
Since this is not a unit-to-unit, or COP, Tracer 100, leave the
Unit-to-Unit checkbox cleared. “Creating a Tracer 100 COP” on
page 128 explains how to create a unit-to-unit Tracer 100.

4. Type the unit password, if any, that is required to access the Tracer
100 panel.
The password you type must be the same as the one in the security
menu of the Tracer 100 panel.

126 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Configuring Tracer 100 or Tracker Panels

5. Click OK. The Devices screen appears with the new device displayed
in the Remote Units list.

Note:
The Unit Type remains unknown until the Tracer 100 panel is
scanned as part of normal processing or by the Task Manager
(see Chapter 15, “Using the Task Manager”).

6. Click Save to store the site in the database.

Configuring a Tracker Panel

When you configure a Tracker using the Tracker Site Configuration edi-
tor, there is no Devices tab. Instead, you identify Tracker panels on the
Setup tab.
To identify a Tracker panel:
1. From the Tracker Site Configuration editor, click the Setup tab (see
Figure 116).

Figure 116. Tracker Setup Screen

2. In the Remote Unit Name field, type the name for the Tracker panel.
3. Click Save to store the Tracker site definition in the database.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 127
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Creating Tracer 100 Sites with Multiple

Panels
To create a site with multiple panels, each panel must have a unit-to-unit
communications logic board or card installed. In addition, you must
define a Tracer 100 Communications Processor (COP) panel with a logic
board address of 1. You cannot add a Tracer 100 panel to an existing site
unless the site already has the Tracer 100 COP unit defined for it.

Note:
All Tracer 100 panels linked to the Tracer 100 COP must have
the same software version.

For more information about setting up unit-to-unit Tracer 100 panels,

refer to the Tracer 100 Installation guide software version 15 (EMTB-IN-
12) and /or the Installation Guide for Tracer 100i, Tracer L, and Tracer
Chiller Plant Manager (EMTF-IN-6).

Note:
Building Management Network (BMN) ends connections when
it detects mismatched site configurations, but Tracer Summit
does not. BMN displays messages such as: “A COP answered,
but is not edited as one,” or “Remote edited as a COP, but no
COP found.”
These messages do not appear in Tracer Summit. Therefore, if
you do not define additional remote panels when you should,
Tracer Summit will not allow you to connect to them in termi-
nal emulation, nor will Tracer Summit scan for them.

In the following paragraphs, the Tracer 100 COP is simply referred to as

the COP.

Creating a Tracer 100 COP

When you add several Tracer 100 panels to a single Tracer Summit site,
unit 1 is the Tracer 100 COP. A COP is the lead panel in a unit-to-unit
site configuration. Communications between panels that are controlled by
the COP occur at 1200 baud.
To add a Tracer 100 COP panel:
1. Create a site (see “Creating Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites” on page 120)
and repeat the procedure described in “Entering Phone Numbers” on
page 124.
2. From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab.
3. Click the Create Remote Unit button. The Create New Device dialog
box appears (see Figure 115 on page 126).

128 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Tracer 100 Sites with Multiple Panels

4. In the Remote Unit Name field, type the name of the Tracer 100
panel. This is the same name as you would see in BMN Remote Unit
Setup or in the file name of the panel backup.
5. Click the Unit-to-Unit Tracer check box. The Unit Number field dis-
plays 1, which is the default number.
A COP must have a unit number of 1 in Tracer Summit, as well as on
the logic board DIP switch block.
6. In the Remote Unit Password for System Access field, type the pass-
word of the unit.
The password you type must be the same as the one given in the secu-
rity menu of the panel.
7. Click OK. The Devices screen appears. The COP appears in the
Remote Units group (see Figure 117 on page 130).

Note:
The Unit Type remains unknown until the Tracer 100 panel is
scanned as part of normal processing or by the Task Manager
(see Chapter 15, “Using the Task Manager”).

8. If you are adding remote units to the COP, perform the procedure in
“Adding Tracer 100 Panels to a Multi-Panel Site” on page 130. Other-
wise, click Save.

Note:
When you click Save, the remote device is permanently saved in
the database. This means that you cannot re-edit the unit num-
ber of the remote unit.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 129
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Adding Tracer 100 Panels to a Multi-Panel Site

1. Repeat steps 2-4 in “Creating a Tracer 100 COP” on page 128.
2. In the Unit Number field, if the default value in the Unit Number
field is not the address of the remote you are adding, select the correct
value.
This is the unit number as it is set in the DIP switch block on the logic
board. For each Tracer 100 panel that you add, the unit number incre-
ments by one. Since there can only be one Tracer 100 COP per site,
any additional panels that you add must have unit numbers other
than 1.
3. In the Remote Unit Password for System access field, type the pass-
word that is used to access the Tracer 100 panel.
The password you type must be the same as the one in the security
menu of the panel.
4. Click OK. The Devices screen appears with the unit displayed in the
Remote Units group (see Figure 117).

Figure 117. Devices Screen Remote Units Group

Note:
The Unit Type remains unknown until the Tracer 100 panel is
scanned as part of normal processing or by the Task Manager
(see Chapter 15, “Using the Task Manager”).

5. Click Save. The new remotes are saved to the database.

Note:
When you click Save, the remote devices are permanently saved
in the database. This means that you cannot re-edit the unit
numbers of the remote units.

130 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Modifying Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Use the following procedures to edit phone numbers in the remote,
rename the remote, configure a remote with or without unit-to-unit com-
munications, edit the remote password, or delete a remote.

Changing the Master to Remote Phone Number

1. From the Tracer 100 or Tracker Site Configuration editor, click the
Setup tab.
2. Change the number in the Phone Number field as required.
3. Click the Use Dialing Prefix/Use Calling Card Number check box(es)
as necessary.
4. Click Save.

Changing the Remote to Master Phone Number (Tracer

100 Sites Only)
◆ From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor on the Setup tab,
select and type over the existing phone number and click Save.

Renaming a Tracer 100 Remote Unit

When you rename a panel, you must first rename it in Tracer Summit.
Once you rename the panel, connect to it to have Tracer Summit change
the name at the panel.
To rename a remote unit:
1. From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab.
2. Select the panel that you want to rename.
3. Click the Edit Remote Unit button. The Edit Device dialog box
appears (see Figure 118).

Figure 118. Edit Device Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 131
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

4. Rename the panel using up to 8 characters.

5. Click OK to save the change to the database.
6. Connect to the site.
Once you connect, Tracer Summit displays a dialog box informing you
that the connected panel does not have the same name as the one in
the workstation database. The dialog box also asks whether you want
to rename the panel.
7. In the dialog box, click OK to rename the panel.

Making a Tracer 100 Panel Unit-to-Unit

In the Tracer Summit software, you make a Tracer 100 panel unit-to-unit
when the panel has a logic board installed with unit-to-unit communica-
tion capability. In most cases, this situation will only occur when you have
changed the logic board or installed a unit-to-unit communication card.
For more information on setting up a panel to communicate as a unit-to-
unit device, see “Creating Tracer 100 Sites with Multiple Panels” on
page 128.
To make a Tracer 100 panel unit-to-unit:
1. From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab.
The remote unit already assigned to the site displays in the Remote
Units group.
2. Select the panel and click the Edit Remote Unit button. The Edit
Remote Unit dialog box appears.
3. Click the Unit-to-Unit Tracer check box.
4. Click OK. The Devices screen appears, with modified device displayed
in the Remote Units list.
5. Click Save to store the site in the database.

Removing Unit-to-Unit Capability

Use the following procedure when the panel at the site does not have
unit-to-unit capability. This occurs when you have a panel that does not
have a logic board with unit-to-unit communication capability.
To remove unit to-unit capability:
1. From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab.
The sole remote unit already assigned to the site displays in the
Remote Units group.
2. Click the Edit Remote Unit button. The Edit Remote Unit dialog box
appears.
3. Click the Unit-to-Unit Tracer check box to remove the check mark.
4. Click OK.

132 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

Editing the Unit Number of a Remote Unit-to-Unit

Tracer Panel
You can only edit the unit number of a remote unit before you save it to
the database. If you have already saved the panel and you want to edit its
unit number, use the Delete Object utility to delete the remote unit (see
“Deleting Objects” on page 652). Once the remote unit is deleted, you can
then add the remote unit again, giving the panel the unit number that is
set on the logic board DIP switch block.
To edit the unit number of a remote unit:
1. From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab.
2. Click the Edit Remote Unit button. The Edit Remote Unit dialog box
appears.
3. In the Unit Number field, select the new unit number of the remote.
4. Click Save.

Editing the Password of a Remote Unit

Use the following procedure if you have changed the password of a remote
unit at the panel and to change the password in Tracer Summit, or if you
entered the password incorrectly when you created the site.
To edit the password:
1. From the Tracer 100 Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab.
2. Click the Edit Remote Unit button. The Edit Remote Unit dialog box
appears.
3. Click Remote Unit Password for System Access and type the new
password.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Save to store the edited password to the database.

Deleting a Tracer 100 Remote Unit

You can only delete a remote unit from within the Tracer 100 Site Config-
uration editor if you have not saved the remote unit in the database. If
you have saved the remote unit in the database, then use the Delete
Object utility to delete the remote unit (see “Deleting Objects” on
page 652).

Note:
A site must have at least one remote defined for it. If you start
with only one remote, you cannot delete the remote without
also deleting the site.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 133
Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker Sites

134 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 9

Setting Up Security—Tracer
Summit System

The Tracer Summit system provides sophisticated security to protect

against unauthorized access. The operator enters a user name and pass-
word to log on to the system.
Your security supervisor assigns passwords and access levels for each
operator. The security supervisor also controls which operators have
access to functions, applications, and objects within the Tracer Summit
system. For most elements of the system, the supervisor can assign three
levels of access:
• No access (the operator cannot see the information)
• View only (information can be seen, but not changed)
• View and edit (information can be seen and changed)
You can define which classes have access to an object when you create it.

Setting Up a Security Supervisor

Tracer Summit includes a pre-defined user (User Name: tracer; password:
summit) that allows you to log on the system before you define a security
supervisor. To set up security access for a security supervisor, follow the
steps for setting up a new user (see “Setting Up a New User” on
page 136). Be sure to select Security Supervisor in the User Info screen
options to allow the security supervisor access to the Security editor.
After you define security access for the security supervisor, delete the
tracer user name to prevent unauthorized access.

Note:
The Tracer Summit system allows you to delete the tracer user
name only after a security supervisor has been created on the
system and that supervisor has logged on.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 135
Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

Setting Up a New User

You must set up a user profile for each operator who will use Tracer Sum-
mit.
The steps to set up an operator are:
1. Enter user information.
2. Assign functions the operator may perform.
3. Assign applications the operator may view only or view/edit.
4. Assign objects to which the operator has access.
5. Assign the security classes the operator may view only and view/edit.
Tracer Summit has four operator levels with predefined security access
(see Table 4).

Table 4. Predefined Security Access for Operator Levels

Operator Example Operators Security Access

Level

Level 1 Occasional operators, • View graphics and expanded

such as security messages.
guards • Acknowledge alarms.
• Make timed override request.
Level 2 Daily operators Same as level 1, plus:
• View chiller plant control, chiller
plant status, reports, schedules,
and trends.
• Edit chiller plant control status and
schedules.
• Make timed override request.
Level 3 Advanced daily Same as level 2, plus:
operators • Create schedules.
• Edit chiller plant control, expanded
messages, graphics, reports, and
trends.
• Make timed override request.
Level 4 System supervisor Complete access to everything.

When setting up a new user, you can choose from the predefined profiles,
or you can create a custom profile. You can also copy the profile from a
previously defined user.

Note:
Based on the profile you select when you create a user, access
may be pre-selected for some objects. If you are creating a cus-
tom profile, no access is pre-selected.

136 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

Entering User Information

1. From the Setup menu, select Security. The Select Security dialog box
displays (see Figure 119).

Figure 119. Select Security Dialog Box

2. Click New. The User Setup dialog box displays (see Figure 120).

Figure 120. User Setup Dialog Box

3. Enter a name of 1–8 alphanumeric characters in the User Name field.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 137
Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

4. Select an option:
• If you wish to use a predefined operator level profile or customize
a predefined operator level profile for security access, click the
name in the Selected Profile box, then click OK to display the
Security editor User Info screen (see Figure 122 on page 139).
Proceed to step 9.
• If you wish to copy the operator level profile of an existing user,
click Copy From to display the Copy From dialog box (see
Figure 121). Proceed to step 5.

Figure 121. Copy From Dialog Box

5. Click the user name you wish to copy.

6. Click OK to display the User Setup dialog box.
7. Click OK to display the Security editor User Info screen (see
Figure 122 on page 139).

138 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

Figure 122. Security Editor User Info Screen

8. At the Security editor User Info screen, enter a First name in the
First Name field (1–28 characters) and a Last Name in the Last
Name field (1–29 characters). Entries in the Middle field (0–4 charac-
ters) and Job Title field (0–30 characters) are optional.
9. Enter a password in the Password field. Use up to eight characters.
The password displays as asterisks (*).

Note:
• When setting up multiple sites, an operator can be auto-
matically logged on to all sites. For this to work, you need to
enter the same user name and password for all sites that
the user needs access to.
• When creating the password for the first time, click the
Show Password check box to verify the password entry.
After checking for mistakes, deselect Show Password to
convert the password back to asterisks (*).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 139
Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

10. In the Options fields, click the following to select or deselect the
option:
• Security Supervisor
• Match Upper & Lower Case
• Automatic Remote Connect
• Disconnect Remote Connection at Log Off
• Auto-Log Off

Note:
We recommend you select Auto-Log Off. If a user leaves a PC
Workstation unattended, Tracer Summit logs the user off auto-
matically after the number of minutes specified in the Minutes
field.

11. If you select Auto-Log Off, in the Minutes field type in the number of
minutes of non-activity before the system logs off the user.

Assigning Access to Functions

Click the Functions tab from the Security editor to display the Functions
screen (see Figure 123).

Figure 123. Security Editor Functions Screen

1. Click the checkbox in the Access column to grant or deny access for
each function.
2. Click the check box in the View Only column or in the View/Edit col-
umn for each application to grant or deny access to that application.
3. To set up Simplified Overrides, check the following functions:
• Allow Min/Max edit Simplified Override
• Change Values from Graphics

140 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

• User priority level

Note:
For further details on setting up simplified overrides, see “Set-
ting Up the Simplified Override Dialog Box” on page 172.

4. In the Select Default Priority for Simplified Override Dialog drop-

down, select a user default priority level.

Note:
The highest user priority level you select will determine the
highest user level default override setting available.
To set up the system to perform overrides from a graphic, see
“Setting Up the Simplified Override Dialog Box” on page 172

Assigning Access to Applications

1. Click the Applications tab from the Security editor to display the
Applications screen (see Figure 124).

Figure 124. Security Editor Applications Screen

2. Click the check box in the View Only column or in the View/Edit col-
umn for each application to grant or deny access to that application.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 141
Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

Assigning Access to Objects

1. Click the Objects tab from the Security editor to display the Objects
screen (see Figure 125).

Figure 125. Security Editor Objects Screen

2. Click the check box in the Access column to grant or deny access for
each object.

Assigning Access to Security Classes

1. Click the Classes tab from the Security editor to display the Classes
screen (see Figure 126).

Figure 126. Security Editor Classes Screen

2. Click the check box in the Read Only column or in the Read/Write col-
umn for each class to grant or deny access to that class.

142 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying a User Setup

Modifying a User Setup

1. From the Setup menu, select Security. The Select Security dialog box
displays.
2. Click the name of the user you wish to modify.
3. Click OK to display the Security editor.
4. Use the Security editor screens to select user options and to modify
access to functions, applications, objects, and classes.

Defining Access for Users Not Logged

On
When no user is logged on the Tracer Summit system, the system oper-
ates on a predefined user profile called Nobody Logged On. The default
settings for Nobody Logged On deny the operator access to all functions,
applications, and objects. There may be instances where you want opera-
tors to have limited access to general information, such as a main floor
plan or a graphic display screen, without logging on to a site. You can do
so by modifying the Nobody Logged On user profile.

Note:
Do not remove or change the name of the Nobody Logged On
user. The system requires this user name to operate properly.

To modify the nobody logged on user profile:

1. From the Setup menu, select Security. The Select Security dialog box
displays (see Figure 127).

Figure 127. Seclect Security Dilaog Box

2. Click Nobody Logged On.

3. Click OK to display the Security editor.
4. Use the Security editor screens to select user options and to modify
access to functions, applications, objects, and classes.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 143
Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

Setting Up Group Security

Use the following procedure to create a new group user. Group-level secu-
rity is only available on Tracer Summit Version 13 or higher workstations
with the Enterprise Management package installed.
Group security appears in the Setup menu when you log on to the work-
station with level 2 security access. When you perform a new installation
in Version 13 or higher, or during an upgrade from previous versions, the
only active username with level 2 access is username: Tracer, password:
Summit. This is the Tracer Summit user.

Note:
If you removed the Tracer Summit user from site security, you
have to temporarily re-create this user to log on to a site and
access group security. After you create a new level 2 security
user, you can then delete the Tracer Summit user.

To create a new group user:

1. Set up groups using the Group Configuration editor.
2. From the Setup Menu, select Group Security. The Select Group Secu-
rity dialog box appears (see Figure 128).

Figure 128. Select Group Security Dilaog Box

3. Click New. The Group User Setup dialog box appears (see Figure 129
on page 145).

144 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Group Security

Figure 129. Group Setup Dialog Box

4. Type the name of the new user.

5. Select the security level for the user.
6. Click OK. The Group Security editor displays (see Figure 130 on
page 146). Edit the User Name and Security Level of the user if
needed.
7. Type the password for the user in the Password field.

Note:
As a default, the Tracer Summit software masks the password
from onlookers and all characters in the field display as aster-
isks. Click the Show Password check box to display the pass-
word without asterisks.

8. Click the options that apply to the new user.

Click Match Upper & Lower Cases if you want the Tracer Summit
software to allow upper and lower case characters for the password.
Otherwise, the software accepts all passwords that you type as
though they were lower case.
Click the Auto – Logoff check box to activate the Minutes field. Type
in the number of minutes of system inactivity after which the Tracer
Summit software will automatically logoff the user.
9. In the Available Group(s) list, select the groups that the user can
access.
10. Click Add to add the group(s) to the Assigned Group(s) list.
11. Click Save to store the new user to the database.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 145
Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

Figure 130. Group Security Editor Screen

146 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Security for the Operator Display

Setting Up Security for the Operator

Display
Use the following procedure to set up operator display passwords. This
group is only displayed if the BCU is a BMTW. Entering data in this
group is optional. Use it only to enable security at the operator display.
To set up security for the operator display:
1. Log on to the site that has a BCU operator display.
2. From the Setup menu, select Site Security. The Tracer Summit Secu-
rity editor displays with the User Info tab opened (see Figure 131).

Figure 131. Site Security Editor Screen

3. In the Tracer Summit Security group, set up the security profile of

the user.
For more information on setting up user security.
4. In the Password field, type a password.
The password must be numeric only (4-8 digits). The password can be
the same as or different from the Tracer Summit password. Each
digit of the password displays as an asterisk (*).
To display the password, click the Show Password checkbox. The
password displays in the form you entered it, showing numbers
rather than asterisks.
5. Select the Allow Edit Access options that apply.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 147
Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System

• Click Alarms to enable acknowledgement and deletion of alarms.

If the field is not selected, you can view alarms at the operator
display but cannot acknowledge or delete them.
• Click Schedule to allow the modification of existing schedules. If
the field is not selected, you can view schedules at the operator
display but cannot modify them.
• Click Set Points to allow modification of setpoints. If the field is
not selected, you can view setpoints at the operator display but
cannot modify them.
• Click Overrides to allow overrides. If the field is not selected, you
can view properties that can be overridden (manual controls) but
you cannot modify them.
• Click Setup to allow setup activities at the operator display. If the
field is not selected, you can view the Operator Display settings
but cannot modify them.
• Click Timed Override to allow timed overrides of areas. If the
field is not selected, you can view the timed override status of an
area but cannot modify it.

Note:
Some of the setup activities are always available.

6. Click Save.

Deleting a User
You cannot delete a user from the Security editor. To delete a user, use the
Delete Object utility in the Tools menu..

Note:
Deleting a user from group security does not delete the user
from site security. This applies to site and group security.

148 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 10

Setting Up Printers, Modems,

Cell Phones, and Pagers

Tracer Summit software supports the following features:

• Printing of graphics, reports, Custom Programming Language (CPL)
programs, the event log, and individual alarms and events as they
occur
• Communications between a BCU modem and a PC Workstation
modem
• Communications between a BCU modem, cell phone/pager
This chapter describes the steps in setting up each of these options.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 149
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Setting Up Printers
In Tracer Summit, you can print graphics, reports and CPL programs, as
well as the event log and alarms and events as they occur. For graphics,
reports, CPL programs, and the entire event log, you can select the File
menu’s Print item to print the displayed information. These items use
page printing, which prints a page at a time to a printer. For page print-
ing, you can use any standard printer (such as a laser or inkjet printer).
You set up and use the printer just as you do from any Windows program.
Event and alarm printing is handled differently. Tracer Summit prints
alarms and events to a selected events printer one line at a time as they
occur. A tractor-feed (or line-feed) printer works best as the events printer
so that you can view the events as they are generated and printed. If you
select a page printer, you do not see the events until a complete page is
printed. Typically, the events printer is connected directly to the PC
Workstation (on the LPT1: port). However, the printer can also be con-
nected through a network.
To print the entire event log, you can use any printer. The events printer
is only for printing alarms and events one at a time as they occur.
Whether you are setting up the events printer or any other printers, you
need to first add the printer in the Windows operating system.

Adding a Printer in Windows

Before you can select a printer in Tracer Summit, you need to add the
printer to the Windows operating system using the Add Printer applica-
tion.
To access the Add Printer application:
1. From the Windows desktop, double click on the My Computer icon,
then double click on the Printers icon.
2. At the Printers window, double click on Add Printer. The Add Printer
Wizard displays and will guide you through the installation of a
printer.

Setting Up and Selecting the Events Printer

After you have added a printer to the Windows operating system, you can
select that printer as your events printer. To set up the events printer, you
access the System Options editor (from the Tools menu, select Options).
For detailed information on setting up the events printer, refer to Chapter
33, “Setting System Options”.

Selecting Other Printers

For printing graphics, reports, CPL programs, and the entire event log,
you can use a printer you added to the Windows operating system. With
the graphic, report, CPL program, or event log displayed, on the File
menu select Print. At the Print Setup dialog box, select the printer.

150 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Setting Up Modems
Tracer Summit software supports modem communications between a
BCU and a remote PC Workstation. Once the BCU and PC Workstation
modems are installed, you can set up and configure both modems in
Tracer Summit using the Workstation or BCU Modem editor.
In the Tracer 100/Tracker Communications package, Tracer Summit sup-
ports modem communication between Tracer 100 or Tracker (EMTK)
panels and a remote PC Workstation.
You add BCU modems during site configuration (see “Adding a BCU
Modem” on page 60). Once a BCU modem is configured, you can then
modify the modem through the modem editor.
You add and configure workstation modems for BCU sites and for Tracer
100 or Tracker (EMTK) sites through the modem editor.

Accessing the Workstation Modem Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select Worksta-
tion Modem. The Select Workstation Modem dialog box displays (see
Figure 132).

Figure 132. Select Workstation Modem Dialog Box

2. Select a modem and click OK. The Workstation Modem editor dis-
plays (see Figure 133 on page 152).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 151
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Figure 133. Workstation Modem Editor

Adding a Workstation Modem in Windows

Before you can create a modem object in Tracer Summit, you need to add
a modem to the Windows operating system. The Windows Modems appli-
cation program is found in the Windows Control Panel.
To access the Modems application program:
1. From the Windows desktop, double click the My Computer icon, then
double click the Control Panel icon. The Control Panel displays (see
Figure 134).
2. Double click the Modems icon. For further instructions on adding a
modem, refer to the Windows operating system manual.

Figure 134. Windows Modems Icon

Modems
Icon

152 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Creating a New Workstation Modem

A workstation modem is a modem that is installed in your PC. In Tracer
Summit, you must configure your modem to communicate with BCU sites
and Tracer 100 or Tracker sites (if you have the Tracer 100/Tracker Com-
munication package installed).
The modem editor will only allow you to create workstation modems for
the type of Tracer Summit package that you have on your workstation.
The Tracer Summit standard software allows you to add workstation
modems for BCU sites. When you have the Tracer 100/Tracker Communi-
cation or Enterprise Management package, you can create workstation
modems for Tracer 100 or Tracker sites.
To create a Tracer Summit local workstation modem, you perform
these tasks:
1. Add a modem to the Windows operating system (see “Adding a Work-
station Modem in Windows” on page 152).
2. Configure and set up a workstation modem using the Modem editor.
You need to:
• Open and name a new modem object (as described in this section)
• Choose which modem in Windows that your workstation will use
(see “Setting Up a Workstation Modem” on page 157)
• Define how the modem will be used (see Table 5 on page 159)
• If you have the option to do so, determine whether you will use
the workstation modem to communicate to Tracer 100 or Tracker
sites
• Add phone numbers to the Phone Book (see “Setting Up the
Phone Books” on page 163)
• Verify the defaults for the comm port and the configuration
strings
• Save the modem object

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 153
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

To create a workstation modem object:

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select Worksta-
tion Modem. The Select Workstation Modem dialog box displays (see
Figure 135).

Figure 135. Select Workstation Modem Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Modem Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 136).

Figure 136. New Modem Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the Modem Name field. Use a maximum of 32 char-

acters. You must enter a name before you can save the new worksta-
tion modem object. (You can modify the name from the Setup screen
of the Modem editor.)
4. Click OK. The Workstation Modem editor displays (see Figure 137 on
page 155).

154 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Figure 137. Workstation Modem Editor Status Screen

5. Proceed with configuring and setting up the new workstation modem

(see “Configuring a Workstation Modem for BCU Sites” on page 155
and “Setting Up a Workstation Modem” on page 157).

Configuring a Workstation Modem for BCU Sites

The following screen gives you a way to view and append the maximum
speed of the comm port for the workstation modem, as well as the stan-
dard configuration strings that the Windows operating system provides
for the modem.

Note:
The comm port in the BMTS BCU has a fixed speed of 9600
baud. The BMTW BCU has an adjustable speed up to 38400
baud. So, depending on what type of BCU you are calling, as
well as the quality of the phone line, you might be able to use
the higher baud rate.

To configure a workstation modem for BCU sites:

1. From the Workstation Modem editor, click the Configuration (BCU
Sites) tab to display the Configuration (BCU Sites) screen (see
Figure 138 on page 156).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 155
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Figure 138. Workstation Modem Configuration (BCU Sites) Screen

2. Select the baud rate from the Workstation Comm Port Maximum
Speed list.

Note:
The Configuration Strings fields display default modem com-
mand strings. However, you can edit the fields to accommodate
specific modem requirements. For information about changing
default settings, refer to the Tracer Summit online Help.

Configuring a Workstation Modem for Tracer 100

or Tracker Sites
If your Tracer Summit workstation includes the Tracer 100/Tracker Com-
munication or Enterprise Management package, the Configuration (T100/
Tracker Sites) screen appears when you access the workstation modem
editor. The Configuration (T100/Tracker Sites) screen lets you enable or
disable the modem for use with these Tracer 100 or Tracker sites.
To configure a workstation modem:
1. From the Workstation Modem editor, click the Configuration (T100/
Tracker Sites) tab to display the Configuration (T100/Tracker Sites)
screen (see Figure 139 on page 157).
2. Select the Use this modem for T100/Tracker Sites check box.

156 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Figure 139. Workstation Modem Configuration (T100/Tracker Sites)

Screen

Note:
The Configuration Strings fields display default modem com-
mand strings. However, you can edit the fields to accommodate
specific modem requirements. To connect to Tracer 100 or
Tracker sites, it is very important to include commands to dis-
able error correction and data compression in the initialization
string fields. For information about changing default settings,
refer to the Tracer Summit online Help.

Setting Up a Workstation Modem

Use the following procedure to:
• Rename the workstation modem
• Define what modem in Windows that the Tracer Summit workstation
modem object should use
• Define comm port the modem is on
• Define whether the modem can accept incoming and/or outgoing calls
To set up the workstation modem:
1. From the Workstation Modem editor, click the Setup tab to display
the Setup screen (see Figure 140 on page 158).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 157
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Figure 140. Workstation Modem Editor Setup Screen

2. In the Workstation Modem Name field, modify the name of the

modem if necessary.
3. From the Connect By list, select what modem in Windows the Tracer
Summit workstation modem object should use.
4. In the Comm Port field, check the communication port default value
for the workstation modem. If necessary, enter the new communica-
tion port number.

Note:
• You will not be able to select a communications port that is
being used by another workstation modem.
• If you edit this field for an existing workstation modem,
Tracer Summit continues to use the previous value until
you restart Tracer Summit.

5. From the Modem Usage list, select the option that best fits how the
modem is to be used. For information on making your selection, see
Table 5 on page 159.

158 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Table 5. How to Determine Modem Usage

Use this
Modem Modem for
Result
Usage T100/Tracker
Sites

• Can dial BCU sites.

Outgoing
False • Cannot dial Tracer 100 or Tracker sites.
calls only
• No incoming calls accepted. See note 1.
• Can dial BCU sites, Tracer 100 sites, and
Outgoing Tracker sites.
True
calls only • No incoming calls accepted. See notes 1
and 2.
• Can take incoming calls from BCU sites.
Incoming • Cannot take incoming calls from Tracer
False
calls only 100 or Tracker sites.
• No outgoing calls allowed. See note 1.
• Can take incoming calls from BCU sites,
Incoming Tracer 100 sites, and Tracker sites.
True
calls only • No outgoing calls allowed. See notes 1
and 2.
• Can dial and take incoming calls from
Both incom- BCU sites.
ing and out- False
going calls
• Cannot dial or take incoming calls from
Tracer 100 or Tracker sites. See note 1.
Both incom- Can dial and take incoming calls from BCU
ing and out- True sites, Tracer 100 sites, and Tracker sites. See
going calls notes 1 and 2.

(1) There is no setting to exclude BCU sites from using the modem as there
is for Tracer 100 and Tracker sites (see the Use this Modem for T100/Tracker
Sites check box discussed in “Configuring a Workstation Modem for Tracer
100 or Tracker Sites” on page 156). However, to exclude incoming calls: pro-
gram your remote BCU sites to call a different phone number than the one
your remote Tracer 100 and Tracker sites call.
(2) To communicate with Tracer 100 and Tracker panels, you must initialize
the modem so that data compression and error control are disabled.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 159
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Accessing the BCU Modem Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select BCU
Modem. The Select BCU Modem dialog box displays (see Figure 141).

Figure 141. Select BCU Modem Dialog Box

2. Select a modem and click OK. The BCU Modem editor displays (see
Figure 142).

Figure 142. BCU Modem Editor

160 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Creating a New BCU Modem

Create a new BCU modem using Tracer Summit’s Site Configuration
Utility (see “Adding a BCU Modem” on page 60). After creating the new
modem, you can edit its configuration with the BCU Modem editor.
With the BCU Modem editor, you perform these tasks:
• Choose which model of modem you have installed in the BCU (see
“Configuring a BCU Modem” on page 162) This does not apply to the
BMTX BCU which has only one model of modem available.
• Set the number of dialing attempts (see “Setting Up a BCU Modem”
on page 161)
• For modems in BMTW and BMTX BCUs, set the BCU comm port
maximum baud rate
• Verify the defaults for the configuration strings
• Add phone numbers to the Phone Book (see “Setting Up the Phone
Books” on page 163)
• Define security access (see “Setting Security Access for a BCU
Modem” on page 166)
• Save the modem object

Setting Up a BCU Modem

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the Setup tab to display the Setup
screen (see Figure 143).

Figure 143. BCU Editor Setup Screen

2. Select model of modem you have installed in the BCU from the Con-
nect By list. This does not apply to the BMTX because there is only
one model of modem available.
3. In the Maximum Dialing Attempts field, enter the number of times
the BCU will attempt to connect with a remote PC Workstation, cell
phone/pager.

Note:
If the number of dialing attempts is greater than one, the BCU
will wait five minutes before each attempt to dial the number
again.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 161
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Configuring a BCU Modem

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the Configuration tab (see
Figure 144).

Figure 144. BCU Modem Editor Configuration Screen

2. From the BMTW BCU Comm Port Maximum Speed list, select the
baud rate that best matches the speed of the modem you have
installed in the BCU.
The comm port in the BMTX and BMTW BCU has an adjustable
speed setting. This is because modems are gaining in speed and phone
lines are clearer, so the speeds at which a workstation or BCU modem
can connect is increasing as well. To maximize the rate that data can
be transferred between the BCU modem and the BCU, set the speed
of the comm port to its maximum value.

Note:
For CE certification, special initialization strings must be used
based on the international location. See online help for specific
configuration information.
The Configuration Strings fields display default modem com-
mand strings. However, you can edit the fields to accommodate
specific modem requirements.

162 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Setting Up the Phone Books

Use the Phone Book screen to enter and store phone numbers. The work-
station needs phone numbers in the workstation modem editor for remote
sites. The BCU needs phone numbers in the BCU modem editor for rout-
ing alarms to remote workstations and cell phones/pagers.
The Phone Book screen allows you to:
• Edit existing phone numbers
• Add new phone numbers
• Remove phone numbers

Editing Existing Phone Numbers

1. From the BCU or Workstation Modem editor, click the phone book tab
to display the Phone Book screen. Figure 145 shows the BCU Modem
editor’s Phone Book screen (which is slightly different than the Work-
station Modem editor’s Phone Book screen).

Figure 145. BCU Modem Editor Phone Book Screen

2. In the Phone Number field, make changes as necessary to the phone

number.

Note:
For cell phone support, this phone number is the dial-up
modem number for your short messaging service center
(SMSC). This number comes from the cell phone provider.

3. Make sure the Use Dialing Prefix and Use Calling Card # check boxes
are set as desired.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 163
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

4. In the Dialing Prefix field, enter a dialing prefix to be used with all
phone numbers defined in the phone book (if applicable).

Note:
When dialing out on the modem, the total combined character
lengths of the dialing string cannot exceed the manufacturer’s
recommended maximum length. The dialing string for worksta-
tions is comprised of the dialing command (ATDT), the dialing
prefix, phone number, and calling card number. The dialing
string for BCUs is the same as the workstations except that the
BCU might also have a numeric message for digital (numeric)
cell phones/pagers. The sequence in which the dial string is
sent in the order listed above.

5. In the Calling Card field, enter a long distance calling card number
that can be used with the defined phone number.

Note:
Depending on the calling card, a short pause or second dial tone
may be required before dialing the calling card number. Use
commas to define a pause (for example: ,,,821-163-2288-6576)
Use a W to make the modem wait for a second dial tone (for
example: W 825-163-2288-6576).

Adding Phone Numbers

1. From the BCU or Workstation Modem editor, click the Phone Book
tab to display the Phone Book screen.
2. Click the Add Phone Number button. The Add Phone Number dialog
box displays (see Figure 146 and Figure 147: Workstation Modem Add
Phone Numbers Dialog Box below).

Figure 146. BCU Modem Add Phone Number Dialog Box

164 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Figure 147. Workstation Modem Add Phone Numbers Dialog Box

3. For BCU modems:

• In the Type field, select the object type the BCU needs to call.
• In the Name field, select the name of the object.
• In the Phone Number field, enter the phone number you want the
BCU modem to dial when attempting to connect with the selected
object type (workstation or cell phone/pager).
4. For Workstation modems, in the Phone Number field, enter the phone
number you want the modem to dial.
5. If you defined a dialing prefix on the Phone Book screen, click the Use
Dialing Prefix check box to have Tracer Summit send that dialing
prefix.
6. If you defined a calling card on the Phone Book screen, click the Use
Calling Card # check box to have Tracer Summit send that calling
card number.
7. Click OK.

Removing Phone Numbers

1. From the BCU or Workstation Modem editor, click the Phone Book
tab to display the Phone Book screen.
2. In the Phone Book field, click the left-most column of the number that
you want to remove.
3. Click the Remove Phone Number button.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 165
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Setting Security Access for a BCU Modem

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the Classes tab to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 148).

Figure 148. BCU Modem Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog

box (see Figure 149).

Figure 149. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

166 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Cell Phone/Pagers

Setting Up Cell Phone/Pagers

Tracer Summit software supports communication between a BCU and a
cell phone/pager. The BCU (equipped with a modem) sends messages to
the cell phone/pager using a paging service. Tracer Summit uses cell
phone/paging to notify you of alarms in the system.

Note:
See Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”, for
details on how to assign a cell phone/pager as an event receiver

Accessing the Cell Phone/Pager Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, and then select Cell
Phone/Pager. The Select Cell Phone/Pager dialog box displays (see
Figure 150).

Figure 150. Select Cell Phone/Pager Dialog Box

2. Select a cell phone/pager and click OK. The Setup screen displays (see
Figure 151).

Figure 151. Cell Phone/Pager Editor Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 167
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Creating a New Cell Phone/Pager Object

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select Cell
Phone/ Pager. The Select Cell Phone/Pager dialog box displays (see
Figure 152).

Figure 152. Select Cell Phone/Pager Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Cell Phone/Pager Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 153).

Figure 153. New Cell Phone/Pager Name Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the Cell Phone/Pager Name field. Use a maximum of

32 characters. You must enter a name before you can save the new
cell phone/pager object. (You can modify the name from the Setup
screen of the Cell Phone/Pager editor.)

168 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Cell Phone/Pagers

4. Click OK. The Cell Phone/Pager editor displays (see Figure 154).

Figure 154. Cell Phone/Pager Editor

5. Set up the new cell phone/pager (see “Setting Up a Cell Phone/

Pager”).

Setting Up a Cell Phone/Pager

1. From the Cell Phone/Pager editor, display the Setup screen (see
Figure 154).
2. In the Protocol field, select the type of cell phone/pager format the
BCU will use to dial out alarms (either Alpha-Numeric ‘TAP” or Digi-
tal ‘Numeric Only’).

Note:
If you select Alpha-Numeric ‘TAP, the paging service or the cell
phone provider’s SMSC must support the TAP communications
protocol.

3. Make a selection:
• If the Alpha-Numeric ‘TAP’ button is selected, enter the telephone
number of the cell phone/pager in the ID (PIN) field.
• If the Digital ‘Numeric Only’ button is selected, enter a numeric
code in the Message field. The code should be meaningful to the
receiver.

Setting Security Access for a Cell Phone/Pager

1. From the Cell Phone/Pager editor, click the Classes tab to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 155 on page 170).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 169
Setting Up Printers, Modems, Cell Phones, and Pagers

Figure 155. Cell Phone/Pager Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog

box (see Figure 156).

Figure 156. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

170 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 11

Overriding System Values

You can override the system control of the present value property for an
object by selecting the override control. When the override control is on a
graphic, you can display status information as to the object’s override
state, or if you have simplified overrides configured, you can click on the
graphic and display the simplified override dialog box. This gives you
information on what system applications are currently controlling the
object (see Figure 161 on page 175 and Figure 162 on page 175).
When a “hand” icon is displayed on an override button, it indicates that
the present value of the object has been manually overridden. To set up
this feature, see “Displaying Override Status” on page 564.

Figure 157. Manual Override Icon

The Override button for UCMs is active if the BCU is up and communi-
cating with the UCM and your workstation, and if the UCM is not under
local control. The Override button for an area object is active if the BCU
that the area object is saved in is communicating to your workstation.

Note:
The text of the button that displays the Override dialog box is
specific to your site. The button may, for example, be called
Override, Control, or another name.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 171
Overriding System Values

Setting Up the Simplified Override

Dialog Box
With the Simplified Override dialog box, the daily operator can change
the present value of an object from a graphic. First, the simplified over-
ride must be set up before it is available for use in Tracer Summit.
To set up the simplified override dialog box:
1. From the Site Security editor, click the Functions tab.
2. In the Access column, click the checkbox for the following functions
(see Figure 158):
• Allow Min/Max edit in Simplified Override
• Change Values from Graphics
• User–Priority level
3. In the Select Default Priority for Simplified Override Dialog drop-
down, select a user default priority level.

Note:
The highest user priority level you select will determine the
highest user level default override setting available.

Figure 158. Functions tab

172 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up the Simplified Override Dialog Box

4. Click the Objects tab (see Figure 159).

5. In the Access column, click the checkbox for the following:
• Analog Output
• Binary Output
• The appropriate UCMs
6. Click Save

Figure 159. Objects tab

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 173
Overriding System Values

Accessing the Simplified Override

Dialog Box
The Simplified Override dialog box can be only accessed through a
graphic. You can access it by using either the Override Control button or a
pop-up menu. With the Simplified Override dialog box you can override
the present value of:
• Analog outputs
• Multi-state analog outputs
• Binary outputs
• UCMs and applications
• Non-Trane BACnet points

Using the Override Control button

1. In a graphic, click on the Override control button (see Figure 160).
The Simplified Override dialog box displays (see Figure 161 on
page 175).

Note:
The Override control button only controls present value proper-
ties and does not have the capability to override an area appli-
cation’s lighting values. To override the lighting values, refer to
“Overriding a Binary Output or a Lighting Value for an Area
Application” on page 182.

Figure 160. Override control button

Override control
button

174 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Accessing the Simplified Override Dialog Box

Figure 161. Example of a Simplified Override Dialog Box

2. Click the More button to view information about priority arrays (see
Figure 162).

Figure 162. Expanded Simplified Override Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 175
Overriding System Values

Using a Pop-up Menu

Note:
If you are not set up to use the Simplified Override dialog box,
only the Advanced dialog box displays. See your Site Security
Administrator for more information.

1. Right-click on a property in a graphic. A pop-up menu displays two

override options (see Figure 163):
• Override <object type> (this is the simplified override option)
• Override using Advance Dialog
2. Select the simplified override option to display the Simplified Over-
ride dialog box.

Figure 163. Graphic Pop-up Menu

Simplified override option

176 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Simplified Override Dialog Box

Using the Simplified Override Dialog

Box
With the Simplified Override dialog box you can easily override the fol-
lowing:
• Analog outputs
• Binary outputs
• Multi-state analog outputs
• UCMs
• Non-Trane BACnet points

Overriding an Analog Output

1. Open the Simplified Override dialog from a graphic or the from the
override button. The Override dialog box displays (see Figure 164).

Note:
When you first open the dialog, the Auto/Manual knob displays
the control status of the object. Auto means the automation sys-
tem is in control. Manual means that a security user has over-
riden the object.

Figure 164. Analog Output Override Dialog Box

Note:
Click on the More control button at the bottom of the dialog box
to display the Priority Arrays box. To perform an override, your
default control priority level must be higher than priority level
listed in the box. If not, refer to “Using the Advanced Systems
Override” on page 187.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 177
Overriding System Values

Note:
An error message in red will display in the override details box
warning you that your access level isn’t high enough to override
the object. For more options, refer to “Using the Advanced Sys-
tems Override” on page 187.

2. Click on Manual option on the Auto/Manual knob. This enables the

slider bar and text field.
3. Click in the text field and type a new value. The green indicator in the
slider bar moves to reflect the new value.
4. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Changing the Min/Max Output Range

1. Click on the Edit Min/Max button in the Analog Output Override dia-
log box. The Edit Min/Max dialog box displays (see Figure 165).

Figure 165. Edit Min/Max Dialog Box

2. Type values in the Max Value, Default Value, and Min Value fields.
3. Click OK. The dialog box closes.
To return control back to the BAS, see “Releasing Control Back to the Sys-
tem” on page 186.

178 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Simplified Override Dialog Box

Overriding an Analog Output or Analog Value in a Non-

Trane BACnet Device
1. Open the Simplified Override dialog from a graphic or the from the
override button. The Override dialog box displays (see Figure 166).

Figure 166. Non-Trane Analog Output Override Dialog Box

Note:
Click the More control button at the bottom of the dialog box to
display the Priority Arrays box. To perform an override, your
default control priority level must be higher than priority level
listed in the box. If not, refer to “Using the Advanced Systems
Override” on page 187.

Note:
An error message in red will display in the override details box
warning you that your access level isn’t high enough to override
the object. For more options, refer to “Using the Advanced Sys-
tems Override” on page 187.

2. Click in the text field to type a new value.

3. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 179
Overriding System Values

Overriding a Multi-State Analog Output

Note:
The analog output (AOP) object must be set up in the editor as
a multistate object for this view. For more information see “Set-
ting Up Multi-State Values and Assigning Labels” on page 262.

1. Open the Simplified Override dialog from a graphic or the from the
override button. The Override dialog box displays (see Figure 167).

Figure 167. Analog Output (Multi-state) Override Dialog Box

Note:
Click on the More control button at the bottom of the dialog box
to display the Priority Arrays box. To perform an override, your
default control priority level must be higher than priority level
listed in the box. If not, refer to “Using the Advanced Systems
Override” on page 187.

Note:
An error message in red will display in the override details box
warning you that your access level isn’t high enough to override
the object. For more options, refer to “Using the Advanced Sys-
tems Override” on page 187.

2. Click on the Manual option in the Auto/Manual knob. This enables

the multi-state slider bar and the Apply button.

180 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Simplified Override Dialog Box

3. Click and drag the indicator in the slider bar to the desired setting.
4. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
To return control back to the BAS, see “Releasing Control Back to the Sys-
tem” on page 186.

Overriding a Multi-State Output in a non-Trane BACnet

Device
1. Open the Simplified Override dialog from a graphic or the from the
override button. The Override dialog box displays (see Figure 168).

Figure 168. Non-Trane Analog Output (Multi-state) Override Dialog Box

Note:
Click on the More control button at the bottom of the dialog box
to display the Priority Arrays box. To perform an override, your
default control priority level must be higher than priority level
listed in the box. If not, refer to “Using the Advanced Systems
Override” on page 187.

Note:
An error message in red will display in the override details box
warning you that your access level isn’t high enough to override
the object. For more options, refer to “Using the Advanced Sys-
tems Override” on page 187.

2. Verify that the Control knob is in the Change to position.

3. Click and drag the indicator in the slider bar to the desired setting.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 181
Overriding System Values

4. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
To return control back to the BAS, see “Releasing Control Back to the Sys-
tem” on page 186.

Overriding a Binary Output or a Lighting Value for an

Area Application
1. Open the Simplified Override dialog from a graphic or the from the
override button. The override dialog box displays (see Figure 169).

Figure 169. Binary Output Override dialog box

Note:
Click on the More control button at the bottom of the dialog box
to display the Priority Arrays box. To perform an override, your
default control priority level must be higher than priority level
listed in the box. If not, refer to “Using the Advanced Systems
Override” on page 187.

Note:
An error message in red will display in the override details box
warning you that your access level isn’t high enough to override
the object. For more options, refer to “Using the Advanced Sys-
tems Override” on page 187.

2. Click on the Manual option in the Auto/Manual knob.

182 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Simplified Override Dialog Box

3. Click the toggle switch to set it to the On state, or click the toggle
switch to set it to the Off state. With either selection, the On label or
the Off label will then appear in bold.

Note:
The toggle switch labels are defined in the Binary Output
editor and can be assigned names other than On and Off.

4. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
To return control back to the BAS, see “Releasing Control Back to the Sys-
tem” on page 186.

Overriding a Binary Output or Binary Value in a

Non-Trane BACnet Device
1. Open the Simplified Override dialog from a graphic or the from the
override button. The Override dialog box displays (see Figure 170).

Figure 170. Non-Trane binary Output Override Dialog Box

Note:
Click on the More control button at the bottom of the dialog box
to display the Priority Arrays box. To perform an override, your
default control priority level must be higher than priority level
listed in the box. If not, refer to “Using the Advanced Systems
Override” on page 187.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 183
Overriding System Values

Note:
An error message in red will display in the override details box
warning you that your access level isn’t high enough to override
the object. For more options, refer to “Using the Advanced Sys-
tems Override” on page 187.

2. Verify the control knob is in the Change to position.

3. Click the toggle switch to set it to the On state, or click the toggle
switch to set it to the Off state. With either selection, the On or Off
label will then appear in bold.

Note:
The toggle switch labels cannot be edited for non-Trane BACnet
points. If you wish to edit the labels, create a binary output
point that references the non-Trane BACnet point. Use the
Binary Output editor to edit the labels.

4. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
To return control back to the BAS, see “Releasing Control Back to the Sys-
tem” on page 186.

184 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Simplified Override Dialog Box

Overriding a UCM or Application

1. Open the Simplified Override dialog afrom a graphic or the from the
override button. The override dialog box displays (see Figure 171).

Note:
If you are overriding an application object it must have a
Present Value property. Area is an example of an application
with a Present Value property.

Figure 171. UCM Override Dialog Box

Note:
Click on the More control button at the bottom of the dialog box
to display the Priority Arrays box. To perform an override, your
default control priority level must be higher than priority level
listed in the box. If not, refer to “Using the Advanced Systems
Override” on page 187.

Note:
An error message in red will display in the override details box
warning you that your access level isn’t high enough to override
the object. For more options, refer to “Using the Advanced Sys-
tems Override” on page 187.

2. Click the Manual on the Auto/Manual knob.

3. Click and drag the indicator in the slider bar to the setting you want.
4. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 185
Overriding System Values

To return control back to the BAS, see “Releasing Control Back to the Sys-
tem” on page 186.

Releasing Control Back to the System

To return control back to the BAS after performing an override, do the fol-
lowing:

Trane Objects
1. In the Simplified Override dialog box, click Auto in the
Auto/Manual knob.
2. Click OK to close the dialog box, or click Apply to view the updated
Present Value field and priority arrays.

Note:
Clicking on Auto to release control back to the BAS also
removes all user overrides from the priority array.

Non-Trane BACnet devices

1. In the Simplified Override dialog box, click on the Release in the
Release/Change to knob.
2. Click OK to close the dialog box, or click Apply to view the updated
Present Value field and priority arrays.

Note:
Clicking Release only releases control at the user’s default pri-
ority level.

186 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Advanced Systems Override

Using the Advanced Systems Override

You can perform overrides using the advanced Override dialog box
(see Figure 172). However, Trane encourage’s you to define your default
priority level in Site Security and then override from graphics by using
the simplifed overrides dialog box (see Chapter 11, “Setting Up the Sim-
plified Override Dialog Box”).
• To override an analog or binary output using the advanced override
dialog box, see Chapter 17, “Overriding an Analog or Binary Output.”
• To override an area using advanced override dialog box, see Chapter
20, “Overriding an Area.”
• To override a UCM using advanced override dialog box, see Chapter
12, “Setting the Overrides for a UCM.”

Figure 172. Advanced Override Dialog box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 187
Overriding System Values

188 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 12

Using UCM Editors

Each unit control module (UCM) supported in the Tracer Summit system
has an editor that allows you to create or to modify the UCM’s setup. You
access the UCM editors through the Unit Controllers menu item of the
Setup menu.
You can use UCM editors to perform these tasks:
• Create, set up, and configure a UCM on the Tracer Summit system
• View the status of a UCM
• Troubleshoot a UCM
UCM editors share common layouts and functions. This chapter describes
the typical editing tasks you can perform in UCM editors.

Note:
For detailed information about each UCM editor, refer to Tracer
Summit online help (from any UCM editor, click the Help but-
ton or press the F1 key).

Accessing a UCM Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers. The list of unit control-
lers displays.
2. Select the name of the unit controller that you want to edit. The
Select dialog box displays, listing each UCM of the type you selected.
Figure 173 shows a Select dialog box for a Voyager Rooftop.

Figure 173. Select Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 189
Using UCM Editors

3. Click on the name of the unit controller you wish to edit.

4. Click OK to display the UCM editor. Figure 174 shows the editor for a
Voyager Rooftop. For all editors, the Status screen displays when the
editor is first opened. You can view this screen to monitor the UCM’s
status.

Figure 174. Voyager Rooftop Editor

190 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New UCM

Creating a New UCM

To create a new UCM, you perform these tasks:
• If no UCMs of the appropriate type are defined yet, set up the new
UCM type (as described in this section)
• Name and set the address of the new UCM (as described in this sec-
tion)
• Set up the UCM (see “Setting Up a UCM” on page 193)
• Configure the UCM, if appropriate (see “Configuring a UCM” on
page 194)
• Set overrides for the UCM, if appropriate (see “Setting the Overrides
for a UCM” on page 195)
• Route alarms and events and define security access (see “Routing
Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access” on page 197)
The following steps show you how to create a new UCM using the Setup
menu’s Unit Controllers option. You can also create a new UCM while
configuring a site. For more information, see Chapter 6, “Configuring
Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”
To create a new UCM:
1. From the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers. The list of defined
UCM types displays.
2. Make a selection:
• If the appropriate UCM type is listed, select it. The Select dialog
box displays. Then click New.
• If the appropriate UCM type is not listed, select New UCM Type.
The Select New UCM Type dialog box displays, listing UCM types
that have not yet been defined in the site (see Figure 175). Click
the appropriate UCM type, then click OK.

Figure 175. Select New UCM Type Dialog Box

For both options, the New UCM Name/Address dialog box displays
(see Figure 176 on page 192).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 191
Using UCM Editors

Figure 176. New UCM Name/Address Dialog Box

3. In the UCM Name field, enter a unique name for the UCM. Make the
name as informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
You must enter a name before you can save the new UCM. You can
modify the name at any time from the Setup screen of the UCM edi-
tor.
4. In the BCU field, select a BCU. Only BCUs with compatible links are
listed.
5. In the Comm. Link field, select a communication link. Only compati-
ble links are listed.
6. In the Address field, select an address for this UCM. Only valid,
unused addresses are listed.
7. Click OK. The UCM editor specific to the UCM type you have selected
displays.
8. Set up the new UCM (see “Setting Up a UCM” on page 193).

Note:
You can not create a UCM in excess of the links capacity.

192 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up a UCM

Setting Up a UCM
The tasks for setting up a UCM vary depending upon the UCM type. In
general, you can:
• Change the name of the UCM
• Control UCM setpoints
• Change the UCM link and address
• Select or change other setup information
You can make these changes from the UCM editor’s Setup screen. This
screen contains the fields necessary for Tracer Summit to control the
UCM. Depending on the type of UCM, there may be other dedicated
Setup tabs for specific UCM functions. For detailed information on the
fields of the Setup screen, click the Help button.
To set up a UCM:
1. From the UCM editor, click the Setup tab. Figure 177 shows an exam-
ple Setup screen. The fields vary depending upon the UCM type.

Figure 177. Example Setup Screen

2. Edit the setup information as necessary.

3. To change the UCM link or address, click the Change Address button.
Make your changes and click OK.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 193
Using UCM Editors

Configuring a UCM
Most UCM editors have a Configuration screen where you can set UCM
configuration information. Because this information is stored locally in
the UCM, you cannot edit the information on the Configuration screen
when the UCM is offline. For detailed information on the fields of the
Configuration screen, click the Help button.
To configure a UCM:
1. From the UCM editor, click the Configuration tab. Figure 178 shows
an example Configuration screen. The fields vary depending upon the
UCM type.

Figure 178. Example Configuration Screen

2. Edit the configuration information as necessary.

194 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting the Overrides for a UCM

Setting the Overrides for a UCM

When you override a UCM from the Overrides tab of a UCM editor, you
perform the override using the advanced Override dialog box. However,
Trane encourages you to define your default priority level in Site Security
and override from graphics by using the simplifed overrides dialog box
(see “Setting Up the Simplified Override Dialog Box” on page 172). From
the advanced override dialog box you can:
• Release control at the specific priority
• Change the present value at a specific priority

Note:
You will need access to change the priority level. Priority con-
trol ranges from 1 (highest) to 16 (lowest). The command with
the highest priority controls the object. To take control off, you
must select the Release Control option button. Then the next
highest priority commands the object.

Overriding the Present Value of a UCM

1. From the UCM editor, click the Override tab. Figure 179 shows an
example Overrides screen. All UCM editors have an Override button.
The remaining fields vary depending upon the UCM type.

Figure 179. Example Overrides Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 195
Using UCM Editors

2. Click the Override button. The Override dialog box displays with
Change Value To selected (see Figure 180 on page 196).

Note:
If you need help with overrides, click the Tutorial button (see
Figure 180 on page 196) to open the Tracer Summit Daily Oper-
ations Tutorial.

Figure 180. Override Dialog Box

3. In the Change Value To list box, select the desired value. For a UCM,
the available values are: Unoccupied, Optimal Stop, Occupied, Opti-
mal Start, Demand Limit, Duty Cycle, Priority Shutdown, Night
Economize, and Night Heat/Cool.
4. Click the At Priority list box to select a priority.
5. Click Apply to perform the override. The Priority Array list updates.
6. Click OK to close the Override dialog box.

Releasing Control of a UCM

1. From the UCM editor, click the Override tab.
2. Click the Override button. The Override dialog box displays.
3. Click the Release Control button. The Change Value To button
becomes inactive and the system selects the highest priority from the
At Priority list box.
4. Click Apply to release control at the selected priority level. The Prior-
ity Array list updates, or click OK to apply the changes and close the
dialog box.

196 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access

Overriding Other Values in a UCM

1. From the UCM editor, click the Override tab.
2. Edit the override fields as necessary.
3. Click Apply to release control at the selected priority level. The Prior-
ity Array list updates, or click OK to apply the changes and close the
dialog box.

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting

Security Access
All UCM editors have a Classes screen where you can assign alarm and
event routing and set security access for a UCM.

Defining Alarm and Event Routing

1. From the UCM editor, click the Classes tab. Figure 181 shows an
example Classes screen.

Figure 181. Example Classes Screen

2. In the Control Class field, select a control class. The control class
defines the event class that will receive an event message when the
present value of the UCM changes.
3. In each diagnostic field in the Alarm Classes group, select an appro-
priate event class for routing alarms.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 197
Using UCM Editors

Setting Security Access

1. From the UCM editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 182).

Figure 182. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to
the security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked,
permission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.

Deleting a UCM
You cannot delete a UCM from a UCM editor. Use the Delete Object func-
tion from the Tools menu to delete a UCM (see Chapter 39, “Deleting
Objects and Sites”).

198 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 13

Creating Groups of Sites

Grouping sites allow you to quickly and easily service and monitor large
numbers of sites. Creating groups is a feature that comes with the Enter-
prise Management package.
With grouping capabilities, you can group sites together and edit sched-
ules or change setpoints once for the group. This saves time because you
do not have to make the same edit for each site. In addition, with Tracer
Summit grouping functions, you can:
• Put a site in multiple groups.
• Perform global changes to the groups. These changes can affect all
sites in the group.
• Use Task Manager to schedule a scan of groups of sites rather than
scheduling individual site scans.
• Use message forwarding and call centers to organize message for-
warding by site groups rather than individual sites.

Note:
Group configuration does not appear as a selection on the Setup
menu unless you have both site security and group security
access. For more information about group security, see “Setting
Up Group Security” on page 144.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 199
Creating Groups of Sites

Creating a Group
Use Group Configuration to put sites into groups. You can also include
groups of sites within groups.

Note:
You must create sites before you can add or create groups (see
“Creating a Site” on page 34).

To create a group:
1. From the Setup menu, select Group Configuration. The Select Group
dialog box displays (see Figure 183).

Figure 183. Select Group Dialog Box

2. Click New. The Group Configuration dialog box displays (see

Figure 184).

Figure 184. Group Configuration Dialog Box

3. In the Group name field, type the group name.

200 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying Groups

4. In the Available Site(s) list, select the desired sites.

Note:
Groups of sites display in the Available site(s) list with a “(g)”
prefix.

5. Click Add to add the sites to the Current Member(s) list.

6. Click Save to save the new group to the database.
7. Click Close.

Modifying Groups
After you create a group, any changes that you make to this group are
made to all of the site(s) or group(s) of sites in the group.
To modify groups:
1. From the Group Configuration dialog box:
• Click Add to add selected members to the Selected Site(s) list
• Click Remove to remove selected members from the Selected
Site(s) list
2. Click Save to save the new group to the database.
3. Click Close.

Using Groups to Make Global Changes

Through a global change you can edit or modify the setup of many objects
of the same type in one action. This means that you do not have to open
the editor for every object to make a change. For more information about
making global changes using groups, see “Applying Global Changes to
Multiple Sites” on page 205.

Sample Scenarios
The following scenarios show how you might use groups to make global
changes.

Scenario 1
As a building manager for a school district you have to override all of the
schedules for 15 schools because of weather. To do this, you access the
Time of Day application and click the Group Select button. You specify
the “All Buildings” group and select all of the affected schedules. After
you click OK, the global changes editor for time of day appears.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 201
Creating Groups of Sites

In the editor, you remove all of the start events for the day and click the
Save As Exception button. When the Download Scheduler dialog box
appears, you download the changes to the sites immediately. The work-
station scans all of the sites in the database to download the schedule
exceptions for that day.

Scenario 2
As a manager of several stores you need to change the cooling setpoint for
the offices in all your stores. You select Area from the Setup menu, then
click Group Select on the Select Area dialog box. You select the All Stores
group and select all the office areas. After you click OK, the global
changes editor for Area appears. On the Setup screen you change the
occupied cooling setpoint and save your changes. In the Download Sched-
uler dialog box you schedule the changes to download that night at
2:00 a.m. Later the next morning, the workstation begins a scan task at
2:00 a.m., scanning all of the sites to download the area setpoint change.

Creating Scan Tasks for Groups

The Task Manager application scans groups that contain BCU sites,
Tracer 100, or Tracker sites. For details about scanning groups with the
Task Manager, see “Creating a Task for Groups of Sites” on page 226.

Creating Call Centers for Groups of

Sites
Call centers allow you to e-mail and send cell phone pager messages for
alarms and event occurrences to selected recipients. These recipients can
receive these alarms for groups of sites that you specify in Message For-
warding. For information about sending alarm e-mails for groups of sites,
see “Selecting a Site/Group from Which Alarms Are Sent” on page 245.

Deleting Groups
Use the Delete Objects utility to delete a group or groups. For more infor-
mation on using the utility, see “Deleting a Site” on page 658.

202 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 14

Making Global Changes

To make global changes, you select multiple objects of the same type and
edit them simultaneously with the editor for that object type. For exam-
ple, you can select specific schedules in groups of sites and edit all the
schedules in the schedule editor.
Making changes to single sites is part of the Tracer Summit standard
software. Making global changes to groups of sites is part of the Enter-
prise Management package.
Using the global change function editor of the object editor, you can
quickly and simply change many objects in a single site or across numer-
ous sites that are part of groups. The following types of objects allow glo-
bal changes:
• Area
• Binary inputs/outputs
• Analog inputs/outputs
• Time of Day schedules (BCU and Tracer 100)
• Calculated binaries (type 08 points), see “Viewing and Modifying
BCU Objects” on page 207
• Calculated analogs (type 11 points), see “Viewing and Modifying BCU
Objects” on page 207
• Thermostat control modules
• Voyager rooftops
• VAV II/III/IV

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 203
Making Global Changes

Applying Global Changes to a Single

Site
Use the following procedure to make global changes (such as changing all
binary outputs) in a single site.
To make global changes to a single site:
1. Log on to the desired site.
2. From the Setup menu, select an object. For example, from the Inputs/
Outputs submenu, select Binary Outputs. The Select Object dialog
box displays (see Figure 185).
3. Select the objects you want to change at this site.

Figure 185. Select Object Dialog Box: Select Binary Output

4. Click OK. The editor of the object type you selected displays.
5. In the editor, change the desired properties of the object.
For example, from the Binary Output editor, click the Setup tab and
change the On State Label from On to Enable.
6. Click Save. The editor saves the changes to the objects you selected in
step 3. The Save Successful dialog box displays.
7. Click OK in the Save Successful to return to the editor.

204 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Applying Global Changes to Multiple Sites

Applying Global Changes to Multiple

Sites
To make global changes to groups of sites, you must have the proper secu-
rity access and groups must already exist (see “Creating a Group” on
page 200).
To globally change multiple sites:
1. Log on to a site.
2. Select an object type to modify.
For example, from the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers, then
select Voyager Rooftops. The Select Object dialog box displays.
3. Click the Group Select button. The group-level Select Object dialog
box displays (see Figure 186).

Figure 186. Select Object for Global Edit Dialog Box

4. In the Available Groups field, select the desired group. The Available
Objects list displays all the Voyager rooftops that are in the sites
which are members of the specified group.

Note:
To sort the object list alphanumerically by object name, click
the Object header.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 205
Making Global Changes

5. In the Available Objects in the Group list, select the desired object(s).
6. Click Add to add the object(s) to the Objects selected for editing list.
7. Click OK. The editor for the object type displays.
8. Click the Setup tab.
9. Change any available attribute of the object.
10. Click Save. The Global Changes - Schedule Download dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 187).

Figure 187. Global Changes - Schedule a Download Dialog Box

11. Select a time to download the changes.

• Click the Download Immediately button to download the changes
right away.
• Click the Download on button to schedule a date and time to
download the changes.

Note:
When you define a download time, it does not simply download
the most recent changes. It also downloads any other changes
that you made to the database.

12. Click OK. The changes will be sent to the database at the time you
designated. The Save Successful dialog box displays.

Note:
To verify that the changes downloaded successfully, check the
error log.

13. Click OK on the Save Successful dialog box to return to the editor.

206 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing and Modifying BCU Objects

Viewing and Modifying BCU Objects

You can upload, download, view, and modify BCU objects. You can glo-
bally change these objects across single sites or across multiple sites con-
taining BCU panels.

Note:
To change objects across multiple sites, you must have installed
the Enterprise Management package.

You can view these objects online or offline in the editors. You can modify
them online or upload them to your workstation and then modify them
through the appropriate editor.

Uploading and Downloading BCU Objects

When you are connected to a BCU site, Tracer Summit downloads any
changes you make immediately to the BCU. When you change objects
offline, Tracer Summit downloads the change to the BCU the next time
that you connect to the site.
If you have installed the Building Management or Enterprise Manage-
ment package, you can schedule the Task Manager to connect to the site.
See Chapter 15, “Using the Task Manager” for more information.

Note:
Task Manager schedules scans, and during this process uploads
and downloads the correct items.

Accessing the Analog or Binary Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. Then, select either Ana-
log Output or Binary Output. Figure 188 on page 208 shows an exam-
ple of the Select Analog Object dialog box.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 207
Making Global Changes

Figure 188. Select Analog Object Dialog Box

2. Select the desired object.

3. Click OK. The Analog Output/Binary Output object editor appears,
with the object name displayed (see Figure 189).

Figure 189. Analog Output Object Editor

208 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing and Modifying BCU Objects

Modifying the Present Value for Analog or Binary

Objects
The following procedures describe how to override or release analog or
binary output objects while performing:
• Offline single object overrides
• Offline or online global overrides within a single site
• Offline or online global overrides across multiple sites

Note:
When performing a global change across multiple sites you can
override an object at the priority level selected in the At Prior-
ity drop-down list, even if your site level security does not allow
access to priority level.

Changing the present value of an Analog or Binary Object

1. From the Setup menu, highlight Input/Output. Then select either the
Analog Output or Binary Output editor. The dialog box for the object
displays.
2. Select the object(s) that you want to override.
3. Click OK to display the editor.
4. Click the Overrides tab. The Overrides screen displays (see
Figure 190).

Figure 190. Overrides Screen

5. Click the Override button. The Override Object dialog box appears
(see Figure 191 on page 210).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 209
Making Global Changes

Figure 191. Override Object Dialog Box

Dialog displayed for analog Dialog displayed for

outputs binary outputs

6. Click the Change Value to option.

7. For analog output objects, type the desired value in the field. For
binary output objects, select one of the states listed in the drop-down
list.
8. To apply the change, select one of the priority levels in the At Priority
drop-down list. Priority 1 is the highest, priority 16 is the lowest.

Note:
The analog or binary output objects may not control to your
modification if the object is being controlled at a higher priority
than the one you select.

9. Click OK to make the change and close the dialog box.

• If you make the change while connected to the site, the change is
immediately sent to the panel.
• If you make the change offline, you must connect to the BCU
panel for the modification to take effect.

210 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing and Modifying BCU Objects

Releasing the present value of an Analog or Binary Object

1. From the Setup menu, highlight Input/Output. Then select Analog or
Binary Output. The dialog box for the object displays.
2. Select the object(s) that you want to release.
3. Click OK to display the editor.
4. Click the Overrides tab. The Overrides screen displays (see Figure
190 on page 209).
5. Click the Override button. The Override Object dialog box displays
(see Figure 191).
6. Click the Release Control option. The requested value field (no label)
is disabled.
7. Select the priority level in the At Priority drop-down box to be
released. The object will not longer control to the value applied to this
priority level. Priority 1 is the highest, priority 16 is the lowest.
8. Click OK.

Note:
If you make the change offline, you must connect to the BCU
panel for the modification to take effect.

Globally Changing Analog or Binary Output Objects

Modifying the present value of a analog/binary output is the most impor-
tant feature of these editors. There are two likely types of global changes
that you might make using analog/binary output objects:
• Change the multiple analog/binary output points (turn the lights on
in all areas, for example) within a single site or across multiple sites.
• Change an analog/binary output object that is in each of several iden-
tical or very closely matched sites and all programmed in the same
manner. You can change a calculated analog/binary point that is in
each site using the global change functions.
To globally change objects:
◆ Follow the procedure in “Applying Global Changes to a Single Site” on
page 204 or “Applying Global Changes to Multiple Sites” on page 205.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 211
Making Global Changes

Viewing and Modifying Calculated

Analog and Binary Objects
You can upload, download, view, and modify calculated analog and binary
objects if you have installed the Tracer 100/Tracker Communication pack-
age. You can globally change these objects across single sites or across
multiple sites containing Tracer 100 panels.

Note:
To change objects across multiple sites, you must have installed
the Enterprise Management package.

You can view these objects online or offline in the editors with the termi-
nal emulation screen (see the section on terminal emulation in the Daily
Operations guide). You can modify them online or upload them to your
workstation and then modify them through the appropriate editor.
Calculated binary and analog objects are only used by Tracer 100 series
panels. Calculated binaries (point type 08) and calculated analogs (point
type 11) are similar to binary and analog inputs/outputs, but they are not
associated with hardware. See Tracer 100 Series Programming Guide
(EMTB-PG-11) for more information about calculated binaries and ana-
logs.

Uploading and Downloading Calculated Binary/Analog

Objects
To view calculated binary/analog objects with their editors, you must first
upload them from the Tracer 100 panel. Uploading occurs as part of nor-
mal processing when you connect to a Tracer 100 site.
When you are connected to a Tracer 100 panel, Tracer Summit downloads
any changes you make immediately to the panel. When you change
objects offline, Tracer Summit downloads the change to the panel the
next time that you connect to the site.
If you have installed the Building Management or Enterprise Manage-
ment package, you can schedule the Task Manager to connect to the site.
See Chapter 15, “Using the Task Manager” for more information.

Note:
Task Manager schedules scans, and during this process uploads
downloads the correct items.

212 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing and Modifying Calculated Analog and Binary Objects

Accessing the Calculated Binary or Analog Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Calculated Binary or Calculated Analog.
The select object dialog box appears (see Figure 192).

Figure 192. Select Calculated Object Dialog Box

2. Select which object you want to check.

3. Click OK. The calculated object editor appears, with the object dis-
played (see Figure 193).

Figure 193. Calculated Object Editor

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 213
Making Global Changes

Modifying Calculated Binary or Analog Objects

Use the following procedures to override or release calculated binary or
analog objects. When you are connected to the Tracer 100, access the cal-
culated analog or binary object through terminal emulation or through
the Tracer Summit editors. Any changes you make to the object are sent
immediately to the Tracer 100 panel.
When you are offline, you can access calculated analog or binary object
status only through the editors. Since Tracer Summit is not connected to
the Tracer 100, the editor does not display the alarm condition of the
point, but it does display the last-known values. To have your changes
take effect, you must connect to the panel (see “Uploading and Download-
ing BCU Objects” on page 207).

Modifying the Calculated Binary or Analog Object through

Terminal Emulation
1. Connect to the Tracer 100 site using the procedure for terminal emu-
lation described in the Daily Operations guide.
2. Modify the object.
If you want to use the terminal emulation menus to change the object,
follow the procedures described in the Tracer 100 Series Operator’s
Guide (EMTB-OG-15).

Overriding the Calculated Binary or Analog Object through the

Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Calculated Binary or Calculated Analog.
The object dialog box appears.
2. Select the object that you want to override.
3. Click OK.
4. Click the Overrides tab. The Overrides screen displays (see
Figure 194).

Figure 194. Overrides Screen

5. Click the Override button. The Override Object dialog box displays
(see Figure 191 on page 210).

214 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing and Modifying Calculated Analog and Binary Objects

Figure 195. Override Object Dialog Box

6. Click the Change Value to button.

7. Position the cursor in the field (the unlabeled field next to the Change
Value to button. Type the desired value.
8. Click OK to make the change and close the dialog box or click Apply to
make the change but keep the dialog box open.
• If you make the change while connected to the Tracer 100, the
change is immediately sent to the panel.
• If you make the change offline, you must connect to the panel for
the modification to take effect, (see “Uploading and Downloading
BCU Objects” on page 207).

Releasing a Calculated Binary or Analog Object

through the Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Calculated Binary or Calculated Analog.
The select object dialog box appears.
2. Select the object that you want to release.
3. Click OK.
4. Click the Overrides tab. The Overrides screen displays (see Figure
190 on page 209).
5. Click the Override button. The Override Object dialog box appears
(see Figure 191).
6. Click the Release Control button The requested value field (no label)
is disabled.
7. Click OK or Apply.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 215
Making Global Changes

• If you make the change while connected to the Tracer 100, the
change is immediately sent to the panel.
• If you make the change offline, you must connect to the panel for
the modification to take effect, (see “Uploading and Downloading
BCU Objects” on page 207).

Globally Changing Calculated Binary or Analog Objects

Modifying the present value of a calculated analog/binary is the most
important feature of these editors. There are two likely types of global
changes that you might make using calculated analog/binary objects:
• Change multiple calculated analog/binary points (turn the lights on
in all areas, for example) within a single site or across multiple sites.
• Change a calculated object that is in each of several identical or very
closely matched sites and all programmed in the same manner. You
can change a calculated analog/binary point that is in each site using
the global change functions.
To globally change calculated objects:
Follow the procedure in “Applying Global Changes to a Single Site” on
page 204 or “Applying Global Changes to Multiple Sites” on page 205.

216 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 15

Using the Task Manager

Task Manager helps you automate tasks to reduce the time it takes to
maintain a site or groups of sites. Task Manager lets you schedule BCU,
Tracer 100, or Tracker site backups, archive the event log, or scan sites to
occur whenever your workstation is on.
With Task Manager, you can change site information offline and schedule
these changes to download to specific sites or groups at night, when tele-
phone rates are low. If you have a large number of sites that require
extensive changes, you can schedule these for non-work hours, saving this
time for other duties.
The Task Manager is part of the Building Management and Enterprise
Management packages. These add-ons to Tracer Summit enable you to
create tasks for hundreds or even thousands of separate sites from a cen-
tral location.
The Task Manager lets you:
• Download during a scan the offline global changes that you made to
any of the site types
• Schedule automatic scans for BCU sites, as well as Tracer 100 and
Tracker sites (if you have the Tracer 100/Tracker Communication
package).
• Schedule site backups that you can use to restore sites at a later date
• Schedule regular archives of the workstation event log
• Edit existing tasks to modify schedules, actions, or site members
• Schedule one-time events or repeating tasks
• Initiate manual scans on the site you are connected to
• Log scan errors in Task Log. (For more information, see the sections
on the event log in the Daily Operations guide)
• Perform operations on the workstation while scans and other tasks
are being run

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 217
Using the Task Manager

Defining the Four Tasks

Task Manager can perform a task for a site at a time that you schedule or
perform the task immediately. The four tasks that Task Manager can per-
form include:
• Archiving the event log
• Backing up sites
• Scanning sites
• Panel backups

Archiving the Event Log

With Task Manager you can schedule the automatic archiving of the
event log as it exists for each site in your workstation database. The infor-
mation is stored as a Microsoft Excel-compatible file format. You can
import this file into Microsoft Excel to view it.
With Task Manager you can also archive the event log as a text file, as
well as specify where the archive is stored in the Tracer Summit backup
folder.

Backing Up Sites
Task Manager performs immediate or scheduled backups of BCU and
Tracer 100. This function makes a copy of the information from your
workstation database for BCU or Tracer 100 sites. A BDB file is created
for each of the selected sites.
The backup files can be saved to any location that you specify.

Scanning Sites
During a site scan, Tracer Summit connects to a site and downloads
changes to the site and collects information from the site.

Note:
The Tracer Summit site scan is similar to the scan function of
Building Management Network (BMN) software. Task Man-
ager, however, does not perform the reporting functions during
scans that BMN software does.

Task Manager can scan Tracer Summit BCU sites, as well as Tracer 100
and Tracker sites (if you have the Tracer 100/Tracker Communication
package).
During a site scan, Tracer Summit uploads or downloads site informa-
tion. For BCU sites, Task Manager uploads all object types. For Tracer
100 or Tracker sites, Task Manager uploads schedules, alarms, holidays,
and calculated binary/analog objects.
During a site scan, Task Manager also determines whether you have
made offline changes to the site. If you have changed a site’s information
at the workstation, Task Manager downloads this information to the

218 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Defining the Four Tasks

panel first. If you have not made offline changes, Task Manager uploads
the panel information.

Panel Backups
During a panel backup, Tracer Summit connects to Tracer 100 sites and
creates a backup file of the panel’s database. If a Tracer 100 site has mul-
tiple panels linked to it, Tracer Summit creates separate .SAV files for
each panel.

Note:
If you want to back up individual panels of a site, use the
Backup a Remote selection from the Setup menu. For more
information, see “Creating .SAV files for Tracer 100 Panels” on
page 412.

This backup creates a .SAV file, which you can use to restore the panel
(see “Restoring a Tracer 100 Panel” on page 668). You cannot, however,
use this file to restore the panel information to your workstation data-
base. You can only use .BDB files to restore site information to the work-
station database.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 219
Using the Task Manager

Accessing the Task Manager Schedule

Screen
◆ From the Setup Menu, select Task Manager. The Task Manager
Schedule screen appears (see Figure 196).

Figure 196. Task Manager Schedule Screen

220 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Run Immediate Scan on a Single Site

Run Immediate Scan on a Single Site

Run an immediate scan on a single connected site when you need to
upload or download site information right away. For example, a facility
manager for a school building may need to run an immediate scan to
download a schedule for a change due to weather. You might also run an
immediate scan to back up a site before performing global changes.
If you have installed the Building Management or Enterprise Manage-
ment package, you can run immediate scans on BCU sites. You can scan
Tracer 100 or Tracker sites if you have installed the Tracer 100/Tracker
Communication package and either Building Management or Enterprise
Management.

Note:
For more information about running an immediate scan on
groups of sites after making global changes, see “Applying Glo-
bal Changes to Multiple Sites” on page 205.

To run an immediate scan on a single site:

1. From the Task Manager Schedule screen, click the Run Immediate
button. The Select Task dialog box displays (see Figure 197).

Figure 197. Select Task Dialog Box

2. Select the desired task:

• Select Archive Event Log to create a backup of the workstation’s
alarms and events as they exist in the database
• Select Site Backup to create a .BDB file for the site
• Select Site Scan to upload information from the site or download
changes made to the site offline in Tracer Summit
• Select Tracer 100 panel backup to create a .SAV file for a Tracer
100 site and all of its linked panels
3. Click OK to run the task. The word “Scan” appears in a blue box in
the lower right-hand corner of the screen.
When the task ends, the scan indicator on the status bar disappears.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 221
Using the Task Manager

To access the Scan Status dialog box, double-click the blue box on the
status bar. The Scan Progress dialog box appears.

Note:
To verify that the changes downloaded successfully, check the
error log.

Creating a Task for a Single Site

Use the following procedure to schedule a task for a single site. Tasks you
can schedule include archiving the workstation event log, backing up
sites of panels, and scanning Tracer 100, Tracker, or BCU sites (see
“Defining the Four Tasks” on page 218).
With the Task Schedule Wizard, you can specify the start time and date of
these tasks. You can schedule a task as a once-only task, or schedule it to
occur on a daily, weekly, monthly, or other specified time interval.
To create a task for a single site:
1. From the Task Manager Schedule, click the New Task button. The
Welcome dialog box of the Task Schedule Wizard (1 of 4) appears.
2. Click Next. The Recurring Type screen (2 of 4) of the Task Schedule
Wizard displays.
3. Select the interval at which the task should occur:
• Click the Once button if the task will occur just once
• Click the Daily button if the task will occur every day, beginning
with the start date
• Click the Weekly button, if the task will occur at weekly intervals
• Click the Monthly button if the task will occur at specific times in
a month
• Click Specified Time Interval if the task must occur intermit-
tently
4. Click Next. Screen 3 of 4 of the Task Schedule Wizard appears (see
Figure 198 on page 223).
5. On Screen 3 of 4, select the appropriate data:
• On the once screen, select the start time and schedule start
• On the daily screen, select the start time, how often to perform
the task, and the effective period
• On the weekly schedule, select the start time, the days of the
week, how often, and the effective period
• On the monthly schedule, select the start time, the days of the
month, how often, and the effective period

222 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Task for a Single Site

• On the time interval screen, select the start time, time interval,
and effective period

Note:
“Every 1 weeks” means every week. “Every 2 weeks” means
every other week, and so on.

Figure 198. Task Schedule Wizard: Weekly (3 of 4)

6. Click Next. The Task Schedule Wizard Summary screen (4 of 4)

appears. Confirm that the task schedule is correct.
7. Click Finish. The Task Setup dialog box displays (see Figure 199 on
page 224). Summary information from the Task Schedule Wizard
appears in the Schedule field and the cursor is blinking in the
Description field.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 223
Using the Task Manager

Figure 199. Single Site User Task Setup Dialog Box

8. In the Description field, type a task description.

The description that you type appears in the Task Manager Schedule
field after you save the task.
9. Select the type of task you want to perform:
• Click the Workstation Tasks button to perform a workstation
task.
• Click the Site Tasks button if you want to perform a site task.
10. Select the specific task you want to perform:
• Click the Archive Event Log check box to archive the event log. To
save the archive as a text file, perform the procedure in “Saving
the Event Log Archive File” on page 228.
• Click the Tracer 100 panel backup check box if you want to create
a .SAV file for a Tracer 100 site. If you want to save the file in a
specific location, perform the procedure in “Specifying Where to
Save a Backup File” on page 229.
• Click the Site Backup check box if you want to create a .BDB file
for a site. If you want to save the file in a specific location, perform

224 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Task for a Single Site

the procedure in “Specifying Where to Save a Backup File” on

page 229.
• Click the Site Scan check box if you want to scan the site to
upload data from the site or download changes you have made
offline.
• If you desire, click both the Site Backup and Site Scan check
boxes. Note, however, that if you have made offline changes to the
site, these will download first. Beyond this, there is no order in
which the task runs. If you require, for example, that the site be
scanned first and then backed up, schedule these items as sepa-
rate tasks in the order you want them to run.
11. If you are backing up a site or scanning a site, in the Available Site(s)
list, select the site that you want create the task for.
12. Click Add to add the site to the Selected Site(s) list.
13. Click OK. The Task Setup dialog box closes and the Task Manager
Schedule displays.
14. Click Save. The new task is saved to the workstation database and
displays in the Task Manager Schedule (see Figure 200).
The task runs at the time you schedule.

Note:
The task does not appear in the Task Manager Schedule until
you click Save. To verify that the changes downloaded success-
fully, check the error log.

Figure 200. Task Manager Schedule Screen with a Task

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 225
Using the Task Manager

Creating a Task for Groups of Sites

Task Manager makes maintaining groups of sites easier, more effective,
and more efficient. You can back up groups of sites and scan them to
upload information or download changes that you made to them offline.
You can also create .SAV files for an entire site or groups of sites, includ-
ing all the panels linked to them.

Note:
See Chapter 14, “Making Global Changes” for procedures for
global changes and scheduling them to be downloaded to groups
of sites.

With the Task Schedule Wizard, you specify the start time and date of the
task. You can schedule a task as a once-only task, or schedule it to occur
on a daily, weekly, monthly, or other specified time interval.
To create a scan task for groups of sites:
1. Repeat steps 1 through 10 in “Creating a Task for a Single Site” on
page 222.
2. In the Available Site(s) list, select the sites and/or groups that you are
creating the task for.

Note:
When you assign a group to a scheduled task, all sites that are
members of the group when the task runs are included in the
task. Use the Group Configuration dialog box to add or remove
sites from the group after you have created the task (see “Creat-
ing a Group” on page 200). In this way, sites that are added to a
group after you schedule the group for a task are included when
the task runs.

3. Click Add to add the sites and/or groups to the Selected Site(s) list.
4. Click OK. The Task Setup dialog box closes and the Task Manager
Schedule displays.
5. Click Save. The new task is saved to the workstation database and
displays in the Task Manager Schedule.
At the scheduled time, the task runs.

Note:
The task does not appear in the task manager schedule until
you click Save. To verify that the changes downloaded success-
fully, check the error log.

226 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying Tasks

Modifying Tasks
Use the following procedures to modify Tracer Summit tasks created with
Task Manager.

Editing a Task
1. From the Task Manager Schedule, double-click the task you want to
edit in the Task Manager Schedule. The Task Setup dialog box dis-
plays the description, schedule, task actions and site assignments for
the edited task.
2. From this screen, you can perform the following:
• Change the description for the task
• Click Edit Schedule to modify the timing of the task
• Select different tasks and/or task options
• Add and/or remove sites from the scheduled task
3. After you edit the task, click OK to display the Task Manager Sched-
ule.
4. Click Save. The edited task is saved to the workstation database and
displays in the Task Manager Schedule.

Deleting a Task
1. From the Task Manager Schedule, click the task you want to delete in
the Task Manager Schedule view. The selected task is highlighted.
2. Press the Delete key.
3. Click Save. The task you selected and all further occurrences of it are
removed from the system.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 227
Using the Task Manager

Saving the Event Log Archive File

Use the following procedure to save the event log archive as a text (.TXT)
file or Microsoft Excel file.
To save the eventlog archive file in a specific format:
1. After selecting the archive event log option, click in the Archive
Eventlog cell. A button with three dots (ellipsis) displays (see
Figure 201).

Figure 201. Archive Event Log Button with Three Dots

2. Click the button with three dots. The Archive Options dialog box
appears (see Figure 202).

Figure 202. Archive Options Dialog Box

3. Select the file format to save the file in:

• Click the Excel Format button to save the archive as a Microsoft
Excel file
• Click the Text Format button to save the archive as a text file
4. In the Path field, specify the folder on your hard drive where you
want to save the file.
Click the Browse button to select a path using the Microsoft Browse
for Folder dialog box.
5. Click OK to save your selection. The Archive Options dialog box dis-
appears and the Task Manager Schedule becomes available again.
6. Continue programming the task.

228 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Specifying Where to Save a Backup File

Specifying Where to Save a Backup File

Use the following procedure to select where the site backup is saved.
To save the site backup file in a specific folder:
1. After selecting the Site Backup or Tracer 100 panel backup option,
click in the cell. A button with three dots (ellipsis) displays (see
Figure 203).

Figure 203. Site Backup Button with Three Dots

2. Click the button with three dots. The Site Backup Options dialog box
appears.

Note:
When changing Panel Backup options, the Site Backup Options
dialog box appears (see Figure 204).

Figure 204. Site Backup Options Dialog Box

3. In the Path field, specify the folder on your hard drive where you
want to save the file.
Click the Browse button to select a path using the Microsoft Browse
for Folder dialog box.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
5. Continue programming the task.

Note:
The default save location for backup files is the
\Tracer Summit\Backup directory.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 229
Using the Task Manager

230 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 16

Message Forwarding and

Call Centers

Message forwarding enables a Tracer Summit workstation to forward

alarms at scheduled times to a group of e-mail addresses or to individu-
als. Recipients who are on-call can receive the e-mails on their PCs or on
e-mail enabled pagers and cell phones.
The basic features of message forwarding are set up in System Options
(see “Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log
Settings” on page 569). More advanced features are set up in the Message
Forwarding editor. These advanced features are only available in the
Building Management and Enterprise Management packages. This chap-
ter only discusses these advanced features

Note:
Tracer 100 and Tracker sites are available when you have the
Tracer 100/Tracker Communications package installed, as well
as either the Building Management or Enterprise Management
packages.

Note:
Once set up, message forwarding and call centers work in the
background. Message forwarding will send out alarm messages
even when you are not logged onto a site, but, Tracer Summit
must be running, and your PC must be logged in to your com-
pany’s mail server or your PC modem line must not be busy.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 231
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

What is a Call Center

A call center is a group of e-mail recipients. To better visualize how a call
center works, think of a call center as a control room with Tracer Summit
workstations, an operator, and one or more BAS recipients who are on- or
off-site.
When working with call centers and message forwarding, remember the
following:
• Message forwarding works with valid e-mail programs that support
Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) profiles. For
example, a valid e-mail program is Microsoft Outlook but not
Microsoft Outlook Express.
• The Tracer Summit workstation program communicates with a mail
server. This server can be a LAN server or a modem-based, dial-in
Internet service provider (ISP) server. If the mail server is a dial-up
service, the Tracer Summit workstation dials up, sends the e-mail,
and then closes the connection.

Background Considerations
Important issues you should remember when setting up message for-
warding and call centers for Tracer Summit BCU, Tracer 100, and
Tracker sites are the setup processes for message forwarding and call cen-
ters, as well as preliminary setup issues.

Previewing the Message Forwarding Setup Process

There are two main stages to setting up the forwarding of alarms by
means of e-mail. Figure 205 on page 234 provides an overview of the mes-
sage-forwarding setup process.
• Set up e-mail services—This is the responsibility of your informa-
tion services (IS) department. The IS person sets up a mailbox on a
mail server used by the Tracer Summit software. The mailbox resides
on the server.
Every valid user of the Tracer Summit message forwarding applica-
tion must have access to this mailbox. Also, the IS person must set up
client-side access to this mailbox e-mail account profile in the Tracer
Summit workstation.
A user profile is a group of settings that define how a mailbox is set
up for a particular user. For example, a profile may include access to a
mailbox on Microsoft Exchange Server and specify that the Outlook
Address Book appear in the Address Book dialog box. A profile can
contain any number of information services.
Generally, you only need one user profile. If you sometimes need to
work with a different set of information services, it may be helpful to
create an additional profile to use those services. If more than one
person uses the same computer, each person should have a separate

232 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Background Considerations

profile to keep personal items secure. Tracer Summit uses the profile
to send alarms to the mail server.
• Set up e-mail message forwarding—This includes setting up the
call center and recipient in the Tracer Summit software. While the
facility is unattended, you can send cell phone pager alarms that orig-
inate from sites as e-mails to on-call recipients.
• The call center forwarding schedule displays the times when the
call center forwards alarms to various recipients by means of
their e-mail addresses. A typical schedule for alarm forwarding is
between 5 p.m. to 8 a.m., Monday to Friday, and all day on week-
ends and holidays.
• The recipient on-call schedule is the time when an on-call recipi-
ent receives the e-mails. In a typical work situation, recipients
are on-call on a rotating basis. When setting up a call center,
make sure that the unattended hours of the facilities are covered.
• In Figure 205 on page 234, the Select Sites/Groups and Event
Classes/Priorities boxes represent steps in which you specify
which sites or groups and what alarms need to be forwarded.
Besides sites and groups, you can schedule alarms for BCU event
classes and alarm priorities for Tracer 100 or Tracker panels.

IMPORTANT
Your workstation must be set up as an event receiver in BCU sites, with
a telephone number defined in Tracer 100 and Tracker sites, and other
requirements for alarms must be satisfied, as described in Chapter 6,
“Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 233
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Figure 205. Setting Up Message Forwarding Flowchart

Set Up Set up mailbox on server

E-mail Set up e-mail account profile on client
Services (Tracer Summit workstation)

Set Up Set up call center’s recipient schedule

Schedules Set up recipient on-call schedule

Select Sites/
Groups

Select Alarm
Priorities

Setup
Complete

Preliminary Issues to Consider before Creating a Call

Center
Before creating message-forwarding call centers, review the following
information:
• Each call center has its own forwarding schedule. Therefore, you
must create multiple call centers when the same recipient needs to
receive alarms from specific event classes or priorities on different
schedules.
• When you route e-mails to a pager service, the length of the message
might be truncated to meet the specifications of the cell phone pager.
The Tracer Summit software sends the message in such a way that
the most important information is carried in the first part of the mes-
sage. How the message is truncated depends on the pager company
and its policies.
For example, the following message: “TRANEBAS: 12/31/01
11:59AM, 1234567890, Ack Reqd, UCM Diagnostic, Ipak-1”

234 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Background Considerations

might be truncated to: “TRANEBAS: 12/31/01 11:59AM,

1234567890.”
• Message forwarding information is stored only in the workstation
where you create it. This information never goes to the BCU or to
other workstations on the site. Therefore, configure each workstation
with its own alarm forwarding schedules.
• Some mail servers require that you be logged in to the client worksta-
tion operating system to communicate with the server. If your mail
server requires this, then you must meet this requirement before and
after setting up the message forwarding application.
To access message forwarding and call center features, your security set-
tings must include the following:
• You have security access to the System Options editor to select an e-
mail profile.
• In client and server side e-mail services you have an e-mail profile set
up. This profile is related to the address that appears in the From
field in your e-mails.
• You have security access to the Message Forwarding editor (see
“Assigning Access to Applications” on page 141).

Call Centers and Groups

You cannot create or edit groups from within the Message Forwarding
editor. If you need to forward alarms from groups, then you must have the
Enterprise Management package installed and defined groups along with
their site members in Group Configuration. For more information about
group configuration, see Chapter 13, “Creating Groups of Sites”.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 235
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Accessing the Message Forwarding

Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Call
Center dialog box displays (see Figure 206).

Figure 206. Select Call Center Dialog Box

2. Select the desired call center.

3. Click OK. The Message Forwarding editor displays (see Figure 207).

Figure 207. Message Forwarding Editor Screen Recipient Schedule

Screen

236 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

Setting Up Call Centers and Message

Forwarding
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management pack-
age installed, you can set up call centers and advanced message forward-
ing for selected users, as well as to schedule when e-mails are sent and
the types of alarms for which e-mails are sent.
To create a call center you:
• Add recipients and schedule when they should receive e-mails on the
Recipient Schedule screen
• Schedule the on-call hours of the facility on the Forward Schedule
screen
• Define the sites and/or groups for which the e-mails should be sent on
the Sites screen
• Define the alarm classes for which you want e-mails sent to recipients
on the Event Classes screen

Registering E-Mail Profiles

When you first access message forwarding, you must register your user
profile. A user profile is a group of settings that define how the mail
server is set up for a particular user. For example, a profile may include
access to a mailbox on Microsoft Exchange Server and specify that the
Outlook Address Book appears in the Address Book dialog box.
To register e-mail profiles:
1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Profile
dialog box appears. One or more user profiles display in the Profile
list box.
If the Tracer Summit software does not detect an already existing
user profile, an error dialog box appears. If a profile is loaded but no
profile is registered, the software prompts you to select a profile.
2. Select a profile.
3. Click OK. The Select Call Center dialog box appears.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 237
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Creating a Call Center

When you create a call center you add recipients who will receive alarm
e-mails during on-call hours. On the Recipient Schedule screen you spec-
ify the days and dates when each recipient should receive e-mails from
Tracer Summit.

Note:
To save a call center you must first add recipients and schedule
when they should receive e-mails.

To create a call center:

1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Call
Center dialog box displays.
2. Click New.
3. Type the call center name in the Select Call Center dialog box.
4. Click OK. The Message Forwarding editor launches. The name of the
call center displays at the top of the screen.
5. To add recipient(s), click the Recipient Schedule tab. The Recipient
Schedule screen appears (see Figure 208).
6. Click Add. The address book of the e-mail program, such as an Out-
look Address Book, displays.
7. Select one or more e-mail addresses to which to send alarms.
8. Click OK. The names of the recipients display in the list on the Recip-
ient Schedule screen (see Figure 208).

Figure 208. Recipient Schedule Screen

238 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

Scheduling When Recipients Receive E-mails

Next, schedule when recipients receive e-mails. Each recipient can have a
different schedule when they are on-call.
To schedule when recipients receive e-mails:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Recipient Schedule
tab.
2. Select the name of a recipient in the list.
3. Click the Schedule button. The Recipient Schedule dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 209).
4. Select the schedule start date, how often the e-mail should be sent
(once or daily), and how often the schedule should occur (weekly, daily
or monthly).
For example, in Figure 209 the recipient schedule is set up to: specify
May 27, 2003 as the Start Date; indicate the day of the week the e-
mail is sent; repeat every two weeks.

Figure 209. Recipient Schedule

5. Click OK to save the schedule. The recipient’s name, e-mail address,

start date, and schedule display in the recipients Schedule screen.
6. Click Save to store the recipients and their e-mail schedules to the
database.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 239
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Testing E-mail Forwarding

Use this procedure to verify that Tracer Summit can send an e-mail to the
recipients selected in the list of the current call center.
To send the e-mail, the Tracer Summit software:
• Uses the profile that is registered with Tracer Summit
• Uses the mailbox that is set up on the mail server. IS sets up the pro-
file to access this mailbox
To test e-mail forwarding:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Recipient Schedule
tab.
2. Select the recipient(s) that you want to receive the test e-mail.
3. Click the Test Email button. The Tracer Summit software sends the
test e-mail.
The e-mail contains the following message: “This is a test of the Test
Email button.”
4. Verify with the recipients that they received an e-mail message from
Tracer Summit.

Checking the Schedule of Existing Recipients

Use this procedure to check the e-mail forwarding schedules of recipients.
You can also use it to make sure that a date for receiving e-mails is cov-
ered by one or more recipients.
To check the schedule for existing recipients:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Recipient Schedule
tab.
2. Select one or more recipients in the grid whose message forwarding
schedules you want to check.
3. Click the Check Schedule arrow next to the Check Schedule button
and select the date you want from the calendar (see Figure 210).

Figure 210. Check Schedule Calendar

4. Click the Check Schedule button. A dialog box displays indicating if

the selected recipient receives e-mail on the date you specified in step
3.

240 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

5. Click OK.

Creating a Message Forwarding Schedule

You can regard the Forward Schedule as representing the times when a
facility is open and not open. When the facility is not open, you want to
forward alarm messages to on-call recipients.
On the Forward Schedule screen, specify the operating hours of the call
center. Define the start time when e-mails should be sent and the end
time.
For example, a normal work day is from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. These are the
times when people are on-site. After-hours is from 5 p.m. to 8 a.m. During
after-hours, the individuals designated to receive e-mails on the Recipient
Schedule screen will receive any alarm messages generated.
To schedule when e-mails are sent:
1. From the Message Forwarding Editor, click the Forward Schedule tab.
2. In the schedule, click the cell that corresponds to the time and day
you want the e-mail forwarding schedule to start. Select Set Start
from the pop-up menu.
3. Click in the cell when you want the schedule to end and select Set
End (see Figure 211 on page 242).
The cell set as Set Start is bright green and is labeled Start. The cell
set as Set End is red and is labeled End. The cells in between these
two cells are blue.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 241
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Figure 211. Forward Schedule Screen

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to complete the schedule for any remaining

weekdays and weekends.
5. Click Save.

Setting a Holiday Schedule

Setting up a holiday schedule is a two-step process. First, add holiday
dates to the Selected Dates list box. Then, go into each call center and
check the Send e-mail checkbox (see Figure 212 on page 243).
To add holidays:
1. Click the Edit button to display the Select Dates dialog box.
2. Select the holiday date from the calendar.
3. Click the Add Date button to add the date to Selected Dates list.
4. Click Save to save the holiday date to the list.
5. Click Okay to return to the editor.

Note:
It doesn’t matter which call center you are in when you add
dates to the list, the date will become a holiday for all call cen-
ters. However, each call center can decide whether to observe
the holiday dates or not, depending on whether the Send e-mail
checkbox is checked or unchecked.

242 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

Figure 212. Holiday Calendar

Send e-mail checkbox

To remove holidays
1. Click the Edit button to display the Select Dates dialog box.
2. From the Selected Dates list, select the holiday you want to remove.
3. Click the Remove Date button to delete the date.
4. Click Save to save your changes.
5. Click Okay to return to the editor.

Note:
The holiday date is removed from all call centers.

To send e-mail on holidays:

◆ To have e-mail automatically sent on holidays, check the send e-mail
check box (See Figure 212).

Note:
If you check this box, the call center will send e-mail on all holi-
days displayed in the list box. If you leave this box unchecked,
no e-mail will be sent on any of the holidays.

To disable sending e-mail on holidays:

◆ Clear the send e-mail checkbox. The holiday schedule is disabled.

Note:
Disabling the holidays only applies to the currently open call
center. To disable holidays for other call centers, open each one
individually and repeat step 1 above.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 243
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Forwarding Alarms at All Times

You can have e-mails for alarm events sent at all hours of the day. This
may prove useful when you need to override the call center schedule.
To forward alarms at all times:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Forward Schedule tab.
2. Click the Forward At All Times check box (see Figure 213).

Figure 213. Forward at All Times Check Box

When alarms are forwarded at all times:

• Any previously specified forwarding schedule is overridden and
e-mails are sent 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• The schedule grid is unavailable.
• The Call Center Holiday list box is unavailable.

244 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

Selecting a Site/Group from Which Alarms Are Sent

If you have the Tracer 100/Tracker Communication, Building Manage-
ment, or Enterprise Management package installed, after you define
recipients and set up schedules, you need to select the sites or groups
from which e-mails for alarms will be sent. You can only select alarms for
groups of sites when you have installed the Enterprise Management
package (see Chapter 13, “Creating Groups of Sites”).
To select sites or groups that forward messages:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Sites tab (see
Figure 214).
2. Select the site in the Available list that you want to add to the
Selected list.
These are the sites for which alarm messages will be sent as e-mails
to recipients.
• For consecutive groups or sites, click on the first group or site,
then hold down the Shift key and click on the next one.
• Otherwise, click on the first group or site, then hold down the Ctrl
key and click on each additional one.
3. Click Add.

Figure 214. Message Forwarding – Sites Screen

4. Click Save.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 245
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Selecting Alarm Event Classes

Use this procedure to select the alarm event classes for which you want
e-mails sent to recipients.
To select alarm event classes:
1. From the Message Forwarding Editor, click the Event Classes tab (see
Figure 215).
2. Click the alarm class check boxes for which you want Tracer Summit
to send an e-mail to recipients.

IMPORTANT
The event class names in the Event Classes screen do not update to
match the event class names that you might have entered in site con-
figuration (see “Example of User-Defined Event Classes” on page 82).

3. If you have Tracer sites selected, click the Tracer Priority alarms.
4. If you have Tracker sites selected, click the Tracker Priority alarms.

Figure 215. Event Classes Screen

246 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying Call Centers

Modifying Call Centers

Use the following procedures to modify call centers and their schedules.

Deleting a Call Center

1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Call
Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a call center. The Message Forwarding editor displays.
3. From the File menu, select Delete Call Center. The Select Call Center
dialog box displays.
4. Select the call center you want to delete.

Note:
If you try to delete a call center that is currently open, a warn-
ing message displays. It explains that the editor will shut down
if you delete the call center.

5. Click OK. The call center is deleted from the database.

6. Click Save.
7. Click Save.

Registering with a Different E-mail Profile

◆ For more information on how to register a different e-mail profile, see
“Selecting an E-mail Profile for Message Forwarding” on page 579.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 247
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

248 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 17

Creating Input/Output
Objects

Input objects are used to generate alarms. Output objects are used to con-
trol devices and maintain calculated values for CPL routines. There are
four types of input/output (I/O) objects:
• Analog input
• Binary input
• Analog output
• Binary output
The Tracer Summit system can simultaneously monitor hundreds of ana-
log and binary inputs and outputs from every part of a facility.

Note:
Properties of objects can be viewed and controlled directly from
a graphic or other application without the use of an I/O object.
I/O objects are value for:
• Alarming
• Tracking changes in the Event Log
• Sharing data with other BACnet devices.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 249
Creating Input/Output Objects

Creating an Analog Input

An analog input is a value such as a room temperature or an airflow pres-
sure generated by a sensor or device on the Tracer Summit system.

Naming an Input and Defining the Referencer

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Analog Input. The Select Analog Input dialog box displays (see
Figure 216).

Figure 216. Select Analog Input Dialog Box

3. Click New. The New Analog Input Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 217).

Figure 217. New Analog Input Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the input. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
5. Click OK. The Analog Input editor displays (see Figure 218 on page
251).

250 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating an Analog Input

Figure 218. Analog Input Editor

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 219).

Figure 219. Analog Input Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the input. For detailed information on

referencing a property, see Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit Con-
trols.”
8. Enter values for these Scaling fields:
• Multiplier
• Offset
9. Select a unit designator from the Units list.
10. Continue using the editor to set up alarming (see the section “Setting
Up Alarming” below) and to route alarms and to set security classes
(see the section “Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting an
Alarm Message” on page 253).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 251
Creating Input/Output Objects

Setting Up Alarming
You can set up four types of alarm scenarios for an analog input:
• Off Alarm Limits. The analog input causes an alarm based on the Off
Alarm Limits you enter. This is the default setting.
• On Alarm Limits. The analog input causes an alarm based on the On
Alarm Limits you enter.
• Referencer control of On or Off Alarm Limits. A referencer controls
the use of on or off limits.
• Disabled for no alarming.
The present value of an analog input is either inside or outside a range of
normal values that you define. If the present value is outside the range of
normal values, the analog input is either in a warning or alarm state. To
direct the system to ignore a warning or alarm state, disable the alarm.
The alarming limit setup can be based on a binary property status. For
example, you may want to allow a static pressure sensor input to alarm
only when the associated fan is running. In this case, you would set up
the fan status as the referencer for on/off alarm limits and set limits for
on and off conditions appropriately.
To prevent nuisance alarms on start up of equipment, use the On Delay
for Referencer field to set up a delay time before issuing an alarm on a
change in status from off to on.
To set up an alarm:
1. Click the Alarming tab from the Analog Input editor to display the
Alarming screen (see Figure 220).

Figure 220. Analog Input Editor Alarming Screen

2. Click Enable Alarming to make the rest of the fields on the screen
available for editing.

252 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating an Analog Input

3. Select On or Off from the On or Off Alarm Limits list, or select a prop-
erty reference (for detailed information on referencing a property, see
Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit Controls”).
4. If you selected On or Off Alarm Limits:
On Alarm Limits: Enter High Alarm, Low Alarm, High Warning,
Low Warning values in the On Alarm Limits Setup fields.
Off Alarm Limits: Enter High Alarm and Low Alarm values in the
Off Alarm Limits Setup fields.
5. If you referenced a property, enter values in these fields:
• High Alarm and Low Alarm (off limits)
• High Alarm and Low Alarm, High Warning and Low Warning (on
limits)
• On Delay for Referencer
6. Enter a Return to Normal Deadband value.
7. Enter a Minimum Time in Alarm Before Notification value.
8. Select a CPL Program to run from the program list (optional).

Note:
A CPL routine is called by an entry into alarm and a return out
of alarm.

Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting an Alarm

Message
To select where alarms and warnings are routed, set the entry/exit classes
using the Classes screen. You can also select an expanded message to dis-
play when an input enters an alarm state. (For information on expanded
messages, see Chapter 30, “Using the Graphics Editor.”)
To route an alarm or warning and select an alarm message:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Analog Input editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 221 on page 254).
The fields available on the classes screen depend upon your selection
in the On or Off Alarm Limits field on the Alarming screen. If you use
a referencer to determine the input state, both the Off Alarm Limits
and the On Alarm Limits fields are available.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 253
Creating Input/Output Objects

Figure 221. Analog Input Editor Classes Screen

2. Select an entry routing class for each type of alarm or warning.

3. Select an expanded message for each type of alarm or warning
(optional). (See Chapter 30, “Using the Graphics Editor”, for details
on creating expanded messages.)

Note:
The expanded message assigned in the Analog Input editor has
priority over the expanded message assigned on the Event
Classes tab in the Site Configuration editor. If the Entry Mes-
sage field for the Analog Input or Binary Input is set to None
then the Expanded Message field in Site Configuration will be
used.

4. Select an exit routing class for each type of alarm or warning.

5. Click the Security Classes button if you want to limit access to this
object using security classes. (See “Setting Security Classes” on
page 274.)

254 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Binary Input

Creating a Binary Input

Binary inputs are two-state inputs, such as on/off or alarm/normal. The
inputs are generated by momentary switches or standard (maintained)
switching devices.

Naming an Input and Defining the Reference

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Binary Input. The Select Binary Input dialog box displays (see
Figure 222).

Figure 222. Select Binary Input Dialog Box

3. Click New. The New Binary Input Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 223).

Figure 223. New Binary Input Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the input. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
5. Click OK to display the Binary Input editor (see Figure 224 on page
256).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 255
Creating Input/Output Objects

Figure 224. Binary Input Editor

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 225).

Figure 225. Binary Input Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the input. For detailed information on

referencing a property, see Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit Con-
trols”.
8. Enter text in the On State Label field. Use up to eight characters.
9. Enter text in the Off State Label field (close contact = On). Use up to
eight characters.
10. Click on Normal or Reversed to select the polarity for the input (close
contact = Off).
11. Continue using the editor to set up alarming (see the section “Setting
Up Alarming” below), to route alarms and warnings, and to set secu-

256 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Binary Input

rity classes, if desired (see the section “Routing an Alarm or Warning

and Selecting an Alarm Message” on page 253).

Setting Up Alarming
You can set up three types of alarm scenarios for a binary input:
• Alarming always enabled
• Enable/disable via referencer
• Feedback referencing
Binary inputs have two states. They can either be active (on) or inactive
(off). You define which of these states is the alarm state. You can also
choose to disable the alarm state. If you only want to process alarms
under certain conditions, select a binary referencer to determine whether
alarms are enabled or disabled.
If you want alarm processing to occur and the normal state of the binary
input can change dynamically (sometimes active is normal, sometimes
inactive is normal), specify a feedback reference to determine if the
binary input is in alarm. A feedback reference is a binary property in the
system that mirrors the state of the referenced property of the binary
input. If the present value of the binary input and the current value of the
feedback reference do not match, the binary input is in alarm.
For example, choose the binary output command for fan start/stop as a
feedback referencer for the fan status. If the two states do not match, an
alarm is generated.
To set up an alarm:
1. Click the Alarming tab from the Binary Input editor to display the
Alarming screen (see Figure 226).

Figure 226. Binary Input Editor Alarming Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 257
Creating Input/Output Objects

2. Click Enable Alarming to make the rest of the fields on the screen
available for editing.
3. Select Alarming Always Enabled, Enable/Disable Follows Referencer,
or Feedback Referencing.
• If you selected Alarming Always Enabled, select On or Off in the
Input Alarm State.
• If you selected Enable/Disable Follows Referencer or Feedback
Referencing, select a property reference. For detailed information
on referencing a property, see Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit
Controls”.
• If you selected Enable/Disable Follows Referencer, enter the num-
ber of minutes to delay in the Delay for Enable/Disable Refer-
encer field.
4. Enter a Minimum Time in Alarm Before Notification value.
5. Select a CPL Program to run from the program list (optional).

Note:
A CPL routine runs whenever the state changes. The routing
must determine the state in order to provide the necessary con-
trol.

Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting an Alarm

Message
To select where alarms and warnings are routed, set the entry/exit rout-
ing classes using the Classes screen in the Binary Input editor. You can
also select an expanded message to display when an input enters an
alarm state.
To route an alarm or warning:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Binary Input editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 227).

Figure 227. Binary Input Editor Classes Screen

258 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating an Analog Output

2. Select a routing class in the Entry Class field.

3. Select an expanded message in the Entry Message field (optional).
(See Chapter 30, “Using the Graphics Editor”, for details on creating
expanded messages.)

Note:
The expanded message assigned in the Binary Input editor has
priority over the expanded message assigned on the Event
Classes tab in the Site Configuration editor. If the Entry Mes-
sage field for the Analog Input or Binary Input is set to None
then the Expanded Message field in Site Configuration will be
used.

4. Select a routing class in the Exit Class field.

5. Click the Security Classes button if you want to limit access to this
object using security classes. (See “Setting Security Classes” on
page 274.)

Creating an Analog Output

Analog outputs control devices on the Tracer Summit system, such as a
damper actuator or a water valve. The most common use of analog out-
puts is to provide setpoints for control of end devices. For example you can
send the same setpoint to all air handling units (AHUs) using a global
reference of the analog output object value.
Analog output values are generated either by application programs or are
entered manually.

Naming the Output and Defining the Reference

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Analog Output. The Select Analog Output dialog box displays
(see Figure 228 on page 260).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 259
Creating Input/Output Objects

Figure 228. Select Analog Output Dialog Box

3. Click New. The New Analog Output Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 229).

Figure 229. New Analog Output Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the output. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
5. Click OK to display the Analog Output editor (see Figure 230).

Figure 230. Analog Output Editor

260 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating an Analog Output

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 231).

Figure 231. Analog Output Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the output (using a referencer is

optional). For detailed information on referencing a property, see
Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit Controls.”
8. Enter values for these Scaling fields:
• Multiplier
• Offset
9. Enter values for these Output Range fields (the Minimum and Maxi-
mum values are interactive):
• Minimum
• Maximum
10. Select a unit designator from the Units list.
11. Click Save. If you use a referencer, the analog output is automatically
saved to the BCU where the referencer resides. If not, the Save dialog
box displays. Click the name of a BCU to save the output to.
After saving the analog output, you can save global references (see
“Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs” on
page 268).
12. Continue using the editor to enter overrides, to enter a control class,
or to set security classes, if desired (see the section “Entering a Con-
trol Class” on page 263).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 261
Creating Input/Output Objects

Setting Up Multi-State Values and Assigning Labels

Use the multi-state screen to define labels for the present values of a
multi-state object. The labels provide a textual description of the state of
the object on the simplified overrides screen (see Figure 232).

Figure 232. Simplified Overrides Screen—Textual descriptions (labels)

Multi-state labels
for the state of
the present value

To define labels for the present values of multi-state objects:

1. Click the Multi-State Analog Output check box. The Setup Mult-State
tab appears
(see Figure 233).

Figure 233. Setup Multi-State Tab

Multi-State tab

Multi-State Analog
Output check box

2. Click the Setup Multi-State tab to display the screen (see Figure 234
on page 263).

262 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating an Analog Output

Figure 234. Setup Multi-State Screen

3. In the Label fields, type a description of the state of the object based
on its present value (for example, Label 1 = Off).
4. In the corresponding value fields, type the present value for that state
(for example, Value 1 = 0.00).

Note:
All of the fields do not have to be used. However, Label 1 must
be used before Label 2, Label 2 must be used before Label 3.
Unused blank fields should have blank label fields and 0.00 in
the value fields.

5. Click Save to save your changes.

Entering a Control Class

To specify where change of state control notification is routed, set the con-
trol class in the Classes screen of the Analog Output editor.
To enter a new control class:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Analog Output editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 235 on page 264).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 263
Creating Input/Output Objects

Figure 235. Analog Output Editor Classes Screen

2. Select a routing class in the Control Class field.

3. To set security access for this object and define class access, click the
Security Classes button. (See “Setting Security Classes” on page 274.)

264 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Binary Output

Creating a Binary Output

Tracer Summit uses binary outputs to turn devices on and off or to send a
calculated binary output. Typically, a binary output is used as an inter-
lock on enable/disable. Follow the steps in this section to control UCM
outputs or to maintain calculated output values within the system.

Naming the Output and Defining the Reference

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Binary Output. The Select Binary Output dialog box displays
(see Figure 236).

Figure 236. Select Binary Output Dialog Box

3. Click New to display the New Binary Output Name dialog box (see
Figure 237).

Figure 237. New Binary Output Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the output. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
5. Click OK to display the Binary Output editor (see Figure 238 on page
266).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 265
Creating Input/Output Objects

Figure 238. Binary Output Editor

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 239).

Figure 239. Binary Output Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the output (optional). For detailed

information on referencing a property, see Chapter 4, “Using Refer-
encer Edit Controls”.
8. Enter text in the On State Label field. Use up to eight characters.
9. Enter text in the Off State Label field. Use up to eight characters.
10. Select On or Off in the Default Value field.
11. Click Normal or Reversed to select the polarity for the output.
12. Enter number of minutes in these On/Off Time fields to avoid exces-
sive cycling of equipment:

266 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Binary Output

• Minimum On Time
• Minimum Off Time
13. Click Save. If you used a referencer, the binary output is automati-
cally saved to the BCU where the referencer resides. If not, the Save
dialog box displays. Click on the name of a BCU to save the output to.
After saving the binary output, you can save global references (see
“Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs” on
page 268).
14. Continue using the editor to enter overrides, to enter a control class,
or to set security classes, if desired (see the section “Entering a Con-
trol Class” on page 267).

Entering a Control Class

To specify where change of state control notification is routed, set the con-
trol class in the Classes screen of the Binary Output editor.
To enter a new control class:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Binary Output editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 240).

Figure 240. Binary Output Editor Classes Screen

2. Select a routing class in the Control Class field.

3. To set security access for this object and define class access, click the
Security Classes button. (See “Setting Security Classes” on page 274.)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 267
Creating Input/Output Objects

Setting Up Global References for

Analog or Binary Outputs
Use global references to assign an analog or binary output to multiple
objects on the system at one time. For example, you can send the same
occupied setpoint to all air handlers in the system or enable/disable the
economizer for the units.
To set up global references:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Analog or Binary Output editor to dis-
play the Setup screen (see Figure 241).

Figure 241. Analog Output Editor Setup Screen

Note:
The Global Referencers button is not available until the analog
or binary output has been saved (click the Save button).

2. Click Global References to display the Global Referencers dialog box

(see Figure 242 on page 269).

268 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs

Figure 242. Global Referencers Dialog Box

3. In the Object Type field, select the type of object. Select only one
object type.
4. In the Property field, select the property you want this object to con-
trol.
5. In the Available Names field, select the name(s) of specific object(s).
6. Click Save Selections. The Global References dialog box closes and
the Setup screen displays.

Note:
Once a global reference has been set up it can not be deleted
from this editor. In order to delete the reference you must go the
the editor for each object that has been referenced to this point.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 269
Creating Input/Output Objects

Modifying an Input/Output
You can modify any parameter of an input or output at any time.
To modify an input/output:
1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select the type of input or output you wish to modify. The Select Input
dialog box (specific to the item you chose) displays.
3. Click the name of the input or output you want to modify.
4. Click OK. The editor for the selected input or output displays.
5. Click the appropriate tab at the top of the editor to display the screen
that you want to modify.

Note:
Be careful when changing the name of an input or output. A
name change will affect any CPL routine that uses the input or
output. (See Chapter 25, “Custom Programming Language”.)

270 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Overriding an Analog or Binary Output

Overriding an Analog or Binary Output

When you override analog and binary values from the Overrides tab of a
UCM editor, you perform the override using the advanced Override dialog
box. However, Trane encourages you to define your default priority level
in Site Security and override from graphics by using the simplifed over-
rides dialog box (see “Setting Up the Simplified Override Dialog Box” on
page 172).
From the advanced override dialog box you can:
• Release control at the specific priority
• Change the present value at a specific priority

Note:
You will need access to change the priority level. Priority con-
trol ranges from 1 (highest) to 16 (lowest). The command with
the highest priority controls the object. To take control off, you
must select the Release Control option button. Then the next
highest priority commands the object.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 271
Creating Input/Output Objects

Releasing Control to Another Object

1. Click the Overrides tab from the Analog or Binary Output editor (see
Figure 243).

Figure 243. Binary Output Editor Overrides Screen

2. Click the Override button to display the advanced Overrides dialog

box (see Figure 244).

Figure 244. Override Dialog Box

3. Click the Release Control option button.

4. In the At Priority field, select the priority level that you want to
release control to.

Note:
Control priorities identify the levels at which Tracer Summit
applications control an object. Normally, control priorities are
set to the Tracer Summit defaults. For information on setting
up control priorities for non-Trane BACnet devices, see Chapter
37, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices.”

272 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Overriding an Analog or Binary Output

5. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Changing the Present Value

1. Click the Overrides tab from the Analog or Binary Output editor
2. Click the Override button to display the Overrides dialog box (see
Figure 245).

Figure 245. Override Dialog Box

3. Click the Change Value To option button.

4. For an analog output, enter a new value in the Change Value To field.
For a binary output, select a new value from the list provided.
5. In the At Priority field, select the priority level that you want to give
control to.
6. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Note:
The Priority Array list shows all the applications and priorities
that are currently commanding the object. The Priority Array
and the Present Value fields show what the object is controlled
to, when it was controlled last, and what application or user is
controlling it.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 273
Creating Input/Output Objects

Setting Security Classes

Tracer Summit has 20 security classes you can set up to segment a site,
based on whatever parameters you want. For example, a class might
define a building, a floor, a chiller plant, inside, or outside. The class des-
ignations are used to group objects for security control. (See Chapter 9,
“Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System”). The Security Classes
button on the Classes screen in the input/output editors allows you to con-
trol which classes have access to the input or output you are creating or
modifying.
To set security classes:
1. Click the Classes tab from the input or output editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 246).

Figure 246. Binary Output Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog

box (see Figure 247 on page 275).

274 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting an Input/Output

Figure 247. Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to allow or deny access. A
check in the field allows access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

Deleting an Input/Output
To delete an input or output, use the Delete Object utility in the Tools
menu (see Chapter 39, “Deleting Objects and Sites”).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 275
Creating Input/Output Objects

276 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 18

BCU Inputs and Outputs

This chapter describes input and output options available for the model
BMTX and the model BMTW BCUs.

BMTX Binary Inputs

The BMTX BCU has two binary inputs hardwired onto the main board.
You can use these inputs for:
• Timed override inputs
• Failure inputs
• Latching inputs
• Pulse meter inputs.
These properties can be referenced from the Select Properties dialog box
by selecting Type, Name, and Property (see Figure 248) .

Figure 248. Select Property dialog box

referenced property

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 277
BCU Inputs and Outputs

Each of the two binary inputs has four properties with different functions:
• Binary Input [01] —Timed override (TOV). You can use this property
as a TOV trigger for the TOV Application or a TOV CPL routine. This
property is on if the Binary Input has been closed at any time in the
last two minutes.
• Binary Input [02]—Fail. You can use this property to monitor status
for alarms. This property is on if the Binary Input has not been closed
at any time the last two minutes.
• Binary Input [03]—Latch. This property will be on if the Binary Input
has been closed any time in the last two minutes. You can monitor
momentary inputs with this property.
• Binary Input [04]—Status. This property shows the current state of
the Binary input point. The input must remain continuously on or off
for at least two seconds before the property will change.

Pulse Meter Input

You can use the BMTX binary input for a pulse meter input. The inputs
have analog properties even though they are binary inputs. These analog
properties, typically used in calculation objects for Energy Management,
can be referenced by choosing Type, Name, and Property (see Figure 249).

Figure 249. Referencing Analog Properties

referenced property

Each input has four analog properties with different functions:

• Analog Input [01]—Rate. This is the rate of pulses per minute. The
BCU calculates the rate by looking at the last ten pulses and averag-
ing the time between pulses for all the pulses that occurred within
the last minute. Pulses older than one minute are ignored.

278 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 BMTW I/O Module

• Analog Input [02]—Pulse count since last read. Note that each time
you read this property from the Tracer Summit Workstation the BCU
resets it to zero.
• Analog Input [03]—Pulse Total. This is the number of pulses since the
last power reset on the BMTX. This property has a maximum value of
999,999,999, if it exceeds this number it reverts to 0.
• Analog Iput [04]—Not Used. This property has a value of 0.

BMTW I/O Module

The BMTW BCU uses the input/output (I/O) module which is an optional
board on the BCU that facilitates connection of common points by adding
five universal inputs (UIPs) and one binary output (BOP) to the BMTW
BCU.
The I/O module’s inputs are referenced by analog input (AIP) and binary
input (BIP) objects for alarm processing and limit checking. The one
binary output can be used to control equipment or provide status infor-
mation, such as an alarm condition.
The I/O module is supported by a BCU I/O module object that you create
in Tracer Summit. Each I/O module object has an editor that allows you
to configure the UIP type to match the hardware jumper selection. Both
hardware jumper selection and software configuration set the UIP type.
This section covers the following tasks:
• Creating a BCU I/O module object
• Configuring UIPs
• Setting up alarm and security classes
• Creating analog and binary input/output objects
These tasks must be performed in order to create and set up the neces-
sary objects that will provide units, calculation, and alarming to the
desired input.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 279
BCU Inputs and Outputs

Creating the BCU I/O Module Object

The following steps show you how to create a BCU I/O module object from
the Setup menu’s Site Configuration option. You can create a BCU I/O
module object while configuring a site, or you can add it to a specified
BCU.

Note:
The BCU I/O module buttons are only selectable for standard
and high capacity BCUs.

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration (see Chapter 6, “Con-
figuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”).
2. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab to display
the Devices screen (see Figure 250):

Figure 250. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

• If the appropriate BCU is listed, select it. Then click the Edit
Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 251 on page 281).
• If the appropriate BCU is not listed, click the Create Device but-
ton. The Create New Device dialog box displays (see “Configuring
Tracer Summit BCU Sites” on page 33).

280 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating the BCU I/O Module Object

Figure 251. Edit Device Dialog Box

3. Click the BCU I/O module Add button to display the Create New BCU
I/O module dialog box (see Figure 252).

Figure 252. Create New BCU I/O Module Dialog Box

4. In the Name field, enter a name for the BCU I/O module. Use a maxi-
mum of 32 characters.
You must enter a name before you can save the new BCU I/O module
object. You can modify the name at any time from the Edit BCU I/O
module dialog box. You can access the dialog box from the BCU I/O
module Edit button. Click OK to return to the main screen.
5. To define security access, click the Security Classes button to display
the Security Classes dialog box (see “Setting Security Access for the
BCU I/O Module” on page 286).
6. Click OK to return to the dialog box.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 281
BCU Inputs and Outputs

7. Click OK to the Devices screen, then click Save.

Setting Up Universal Inputs

After creating the BCU I/O module object in Site Configuration, set up
the universal inputs (UIPs). The UIPs are set up in two places: on the
BCU I/O module board on the BCU and in the Tracer Summit software.
Both hardware jumper selection and software configuration selection set
the UIP function type.

Accessing the BCU I/O Module Editor

1. From the Setup menu select Unit Controllers, then select BCU I/O
Module. The BCU I/O module editor displays (see Figure 253).

Figure 253. BCU I/O Module Editor

282 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Universal Inputs

Setting Up the BCU I/O Module UIPs

Note:
After setup is complete, it is necessary to create and set up sys-
tem objects to reference the inputs, see “Setting Up System
Objects” on page 284.

1. From the BCU I/O Module editor, click the Setup tab to display the
Setup tab screen (see Figure 254).

Figure 254. BCU I/O Module Editor Setup Screen

2. Configure the input Type fields (1-5) to match the BCU I/O module
board UIP jumper settings.
If the device is a pulse meter, enter the correction factor in the Pulse
Multiplier field (see “Calculating the Pulse Multiplier” on page 284).
This field is unavailable for other input types.
If the device is an analog type (voltage, current, or thermistor), the
Disable Analog Failure check box is available:
• Check this box to disable the alarm within 2% of the range end
points.
• Leave this box unchecked to alarm on endpoint conditions.

Note:
Verify input type settings with the BCU I/O module UIP jump-
ers.

3. See “Setting Up System Objects” on page 284 for creating and setting
up system objects to reference the inputs.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 283
BCU Inputs and Outputs

Calculating the Pulse Multiplier

The pulse multiplier value is the desired consumption amount per contact
closure. This value is a constant scaling factor that is applied to both the
accumulator count and rate calculation. The multiplier is used only in
constant consumption applications, such as, water and electricity. Under
constant pressure and temperature conditions, a constant pulse multi-
plier value may be used for gas consumption. Refer to the manufacturer’s
equipment specification for the proper value on consumption amount per
pulse. The desired consumption amount is the consumption amount per
pulse multiplied by a conversion factor (desire units/manufacturer’s
equipment units).

Setting Up System Objects

After setting up the UIPs in the BCU I/O Module editor, create analog
input (AIP) and binary input (BIP) objects that reference the BCU I/O
module’s input object properties. The AIP and BIP objects read and
manipulate raw data from the BCU I/O module, providing real values
that are used in alarm processing and other applications (for example,
CPL programming, graphics, reports, and calculations).

Note:
The AIP and BIP objects must be saved in the same BCU as the
BCU I/O module object.

Setting Up Analog Inputs

Creating an analog input object is the only way to handle conversions,
alarms, and CPL triggers for analog and pulse accumulator values.
To create an analog input object, see “Creating Input/Output Objects” on
page 249. Also refer to the steps below.
On the Analog Input editor Setup screen:
1. Select a property reference for the input.
2. Enter the multiplier and offset scaling values (for thermistor type
inputs, use the default value).
3. Select the correct unit designator.
On the Analog Input editor Alarming screen:
◆ Set up alarm limits.

Setting Up Pulse Metered Inputs

Setting up pulse metering inputs involve creating a Meter Totalization
calculation object and alarm limits that reference the BCU I/O module’s
pulse accumulator input.

284 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up System Objects

Creating a Calculation Object

In order to create a calculation object, you must first define the calcula-
tion type. Select Meter Totalization for the calculation type.
To create a new calculation object, see Chapter 31, “Using the Calcula-
tions Editor.” Also, refer to the steps below.
On the Calculation editor Setup screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Pulse Accumula-
tor, Since Last[x], where x is the input number for the UIP.
2. Set the Conversion Factor field to 1.

Alarming on Metered Inputs

Alarming on metered inputs is accomplished by creating an analog input
object. (See Chapter 17, “Creating Input/Output Objects.”) Also, refer to
the steps below.
On the Analog Input editor Setup screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Pulse Accum-
rate[x], where x is the input number for the UIP.
2. Select the correct unit designator.
On the Analog Input Alarming tab:
◆ Set the On Delay For Referencer field to more than one minute.

Setting Up Binary Inputs

Binary input objects are used for polarity, units, and alarming assign-
ment for UIPs. To create a binary input object, see Chapter 17, “Creating
Input/Output Objects.” Also, refer to the steps below.
On the Binary Input editor Setup screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Binary In[x] or
Momentary Binary In[x], where x is the input number for the UIP.
2. Enter the Polarity.
3. Select the correct unit designator.
On the Binary Input editor Alarming tab:
◆ Set up the alarm limits.

Setting Up a Binary Output

Creating a binary output object (BOP) is the only way to control the BCU
I/O module’s binary output. To create a binary output object, see Chapter
17, “Creating Input/Output Objects”. Also, refer to the steps below.
On the Binary Output editor screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Binary Output.
2. Enter the Polarity.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 285
BCU Inputs and Outputs

3. Select the correct unit designator.

Setting Security Access for the BCU I/O Module

To specify where the BCU I/O module’s alarm messages are routed, set
the Alarm Class in the Classes screen.
To enter a new alarm class:
1. Click the Classes tab from the BCU I/O module editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 255).
2. Select an event class in the Alarm Class field.

Figure 255. BCU I/O Module Editor Classes Screen

3. To set security access for this object and define class access, click the
Security Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog
box (See Figure 256).

Figure 256. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

286 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up System Objects

4. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
5. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 287
BCU Inputs and Outputs

288 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 19

Chiller Plant Control

Chiller Plant Control is used to coordinate chillers and provide system

chilled water control. The program performs four main functions:
• It controls leaving water temperature by adding chillers as the build-
ing cooling load increases. It also calculates the chilled water setpoint
for each chiller.
• It recovers from failures by starting the next chiller in the sequence
immediately after a chiller is marked failed.
• It optimizes energy use by subtracting chillers when the cooling load
does not require them to be enabled. It also matches chillers to the
load.
• It equalizes runtime and wear on each chiller by using different rota-
tion schemes. It also provides a more reliable chiller plant by periodi-
cally exercising all of its components.
You can use the Chiller Plant editor or the Chiller Plant Control Status
displays to perform these functions. For information on the Chiller Plant
Control Status displays, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily Operations
guide and the Tracer Summit Chiller Plant Control Application Program,
BAS-APG004-EN.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 289
Chiller Plant Control

Accessing the Chiller Plant Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Click Chiller Plant Control. The Select
Chiller Plant dialog box displays (see Figure 257).

Figure 257. Select Chiller Plant Dialog Box

2. Select a chiller plant.

3. Click OK. The Chiller Plant editor displays (see Figure 258).

Figure 258. Chiller Plant Editor

290 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New Chiller Plant

Creating a New Chiller Plant

To create a new chiller plant, you follow these steps:
• Create chiller objects in the Site Configuration editor (for more infor-
mation, refer to Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”)
• Open and name a new chiller plant (as described in this section)
• Set up the chiller plant system (see “Setting Up the Chiller Plant Sys-
tem” on page 292)
• Modify startup settings (see “Modifying Startup Settings” on
page 293)
• Modify subtract settings (see “Modifying Subtract Settings” on
page 294)
• Add and set up chiller objects (see “Adding Chiller Objects to the
Chiller Plant” on page 295 and “Setting Up Individual Chiller
Objects” on page 297)
• Set up the chiller UCM objects (see “Chiller UCM Setup” on page 298)
• Set up security for the chiller plant (see “Routing Alarms and Events
and Setting Security Access” on page 298)

Note:
The settings described for the Chiller Plant editor screens are
required entries. (For more information, refer to Tracer Summit
online help.) Verify that default entries on all screens of the edi-
tor are correct for the chiller plant.

To create a new chiller plant:

1. From the Setup menu, select Chiller Plant Control. The Select Chiller
Plant dialog box displays.
2. Click New. The New Chiller Plant Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 259).

Figure 259. New Chiller Plant Name Dialog Box

3. Enter the name of the Chiller Plant. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must enter a name
before you can save the new chiller plant. You can modify the name at
any time from the System screen of the Chiller Plant editor.
4. Click OK. The Chiller Plant editor displays.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 291
Chiller Plant Control

Setting Up the Chiller Plant System

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the System tab (see Figure 260).

Figure 260. Chiller Plant Editor System Screen

2. Reference the system Enable binary output object (refer to Chapter

17, “Creating Input/Output Objects”), or set the Chiller Plant Enable
referencer to On for continuous Chiller Plant operation.
3. Use the Supply Temperature referencer edit control to reference the
property for the system chilled water supply temperature.
4. Use the Return Temperature referencer edit control to reference the
property for the system chilled water return temperature.

292 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying Startup Settings

Modifying Startup Settings

The Startup screen of the Chiller Plant editor allows you to enable Ambi-
ent Temperature Lockout.
To modify startup settings:
1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Startup tab (see Figure 261).

Figure 261. Chiller Plant Editor Startup Screen

2. Click Enable to select Ambient Temperature Lockout.

3. Use the Sensor referencer edit control to reference the property for
the outside air temperature.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 293
Chiller Plant Control

Modifying Subtract Settings

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Subtract tab (see Figure 262).
The temperature-based subtract method is the default selection.

Figure 262. Chiller Plant Editor Subtract Screen—Temperature Method

2. Make a selection:
• To use the temperature-based subtract method, verify that the
Design Delta Temperature is correct for the Chiller Plant (the
system default is 10.0ºF).
• To use the flow-based subtract method, click Flow (see
Figure 263). Then use the Bypass Pipe Flow referencer edit con-
trol to reference the property for the Bypass Pipe Flow.

Figure 263. Chiller Plant Editor Subtract Screen—Flow Method

294 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Adding Chiller Objects to the Chiller Plant

Adding Chiller Objects to the Chiller

Plant
1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Chillers tab (see Figure 264).

Figure 264. Chiller Plant Editor Chillers Screen

2. In the Chiller Type list box, select the type of chiller to be added.
3. In the Chiller Name list, select the chiller name to be added.
4. Click Add to add the chiller object to the Chiller Plant Control mem-
ber’s list. The Add Chiller dialog box displays (see Figure 265).

Figure 265. Add Chiller Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 295
Chiller Plant Control

5. In the Index field, select the array index used to display individual
chillers. Use the default index number for the Chiller object.
6. In the Sequence Type field, select the chiller sequence type: Normal,
Base, Peak, or Swing.
Normal chillers rotate in a round-robin fashion (the last on is the first
off). A base chiller is always the first chiller on and the last chiller off.
A peak chiller is always the last chiller to run and the first chiller off.
A swing chiller is the first on and then alternates after that (see Table
6 on page 296 for an example of how a system having chillers of each
type are stepped on and off).

Note:
The PC Workstation validates these settings to eliminate dupli-
cate types for base, peak, or swing. One of each may be defined.
After a base, peak or swing chiller has been chosen, it is
removed from the drop-down list of member choices. There is no
limit to the number of normal chillers allowed.

Table 6. Chiller Sequence Type

Chiller 1 Chiller 3 Chiller 4 Chiller 5 Chiller 2

Step (Base) (Swing) (#1) (#2) (Peak)

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
3 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON OFF OFF
5 ON OFF ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON ON ON

7. Click OK to save the entry and to return to the Chillers screen.

296 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Individual Chiller Objects

Setting Up Individual Chiller Objects

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Chillers tab (see Figure 266).

Figure 266. Chiller Plant Editor Chillers Screen

2. In the member’s list, click the Index number of the chiller you want to
set up.
3. Click the Chiller Setup button to display the Chiller Setup dialog box
(see Figure 267).
Figure 267. Chiller Setup Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 297
Chiller Plant Control

4. If the temperature-based subtract method was selected on the Sub-

tract screen, highlight Chiller Design Capacity. If the Flow-based sub-
tract method was selected on the Subtract screen, highlight the
Chiller Design Flow.
5. Type a valid value in the Value field.
6. Click OK to save the entry and return to the Chillers screen.

Note:
Be sure all chillers in this Chiller Plant use the same units for
capacity (for example, tons, KWH, etc.), or flow (for example,
gpm, l/s, etc.).

Chiller UCM Setup

After the Chiller Plant Control application is set up, go to the UCM editor
for each of the chillers that were selected to be part of the chiller plant.
(From the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers.) For more information on
UCM editors, refer to Chapter 12, “Using UCM Editors”.
To set up a chiller UCM from the UCM editor:
1. Make sure the chilled water setpoint for each chiller references the
chiller chilled water setpoint property in the Chiller Plant Control
object. By editing the chilled water setpoint appropriately, you ensure
that each chiller is getting its chilled water setpoint from the Chiller
Plant Control object.
2. Make sure the current limit setpoint for each chiller references the
chiller current limit setpoint property in the Chiller Plant Control
object. By editing the current limit setpoint appropriately, you ensure
that each chiller is getting its current limit setpoint from the Chiller
Plant Control object.
3. Make sure the minimum On and Off time of each chiller is less than
the control feed back delay time. Under certain circumstances, mini-
mum On and Off times longer than the control feedback delay time
can cause the chiller to be needlessly marked as failed.

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting

Security Access
At the Chiller Plant editor’s Classes screen, you can assign alarm and
event routing and set security access for a chiller plant.

Defining Alarm and Event Routing

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Classes tab (see Figure 268 on
page 299).

298 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access

Figure 268. Chiller Plant Editor Classes Screen

2. In the Event Class field, select an appropriate class for routing

events.
3. In the Alarm Class field, select an appropriate class for routing
alarms.

Setting Security Access

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 269).

Figure 269. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 299
Chiller Plant Control

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to
the security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked,
permission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.

Deleting a Chiller Plant

To delete a chiller plant, use the Delete Objects utility from the Tools
menu. For more information, see Chapter 39, “Deleting Objects and
Sites”.

300 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 20

Area Control Application

Area control allows you to define the components and parameters of an

area so that the same comfort level can be maintained throughout the
defined space. An area may consist of a single office, a group of offices, a
large open warehouse, a manufacturing space, or any grouping you wish
to define.

Using Area Control

Use area control to perform these functions:
• Coordinate equipment operations, such as heating, cooling, ventila-
tion, and lighting within an area
• Integrate into time of day scheduling to allow for optimal start/stop,
night economizing, and lighting events
• Facilitate night heating and cooling operations
• Give a common look and feel to all parts of a defined area, regardless
of the equipment that serves it
Area control works in combination with the time of day scheduling, VAV
air systems, custom programming language applications, and timed over-
ride to perform the following functions:
• Optimal Start/Stop: Area Control calculates optimal start/stop val-
ues that control the startup and shutdown times of heating and cool-
ing devices so they run only as long as necessary to meet the required
temperature setpoints for the intended occupancy. You set the target
start/stop times in Time of Day Scheduling. Area Control calculates
the actual start/stop times required to meet the set targets.
• Night Heat/Cool: Area Control monitors the temperature of an area
when it is unoccupied and starts or stops heating or cooling to keep
the space within a pre-defined temperature range.
• Night Economizing: Area Control works with Time of Day Schedul-
ing to initiate the Night Economizing operation. Night Economizing
brings cool nighttime air inside the building to pre-cool the area
before occupancy starts. Using cool outside air to help cool a building
can reduce the load on the mechanical cooling equipment. Time of
Day Scheduling provides the window of opportunity in which Area
Control can use the night economizing mode. Area Control then deter-
mines if the outside air is cool enough to provide effective cooling.
• Ventilation Coordination: Area Control coordinates ventilation
with heating and cooling functions during hours of occupancy.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 301
Area Control Application

• Lighting Control: Area Control works with Time of Day Scheduling

to control lighting on and lighting off times to minimize operating
costs.
• Custom Programming Language: You can create Custom Pro-
gramming Language (CPL) routines that work with Area Control to
control such system activities as Priority Shutdowns and Demand
Limiting.
• Timed Override (TOV): Area control monitors the status of the On
and Cancel thermostat buttons of Trane SCC, VAV, and Voyager
equipment. Upon seeing a timed override request from a Trane zone
temperature sensor, Tracer Summit PC Workstation, or BCU opera-
tor display the area will change from its current state to occupied.

Area Mode/Member Modes

Table 7 on page 303 shows the standard operating behavior for binary
output members and UCM members for each area control operating
mode. For numeric entries (1, 2, 3, or 4), refer to the corresponding note.

302 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using Area Control

Table 7. Area Mode/Member Mode Chart

Binary Output Members UCM/CPL Members

Cool Heat Cool Heat

Area Mode Only Only H/C Vent Light Only Only H/C Vent Light
Heat Off 1 1 On 3 Occupy Occupy Occupy Occupy 3,5
Occupy

Cool 1 Off 1 On 3

Heat Off Off Off Off 3 Unoc- Unoc- Unoc- Unoc- 3,5
Unoccupy
cupy cupy cupy cupy
Cool Off Off Off Off 3

Heat Off On On Off 3 Unoc- Night Night Unoc- 3,5

*Night
H/C cupy H/C H/C cupy

Cool On Off On Off 3 Night Unoc-

H/C cupy
2 Off 2 Off 3 4 Unoc- 4 Unoc- 3,5
*Night Economize
cupy cupy
Heat Off 1 1 Off 3 Opti- Opti- Opti- Opti- 3,5
Optimal
Start mal mal mal mal

Cool 1 Off 1 Off 3 Start Start Start Start

Heat Off Off Off On 3 Opti- Opti- Opti- Opti- 3,5

Optimal
Stop mal mal mal mal

Cool Off Off Off On 3 Stop Stop Stop Stop

Off Off Off Off 3 Priority Priority Priority Priority 3,5

Priority Shutdown Shut- Shut- Shut- Shut-
down down down down
Notes:
1 On if the occupied temperature control is disabled, otherwise follows the occupied temperature control logic.
2 On if checked for night economizing.
3 Lighting members are controlled based on lighting control events in the Time of Day Scheduling application Binary output
members will be on for lighting start events and off for lighting stop events. UCM/CPL lighting members will be occupied for
lighting start events and unoccupied for lighting stop events.
4 Night economize if checked for night economizer. Night economize events must be scheduled in the Time of Day Scheduling
application.
5 A timed override initiated by a UCM area member, the Area Editor Overrides tab, or the timed override toolbar button will over-
ride the present value of the area to occupied and the lighting value to On. The priority level will be Timed Override.
* Night Heat/Cool and Night Economizing are sub-modes of the area’s unoccupied present value. The area itself remains unoc-
cupied while its members are placed in these modes.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 303
Area Control Application

Timed Override Control

Table 7 on page 303 does not show a timed override mode because timed
override only affects the present value of the area. When timed override is
in control, the present value shows “Occupied” at a priority level of timed
override.

Accessing the Area Control Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Area. The Select Area dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 270).

Figure 270. Select Area Dialog Box

2. Select an existing area you wish to edit.

3. Click OK to display the Area Control editor (see Figure 271).

Figure 271: Area Control Editor

304 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating an Area

Creating an Area
To create an area, you perform these tasks:
• Open and name the area (as described in this section)
• Assign members to the area (see “Assigning Members” on page 306)
• Define referencers for the indoor and outdoor air temperature sensor
fields (see “Setting Air Temperature Sensors” on page 308)
• Define parameters for night economizing (see “Setting Up Timed
Override” on page 310)
• Establish heating and cooling setpoints for the occupied and unoccu-
pied modes and occupied and unoccupied differentials (see “Setting
Setpoints and Differentials” on page 309)
• Assign event classes (see “Assigning Event Classes” on page 312)
• Define security access (see “Setting Security Access for the Area” on
page 313)
• If necessary, enable and set duration for timed override members (see
“Setting Up Timed Override” on page 310).
After you create an area, you should assign the Area object to a time of
day schedule (see Chapter 24, “Time of Day Scheduling”). In the time of
day schedule, you must include a night economizing value and a lighting
value in addition to the present value if you intend to use those functions
in area control.
To create an area:
1. From the Setup menu, select Area. The Select Area dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 272).

Figure 272. Select Area Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Area Name dialog box displays (see Figure 273
on page 306).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 305
Area Control Application

Figure 273. New Area Name Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the Area Name field. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must enter a name
before you can save the new area. You can modify the name at any
time from the Setup screen of the Area Control editor.
4. Click OK. The Area Control editor displays.
5. Click Save. The first time you save a new area, the Save Area dialog
box displays (see Figure 274).

Figure 274. Save Area Dialog Box

6. Click the name of the BCU in which you want the area to reside.
7. Click OK.

Assigning Members
1. From the Area Control editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 275).

Figure 275. Area Control Editor Members Screen

306 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Assigning Members

2. Select the member type from the Type list.

3. In the Name list, click on the member names that you want to add to
the area.
4. Click Add. The Select Area Member Type dialog box displays (see
Figure 276). The dialog box displays for each member you have
selected.

Figure 276. Select Area Member Type

Note:
You can assign a member to only one area. If you try to add a
member that is already assigned to another area, a message
indicates that the member is currently assigned to another
area. Do not assign a member to an area that also is an AHU or
vent only member of a VAV Air System.

5. Click on the arrow to select the member type from the list in the
Member Type field. Member types include Heating, Cooling, Heating/
Cooling, Lighting, and Ventilation.
6. Click the Night Economize check box if you want to use this member
for night economizing. The only member types that you can check for
night economizing are Cooling Only and Heating/Cooling.
7. Click the Timed Override (TOV) initiator checkbox to allow timed
override requests to be initiated from Trane SCC (except for very
early versions of the ZN510/511), VAV and Voyager members. Timed
override requests for these members can be generated from a Trane
zone sensor, a Tracer Summit PC Workstation, or a BCU operator dis-
play.

Note:
The Enable Timed Override checkbox on the Setup tab also has
to be checked in order for the area to process requests and can-
cels from TOV members (see “Setting Up Timed Override” on
page 310).

8. Click OK to add the member to the Area Members list (see Figure 277
on page 308).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 307
Area Control Application

Figure 277. Area Members List

Setting Air Temperature Sensors

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 278).

Note:
The Heat/Cool Input field should generally be set to Auto. For
details, see Tracer Summit online help.

Figure 278. Area Control Editor Setup Screen

2. Enter a referencer in the Sensors Space Temperature field. Area Con-

trol uses the space temperature value, along with heating and cooling
setpoints, to determine the heating/cooling mode (provided the Heat/
Cool Input field is set to Auto). For detailed information on using ref-
erences, see Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit Controls.”
3. Enter a referencer in the Sensors Outdoor Air Temperature field.
Area Control uses the outdoor air temperature sensor for its Night
Economizing and Optimal Start/Stop operations.

308 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Setpoints and Differentials

Setting Setpoints and Differentials

Area Control uses occupied setpoints to:
• Calculate optimal Start/Stop rates for Time of Day Scheduling
• Determine whether the area should be in heating or cooling mode
• Maintain occupied temperature control (Binary Output heating or
cooling members only)
Area Control uses unoccupied setpoints to:
• Maintain unoccupied heating/cooling control
The differential values prevent equipment from cycling on and off too
quickly. Occupied differentials affect only Binary Output members that
are actively using the areas occupied heating/cooling setpoints. Unoccu-
pied differentials affect both Binary Output and UCM members that are
actively using the area’s unoccupied heating/cooling setpoints.
To set setpoints and differentials:
1. From the Area Control editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 279).

Figure 279. Area Control Editor Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 309
Area Control Application

2. To change the default setpoint values, enter referencers or new con-

stants in the following fields:
• Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint
• Occupied Cooling Setpoint
• Occupied Heating Setpoint
• Unoccupied Heating Setpoint
3. To change the default differential values, enter new constants in the
following fields:
• Occupied Differential
• Unoccupied Differential

Setting Up Timed Override

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Setup tab to display the Setup
screen. (see Figure 280).

Figure 280: Area-Setup Screen

2. Make sure the Enable Timed Override checkbox is checked to enable

timed override. The default setting for this checkbox is enabled.
3. In the Duration field, type the number of minutes you want timed
override active after someone makes a timed override request. Timed
override will remain active but not in control if:

310 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Night Economizing

• Another application controls the Area to occupied, such as a

schedule.
• Another application at a higher priority level controls the Area to
any mode.

Note:
You can edit this field when timed override is active, but the
change will not take effect until the next timed override start
request.

4. Use the Optional Request Source referencer to allow a timed override

request from a binary property. (For an example of how to use this
field, see the online help for the Area Editor–Setup tab.)
5. Click Save.

Note:
Area members in the member list on the Members tab must be
set up for timed override in order for the area to process
requests and cancels from TOV members (see, “Assigning Mem-
bers” on page 306).

Setting Up Night Economizing

To set up night economizing use the Area Control and the Time of Day
Scheduling (see Chapter 24, “Time of Day Scheduling”).
To enable or disable Night Economizing in Area Control:
1. From the Area Control editor, click the OSS - Night Econ. tab (see
Figure 281).

Figure 281. OSS - Night Economizing Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 311
Area Control Application

2. Use the Night Economizing Input field to enable or disable Night

Economizing manually, or select a referencer that will control the
enabling and disabling of Night Economizing. For detailed informa-
tion on referencing a property, see Chapter 4, “Using Referencer Edit
Controls.”
3. Enter a value in the Minimum Indoor/Outdoor Temperature Differen-
tial field. For Night Economizing to occur, the actual temperature dif-
ferential between the indoor and outdoor temperatures must be
greater than this number.

Assigning Event Classes

From the Classes screen, you can assign event classes for Control Class
events and Timed Override Events (see Figure 282). An event class is an
alarm category (system critical alarms, system log, no notification, etc.)
that receives an event message.
For control class events, Tracer Summit will generate messages to notify
the daily operator when the present value of the area changes state (for
example, changes from unoccupied to occupied).
For timed override events, Tracer Summit will generate messages to
notify the daily operator when a timed override has been requested, can-
celled, or expired for the area.
Assigning an event class categorizes the type of event message that is
routed to an event receiver (workstation, cell phone pager, BCU event log,
etc.).

Note:
In the Site Configuration editor, you can choose which event
receiver (workstation, cell phone pager, BCU event log, etc.)
gets messages from an event class. For more information on
choosing an event receiver, see “Setting Up Event Classes” on
page 81.

312 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Assigning Event Classes

To assign an event class:

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Classes tab.

Figure 282. Area Control Editor Classes Screen

2. Click the Control Class or Timed Override Class arrow to select an

event class.
3. Click Save.

Setting Security Access for the Area

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Classes tab (see Figure 282 on
page 313).
2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog
box (see Figure 283).

Figure 283. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 313
Area Control Application

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

Overriding an Area
When you override the present value and lighting value from the Over-
rides tab of a UCM editor, you perform the override using the advanced
Override dialog box. However, we encourage you to define your default
priority level in Site Security and override from graphics by using the
simplifed overrides dialog box (see “Setting Up the Simplified Override
Dialog Box” on page 172).
The Override function lets you manually override the present value and
lighting value of an area. It also allows you to make a timed override
request if timed override is enabled for the area.

Overriding the Present Value and Lighting Value

From the advanced override dialog box you can:
• Release control at the specific priority
• Change the present value at a specific priority

Note:
You will need access to change the priority level. Priority con-
trol ranges from 1 (highest) to 16 (lowest). The command with
the highest priority controls the object. To take control off, you
must select the Release Control option button. Then the next
highest priority commands the object.

314 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Overriding an Area

To access the Override dialog box:

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Overrides tab (see
Figure 284).

Figure 284. Area Control Editor Overrides Screen

2. Click the Override button. The Override dialog box displays (see
Figure 285).

Figure 285. Override Dialog Box

Releasing Control to Another Priority

1. From the Override dialog box, click the Release Control option.
2. In the At Priority field, select the priority level that you want to
release control to.

Note:
Control priorities identify the levels at which Tracer Summit
applications control an object. Normally, control priorities are
set to the Tracer Summit defaults. For information on setting
up control priorities for non-Trane BACnet devices, see Chapter
37, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices.”

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 315
Area Control Application

3. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Changing the Present Value

1. Click the Overrides tab from the Area Control editor.
1. Click the Override button to display the advanced Overrides dialog
box (see Figure 285 on page 315).
2. Select the new present value from the drop-down list.
3. Select the priority level to which you wish to give control in the At
Priority field.

Note:
The Priority Array list shows all the applications and priorities
that are currently commanding the object. The Priority Array
and the Present Value fields show what the object is controlled
to, when it was controlled last, and what application or user is
controlling it.

4. Click Apply to perform the override.

5. Click OK to close the Overrides screen.

Making a Timed Override Request

After timed override is set up for an area, you can initiate or cancel a
timed override request. (For setting up timed override for an area, see
“Setting Up Timed Override” on page 310.) Timed override must be
enabled in order for Area Control to process a request.
To start or cancel a timed override request:
1. From the Area Control editor, click the Overrides tab (see Figure 284
on page 315).
2. Click the TOV button to display the Timed Override dialog box (see
Figure 286)

Figure 286. Timed Override Dialog Box

316 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting an Area

3. In the Timed Override Request box, click the desired option.

4. Click OK to close the Timed Override screen and begin the request.

Note:
You can also get to this dialog box by clicking on the TOV but-
ton on the toolbar.

Deleting an Area
An area cannot be deleted from the Area Control editor. Use the Delete
Object function from the Tools menu to delete an Area object (see Chapter
39, “Deleting Objects and Sites”).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 317
Area Control Application

318 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 21

Comm5 VAV Air Systems

The Tracer Summit Comm5 VAV air system (VAS) coordinates a collec-
tion of variable-air-volume (VAV) boxes and an air-handling unit (AHU)
to create a coherent air system. VAS Comm5 provides the following
capabilities:
• Manages common space VAVs to prevent over-pressurization of the
ductwork.
• Controls the AHU to provide air when any VAV member is in the
occupied mode.
• Provides built-in ventilation and pressure optimization features.
• Provides air and water balancing features.
• Automates the commissioning and calibration of VAVs.
• Reports status information on a standard graphic, a standard report,
and the VAS Comm5 editor.
VAS Comm5 supports the following controllers:
• Tracer VV550/551 VAV controllers (recommended) and other control-
lers that support the VAV object of the LonMark® Space Comfort Con-
troller (SCC) profile
• Tracer AH540/541 and MP580/581 controllers and other controllers
that support the LonMark® Discharge Air Controller (DAC) profile
To create a VAV air system for Comm3 and Comm4 controllers, refer to
Chapter 22, “Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems.”

Note:
The optimization features work only with Tracer VV550/551
controllers. If you use other controllers, additional features of
VAS Comm5 may not be available depending on how the con-
trollers implement the SCC profile.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 319
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Accessing the VAS Comm5 Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air Systems, then select VAS
Comm5. The Select VAS Comm5 dialog box displays (see Figure 287).

Figure 287. Select VAS Comm5 Dialog Box

2. Select an existing VAS object and click OK. The VAS Comm5 editor
displays (see Figure 288).

Figure 288. VAS Comm5 Editor Status Screen

320 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

To create a Comm5 VAV air system, follow these steps:
• Create the object (see “Creating a VAS Comm5 Object” on page 321)
• Assign VAS members (see “Assigning VAS Members” on page 322)
• Assign common space VAVs (see “Assigning Common Space VAVs” on
page 324)
• Set up the VAV air system, including using duct pressure optimiza-
tion and ventilation optimization if necessary (see “Setting up a
Comm5 VAV Air System” on page 326)
• Set up global references if necessary (see “Setting up Global Refer-
ences” on page 328)
• Change security classes if necessary (see “Setting Security Access” on
page 329)

Creating a VAS Comm5 Object

1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air Systems, then select VAS
Comm5. The Select VAS Comm5 dialog box displays.
2. Click New. The New VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Name dialog box
displays (see Figure 289).

Figure 289. New VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Name Dialog Box

3. Type a name in the VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Name field. Make
the name as informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 charac-
ters. You can modify the name at any time from the Setup screen of
the VAV Air System editor.
4. Click OK. The Status screen of the VAS Comm5 editor displays.
5. You will not be able to save the VAS until you add at least one VAV
member (see “Assigning VAS Members” on page 322). After you have
done so, click Save. The first time you save a new area, the Save VAV
Air System dialog box displays (see Figure 290 on page 322).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 321
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Figure 290. Save VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Dialog Box

6. Select the name of the BCU in which you want the VAV Air System to
reside.
7. Click OK.

Note:
To delete a VAS object, use the Delete Objects utility from the
Tools menu. Refer to Chapter 39, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”

Assigning VAS Members

You can assign two types of VAS members:
• One air-handler member per VAS, which can be a
Tracer AH540/541, a Tracer MP580/581, or other DAC device
• VAV members, usually Tracer VV550/551 VAV controllers (although
you can use other SCC devices, some features of VAS Comm5 work
only with Tracer VV550/551 controllers)

Note:
VAS Comm5 supports two types of air-handler objects: Tracer
MP580/581 objects and DAC objects. The air-handler controller
must be configured as a DAC device.

To assign members:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 291
on page 323).

322 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

Figure 291. VAS Comm5 Editor Members Screen

2. To add VAV Members, click the Add Members button in the VAV
Members area. The VAV Members dialog box displays (see
Figure 292).

Figure 292. VAV Members Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 323
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

3. Select the VAVs you want to add to the VAS. To add more than one
VAV, hold down the Ctrl key and click each VAV you want to add.
All available Space Comfort Controllers (SCCs) display in the avail-
able VAVs list. Make sure that you select only SCCs configured as
VAVs (VAS Comm5 does not check this for you).
4. Click the Add button. The VAVs you want to add display in the
Selected VAVs list.
5. When you are done adding VAV Members, click OK.
6. To add the AHU member, click the Add Member button in the AHU
Member area. The AHU Member dialog box displays (see Figure 293).

Figure 293. AHU Member Dialog Box

7. In the Type list, select the type of air handler you want to add to the
VAS.
8. In the Name list, select the air handler you want to add to the VAS.
9. Click OK.

Assigning Common Space VAVs

Common space VAVs act much like pressure relief valves—the VAS con-
trols common space VAVs to make sure that there is always someplace for
the air to escape when the AHU is on. Make sure that you assign enough
common space VAVs to avoid over-pressurizing the ducts. If you have
other ways to relieve duct pressure, you may not need to use common
space VAVs.
Typically, common space VAVs should serve common areas, such as lob-
bies, hallways, and restrooms. You can, however, designate any VAV as a
common space VAV.
Follow these guidelines when assigning common space VAVs:
• Because common space VAVs act as pressure relief valves, do not set
their minimum flow setpoints to zero.
• A VAV cannot be a common space VAV if it is already a member of an
Area object.

324 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

• You cannot schedule common space VAVs because only the VAS can
control them. Common space VAVs still provide space temperature
control of the zone like any other VAV.
• If you decide to change a common space VAV back to a normal VAV,
you will have to manually release the priority level 9 control that VAS
has over the VAV. If you do not release the priority control, Area will
not be able control the VAV because it controls at a lower priority
level.
To assign common space VAVs:
1. In the VAV Members table on the Members screen, select the Com-
mon Space check boxes for the VAV members that you want to serve
as common space VAVs (see Figure 294).
2. Click Save to save your changes.

Figure 294. Assigning Common Space VAVs

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 325
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Setting up a Comm5 VAV Air System

Use the Setup screen to configure your Comm5 VAV air system. Click the
Help button or press F1 to access the online Help, which contains detailed
descriptions of each field.
To set up a Comm5 VAV air system:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 295).

Figure 295. VAS Comm5 Editor Setup Screen

2. In the AHU Startup Delay field, type the number of minutes for the
VAS to wait before starting the AHU.
The AHU startup delay should be at least the amount of time it takes
for the air valves in the common space VAVs to open to an acceptable
position. The startup delay prevents the ductwork from over-
pressurizing.
3. In the Common Space VAV Shutdown Delay field, type the number of
minutes for the VAS to wait before shutting down common space
VAVs after the AHU enters the unoccupied mode.
The shutdown delay should be at least the amount of time it takes the
AHU to go from full speed to a complete stop. To prevent the duct-
work from over-pressurizing, VAS Comm5 prevents its common space
VAVs from entering the unoccupied mode during the shutdown delay.
Note that Tracer VV550/551 controllers have an automatic three-

326 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting up a Comm5 VAV Air System

minute shutdown delay, which begins after the VAS shutdown delay
is over.
4. In the VAV Calibration field, select Recalibrate if you want to initiate
a recalibration of VAV members. You can also set up a referencer to a
binary output to trigger recalibration (for example, you can reference
a binary output and assign a schedule to the output). The BCU stag-
gers the calibration requests to prevent the ductwork from over-pres-
surizing.
Because Tracer VV550/551 calibrate automatically when they transi-
tion from occupied to unoccupied, use the VAV Calibration field only
for VAVs that are continually occupied.
5. Select the Allow VAV Aux Heat at Night check box to allow VAV aux-
iliary heat at night.
If you want to disable auxiliary heat at night to reduce energy usage,
clear this check box. For this feature to work, you must also reference
the Auxiliary Heat Control property of all VAV members to the VAS
Aux Heat Control Request property (you can do this globally by click-
ing the Set VAV References button on the Members screen as
described in “Setting up Global References” on page 328).
6. Select the Enable Duct Pressure Optimization check box if you want
to use duct pressure optimization. Type new setpoints if necessary. In
most cases, use the default settings for best performance. (Press F1
for a description of each field.)
The duct pressure optimization feature determines the optimal duct
pressure based on VAV air-valve positions. This optimization reduces
energy costs by ensuring that the AHU is working just hard enough
to satisfy the most-open VAV air valve. Duct pressure optimization
works only with Tracer VV550/551 controllers.
7. Select the Enable Ventilation Optimization check box if you want to
use ventilation optimization. Type new setpoints or set up referencers
if necessary. In most cases, use the default setpoints for best perfor-
mance. (Press F1 for a description of each field.)
The ventilation optimization feature manages the outdoor air intake
system to meet ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62-2001: Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. This standard specifies minimum ven-
tilation rates and indoor air quality to minimize the potential for
adverse health effects for occupants. Ventilation optimization works
only with Tracer VV550/551 controllers.
8. Click Save to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 327
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Setting up Global References

VAS Comm5 provides a way to set up references across the variable air
system. After you create the global references, you cannot undo them in
VAS Comm5. You can change the references only in the SCC editor for
each device (or globally in the Analog Output object editor).
To set up global references:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Members tab.
2. Click the Set VAV References button. The VAV References dialog box
displays (see Figure 296).
3. Select the global references you want to set up, then click OK. Some
options are not available until you assign an AHU member. (Click the
Help button or press F1 for a description of each option.)

Figure 296. VAV References Dialog Box

328 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Security Access

Setting Security Access

Use the Classes screen to set security access for VAS Comm5.
To set security access:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 297).

Figure 297. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Select the Access check box next to each class to grant or deny access
to the security class. A check in the field grants access.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.
5. Click the Save button to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 329
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Balancing Air and Water Flow

To assist with balancing air and water flow, use the system-wide over-
rides found on the Overrides tab (see Figure 298).
From the Overrides screen, you can apply the following overrides to the
air valves of all VAV members:
• Drive to minimum cooling flow setpoint
• Drive to maximum cooling flow setpoint
• Drive to a percentage of the maximum cooling flow setpoint
You can apply the following overrides to the water valves of all VAV mem-
bers:
• Drive open
• Drive closed

Figure 298. VAS Comm5 Editor Overrides Screen

To perform an override:
1. Select the appropriate option.
2. Click the Apply button to perform a system-wide override.

Note:
Use the Rover Air and Water Balancing tool if you need addi-
tional balancing features.

330 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Balancing Air and Water Flow

To Release an override:
◆ Click the Release Override Option to release the system-wide over-
ride.

Note:
If you do not release overrides from the VAS Comm5 editor,
they will release automatically in each VAV controller after a
certain period of time (by default, overrides to Tracer VV550/
551 controllers release automatically after 10 hours, though
this time can be changed in Rover Comm5).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 331
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Autocommissioning VAVs
Autocommissioning is a special operating sequence that validates the
proper operation of all inputs and outputs of VAV members. Because air
valves are closed during parts of the autocommissioning test, the BCU
commissions the VAVs in several groups to avoid over-pressurization. The
BCU divides common space VAVs evenly among the groups.

Note:
Because the BCU staggers the VAVs being autocommissioned,
starting another staggered sequence will interrupt the current
sequence. For example, if a calibration sequence is initiated
while autocommissioning is in progress, autocommissioning
will stop and calibration will begin. Autocommissioning will not
resume after the calibration sequence finishes.

To autocommission VAVs:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Setup tab.
2. If duct pressure optimization is enabled, clear the Enable Duct Pres-
sure Optimization check box, then click Save.
3. Click the Overrides tab.
4. In the VAV Autocommissioning Sequence area, select Start, then click
the Apply button.
5. Click OK to acknowledge the message that displays.
6. To check the progress of the autocommissioning sequence, open the
VAS graphic by double-clicking the VAS icon in the navigation tree.
While autocommissioning is in effect, the Mode: Active property of
each VAV member will report Test (see Figure 299). Autocommission-
ing should take no more than 90 minutes, regardless of the size of
your VAS.

Figure 299. VAV Graphic

7. After the autocommissioning sequence is done, re-enable duct pres-

sure optimization if you are using it in your VAS.
8. On the Status screen of the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Report but-
ton. The Select Standard Live Report dialog box displays.
9. Select VAS Comm5 Commissioning Report, then click OK. The VAV
Commissioning Report displays.
10. Print or save the report as needed, then click Close.

332 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 22

Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air

Systems

The variable air volume air system (VAS), usually referred to as the VAV
air system, is made up of variable air volume (VAV) boxes, the air-han-
dling equipment that supplies hot and cold air to those boxes, and ventila-
tion-only members. VAS works with Area Control and Time of Day
Scheduling to manage the air handling unit and the associated VAV
boxes.
Using the VAV air system, you can:
• Determine the heating or cooling control action of its VAV members
• Audit VAV member requests for Night Heat/Cool and Night Econo-
mize to verify that adequate demand exists before enabling the air
handler
• Total the minimum cooling flow setpoints and present value votes of
its VAV members to determine its own and the air handler’s present
value
• Control AHU startup and VAV shutdown delays during occupancy
transitions
• Provide an offset control value for VAV I members
Depending on the member characteristics, you can use these options:
• Drive VAV boxes to maximum airflow position when the VAS heat/
cool mode is heating
• Provide VAV airflow overrides for all VAV members
• Specify supply air setpoints for air handler reference
These tasks are all accomplished through the VAV Air System editor,
which is one of several editors in Tracer Summit that you use to set up,
define, and modify elements in the system.
To create a VAV air system for Comm5 controllers, refer to Chapter 21,
“Comm5 VAV Air Systems.”

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 333
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Accessing the VAV Air System Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air System. The Select VAS dialog
box displays (see Figure 300).

Figure 300. Select VAS Dialog Box

2. Select an existing VAS object and click OK. The VAV Air System edi-
tor displays (see Figure 301).

Figure 301. VAV Air System Editor Status Screen

334 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a VAV Air System Object

Creating a VAV Air System Object

To create a VAV Air System object, you follow these steps:
• Open and name the object (as described in this section)
• Assign VAS members (see “Assigning VAS Members” on page 336)
• Set up the VAV Air System (see “Setting Up a VAV Air System” on
page 338)
• Modify setpoints (see “Modifying Setpoints” on page 341)
• Modify overrides, if necessary (see “Modifying Overrides” on
page 342)
• Change control and security classes (see “Routing Alarms and Events
and Setting Security Access” on page 343)
To create the VAV Air System object:
1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air System. The Select VAS dialog
box displays.
2. Click New. The New VAV Air System Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 302).

Figure 302. New VAV Air System Name Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the VAV Air System Name field. Make the name as
informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must
enter a name before you can save the new VAV Air System object. You
can modify the name at any time from the Setup screen of the VAV
Air System editor.
4. Click OK. The Status screen of the VAV Air System editor displays.
5. Click Save. The first time you save a new area, the Save VAV Air Sys-
tem dialog box displays (see Figure 303).

Figure 303. Save VAV Air System Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 335
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

6. Select the name of the BCU in which you want the VAV Air System to
reside.
7. Click OK.

Assigning VAS Members

Once the VAV Air System object is created, you must assign members.
There are three different types of VAS members:
• Air handlers
• VAV boxes
• Ventilation-only devices
To assign members:
1. At the VAV Air System editor, click the Members tab to display the
Members screen (see Figure 304).

Figure 304. VAV Air System Editor Members Screen

2. From the Category list box, select the category of the VAS members
you would like to add. There are three options:
• Air handler
• VAV
• Vent only
3. In the Type list box, select the type of Air Handler, VAV, or Vent Only
object from these options:
• Air handler: Binary Output, CPL Program, CSC, DAC, Intellipak,
PCM, TCM, UPCM, Voyager, Voyager (Comm3), MP580/581

336 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Assigning VAS Members

• VAV: VAV I, VAV II/III/IV

• Vent only: Binary Output, CPL Program
The Name field now displays a list of all of the objects that are of the
same object type selected in the Type list box.
4. Select the name of the object you want to add. You can select as many
members as you want.
5. Click Add to add the Selected members to the Current Members list
box.
To change the Current Members list, click Remove or Remove All
until the list displays only those members you want to add.

Resetting the Votes List for VAV Membership

The VAV Air System votes list keeps track of all its VAV members’
present values (for example, Occupied, Unoccupied, and Optimal Start)
and minimum cooling flow setpoints. When VAVs are removed from the
VAS membership list, the VAS retains votes from those VAVs that no
longer belong to that VAS, until the votes list is reset. The Reset Votes
button is used when VAV membership to the VAV Air System is altered.
To Reset the VAV Membership Votes List:
1. At the VAV Air System editor, click the Members tab to display the
Members screen (see Figure 304 on page 336).
2. If VAV membership has changed (removed members), save the
changes.
3. Click the Reset Votes button to remove votes no longer belonging to
this VAS.

Note:
The BCU must be online in order for the reset to work. How-
ever, the Reset Votes button is always enabled.

Example:
The site called STARPORT has two VAV Air Systems in it (VAS#1 and
VAS#2). Originally, each air system was set up with 20 VAV members
each, which is a mistake. VAS#1 really has 18 VAVs connected to it while
VAS#2 has 22 VAVs connected to it. To correct the situation, you must
first remove the two extra VAVs from VAS#1. Then after saving the
changes to VAS#1, you must click the Reset Votes button. The two extra
VAVs are then added to VAS#2. Changes to VAS#2 are saved.

Note:
It is not necessary to reset votes when VAVs are added to a
VAS, only when VAVs are removed.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 337
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Setting Up a VAV Air System

Once the VAV Air System object is created and members are assigned,
you can set up the VAS to suit the individual needs of the system. You use
the VAV Air System editor’s Setup screen to enter or modify setup infor-
mation.
To set up a VAV Air System:
1. From the VAV Air System editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 305).

Figure 305. VAV Air System Editor Setup Screen

2. To modify the VAS name, enter a new name in the VAS Name field.
3. To modify the VAS minimum flow value, enter the minimum amount
of air that the air handler members can deliver when the supply fan
is on in the VAS Minimum Flow field. You can obtain this number
from the air handler manufacturer.
4. To modify the heat/cool input, select one of these choices in the
required Heat/Cool Input field:
• To allow the VAS to automatically determine its own heat/cool
mode, select MWU Settings (morning warm up) from the list box.
The heat/cool mode of the VAS will change between heating and
cooling based on the values of the VAS morning warm up sensor,
setpoint, and differential.
• If the air handler is a heating only or a cooling only machine,
select either Heating or Cooling from the list box. Do not use a
referencer.

338 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up a VAV Air System

• Reference another heat/cool property in the Tracer Summit sys-

tem (perhaps the heat/cool mode of the Air Handler itself), using a
referencer edit control.
Although the Heat/Cool mode of the VAS can determine the heat/cool
mode of its Air Handler members, it does not automatically do so.
Typically, if the air handling unit is capable of making its own heat/
cool decision (as IntelliPak, Voyager, and CSC can), the air handling
unit’s mode will determine the heat/cool mode of the VAS.
5. If you want the VAS to use the supply air temperature, in the Supply
Air Temperature field enter a constant or assign a reference.

Note:
Only VAV II/III/IV members can use the VAS supply air tem-
perature. VAV I members do not use the VAS supply air tem-
perature even if a sensor is assigned to the entry field. VAV I
control action follows the heat/cool mode of the VAS.

The Supply Air Temperature specifies the active temperature of the

supply air feeding the VAV boxes of this system. Assigning a supply
air temperature allows VAV II/III/IV members to make their own
decision for heat/cool control action based on a comparison of supply
air temperature and zone temperature.
If you select Not Used for the Supply Air Temperature field, the heat/
cool control action VAV II/III/IV members follow the heat/cool mode of
the VAS.
6. To use the VAV Airflow Drive Max field, select the desired setting.

Note:
During an Airflow Drive Max override, parallel fans, electric
heat, and hot water heat are disabled for VAVs that have them.
The VAV Airflow Drive Max field appears twice in the editor;
once on the Setup screen and once on the Overrides screen.

• If you select Auto, the UCM uses its local control algorithms to
decide when to implement the Drive max function.
• If you use a referencer edit control, Auto displays in the entry
field when the referencer is in the zero (0) state. In the zero state,
the UCM can still locally decide to drive to maximum flow if it
needs to. When the referencer is in the one (1) state, Drive Max
appears in the entry field, and the Drive Max override is initiated
from the Tracer Summit system.
• Some air handler units (such as IntelliPak, Voyager, and CSC)
have properties that indicate when they are going into a constant
volume heating mode, and thus require that all downstream VAV
boxes open their air valves to maximum position. You must assign
the property from the Air Handling Unit as the referencer. For the
IntelliPak and Voyager, this property is called VAS Drive to Max.
• If your air handler does not have a predefined property for heat-
ing mode, click the Overrides tab. On the Overrides screen, check

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 339
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

the box for Drive VAVs to Max Flow if VAS is Heating. Click Save
and return to the Setup screen.

Note:
If you selected MWU Settings in the Heat/Cool input field, the
system uses the Morning Warmup fields to determine its heat/
cool mode. (These fields have no other bearing on control.)

7. To assign the morning warm up temperature, in the Temperature

field select a referencer (which will typically be a zone temperature
sensor in the system). Air handler members that are capable of a
morning warm up cycle might want to reference the VAS Morning
Warmup fields if they do not have their own. VAS does not automati-
cally determine the morning warm up settings for the air handling
unit members, but provides reference information.
Occupied mode: If the temperature reported from the morning
warm up sensor is less than or equal to the morning warm up setpoint
minus the differential, the VAS heat/cool mode is heating. If it is
greater than the morning warm up setpoint, the VAS heat/cool mode
is cooling.
Unoccupied mode: If the temperature falls below this setpoint, the
VAS heat/cool mode is heating. If it rises above it, the VAS heat/cool
mode is cooling. The differential is ignored when the VAS is unoccu-
pied.
8. To assign the morning warm up setpoint, in the Setpoint field select a
referencer (which will typically be a zone temperature setpoint in the
system). If the VAS heat/cool input is left in MWU Settings, the morn-
ing warm up setpoint determines the cutoff point at which the VAS
changes modes from heating to cooling or vice versa. (For a descrip-
tion of the occupied and unoccupied modes, see the previous step.)
9. To modify the morning warm up differential (the default is 2.0
degrees), enter a number in the Differential field. The morning warm
up differential value is the deadband used to keep VAS heat/cool
mode from cycling too quickly between occupied heating and occupied
cooling. You can set a 0.0°F to 10.0°F buffer that the temperature
must surpass before switching modes. The differential is ignored
when the VAS is unoccupied.

340 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying Setpoints

Modifying Setpoints
The default values for the fields found on the VAV Air System editor’s Set-
points screen are what you would expect to find on most job sites. Occa-
sionally, however, you may need to change supply air setpoints,
changeover delay times, changeover votes, and the VAV I control offset.
To change setpoints:
1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air System to display the Select
VAS dialog box. The dialog box lists all existing VAS objects.
2. From the list displayed in the Select VAS dialog box, select the one
you want to modify.
3. Click OK to display the VAV Air System editor. The Status window
becomes active and displays the settings and status of the object you
selected.
4. Click the Setpoints tab to display the Setpoints screen (see
Figure 306).

Figure 306. VAV Air System Editor Setpoints Screen

5. Change the desired values in the Supply Air group, Changeover

Delay Times group or the VAV I Control Offset field.
6. To change the values in the Changeover Votes group, refer to the sec-
tion “Modifying Changeover Vote Setpoints” on page 342.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 341
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Modifying Changeover Vote Setpoints

The Present Value of the VAS is determined from the Present Value vot-
ing of the VAVs. A VAV box votes its Present Value to the VAS each time
the VAV’s Present Value changes. The Minimum On and Minimum Off
votes are the number of members required to vote for a change before the
VAS considers the transition. You can redefine the number of VAV
Present Value votes needed for Night Heat/Cool and Night Economize
operations in these fields.
To change the value:
1. Click the text box of the value you want to change to Select the cur-
rent value.
2. Enter a new value for the number of votes.
3. Click Save.

Modifying Overrides
The Overrides screen of the VAV Air System editor contains the fields
that override normal VAV box operation. To override the VAV terminal
units’ flow control you can assign a binary reference to the appropriate
flow override. You can also select the desired flow override from the list
box.
You can override the VAV unit flow control either from the VAV object edi-
tor (individually) or from the VAS to which the VAV unit belongs. The
VAV object editor source is the higher priority if there are overrides from
both sources.
To modify overrides:
1. Click the Overrides tab in the VAS editor to display the Overrides
screen (see Figure 307).

Figure 307. VAV Air System Editor Overrides Screen

2. Change the values in the desired fields by choosing a constant value,

or reference another property in the system to control the field.

342 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access

3. To provide a VAV flow override to maximum if the VAS heat/cool

mode is heating, click the check box next to the field Drive VAVs to
Max Flow if VAS is Heating.

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting

Security Access
At the VAV Air System editor’s Classes screen, you can assign alarm and
event routing and set security access for the VAV Air System.

Defining Alarm and Event Routing

1. From the VAV Air System editor, click the Classes tab (see
Figure 308).

Figure 308. VAV Air System Classes Screen

2. In the Control Class field, select a control class. The control class
defines the event class that will receive an event message when the
present value of the VAV Air System changes.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 343
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Setting Security Access

1. From the VAV Air System editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 309).

Figure 309. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to
the security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked,
permission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.

Deleting a VAS Object

To delete a VAS object, use the Delete Objects utility from the Tools
menu. Refer to Chapter 39, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”

344 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 23

Heat Pump Loop Control

The Heat Pump Loop Control (HPLC) application provides coordination

between a water-source heat pump (WSHP) with Space Comfort Control-
ler (SCC) profile UCM and a Tracer loop controller. A Tracer loop control-
ler controls for example, pumps, cooling towers, and boilers for the WSHP
water loop. The program performs two main functions:
• It enables or disables the compressors of WSHP members based on
the operation of the water loop. For example, if there is no flow in the
water loop, all WSHP compressors are disabled until flow is estab-
lished.
• It monitors the WSHP’s status and determines the proper water loop
operation needed.
Each WSHP should be placed in an area and the area should be sched-
uled as desired. When a WSHP goes into the occupied mode, the HPLC
application also goes occupied, and the Tracer loop controller is requested
to operate the loop. When all units go into the unoccupied mode, the
HPLC goes unoccupied, and the Tracer loop controller shuts down.

Note:
When in the unoccupied mode, the HPLC application monitors
the need for heating or cooling (represented by the terminal
load property) of all WSHP members in order to determine
when to go into the Night Heat/Cool mode. Each WSHP mem-
ber votes its need-to-run based on a terminal load that is
greater than 30% (a positive 30% for cooling and a negative
30% for heating). When enough WSHP members vote a need-to-
run, the HPLC application transitions from the unoccupied
mode to the Night Heat/Cool mode, enabling the Tracer loop
controller to run.
All WSHP members vote continually to the HPLC concerning
whether they have a need-to-run or not. The Need-to-Run
Threshold located on the Setup screen determines how many
WSHPs are needed to initiate Night Heat/Cool operation. In the
Night Heat/Cool mode, the HPLC application commands the
Tracer loop controller to run. In turn, the Tracer loop controller
monitors system water flow and enables the WSHP compres-
sors to run, allowing the units to reach their unoccupied set-
points. The HPLC transitions back to the unoccupied mode
when enough WSHP members fall within their unoccupied set-
points.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 345
Heat Pump Loop Control

Accessing the Heat Pump Loop Control

Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Heat Pump Loop Control. The Select
Heat Pump Loop dialog box displays (see Figure 310).

Figure 310. Select Heat Pump Loop Dialog Box

2. Select a heat pump loop.

3. Click OK to display the Heat Pump Loop Control editor Status screen
(see Figure 311).

Figure 311. Heat Pump Loop Control Status Screen

346 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New Heat Pump Loop Object

From the Status screen you can view the following occupancy status of
WSHP members:
• Tracer loop controller mode (as determined by the HPLC application)
• Current total heating and cooling loads for all WSHPs on this loop
• Compressor enable mode (as determined from the referencer on the
Setup screen)
• Need-to-Run Votes

Creating a New Heat Pump Loop Object

To create a new heat pump loop:
1. From the Setup menu, select Heat Pump Loop Control. The Select
Heat Pump dialog box displays (see Figure 310 on page 346).
2. Click New. The New Heat Pump Loop Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 312).

Figure 312. New Heat Pump Loop Name Dialog Box

3. Type the name of the heat pump loop. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must enter a name
before you can save the new heat pump loop. You can modify the
name at any time from the Setup screen of the Heat Pump Loop edi-
tor.
4. Click OK. The Heat Pump Loop editor Setup screen displays (see Fig-
ure 313 on page 348).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 347
Heat Pump Loop Control

Setting Up the Heat Pump Loop Control

Object
1. From the Heat Pump Loop Control editor, click the Setup tab (see
Figure 313).

Figure 313. Heat Pump Loop Control Setup Screen

2. In the Need-to-Run Threshold field, type the total number of need-to-

run votes needed from WSHP members before the HPLC transitions
from the unoccupied mode into the Night Heat/Cool mode. The
default number is 10 votes.
3. Set the Enable Startup field to a constant of Disable, or referenced to
a binary output object that is controlled by a Time of Day Schedule
(TOD) or CPL routine.

Note:
The Enable Startup referencer field allows you to have the loop
pre-heated or pre-cooled in advance of start up of the water
source heat pumps.

4. Check the Continuous Operation check box if you want the water loop
to operate continuously. If this is checked, the Tracer loop controller is
always in the occupied mode, regardless of individual WSHP sched-
ules or need-to-run.

348 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up the Heat Pump Loop Control Object

5. Assign a referencer to the WSHP Compressor field.

Note:
The WSHP referencer is used to monitor water loop operation
and lock out compressor operation of the heat pumps when the
loop is not operating properly. When a Tracer loop controller is
used, the Compressor Control: Active property is automatically
referenced. When a PCM or UPCM is used as the loop control-
ler, an appropriate referencer needs to be assigned. This could
be a pump output, loop flow status, or a binary value that is set
once all loop operation, including pumps, boilers and towers are
proven.

Assigning a Loop Controller Member

1. In the HPLC Members Category field, select Loop Controller.
2. In the Type box, select the type of loop controller. This can be a Tracer
loop controller, a PCM, UPCM, MP580 or MP581.
3. In the Name box, the available devices are shown. Highlight the
name of the device you want to use as the loop controller.
4. Click the Add button to use this device as the loop controller.
5. To select an alternate loop controller follow steps 1–4, then click the
Replace button.

Assigning a Water Source Heat Pump Member

Note:
Only SCCs can be assigned to this application.

1. In the HPLC Members Category field, highlight Water Source Heat

Pump to select it.
2. In the Name field highlight the unit you want to add.
3. Click the Add button to add the heat pump to the application.

Removing HPLC Members

1. From the Current Member List dialog box, highlight the HPLC mem-
ber that you want to remove.
2. Click the Remove button. To remove all members of the HPLC, click
the Remove All button.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 349
Heat Pump Loop Control

Setting Security Access

1. From the Heat Pump Loop editor, click the Classes tab to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 314).

Figure 314. Heat Pump Loop Control Editor Classes Screen

2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 315).

Figure 315. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to the
security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked, per-
mission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Class dialog box and display
the Classes screen.

350 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 24

Time of Day Scheduling

Time of day scheduling in Tracer Summit enables you to create and mod-
ify schedules that control HVAC equipment and lighting. It also gives you
the flexibility to create time of day schedule reports from the scheduling
screen (see “Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports” on page 366).
Using the scheduling application, you can schedule equipment to start or
stop at specific times during the day. You can use optimal start and stop
times to turn equipment on as late as possible and turn it off as early as
possible, while maintaining the desired comfort level in a defined zone or
building.
You modify schedules using the Scheduling screen. A schedule is a set of
defined events that applies to an effective period of time for one or more of
the following:
• Areas
• UCMs
• Control points
• Set values
A schedule has a normal day defined for each day of the week. A normal
day applies unless you create a holiday or an exception. Holidays take
precedence over normal days, and exceptions take precedence over holi-
days and normal days.
You can define more than one set of events in a schedule for a site, and an
object can be a member of more than one event in a schedule. However, an
object cannot be active during two events simultaneously. For example, if
a UCM is a member of one event that starts at 8 a.m. and stops at 5 p.m.,
it cannot be a member of another event that would require it to start at
7 a.m. and stop at 4 p.m.
The Tracer 100/Tracker Communications package enables you to upload
Tracer 100 schedules, edit them, and then download them to Tracer 100
panels. For more information, see “Using Tracer 100 Schedules” on
page 364.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 351
Time of Day Scheduling

Accessing the Scheduling Screen

1. Click Schedule on the task bar. The Select TOD dialog box appears.
2. Select the schedule you want.
3. The Scheduling screen displays (see Figure 316).

Figure 316. Scheduling Screen

Indicates Optimal
Start/Occupied
schedule Occupied
period
Indicates Night
Economize Optimal
Start period
Indicates Lighting for
BCU sites or Duty
Cycle for T100 sites

Indicates Set Analog

for BCU sites only

Note:
If you need help with time of day scheduling, refer to the Daily
Operations tutorial, Focus on Your System. (For information
about using the tutorial, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily
Operations guide.

4. Select a month and year.

Tracer Summit displays the schedule for the selected name, month,
and year.

352 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New Daily Schedule

Creating a New Daily Schedule

Refer to “Making Global Changes” on page 203 for information about how
to modify a schedule that affects multiple schedules in the Time of Day
Schedule application.

Note:
The scheduling application can create new schedules for BCU
sites only. You can create new schedules for Tracer 100 sites
from the terminal emulation screen and from doing a system
expansion on the Tracer 100 panel (see “Deleting a Tracer 100
Schedule from the Workstation” on page 365). After this is
done, scan the Tracer 100 panel for the new schedules. For
more information about scanning Tracer 100 panels, see “Run
Immediate Scan on a Single Site” on page 221.

To create a new daily schedule:

1. Open the site to which you want the new schedule to apply.
2. Click Schedule on the task bar. The Select TOD dialog box appears.
3. Click New. The first Schedule Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 317).

Figure 317. First Schedule Wizard Dialog Box

4. Type the name of the new schedule in the Schedule Name field.
5. Specify the Start Date using the up and down arrows. (The start date
defaults to the selected date.)
6. Leave the No End Date check box selected if you do not want to spec-
ify an end date.
To specify an end date, uncheck the box to activate the End Date field.
Then, use the up and down arrows to specify the end date.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 353
Time of Day Scheduling

7. Click Next. The second Schedule Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 318).

Figure 318. Second Schedule Wizard Dialog Box

8. Click the Member Types selection arrow to display the list of member
types.
9. Select the desired member type to display in the Available Members
list.
10. In the Available Members list, select the members to which you want
the schedule to apply.
11. Click Add to add the members to the Selected Members list. To add
all available members to the Selected Members list, click Add All.
12. Click Next. The Schedule Wizard—Select Events Schedule Responds
To dialog box displays (see Figure 319 on page 355).

354 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New Daily Schedule

Figure 319. Schedule Wizard—Select Events Schedule Responds to

Dialog Box

Note:
If a schedule contains a mixture of Normal and Optimal events
(such as an Optimal Start and Normal Stop), the members
must be set up as Normal and Optimal.

13. For each member in the Schedules column, define the schedule event
types by selecting the check boxes under the desired column head-
ings. See Table 8 for an explanation of the direct relationship between
schedule member types and event types.

Table 8. Scheduling Member Types

Schedule Member Member Type Events

Type

Night
Normal Optimal Lighting Set Analog
Economize

Area* Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Analog Output and No No No No Yes
Analog Value
Binary Output and Yes No No No** No
Binary Value
CPL Yes No No No No
UCMs Yes No No No No
Notes:
*See Table 7 on page 303 for area mode/member mode behavior.
**To control a binary output (BOP) as a lighting member, the BOP must first be setup as a member of an area. This area is then
added into TOD as a lighting event.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 355
Time of Day Scheduling

14. Click Next. The Schedule Wizard—Set Default Event Times dialog
box displays (see Figure 320).

Figure 320. Schedule Wizard—Set Default Event Times Dialog Box

15. For Normal, Optimal, and Lighting events, click the desired check
boxes. Then, set the Start Event and Stop Event times, using the up
and down arrows.
16. To schedule a start time and duration for the Night Economize event,
click the Schedule Night Economize Events check box. Then, set the
start time using the up and down arrows and enter the length of the
event time in the Duration field.
17. To change the set analog start time, click the Set Analog Selected
check box. Then, set the start time using the up and down arrows and
enter the setpoint value in the Value field.

356 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New Daily Schedule

18. Click Next. The final Schedule Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 321).

Figure 321. Final Schedule Wizard Dialog Box

19. Click the check box for each day of the week on which you want the
schedule to be effective. The Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
and Friday boxes are checked as defaults.
20. Click Finish. The Save New Schedule dialog box displays (see
Figure 322).

Figure 322. Save New Schedule Dialog Box

21. Click the BCU Name selection arrow to display the list of available
BCUs.
22. Select the BCU to which you want to save the schedule.
23. Click OK to display the Scheduling screen and the new schedule.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 357
Time of Day Scheduling

Adding an Event to a Schedule

When adding events for a Tracer 100 schedule, consider the following:
Night Economize Events
Night economize, also known as purge cycle, events only apply to zone
(point type 07) members in the schedule member list. The following
conditions are required before the members of a zone economize:
• A night economize event is defined in the Time of Day Schedule
application
• The zone is unoccupied
• The night enthalpy switch (if defined) is closed
• The inside space temperature is greater than the economizing
setpoint
• The inside space temperature is greater than the night econo-
mizer delta temperature (if non-zero)
Duty Cycle Events
Duty cycle events establish when schedule members are allowed to
duty cycle. This alone, however, will not duty-cycle the schedule mem-
bers. You must also define the duty cycle point for each member in the
schedule while online with a Tracer 100 panel by means of a terminal
emulation session. For zones in the schedule member list, the duty
cycle event applies to the members of the zone, not to the zones them-
selves.
To add an event to a schedule:
1. Display the schedule you want to change.
2. On the clock grid, right-click the mouse once to display a submenu of
events. The pop-up menu in Figure 323 appears for BCU sites. The
pop-up menu in Figure 324 on page 359 appears for Tracer 100 sites.

Figure 323. List of Events for BCU Sites

358 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Adding an Event to a Schedule

Figure 324. List of Events for Tracer 100 Sites

3. Select the event you want to add. Depending on the event you select,
a dialog box appears for that event. For example, after you click one of
the time bars, a Change Event Times dialog box similar to the one in
Figure 325 appears. Depending on the event type that you choose to
add, the fields that display in the dialog box vary.

Note:
Because Tracer 100 panels limit events, the Time of Day Sched-
ule application only lets you add up to six events each day in
the schedule.

Figure 325. Change Event Times Window

4. Click the Enable Start Event box.

5. In the Event Starts At field, select the time at which the event will
start.
6. Click the Enable Stop Event box.
7. In the Event Ends At field, select the time when the event will end.
8. Click OK. The time bar for the new event displays in the clock grid.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 359
Time of Day Scheduling

Removing an Event from a Schedule

1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. On the time bar for the event you want to remove, click the right
mouse button once to display a list of tasks (see Figure 326).

Figure 326. Displaying a List of Tasks

3. Select Delete Event. The event is deleted.

Changing a Schedule Name

You can only change names for BCU sites.
To change a BCU site name:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. From the Edit menu, select Schedule Name. The Change Schedule
Name dialog box displays (see Figure 327).

Figure 327. Change Schedule Name Dialog Box

3. Enter the new schedule name in the New Name field.

4. Click OK.

360 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Adding a Member to a Schedule

Adding a Member to a Schedule

You can only perform this function for BCU sites. You cannot use the
scheduling application to add, remove, or insert member offsets in a
schedule for Tracer 100 sites.
To add a member to a schedule:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. In the Schedule Members list box, right-click the mouse to display a
pop-up menu (see Figure 328).

Figure 328. Pop-Up Menu

3. Select Add Members. The Add Members to Schedule dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 329).

Figure 329. Add Members to Schedule Dialog Box

4. Click the Member Types selection arrow to display the list of member
types.
5. Select the desired member type to display in the Available Members
list.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 361
Time of Day Scheduling

6. Select the member(s) you want to add to the schedule from the Avail-
able Members list.
7. Click Add to add the member(s) to the Selected Members list. To add
all available members to the Members to Add list, click Add All.
8. Click OK.

Removing a Member from a Schedule

You can only perform this function for BCU sites. You cannot use the
scheduling application to add, remove, or insert member offsets in a
schedule for Tracer 100 sites.
To remove a member from a schedule:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. Select the member(s) from the Schedule Members list.
3. In the Schedule Members list box, right-click the mouse to display a
pop-up menu (see Figure 328).
4. Select Remove Members. A dialog box displays warning you that you
will permanently remove the member from the schedule.
5. Click Yes to remove the member from the schedule.

Setting or Modifying Offsets for

Schedule Members
Offsets allow each member of a schedule to start before the defined occu-
pied start time and/or stop after the defined occupied stop time. Offsets
are typically used to avoid having all equipment start at the same time.
You can only perform this function for BCU sites. You cannot use the
scheduling application to add, remove, or insert member offsets in a
schedule for Tracer 100 sites.
To set or modify offsets for schedule members:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. Select the member you want to offset in the Schedule Members list.
3. Right-click the mouse to display a pop-up menu (see Figure 328).
4. Select Set Member Offsets. The Set Member Offsets dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 330 on page 363).

362 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Changing a Schedule’s Effective Period

Figure 330. Set Member Offsets Dialog Box

5. Set or modify the Start Advance time and Stop Delay time using the
up and down arrows.
6. Click OK.

Changing a Schedule’s Effective Period

You can only use this function for BCU sites.
To change the effective period of a schedule:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. From the Edit menu, select Effective Period. The Effective Period dia-
log box displays (see Figure 331).

Figure 331. Effective Period Dialog Box

3. To change the Start Date, use the up and down arrows.

4. To change the end date, use the up and down arrows.
To specify no end date, click the No End Date check box.
5. Click OK.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 363
Time of Day Scheduling

Save Events as a Normal Schedule to Weekdays,

Weekends, and Holidays
Use this procedure to save modified schedules to specific days of the week
(Sunday through Saturday) and/or save them as holidays. Before per-
forming the following steps, do the procedure described in one of the fol-
lowing:
• “Adding an Event to a Schedule” on page 358
• “Changing a Schedule’s Effective Period” on page 363
• “Removing an Event from a Schedule” on page 360
To save events as a normal schedule:
1. After you modify an event in the schedule, click Save.
2. The Save Normal Schedule dialog box appears.
3. Left-click the mouse on the days to which you want to save the sched-
ule. Options include:
• BCU Range—Sunday through Saturday
• Tracer 100 Range—Sunday through Saturday and all holiday
dates
4. Click OK to save the changes for the selected days.

Using Tracer 100 Schedules

With the Tracer 100/Tracker Communications package you can access
schedules for Tracer 100 panels online through the terminal emulation
screen or use Tracer Summit’s Time of Day application to modify them.
The first time that you create a Tracer 100 site and connect to the panel,
the Tracer Summit software scans the panel for existing schedules. The
software uploads these schedules to your workstation. After the schedules
are uploaded to your workstation, use the Time of Day application to
modify Tracer 100 schedules online or offline as described in “Adding an
Event to a Schedule” on page 358, and “Removing an Event from a Sched-
ule” on page 360.
If you modify Tracer 100 schedules offline in Tracer Summit, then the
next time that you connect to the site, your changes are downloaded to
the panel(s). When your workstation is connected to a Tracer 100 panel,
any schedule changes go immediately to the panel.
If you have the Building Management or Enterprise Management pack-
age, use Task Manager to schedule when your off-line changes are down-
loaded to the Tracer 100 panel. For more information, see Chapter 15,
“Using the Task Manager.”

364 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using Tracer 100 Schedules

Accessing Tracer 100 Schedules

1. Log on and/or connect to the Tracer 100 site.
2. Click Schedule on the task bar. The Select TOD dialog box appears.
3. Select the desired schedule.
4. The Scheduling screen displays (see Figure 316 on page 352).

Globally Changing Tracer 100 Sites Schedules

◆ For Tracer 100 schedules, repeat the procedures in “Applying Global
Changes to a Single Site” on page 204 and “Applying Global Changes
to Multiple Sites” on page 205.

Deleting a Tracer 100 Schedule from the Workstation

You cannot remove a schedule from the Tracer 100 panel without clearing
the panel’s memory, also known as doing a system expansion. You can
remove the schedule from your workstation by deleting the schedule
object (see “Deleting Objects” on page 652). However, because the Tracer
100 panel always retains schedules in its memory, during the next scan
the schedule that you deleted in the workstation will upload again from
the panel.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 365
Time of Day Scheduling

Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports

The schedule report provides information about time of day scheduling
activities over a period of time. You select what information goes into the
report (holidays, normal events, exceptions), the length of the reporting
period (one day, one week, one month, etc.), and how the schedules are
sorted in the report. You can create the report to include as many sched-
ules as you desire or just view the activities of one schedule over a report-
ing period.

Note:
This report is also available in the standard site reports. For
more information about standard site reports see “Designing
Reports” on page 539.

Figure 332 shows an example of a time of day schedule report containing

information for multiple schedules. The report is sorted by start date and
has a duration of one year.

Figure 332. Time of Day Schedule Report

366 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports

To create a time of day schedule report:

1. From the Scheduling screen click the Report button. The Choose Sort-
ing Criteria and Report Period dialog box displays (Figure 333).
2. Select the option that you want the schedules sorted by.
3. Select the length of the reporting period.
4. Click the Next button to display the Select Schedules dialog box (see
Figure 334).

Figure 333. Sorting Criteria and Report Period Dialog Box

Figure 334. Select Schedules Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 367
Time of Day Scheduling

5. From the Available Schedules for Selected Period list, select the
schedules that you want to include in your report.
6. Click the Add button to add those schedules to the Selected Schedules
list.

Note:
To remove a schedule from the list click the Remove button.

7. Click the Finish button to create the time of day schedule report.

Adding event information to the report

Event information that you can add to the report is selected by default
(see Figure 335). If you don’t want to include an event on the report, click
on the checkbox to deselect it.

Figure 335. Scheduling information

368 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 25

Custom Programming
Language

Tracer Summit’s Custom Programming Language (CPL) allows you to

create custom programs to perform functions and calculations that can-
not be done by other applications in Tracer Summit.
The Tracer Summit PC Workstation is used to create CPL programs in
the Tracer Summit CPL editor. The process of creating a CPL program
begins with a CPL text file. The text file contains program logic state-
ments and comments. This chapter describes how to create, save, and
compile a CPL text file. Once this process is complete, the CPL program is
completed. This chapter also describes how the CPL program becomes an
object that is sent to the system database and stored in a specific BCU.

Note:
For detailed information on specific CPL statements, functions,
enumerations and so on, refer to Tracer Summit online help.
Tracer Summit includes a library of sample programs located
in the folder C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\cpl\library.
You can also locate the sample programs in the Tracer Summit
electronic library on the Tracer Summit CD (for more informa-
tion, see Chapter 5, “Utilities”).

There are four basic steps used to successfully create and test a CPL pro-
gram object:
1. Create or Edit the CPL text file. CPL text files are created and
edited using the CPL editor and saved to the PC Workstation data-
base.
2. Compile the CPL text file. The compiler checks for any syntax
errors. After the syntax errors are corrected, you can compile the text
file again. This process is repeated until it successfully compiles, at
which point it is an executable CPL program.
3. Create the CPL Object in the Database. A successfully compiled
CPL program is used either to create a new CPL object or replace an
existing CPL object in the system database. During this step, a run
frequency (if any) and the BCU where this program executes are
assigned. The newly created CPL object is automatically sent to the
BCU when the workstation is online.
4. Test the CPL Program. Once the CPL object is sent to the BCU, use
the CPL editor to step through the program and test its logic.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 369
Custom Programming Language

The process of creating a CPL program may require repeated editing if

you have errors from the compile and/or test step. Once a step is repeated,
you must repeat each successive step to complete the process of creating a
successful CPL program. The steps to create a CPL program are
explained in greater detail in the following sections.

Opening and Closing the CPL Editor

You can open the CPL editor with a blank file or with an existing CPL file
displayed.
To open the CPL editor:
1. From the Setup menu, select Custom Programming. The Open dialog
box displays.
2. Make a selection:
• To select a CPL file to work with, select the file’s location and
name, then click Open.
• To display a blank text file, click Cancel.
The CPL editor displays.
To close the CPL editor:
◆ At the CPL editor main menu, click File. Then click Close CPL editor.
The Tracer Summit main window displays.

370 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

The structure of a CPL text file is similar to a C or BASIC program file.
You create this CPL text file using the Tracer Summit CPL editor because
it contains features specific to CPL. You can also look in the library direc-
tory (C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\cpl\library) for templates that
you can adapt to suit your needs.
There are two ways to create a new CPL text file:
• Use a template (recommended). Follow the method in the section
titled “Creating a CPL Text File From a Template” on page 371.
• Use a blank text window. Follow the method in the section titled “Cre-
ating a CPL Text File from a Blank Text Window” on page 374.

Creating a CPL Text File From a Template

The general steps required to edit a CPL text file in the CPL editor are as
follows.
1. From the CPL editor File menu, select Open CPL Text File. The Open
dialog box displays.
2. Open the Library directory (C:\Program Files\Tracer Sum-
mit\cpl\library). See Figure 336.

Figure 336. Open Dialog Box (Library Directory)

3. Select the desired CPL file. For a new routine, you can use the
Header.cpl file, which has the recommended program structure.
4. Click Open to load the file into the CPL editor (see Figure 337 on page
372).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 371
Custom Programming Language

Figure 337. Header File in the CPL Editor

5. Add the program name and text to the comment lines to define your
program (see the section “Adding Comments” on page 374 for more
details).
6. If applicable, use the predefined place in the Header.cpl file to define
variables for the new program.
7. Using the Edit menu items for proper CPL syntax, insert the control
statements and calculations that the program will use (see
Figure 338 on page 373).

372 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Figure 338. CPL Editor Edit Menu

The Edit menu contains the following options:

• Add Statement (see “Adding Statements” on page 374)
• Add Function (see “Adding Functions” on page 375)
• Add Object (see “Assigning Objects and Properties” on page 376)
• Add Obj&Property (see “Adding an Object and Property Refer-
ence” on page 378)
• Add Enum Bool (see “Assigning Enumerations” on page 379)
8. Leave the word END on the last line of the program to let Tracer
Summit know that the program is done.
9. From the CPL editor File menu, select Save CPL Text File As.
10. At the Save As dialog box, select the CPL\custom directory (do not
save in the CPL\library directory).
11. Type a new name for the program in the File Name field of the Save
As dialog box.

Note:
If special startup sequences are required after a power failure,
naming a CPL program object “STARTUP_1”, “STARTUP_2”,
etc., causes the program(s) to execute before all other applica-
tions execute after power is restored on the BCU.

12. Click OK to save your CPL file to the PC Workstation. Save the file
frequently during editing to avoid losing your work.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 373
Custom Programming Language

Creating a CPL Text File from a Blank Text Window

You can create a new CPL text file from a blank text window by inputting
all the elements of a CPL program manually. However, it is recommended
that you follow the method outlined in the section “Creating a CPL Text
File From a Template” on page 371 to make the process of creating a new
CPL text file easier.
If you are going to create the CPL text file from a blank text window, you
can review the CPL examples included with Tracer Summit for guidance
on recommended format. The library of sample programs is located in the
folder C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\cpl\library or the Tracer Sum-
mit electronic library (for more information, see Chapter 5, “Utilities”).
You can display a blank text window for the creation of a new CPL text
file in one of two ways:
• When you first enter the CPL editor (by selecting Setup, then Custom
Programming, at the Tracer Summit main menu), click Cancel at the
Open dialog box.
• At the CPL editor, from the File menu select New CPL Text File.
Once you have a blank text window in the CPL editor, create the program
using the proper syntax end program structure. For more information,
see “Creating a CPL Text File From a Template” on page 371.

Adding Comments
You must manually add comments to your CPL text file to explain the
program steps. Comments will help you and others understand and debug
the program later. There are two types of comments you can add:
• Comment lines beginning with /// use memory in the BCU.
Type /// at the beginning of comment lines that you want to save to the
BCU. These comments remain in the program after it is compiled and
sent to the BCU. You see the comments when you open the CPL
object.
• Comment lines beginning with // do not use BCU memory.
Type // at the beginning of comments lines that you want stored only
in the CPL text file. This saves space in the BCU since these com-
ments are removed when the program is created as an object.

Adding Statements
1. Position the cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement. The Add Statement dia-
log box displays (see Figure 339 on page 375).

374 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Figure 339. Add Statement Dialog Box

3. Select the statement you want to insert in your file.

4. Click OK.
5. Use the proper syntax to complete the statement you have chosen.

Adding Functions
1. Put your cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Function. The Add Function dialog
box displays (see Figure 340).

Figure 340. Add Function Dialog Box

3. Click on the function you want to add to your file.

4. Click OK.
5. Use the proper syntax to complete the function you have chosen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 375
Custom Programming Language

Assigning Objects and Properties

As a CPL programmer, you have access to a major subset of the objects
defined in the BCU. You can directly enter an object name or property
name. To avoid syntax errors use the CPL editor to reference objects and
properties.

Note:
The compiler will ignore spaces, tabs, and blank lines, but you
must avoid carriage returns or word wrap (where the editor
puts a dash mark to finish the word on the next line) when
denoting an object name or property name in your file. The
names of objects and properties used in the program must
exactly match the names in the database.

Adding an Object Reference

To assist you in specifying an object in your CPL program, the CPL editor
has an object selection dialog box that you can access from the CPL editor.
To add an object reference:
1. Position the cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Object. The Select Object dialog box
displays (see Figure 341).

Figure 341. Select Object Dialog Box

3. Select the object type and object name you want to insert.
4. Click OK to insert the object reference into your CPL text file.

Indirectly Referencing an Object

CPL provides an object pointer defined with a variable to reference an
object indirectly. These variables are useful for being passed to proce-
dures that process an object. When not pointing to an object, object point-
ers have a null value.

376 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

You define variables to use as a user-defined shorthand name for an

object. Once a variable has been defined, you can use it throughout the
program to make the program more readable.

Note:
Variable names are case sensitive. For example, the compiler
sees the names OAT and oat as different variables.

To indirectly reference an object:

1. Position the cursor in the Define Variables section of your CPL text
file.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement. The Add Statement dia-
log box displays (see Figure 342).

Figure 342. Add Statement—DEFOBJ

3. Select the DEFOBJ statement.

4. Click OK to insert the DEFOBJ statement into the CPL text file.
Using the DEFOBJ statement adds two lines of code to the program:
the statement DEFOBJ {object name} to the first line of the program
and the object name at the cursor location.
5. In the CPL text file, type in a name for the variable defining the
object pointer. For example:
DEFOBJ RTU1
RTU1 = {FINANCE DEPT TCM}

When defining an object, do not add a property reference to the vari-

able:
RTU1 = {FINANCE DEPT TCM}.{PRESENT VALUE}

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 377
Custom Programming Language

Indirectly Referencing an Object and Property

CPL provides an object and property pointer defined with a variable to
reference an object and property indirectly. These variables are useful for
being passed to procedures that process an object and property.
There are four types of variables available:
• DEFINT defines integers
• DEFLNG defines long integers
• DEFFLT defines single floating point values
• DEFDBL defines double floating point values

Note:
Variable names are case sensitive. For example, the compiler
sees the names OAT and oat as different variables.

To indirectly reference an object and property:

1. Position the cursor in the Define Variables section of your CPL text
file.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement. The Add Statement dia-
log box displays.
3. Select the DEFINT, DEFLNG, DEFFLT, or DEFDBL statement and
click OK. The statement is inserted.
4. In the CPL text file, type in a name for the variable defining the
object and property pointer. For example:
DEFFLT ZONETEMP
ZONETEMP = {BCU#1 VAV-01-065}.{ZONE TEMPERATURE}

Adding an Object and Property Reference

To assist you in specifying an object and property in your CPL program,
the CPL editor has an object and property selection dialog box that you
can access from the CPL editor.
To add an object and property reference:
1. Position the cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Obj&Property. The Select Property
Reference dialog box displays (see Figure 343).

378 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Figure 343. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

3. Select the object type, name, and property you want to insert.
4. Click OK to insert the property reference into your CPL text file.

Assigning Enumerations
Tracer Summit treats all binary and multi-state properties as integers.
On is usually a 1 and Off is 0. These associations between words and inte-
gers are called enumerations. It is critical that the enumeration, once
defined, appear the same throughout the entire program (identical spell-
ing and capitalization).
To assign enumerations:
1. From the Edit menu, select Add Enum Bool. The Select Property Ref-
erence dialog box displays.
2. Select the desired property from the list.
3. Click OK. The Enumeration/Boolean dialog box displays (see
Figure 344).

Figure 344. Add Enumeration Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 379
Custom Programming Language

4. Select the desired enumeration.

The enumeration is automatically defined as an integer with the
proper syntax at the top of the CPL program. In this location, the
resulting DEFINT statement is a global variable. It can be moved to
another place in the program if desired.
5. Click OK.

Defining an Enumeration for Priority Shutdown

Say, for example, that you are writing a CPL program in which the
Present Value of a PCM (attached to AHU1) is controlled to priority shut-
down. You want to define an enumeration for priority shutdown. To do
this, you must perform the following steps (see “Example: Before Enu-
merated Booleans Program” on page 380 and “Example: After Enumer-
ated Booleans Program” on page 381 to see the effect of these steps).
To define an enumeration for priority shutdown:
1. Position the cursor at the location in the CPL program where the enu-
meration is to occur (for instance, at the location in the control state-
ment where the Present Value of the PCM is controlled).
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Enum Bool. The Select Property Ref-
erence dialog box displays.
3. Select the PCM object type, AHU1 object name, and PRESENT
VALUE object property. Then click OK. The Enumeration/Boolean
dialog box displays with the selectable enumerations listed.
4. Choose Priority Shutdown from the available list and click OK.
5. The program adds the words “Priority_Shutdown” where the cursor
was positioned.
The global variable is added to the top of the program where it auto-
matically defines Priority_Shutdown as an integer and sets it equal to
6 (6 is the integer recognized internally by the system as
Priority_Shutdown for the Present Value of the AHU1 PCM).

Example of Assigning Enumerated Booleans

The following two examples show the effect of assigning enumerated bool-
eans to a sample program.
Example: Before Enumerated Booleans Program
This is an example of a CPL text file before an enumeration is assigned.
Program AHU1_SHUTDOWN
// Written: December 15, 1992 by Ryan Smith
// Modifications:
// None
// Properties modified:
// {AHU1 PCM}.{Present Value}
/// This program is executed by Binary Input AHU1 ALARM;
/// therefore, the frequency should be set at 0 seconds.
/// This program turns the AHU Off anytime the binary input
/// AHU1 ALARM is turned On.

380 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

/// This CPL object uses the text file named AHU1SD.CPL
Defint
On = 1, // Define enumerations
Off = 0
If ({AHU1 ALARM}.{Present Value} = On) Then
// If alarm switch is turned On
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, 6, 2, SET)
// Turn the AHU Off
Else
// If alarm switch is turned Off
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, 6, 2, RELEASE)
// Release the AHU to normal control
End If
End
Example: After Enumerated Booleans Program
This is the same CPL text file after the CPL editor assigns the enumera-
tion (the changes are in boldface type).
Defint Priority_Shutdown = 6
Program AHU1_SHUTDOWN
// Written: December 15, 1992 by Ryan Smith
// Modifications:
// None
//
// Properties modified:
//{AHU1 PCM}.{Present Value}
/// This program is executed by Binary Input AHU1 ALARM;
/// therefore, the frequency should be set at 0 seconds.
/// This program turns the AHU Off anytime the binary input
/// AHU1 ALARM is turned On.
/// This CPL object uses the text file named AHU1SD.CPL
Defint
On = 1, // Define enumerations
Off = 0
IF ({AHU1 ALARM}.{Present Value} = On) Then
// If alarm switch is turned On
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, Priority_Shutdown, 2, SET)
// Turn the AHU Off
Else
// If alarm switch is turned Off
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, Priority_Shutdown, 2, RELEASE)
// Release the AHU to normal control
End If
End

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 381
Custom Programming Language

Using Arrays
Tracer Summit CPL allows arrays of objects and/or properties to be cre-
ated to reduce the number of CPL statements needed for a CPL program.
Arrays also make it easier to edit a CPL program once it has been created
by arranging objects and properties in a specific order. Arrays are typi-
cally used in CPL programs where repetitive calculations are performed
(such as programs that use FOR...NEXT statements).
The syntax for defining an array that points to objects and their proper-
ties is:
Defint BIP[6]
BIP[1]={object A}.{property}
BIP[2]={object B}.{property}
BIP[3]={object C}.{property}
BIP[4]={object D}.{property}
BIP[5]={object E}.{property}
BIP[6]={object F}.{property}

The syntax for defining an array that points to objects is:

Defobj BOP[6]
BOP[1]={object A}
BOP[2]={object B}
BOP[3]={object C}
BOP[4]={object D}
BOP[5]={object E}
BOP[6]={object F}

Example Array Program

The following example is a program that looks at the status of binary
inputs (set up in an array), goes through this array, and matches a binary
output to the binary input. The binary output might be directed to a TCM
binary output that controls a lighting relay somewhere else in the facility.
PROGRAM Motion_Status_Lights
// Written 11/20/92, by Seymour Anderson
//
// Properties modified: (BOPs)
// {Area1 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area2 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area3 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area4 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area5 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area6 Status Light}.{Present Value}
//
// Properties read: (BIPs)
// {Area1 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area2 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area3 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area4 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area5 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area6 Motion}.{Present Value}
/// This program monitors the status of several binary inputs
/// throughout the building and directly controls matching binary
/// outputs connected to the status light panel in the security station.

382 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

/// This program is executed anytime a binary input changes state.

/// This CPL object uses the text file named AREASTAT.CPL

DEFINT
Off = 0, // Enumeration for Off
On = 1, // Enumeration for On
NUMB = 6, // Define number of binary inputs and outputs
BIPS[NUMB], // Define array for binary inputs
i // Define index for FOR-NEXT statement

DEFOBJ
BOPS[NUMB]// Define array of binary outputs that will
// match the binary inputs

// Define the array of binary inputs

BIPS[1] = {Area1 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[2] = {Area2 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[3] = {Area3 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[4] = {Area4 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[5] = {Area5 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[6] = {Area6 Motion}.{Present Value}

// Define the array of binary outputs

BOPS[1] = {Area1 Status Light}
BOPS[2] = {Area2 Status Light}
BOPS[3] = {Area3 Status Light}
BOPS[4] = {Area4 Status Light}
BOPS[5] = {Area5 Status Light}
BOPS[6] = {Area6 Status Light}

For i =1 to NUMB step 1

If (BIPS[i] = On)
Then
// Turn the light BOP ON
CONTROL(BOPS[i], {Present Value}, On, 5, SET)
Else
// Turn the light BOP OFF
CONTROL(BOPS[i], {Present Value}, Off, 5, SET)

End If
Next
End

Using Saved Values

Each CPL program has 16 properties called saved values. Saved values
can store variables in memory between CPL executions, share CPL vari-
ables with other CPL programs or applications within the Tracer Summit
system, or display on a graphic.
Typically you use a saved value when you want to save a calculation from
one execution to the next (such as a timer or counter). Saved values can
be either local (defined within the current program) or referenced from
another CPL program object.
CPL variables are initialized to zero and are not saved between CPL exe-
cutions. Therefore, CPL variables must be assigned a value at the start of

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 383
Custom Programming Language

the program or otherwise a new value must be calculated each time the
CPL program runs.
An analog or binary input can be set up to reference a CPL saved value
and alarm if it exceeds the alarm limits (refer to Chapter 17, “Creating
Input/Output Objects”, for more information on setting up analog inputs).
To read or write a local saved value in your program:
1. Position the cursor where you want the saved value to reside.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement.
3. Select LOCAL.{SAVED VALUE}[ ]
4. Click OK to insert the following line into your program:
Local.{Saved Value}[ ]

5. Add a number within the square bracket to indicate the array num-
ber of the saved value (1-16).
To read or write a saved value from another CPL program:
1. Position the cursor where you want the saved value to reside.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Obj&Property. The Select Property
Reference dialog box displays.
3. Select the CPL program object from the Type list.
4. Select the CPL program name from the Name list.
5. Select the Saved Value [#] you want to reference from the property
list (see Figure 345).

Figure 345. Select Property Reference Dialog Box—Saved Value

6. Click OK. The CPL editor will insert the statement. For example:
{Chiller_Control}.{Saved Value}[7]

384 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Saved Value Program Example

In the following example, a timing function is performed, based on a local
saved value.
Program Exhaust_Fan1
// Written 3/22/97 by Eugene Jones
// Properties modified:
// {Exhaust Fan1}.{Present Value}
// Local.{Saved Value}[1]
// Properties read:
//{Warehouse Temperature}.{Present Value}
//{Warehouse Exhaust Fan Setpoint}.{Present Value}
/// This program controls the exhaust fan for the warehouse on
/// anytime the space temperature exceeds setpoint for 10 minutes.
/// This program is executed every minute to keep timers in sync.
/// This CPL object uses the text file named EXHAUST1.CPL

Defint
Off = 0,//Enumeration for Off
On = 1,//Enumeration for On
Timer_1
// If space temperature is 1 F above setpoint, start 10 minute timer
Timer_1 = Local.{Saved Value}[1]
If
({Warehouse Temperature}.{Present Value} > ({Warehouse Exhaust Fan Set-
point}.{Present Value} +1))
Then
Timer_1 = Timer_1 + 1
Else
Timer_1 = 0
End If
// Control the exhaust fan On or Off
If (Timer_1 > 10) Then
Control({Exhaust Fan1}, {Present Value}, On, 5, SET)
Else
Control({Exhaust Fan1}, {Present Value}, Off, 5, SET)
End If
// Store Timer value for the next execution
Local.{Saved Value}[1] = Timer_1
End

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 385
Custom Programming Language

Compiling a CPL Text File

Once the text file for the CPL program is created and saved as a CPL file,
your next step is to compile the program. The CPL editor analyzes the
currently loaded CPL text file for syntax errors and valid object and prop-
erty names. Compiling the text file also structures the information into a
CPL object format so that it can be sent to the Tracer Summit database.
To compile a CPL text file:
1. In the CPL editor, open the CPL text file you would like to compile.
2. From the Program menu, select Compile.
If there are syntax errors or errors in object or property names, the
Compile Report dialog box identifies each error, the type of error and
the line in the program where the compiler finds an error (see
Figure 346).

Figure 346. Compiler Report

3. Double click on the line listed in the Compile Report dialog box to go
to that line and fix the errors, or use the Go To Line command on the
Edit menu.
Depending on how the text file was edited, the line given as the loca-
tion of the syntax error may actually be the line after the location
where the error occurred. Therefore, look at the line indicated and the
lines before it when looking for syntax errors.
4. After you make your corrections, save the file.
5. Run the compile function again. Repeat this cycle (steps 2 - 4) until
the Compile Report dialog box displays “Successful Compile,” indicat-
ing that there are no errors (see Figure 347 on page 387).

386 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a CPL Object in the Database

Figure 347. Compiler Report—Successful Compile

Note:
In addition to errors, this dialog box also displays warnings. Pro-
grams can successfully compile when warnings are generated.
They fail if errors are generated.
6. After compiling successfully, click Close.
7. Save the CPL text file again. It is important to save the file after a
successful compile.

Creating a CPL Object in the Database

In this section, you will see how to use a successfully compiled CPL text
file to create a CPL object in the Tracer Summit database. The objective
is to send the compiled CPL program to be stored as an object in the
selected BCU. After the program is stored at the BCU, the BCU software
schedules the CPL program to execute at a selected frequency and per-
forms the program logic during each execution.
During this step, you will be selecting:
• The CPL object name
• The security classes
• The CPL program execution frequency (if any)
• The BCU where the CPL object will be stored
You can either create a new CPL object in the database or overwrite an
existing CPL object. To overwrite an existing CPL object see “Replacing
an Existing CPL Object in the Database” on page 389.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 387
Custom Programming Language

Creating a New CPL Object in the Database

When you have successfully compiled CPL text files saved on the PC
Workstation, the Create and Replace items on the Program menu are
available to allow you to create a CPL object in the Tracer Summit data-
base.
To create a new CPL object in the database:
1. Once you have successfully compiled the CPL text file, from the Pro-
gram menu select Create CPL Object. The CPL Program Creation
editor dialog box displays (see Figure 348).

Figure 348. CPL Program Creation Editor

The default name displays in the Program Name field. This is the
name from the program statement of the CPL text file. Do not change
the name.
2. From the BCU drop-down list, select the BCU where the CPL pro-
gram object will be stored. Store the CPL object in the same BCU that
most of the objects and properties referenced in the CPL program
reside.
3. Define the frequency with which the CPL program runs. To set this
frequency click the up/down arrows on the right side of each box. It is
recommended that CPL programs run no faster than once every 30
seconds. Normally, programs run every minute, every hour, every day,
or are event-driven, based on the functions performed in the CPL pro-
gram.
4. To assign security classes click Security Classes. (For more informa-
tion on assigning security classes, refer to Chapter 9, “Setting Up
Security—Tracer Summit System.”)

388 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a CPL Object in the Database

5. On the CPL Program Creation editor dialog box, click Create to create
the CPL object and return to the CPL editor.
A Status dialog box displays stating whether sending the CPL object
to the BCU was successful. If the PC Workstation is online with the
BCU, a “Successful Operation Online” message displays. If the PC
Workstation is offline, the CPL editor sends the CPL object to the PC
Workstation database, and a “Successful Operation Offline” message
displays. When the PC Workstation goes online, it sends the CPL
object to the selected BCU.

Replacing an Existing CPL Object in the Database

When you have successfully compiled CPL files saved on the PC worksta-
tion, the Create and Replace items on the Program menu allow you to
replace a CPL object in the Tracer Summit database.
To replace an existing CPL object in the database:
1. Once you have successfully compiled the CPL text file, from the Pro-
gram menu select Replace CPL Object. The Select CPL Program dia-
log box displays (see Figure 349).

Figure 349. Select CPL Program Dialog Box

2. Select the CPL program object to be replaced and click OK.

3. The CPL Program Replacement editor dialog displays (see Figure 350
on page 390).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 389
Custom Programming Language

Figure 350. CPL Program Replacement Editor

Note:
• In the CPL Program Replacement editor dialog box, the BCU
field is unavailable, because the program is being replaced at
the BCU where the previous program object resides.
• The default name displays in the Program Name field which is
the name of the CPL object. Do not change the name.

4. Define the frequency with which the CPL program runs. To set the
frequency click the up/down arrows on the right side of each box. It is
recommended that CPL programs run no faster than once every 30
seconds. Normally, programs run every minute, every hour, every day,
or are event-driven, based on the functions performed in the CPL pro-
gram.
5. To assign security classes, click Security Classes. (For more informa-
tion on assigning security classes, refer to Chapter 9, “Setting Up
Security—Tracer Summit System”.)
6. At the CPL Program Replacement editor, click OK to replace the CPL
object and return to the CPL editor.
A Status dialog box displays stating whether sending the CPL object
to the BCU was successful. If the PC Workstation is online with the
BCU, a “Successful Operation Online” message displays. If the PC
Workstation is offline, the CPL editor sends the CPL object to the PC
Workstation database and a “Successful Operation Offline” message
displays. When the PC Workstation goes online, it sends the CPL
object to the selected BCU.

390 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Testing a CPL Program

Testing a CPL Program

Testing (debugging) allows you to step through a specific CPL program to
view variables and properties, and to verify proper performance of the
program. You can perform CPL testing only when the PC Workstation is
online with the BCU containing the CPL object.

Note:
When a CPL program is in the debug mode, WAIT statements are
executed. For longer WAIT statements, it is recommended that
they temporarily be shortened or commented out (insert “//” or “///”
in front of the statement and recompile) before testing the CPL
program.

You will usually encounter two kinds of problems when testing a CPL pro-
gram:
• The program results in the wrong values for the program variables.
• The program halts because of a runtime error. Runtime errors are
errors that do not appear when a program is compiled, but do appear
when the program is executed.
Testing a CPL program will help you identify and resolve both types of
problems.
To test a CPL program:
1. From the Test menu, select Start Debug. The Select CPL Program
dialog box displays (see Figure 351).

Figure 351. Select CPL Program Menu

2. Select the program you want to test. Then click OK or double click the
desired program.
The background color of the CPL editor changes to cyan when the edi-
tor is in the debug (or test) mode. The first line of the program will be
highlighted, indicating that the test mode is ready to execute.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 391
Custom Programming Language

3. Select Inhibit DB Writes on the Test menu to prevent the program

outputs from being performed.

Note:
• When a CPL program is in the debug mode, the programmer is
manually running the CPL program. All outputs from the pro-
gram are performed unless the Inhibit DB Writes menu item
is selected.
• Inhibit DB Writes will prevent the program from writing to
the database, and prevent any control functions of the pro-
gram. The calculations contained in the program will be per-
formed as intended, but no outputs will be sent out.
4. If necessary, use the Set Breakpoint function on the Test menu to
manually enter a point in the program at which the program execu-
tion will stop.
A break is useful at a point in the program just before a problem area,
or for an area that you want to test more slowly by stepping through
line-by-line.
For example, to test a program you can insert a break just before a
problem area in the program. To begin the test, from the Test menu
select Run. When the program stops at the set break point, use the
Step function to execute the program line by line from that point.
5. Use the Run or Step items on the Test menu to execute the program
test.
If you click Step, only one line of the program executes. If you select
Run, the editor tries to execute the entire program until it hits a
Break or the End statement, or until a runtime error occurs.
6. From the Test menu, select View Variable. The Variable Viewer dialog
box displays (see Figure 352 on page 393).

392 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Testing a CPL Program

Figure 352. Variable Viewer Dialog Box

7. When you encounter a problem that involves editing the CPL pro-
gram, from the Test menu, select Stop Debug. If the program encoun-
ters a runtime error, see the section “CPL Error Codes” on page 394
for explanations of the error codes and possible solutions.
8. Load the original CPL text file back into the CPL editor. You should
not use the decompiled program used for the test to do your edits. The
original CPL text file contains the all the extra comment lines that
are not saved in the compiled program.
9. Edit the CPL text file to fix the problems encountered during the test.
10. Compile the program (see “Compiling a CPL Text File” on page 386).
11. Replace the CPL object in the database (see “Replacing an Existing
CPL Object in the Database” on page 389).
12. Test the new CPL program again. Repeat these steps for testing a
CPL program until the program runs properly and gives the desired
results.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 393
Custom Programming Language

CPL Error Codes

Table 9 shows the error codes that are displayed when you encounter a
problem during testing of a CPL program object. Use the Possible Cause
and Possible Solution columns of the table to help you fix your CPL pro-
gram when one of these errors is encountered. If problems persist contact
your local Trane representative.

Table 9. CPL Error Codes

Error Possible Cause Possible Solution

Error-30 Requested unit is down. The CPL object is trying to access a property in a BCU
that is currently not available.
Error-39 An invalid index was provided for The array of Local.{Saved Value} properties in each CPL
accessing an array element. object has only 16 elements. Trying to access element
17 or higher causes this error. For example, the follow-
ing compiles, but causes this error.
Num=21
For I=1 to Num step 1
Local.{Saved Value}[i]=VAV[i].{Zone Temperature}
Next
Error-103 The CPL program’s Get Property table The property referred to in the CPL routine could not be
entry call failed. found for that object.
Error-250 The CPL program has a bad symbol Recompile and replace the CPL object.
type.
Error-251 The CPL program has a bad expression A bad expression exists in the routine. A common error
stack. is to forget to add the property in a statement that is
intended for testing the property. For example,
If ({Area 1} = 2) Then
rather than
If ({Area 1}.{Present Value}= 2) Then
Error-252 CPL program has a bad program stack. Adjust the Context Size property of the CPL object. The
default context size is 624. Change the value from 624 to
1248. If the error still occurs, change the value to 1872. If
the routine then runs, change the value to 1560. Keep
adjusting the value to find the proper context size.
Error-253 CPL program has an invalid symbol Recompile and replace the CPL object.
stack offset.
Error-254 CPL program has a bad BCX_ITRP exe- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
cution queue or the entry was not found.
Error-255 The CPL program has an invalid/unsup- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
ported token operation.
Error-256 The CPL program has a general problem Recompile and replace the CPL object.
with a symbol.
Error-257 The CPL program has overflowed its P Adjust the Context Size property of the CPL object. The
stack or E stack. default context size is 624. Change the value from 624 to
1248. If the error still occurs, change the value to 1872. If
the routine then runs, change the value to 1560. Keep
adjusting the value to find the proper context size.

394 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 CPL Error Codes

Table 9. CPL Error Codes (Continued)

Error Possible Cause Possible Solution

Error-258 CPL program has an array index that is An array index is too big or too small. You may have
out of bounds. defined the array to have three elements, and then tried
to perform an operation on array element four. Also
remember that 0 is not a valid array index.
Error-259 The CPL program has a bad assignment Recompile and replace the CPL object.
(usually unequal types).
Error-260 The CPL program has an unknown Recompile and replace the CPL object.
token.
Error-261 The CPL program has a BCX_ITRP that Recompile and replace the CPL object.
had a problem looking up symbol (usu-
ally invalid type).
Error-262 The CPL program parameter and argu- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
ment types do not match.
Error-263 The CPL program has underflowed its Recompile and replace the CPL object.
expression evaluation stack.
Error-264 The CPL program has underflowed its Recompile and replace the CPL object.
program stack.
Error-265 The CPL program (or BCX_ITRP) has Recompile and replace the CPL object.
problem with nested If statements.
Error-266 The CPL program has attempted to Debug the routine to find where the divide by zero error
divide by zero. is occurring. Determine whether a variable is not being
initialized (variables are always 0 unless initialized to
another value). Question whether the MIN/MAX opera-
tors or an IF-THEN statement can be used to prevent the
variable in the denominator from going to 0.
Error-267 The CPL program has a bad storage Recompile and replace the CPL object.
address for symbol.
Error-268 The CPL program is too small to be cor- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
rect.
Error-269 The CPL context is too small to be cor- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
rect.
Error-307 An invalid property size was given. Debug the routine to find where the property size error
is occurring. A common error is controlling a binary out-
put to a value other than 0 or 1.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 395
Custom Programming Language

396 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 26

Using the Navigation Tree

The navigation tree is a convenient and intuitive way for users to find and
display information in Tracer Summit. The navigation tree displays next
to the Tracer Summit application window. Daily operators can see where
they are in the system and where they can go. Daily operators can also
use the navigation tree to connect with sites or gather information about
their system.
The ability to connect to Tracer 100 and Tracker sites by double-clicking
is available in the Tracer 100/Tracker Communication and Enterprise
Management packages. Connecting to BCU sites by double-clicking a
node on the navigation tree is available in Tracer Summit as a standard
feature.
Each item on the tree is called a node. For a description of nodes and their
functions, see “Different Types of Nodes” on page 399. Nodes appear auto-
matically as you build sites and add objects. To make your navigation tree
logical and easy to use, arrange the tree to represent the way your organi-
zation is set up. For example, if sites are organized in geographical
regions, arrange nodes based on this geographical layout.
Depending on security level, users can:
• Rearrange an existing navigation tree using drag and drop and cut
and paste commands
• Connect to or disconnect from a site
• Add and remove nodes
• Change the graphic associated with a UCM, area, or site

Note:
Except for systems with shared databases, the navigation tree
is unique to each workstation. You cannot change a navigation
tree on one workstation and have these changes reflected auto-
matically on another workstation. To copy navigation tree
changes from one workstation to another, back up the site data-
base of the workstation where you made the changes and
restore it to the other workstation.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 397
Using the Navigation Tree

The Navigation Tree

The navigation tree graphically depicts where in the system you are and
where you can go. Think of the site node as a place where other sites or
nodes exist. Nodes outside the site node belong to the system. Nodes
inside the site node belong to the site (see Figure 353).
When a node has nodes inside it, a plus (+) symbol displays in front of the
node. Click the + symbol to expand the node and to display the nodes
inside it. After you expand a node, a minus (-) symbol displays in front of
the node. Click the - symbol to collapse the node.

Figure 353. Sample View of the Navigation Tree with Various Nodes

System node
Group of sites node
Tracer 100 site node
Panel node
Macro node
Tracer Summit BCU
site node

Custom site graphic

Area node

UCM nodes

Tracker site node

Custom global
graphic node

398 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Different Types of Nodes

Different Types of Nodes

The ten types of nodes found on the navigation tree appear in Table 10.
For further information about nodes, see “Basic Considerations in Moving
Nodes” on page 402.

Note:
In the following paragraphs, we refer to connecting to a site by
double-clicking a site node on the navigation tree. Connecting
to sites automatically when you double-click on them is set up
in the System Options editor (see “Setting Connection Features
of the Navigation Tree” on page 580). For more information, see
“Connecting to a Site from the Tree” on page 401.

Table 10. Navigation Tree Nodes: Types, Icons, and Descriptions

Node Type Icon Description/Action

System The Tracer Summit system node belongs to the system. All other nodes are
inside the system node. The system node is the collection of all site nodes.

Tracer Summit A site node is any site in the system that belongs to the system. Site nodes
BCU Site display after you create, restore, or upload a site.
When you double-click on a site node, its linked graphic appears in the appli-
Tracer 100 Site cation window. Double-click the site node again to connect to it or to program
off-line.
Tracker Site When you connect to a Tracer 100 or Tracker site, the terminal emulation
screen appears. When the site is a multiple-panel Tracer 100 unit-to-unit site,
the panel to which you connect is unit 1 (the COP).
Panel A panel node appears for each remote unit that you create for legacy Tracer
100 and Tracker sites. Double-click a panel node to connect to it or to program
off-line.
Group of Sites; The group of sites node is a collection of sites. It is a custom global graphic
also known as a node belonging to the system site. A group of sites node differs from a cus-
Custom Global tom global graphic node in the following way. A group of sites node has at
Graphic Without site least one site node inside it. The custom global graphic node has no site
nodes, nodes inside it. The group of sites node is not associated with groups.
appears as: When you double-click a group of sites node, its linked graphic displays in the
... application window.
Custom Site … The custom site graphic node is found inside a site node. When you double-
Graphic click a custom site graphic node, its linked graphic displays in the application
window. You can also double-click the node to connect to it or to program off-
line.
Area Node … An area node appears for each area defined in a BCU site. UCM and custom
site graphic nodes are commonly found inside area nodes. Double-click an
area node to see its linked graphic in the application window. If you are not
connected already, the Tracer Summit software also connects you to the site
to which the area node belongs.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 399
Using the Navigation Tree

Table 10. Navigation Tree Nodes: Types, Icons, and Descriptions (Continued)

Node Type Icon Description/Action

UCM Node … A UCM node appears for each UCM defined in a BCU site. UCM nodes are
grouped together, most often inside area or custom site graphic nodes. Dou-
ble-click a UCM node to see its linked graphic in the application window. If
you are not connected already, the Tracer Summit software also connects you
to the site to which the UCM belongs.
Macro … Macro nodes are found inside Tracer 100 and Tracker sites. When you are
connected to a site and you double-click a macro node, it runs regardless of
what site panel is active.

Using the Navigation Tree

Use the navigation tree to access nodes, sites, equipment, and macros.

Accessing the Tree

◆ From the View menu, select Navigation Tree.
• To expand the entire tree, double-click the system node.
• To collapse the tree, double-click the system node.

Using the Tree Menu and Pop-up Menus

The selections that are available from the Tree menu or pop-up menus
depend on the type of node you have selected. Therefore, using the pop-up
menu is a convenient way to access actions such as Cut, Paste, Add/Edit/
Change/Remove Graphics, Connect Site, Add Macro, and so on.
To access a pop-up menu:
◆ Right-click the mouse on a node in the navigation tree to display a
pop-up menu specific to that type of node (see Figure 354).

Figure 354. Navigation Tree Pop-up Menu

400 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Navigation Tree

Accessing Sites and Equipment

◆ To access a node and its equipment, perform one of the following:
• Click the + symbol to expand a node to display nodes inside it.
• Click the - symbol to collapse a node when nodes inside it are dis-
played.
• Double-click a node to open it. This opens the site but does not
necessarily connect to it. See “Connecting to a Site from the Tree”
for more information on connecting to sites when you double-click
their nodes.

Connecting to a Site from the Tree

When you use the navigation tree to connect to a site, you can only use
the connection method you set up in site configuration in the Site Connec-
tion Wizard. For more information, see “Creating a New Site” on page 34.
You can configure the nodes on a workstation tree to automatically con-
nect to sites when you double-click site nodes or any node(s) inside them.
For more information about this procedure, see “Changing Advanced Set-
tings” on page 575.
◆ To automatically connect to a site, double-click the site node or any
node inside that site.

Note:
The advanced option for connecting automatically might not
work due to workstation hardware limitations. For example, if
your workstation does not have enough modems to communi-
cate simultaneously with every remote site, the system displays
an error message.

Disconnecting from a Site

◆ While connected to the site, from the Connect menu, select Discon-
nect. The site is disconnected from the workstation but stays open for
offline programming.

Closing a Site
◆ With the site open, from the Connect menu select Close Site.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 401
Using the Navigation Tree

Refreshing the Navigation Tree

The navigation tree can display up to 32,768 nodes. Any node created
afterwards does not display until you make room for it by closing other
nodes or sites. When you try to add node 32,769, for example, the naviga-
tion will not display the new node until you collapse a site. Collapsing and
expanding sites refreshes the tree.

Note:
Use the Refresh command as a quick way to collapse all nodes
in the tree.

Creating Nodes
There are several ways to create nodes. These include site configuration,
site uploads, site restorations, the Area editor, the Keyboard Macro editor,
restoring graphics, and the Graphics editor. Once you add nodes to the
tree, you can further modify them by cutting and pasting or dragging and
dropping them inside other nodes.

Basic Considerations in Moving Nodes

“Different Types of Nodes” on page 399 describes and explains the ten
types of nodes. Note the difference between a system node and a site
node. You can move site nodes but not the system node. Table 11 lists
what nodes you can and cannot move.

Table 11. Moving Nodes

You can move You cannot move

Custom graphic nodes System nodes inside site nodes

Area nodes System nodes inside any of the
objects belonging to a site
UCM nodes Nodes that belong to a site outside of
that site
Macro nodes Any node with nodes inside of lower-
level nodes
Site nodes Panel nodes (Tracer 100 or Tracker)
Macro nodes inside other macro
nodes

402 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Nodes

Cutting and Pasting Nodes

1. Click the node that you want to cut and paste.
• For consecutive nodes, click on the first node, then hold down the
Shift key and click on the next node.
• Otherwise, click on the first node, then hold down the Ctrl key
and click on each additional node.
2. From the Tree menu, select Cut.
3. Click the node in which you want to paste the cut node.
4. From the Tree menu, select Paste.

Dragging and Dropping Nodes

For an example of dragging and dropping nodes, see “Grouping Nodes” on
page 404. You can also consult the procedure for dragging and dropping
nodes explained in the Daily Operations guide.

Creating Nodes that Belong to the System

Some nodes are associated with the system and some nodes are associ-
ated with specific sites. Site nodes and custom global graphics, for exam-
ple, belong to the system. Panel and macro nodes belong to specific sites.
All nodes are found inside the system icon. For more information, see
“Different Types of Nodes” on page 399.
Consult the following procedures for creating nodes that belong to the
system.
• You create site nodes during site configuration, uploads, and restora-
tions. For more information, see Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Sum-
mit BCU Sites” and Chapter 8, “Defining Tracer 100 or Tracker
Sites.”
• To create custom global graphic nodes, access the Graphics editor. For
more information, see “About Site and Global Graphics” on page 501.
• To restore custom global graphics, see “Restoring Global Graphics” on
page 646.

Creating Nodes Inside Site Nodes

Consult the following procedures for creating nodes inside site nodes.
• To create custom site graphic nodes, use the Graphics editor. For more
information, see “About Site and Global Graphics” on page 501.
• To restore custom site graphics, see “Restoring Site Graphics” on
page 647.
• To create UCM nodes, use the UCM editor. For more information, see
“Creating a New UCM” on page 191.
• To create area nodes, use the Area editor. For more information, see
“Creating an Area” on page 305.
• If you want to create a node in a Tracer 100 or Tracker site, create a
device (remote unit) or a macro in the Keyboard Macro editor. For

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 403
Using the Navigation Tree

more information, see “Creating a Remote Unit for Tracer 100 Sites”
on page 125 and “Creating a Keyboard Macro” on page 415.

Grouping Nodes
Group nodes to better organize your site. For example, create a custom
site graphic titled UCMs and then group all UCMs under the graphic
node.
To group nodes:
1. Click the first node and left-click the mouse.
2. Drag it onto the second node.
3. Release the left mouse button. The first node moves inside the second
node.

Finding a Node
Use the following procedure to find a node. For example, if you want to
find a specific piece of equipment but have forgotten which site it belongs
to, use Find.
Tracer Summit does not search sites for which you do not have security
access. If you use Find to locate a node that is inside a site to which you do
not have access, then Tracer Summit will not find the node for you.
Any user, except Nobody Logged On, can find nodes outside the site level,
regardless of their security level. Nodes that exist outside the site level
include custom global graphic, group of sites, and site.
To find a node on the navigation tree:
1. From the Tree menu, select Find. The Find Item in Tree dialog box
displays.
2. Type the name of the node that you are looking for in the Look for
field. Use wildcards if you want. (See online Help for information on
wildcard search commands.)
3. Click Find. The Tracer Summit software searches for the node and
highlights it when found. Otherwise, a dialog box informs you that
the node was not found.
4. Click Close.

404 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying the Tree

Modifying the Tree

The following procedures describe how to modify the navigation tree.
These procedures include removing nodes, adding back nodes you
removed, changing the graphic of a node, and modifying macro nodes.

Assigning Graphics to Nodes

You can assign the graphic for a Tracer Summit BCU site object, UCM
object, or area object on the tree. You cannot, however, assign the graphic
for a custom graphic object on the tree. This is because custom graphic
nodes always represent themselves.
The only types of nodes that do not have a graphic associated with them
are the system node, panels, and keyboard macros. You cannot assign
graphics to these nodes.
To change the graphic assigned to a node:
1. Select the desired node to modify.
2. From the Tree menu, select Change Graphic. The Change Graphic
dialog box appears (see Figure 355).

Figure 355. Change Graphic Dialog Box

3. Select the type of graphic that you want to use for the selected node:
• Click Standard for a list of available standard graphics.
• Click Site for a list of site-only graphics (graphics created just for
the site where the selected node resides).
• Click Global to display a list of available global standard and cus-
tom graphics.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 405
Using the Navigation Tree

4. From the Graphics list, select the graphic you want to assign to this
node.
5. Click OK to link the node to the selected graphic.

Editing the Graphic of a Node

1. Double-click the desired node to modify.
2. From the Setup menu, select Graphics Editor. The Graphics editor
displays.
3. To edit the graphic, follow the procedures described in “Editing
Graphic Properties” on page 468.

Removing Node(s)
You can remove custom graphic, UCM, area, and macro objects from the
navigation tree. You cannot remove the system node, site nodes, or Tracer
100 and Tracker panel nodes. To remove these, use the Delete Object util-
ity. For more information, see “Deleting a Site” on page 658.
For example, if you remove a custom graphic node that has UCMs in it,
the UCM nodes under the custom graphic node will also be removed.
If you try to remove a site node that has a macro inside it, the macro node
cannot be removed. Therefore, it relocates inside a higher level site node
or inside the system node.
To remove a node from the navigation tree:
1. Click the node(s) that you want to remove.
2. From the Tree menu, select Remove Graphic/Remove Macro.
If the selected node has nodes inside it, the Node Removal Confirma-
tion dialog box appears asking you whether you are sure you want to
remove the node and all nodes under it.
3. Click OK on the Node Removal Confirmation dialog box. The nodes
are removed from the tree.

406 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Modifying the Tree

Adding Back a Removed Node

When you remove one or more nodes from the navigation tree, you can
later add them back to the tree without recreating their objects, as long as
the objects they reference have not been deleted from the system. The
nodes are added back to a site node or the Tracer Summit system node
(depending upon where they were located originally).

Note:
• A graphical node can only appear in the tree once.
• Any macro node can be shared between many sites, so it
might appear in several sites at a time.

To add a previously removed node:

1. Click in the tree where you want to add back a removed node:
• For previously removed custom graphic nodes that belong to the
system, click on any site or custom global graphic node.
• For previously removed custom graphic nodes that belong to spe-
cific site, click anywhere within that site.
2. From the Tree menu, select Add Graphic. The Add Graphics dialog
box appears. The dialog box displays the nodes that were previously
removed.
3. Select the node(s) you want to add back to the tree.
4. Click OK. The node appears back in the tree.

Note:
Since the tree automatically sorts nodes alphanumerically, the
node might not appear in the spot you wanted it. In that case,
drag and drop or cut and paste it where it belongs.

Editing a Tracer 100 Keyboard Macro from the

Navigation Tree
◆ Select the desired macro to edit. From the Setup menu, select Key-
board Macro editor. The Select Keyboard Macro dialog box appears.
For more information, see “Creating a Keyboard Macro” on page 415.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 407
Using the Navigation Tree

408 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 27

Connecting to Tracer 100 and

Tracker EMTK Panels

Once you install the Tracer 100/Tracker Communication package, you

can connect to Tracer 100 or Tracker EMTK panels in terminal emulation
mode, create .SAV files for Tracer 100 panels, and create keyboard macros
for T100 and Tracker terminal emulation sessions.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 409
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

Background Considerations for

Connecting to Tracer 100 or Tracker
EMTK Panels
Important issues to consider when you connect to a Tracer 100 or Tracker
EMTK panel include port connections, the navigation tree, and altering
panel memory.

IMPORTANT
Tracer Summit supports a connection to Tracer 100 panels at version
14.4 or higher and Tracker EMTK panels at version 5.0 or higher. You can
not connect to the new Tracker BMTK (Tracker III).

Configuring Port Connections

Terminal emulation occurs only through connected sites. Tracer Summit
workstations connect to a Tracer 100 or Tracker (EMTK) by means of
direct connection or modem. In determining the means by which you com-
municate with a Tracer 100 or Tracker panel, the port that you connect to
on the panel logic board is important.
You can directly connect to port 1 or port 2 of the Tracer 100 for terminal
emulation. You can only connect by means of a modem to port 2. Remem-
ber the following when you configure Tracer 100 and Tracker panels:
• Port 1 of the Tracer 100 logic board does not support the BMN proto-
col. This port only handles terminal emulation
• The Tracer Summit workstation—like the BMN workstation—only
supports connection through port 2. Port 2 can handle terminal emu-
lation and BMN protocol simultaneously.
• You can directly connect the Tracer Summit workstation to port 2 on
the Tracer 100 panel or connect to port 2 through a modem
• Port 2 handles ASCII mode and BMN protocols simultaneously. Using
both, however, might cause the terminal emulation menus to slow
down and miss key strokes.

Note:
If you have several Tracer 100 or Trackers connected to the
Tracer Summit workstation, only one site can use the terminal
emulator at a time.

For more information about configuring the Tracer 100 or Tracker panel
for direct or modem connection, see the Tracer 100 Series Programming
guide (EMTB-PG-11), Tracer 100 Installation guide (EMTB-IN-12), or the
Installation Guide for Tracer 100i, Tracer L, and Tracer Chiller Plant
Manager (EMTF-IN-6).

410 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Background Considerations for Connecting to Tracer 100 or Tracker EMTK Panels

Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Sites on the Navigation

Tree
You can configure the Tracer 100 or Tracker site nodes in the navigation
tree to automatically connect to a Tracer 100 or Tracker site and open a
terminal emulation session.

Note:
• Expanding and collapsing the tree by clicking the + and -
symbols does not connect you to a site.
• When you configure the navigation tree to open a site auto-
matically when you double-click on it, the automatic con-
nection applies to all sites or no sites.

For more information about terminal emulation, see the Tracer 100 Daily
Operations guide.
For more information about selecting this capability in system options,
see “Setting Connection Features of the Navigation Tree” on page 580.
For information about the navigation tree and how it connects to Tracer
100 and Tracker panels, see “Connecting to a Site from the Tree” on
page 401.

Altering Panel Memory

Terminal emulation is one of two methods to change settings in a Tracer
100 or Tracker EMTK panel. Another method of changing the settings in
a Tracer 100 panel is to restore a site (see “Restoring a Tracer 100 Site”
on page 650).
Any memory alterations, such as system expansion, that you make while
in terminal emulation mode do not show up in Tracer Summit until the
panel is scanned as part of normal processing. If you have the Building
Management or Enterprise Management package you can scan the site
any time using the Task Manager (see “Run Immediate Scan on a Single
Site” on page 221).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 411
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

Creating .SAV files for Tracer 100 Panels

Use the following procedure to back up all the information in a Tracer 100
panel and save it to a .SAV file. If a site has multiple panels, use this pro-
cedure to back up each panel. When you are disconnected from a site,
Tracer Summit automatically connects to the panel and creates the file,
and then disconnects (if you choose to let it).

Note:
A SAV file differs from a .BDB file, which is created during
daily operations. A .BDB file contains the information that has
been scanned from the panel into the workstation database.
The .BDB file information for Tracer 100 or Tracker sites only
includes schedules, calculated binaries and analogs, and
generic points. A .SAV file, on the other hand, contains all the
information from the panel. The .SAV file is used to restore
Tracer 100 panels (see “Restoring a Tracer 100 Panel” on
page 668).

With the Tracer 100/Tracker Communications package installed, you can

back up individual Tracer 100 panels. If you want to back up entire
Tracer 100 site with multiple unit-to-unit panels or groups of sites, pur-
chase the Building Management or Enterprise Management package. In
these packages, the Task Manager application has an option that backs
up all defined panels of a Tracer 100 site (see “Backing Up Sites” on
page 218).
To create a SAV file:
1. From the Tools menu, select Backup. A submenu appears.
2. Select Remote. The Backup a Remote dialog box appears (see
Figure 356).

Figure 356. Backup a Remote Dialog Box

3. From the Remote Unit to Backup list, select the panel to back up.
Click the Browse button to select the directory where you want to
store the SAV file.
The name of the backup file will always be *.SAV, where * is the name
of the remote unit as defined in Tracer 100 site configuration.

412 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Keyboard Macros

4. Click OK. If you are not already connected to the site, Tracer Summit
connects to the panel and performs the backup. While the backup is
in process (which may take up to 15 minutes), you cannot perform
any other action in terminal emulation.
5. If Tracer Summit had to connect to the site, at the end of the backup,
a dialog box appears that asks whether you want to go online with the
panel. You must respond within two minutes or Tracer Summit dis-
connects.

Creating Keyboard Macros

The Keyboard Macro editor provides access to one feature that is unique
to Tracer 100 and Tracker sites. This is the keyboard macro, also known
as the keystroke macro by many BMN users.
The keyboard macro sends a sequence of ASCII characters and control
codes to the Tracer 100 or Tracker panel while in terminal emulation
mode. This coded sequence is the same as those a user might type at the
command line of the BMN interface.
Keyboard macros make navigation through a Tracer 100 or Tracker
screen quick and efficient. In BMN, all the user has to do is run the
macro, and the BMN interface finds and locates the menu/submenu/item
that the user requires. Tracer Summit has taken these macros and auto-
mated them. Now with Tracer Summit, you can run these macros by dou-
ble-clicking them on the navigation tree or from a pop-up menu.
Macros, however, are not set up to take you between panels. Tracer Sum-
mit handles navigation between panels based on the setup in Site Config-
uration. It does not rely on the keyboard macros to do this.
Tracer Summit ships with a standard library of predefined keyboard mac-
ros. For detailed tables listing these macros and the names they display
on the navigation tree, see “List of Predefined Keystroke Macros” on
page 418.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 413
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

Accessing the Keyboard Macro Editor

1. Log on to a Tracer 100 or Tracker site.
2. From the Setup menu, select Keyboard Macro Editor. The Select Key-
board Macro dialog box appears (see Figure 357).

Figure 357. Select Keyboard Macro Dialog Box

3. Select a Macro and click OK.

4. The Keyboard Macro editor displays (see Figure 358).

Figure 358. Keyboard Macro Editor

414 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Keyboard Macros

Creating a Keyboard Macro

Use the following procedure to add macros to a site or multiple sites.

Note:
The Tracer 100 or Tracker terminal emulator application does
not validate keyboard macros that run during the session. The
Tracer Summit software assumes that you have properly set up
the macro to locate and find the correct location in the Tracer
100 or Tracker menu structure.

To create a keyboard macro:

1. Log on to a Tracer 100 or Tracker site.
2. From the Setup menu, select Keyboard Macro Editor. The Select Key-
board Macro dialog box appears (see Figure 357 on page 414).
3. Click New. The New Keyboard Macro Name dialog appears.
4. Type a unique name for the new macro.
Make your macro name generic enough to remember across numer-
ous sites but specific enough to remember what function it performs.
5. Click OK. The Keyboard Macro editor appears (see Figure 358 on
page 414).
6. Click the Macro Sequence field and type or edit the macro sequence
that you want to run when the macro is chosen. The text entered in
this field is the keystroke sequence that Tracer Summit sends to the
panel.
7. In the Available Site(s) list, select the site(s) to which you want to
apply the macro.
8. Click Add to add the site(s) to the Selected Site(s) list.
9. Click Save. The macro object is saved to the database of the worksta-
tion. The navigation tree is updated to include the macro node under
the sites you specified.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 415
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

Selecting Predefined Macros

Tracer Summit has certain predefined keyboard macros that you can
select without having to enter them manually. For lists of these pre-
defined macros, see “List of Predefined Keystroke Macros” on page 418.
To select predefined macros:
1. With the Keyboard Macro editor open, click the Browse button. The
Macro Reference Table appears (see Figure 359).
2. Click the Panel Main Menu arrow and select a macro type (see
Figure 359).

Figure 359. Macro Reference Table Dialog Box and Pull-down Menu

3. From Submenu Options, select the desired macro (see Figure 360).

Figure 360. Macro Reference Table Dialog Box with a Selected Macro

416 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Keyboard Macros

4. Click OK. The Keyboard Macro editor appears (see Figure 358 on
page 414). The name of the macro displays in the Macro Name field.
The macro sequence displays in the Macro Sequence field.
5. In the Available Site(s) list, select the site(s) to which you want to
apply the macro.
6. Click Add to add the site(s) to the Selected Site(s) list.
7. Click Save. The macro object is saved to the database of the worksta-
tion. The navigation tree is updated to include the macro node under
the sites you specified.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 417
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

List of Predefined Keystroke Macros

The following tables list details for the following three types of predefined
keyboard macros: miscellaneous, Tracer 100, and Tracker.

Miscellaneous Keyboard Macros

Table 12 lists keyboard macros that perform general functions on a termi-
nal emulation menu.

Table 12. Miscellaneous Macros

Function Keystroke Sequence

Acknowledge A
Help H
List L
Menu M
Next N
Panel Main Menu 9M
Previous P

Tracer 100 Predefined Keyboard Macros

Table 13 through Table 20 list keyboard macros that navigate you to spe-
cific places in a specific terminal emulation screen of a site.
The Node Name column contains the name of the keyboard macro as it
appears in the navigation tree and the terminal emulation pop-up menu.
The Keystroke Sequence column displays the actual characters that
make up the content of the macro; that is, the sequence of characters sent
to the terminal emulation interface.

Table 13. Event Log Menu Macro

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Event Log 9M1S

418 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 List of Predefined Keystroke Macros

Table 14. Building Status Menu Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Building Status-main menu 9M2S

Binary Input Status 9M2S1S1S
Analog Input Status 9M2S1S2S
Meter Input Status 9M2S1S3S
Tracer Rooftop Analog Status 9M2S1S4S
Binary Output Status 9M2S1S5S
Tracer Rooftop Status 9M2S1S6S
Zone Status 9M2S1S7S
Calculated Binary Status 9M2S1S8S
TIM Equipment Status 9M2S1S9S
TIM Analog Status 9M2S1S10S
Calculated Analog Status 9M2S1S11S
Analog Output Status 9M2S1S12S
Global Binary Input Status 9M2S1S13S
Global Binary Output Status 9M2S1S14S
Global Analog Input Status 9M2S1S15S
Global Analog Output Status 9M2S1S16S
SCP Status 9M2S1S17S
UCM Analog Input Status 9M2S1S18S
UCM Binary Input Status 9M2S1S19S
VAV CU Group Output Status 9M2S1S20S
Global UCM Output Status 9M2S1S21S
AHU Output Status 9M2S1S22S
UCM Binary Output Status 9M2S1S23S
UCM Analog Output Status 9M2S1S24S
TCM Status 9M2S1S25S
CSC Output Status 9M2S1S26S
Scroll Chiller Output Status 9M2S1S27S
PCM Output Status 9M2S1S28S
VariTrac I CM Output Status 9M2S1S29S
Voyager Micro Rooftop Status 9M2S1S30S
Fan Coil CU Group Status 9M2S1S31S
Fan Coil CU Status 9M2S1S32S
VAV CU Status 9M2S1S33S
RTA-RTW Chiller Output Status 9M2S1S34S
WS Heat Pump Status 9M2S1S35S

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 419
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

Table 14. Building Status Menu Macros (Continued)

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

VAV CU II Group Output Status 9M2S1S36S

VAV CU II Status 9M2S1S37S
Generic Interface Node Status 9M2S1S38S
† Terminal Unit Controller Status 9M2S1S39S
‡ VariTrac II CCP Group Status 9M2S1S40S
‡ VariTrac II CCP Status 9M2S1S41S
† CenTraVac/RTHB UCP2 Status 9M2S1S42S
† Absorption UCP2 Chiller Status 9M2S1S43S
IntelliPak Rooftop Status 9M2S1S44S
UPCM Status 9M2S1S45S
‡ Voyager Commercial RTU Status 9M2S1S46S
(Referencing BAS-EB-25, Tracer 100 Series Software Versions)
† V14.4 added communication and control capabilities for the UCP2
CenTraVac chiller (type 42), the UCP2 Absorption chiller (type 43), and
the WS Heat Pump TUC (type 39).
‡ V15.0 added communication and control capabilities for the VariTrac
II CCP (types 40 & 41) and Voyager Commercial 27.5 to 50-ton rooftop
units (type 46).

Table 15. ICS Equipment Status Main Menu Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

ICS Equipment Status -main menu 9M3S

Unit Controller Status 9M3S1S
Tracer Rooftops 9M3S1S6S
TIM Equipment 9M3S1S9S
SCP 9M3S1S17S
Air Handler Outputs 9M3S1S22S
TCM Outputs 9M3S1S25S
CSC Outputs 9M3S1S26S
Scroll Chiller Outputs 9M3S1S27S
PCM Outputs 9M3S1S28S
VariTrac ICM Outputs 9M3S1S29S
Voyager Micro Rooftops 9M3S1S30S
Fan Coil Command Units 9M3S1S32S
VAV Command Units 9M3S1S33S
RTA-RTW Chiller Outputs 9M3S1S34S
WS Heat Pumps 9M3S1S35S
VAV Command Unit II 9M3S1S37S

420 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 List of Predefined Keystroke Macros

Table 15. ICS Equipment Status Main Menu Macros (Continued)

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Terminal Unit Controllers 9M3S1S39S

VariTrac II CCP 9M3S1S41S
CenTraVac UCP2 Chillers 9M3S1S42S
Absorption UCP2 Chillers 9M3S1S43S
IntelliPak Rooftops 9M3S1S44S
UPCM 9M3S1S45S
Voyager Commercial Rooftops 9M3S1S46S
Chiller Sequencing Status 9M3S2S
Chiller System Status 9M3S2S1S
Chiller Unit A Status 9M3S2S2S
Chiller Unit B Status 9M3S2S3S
Chiller Unit C Status 9M3S2S4S
Chiller Unit D Status 9M3S2S5S
Chiller Unit E Status 9M3S2S6S
Chiller Unit F Status 9M3S2S7S

Table 16. Operator Logon/off Menu Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Operator Logon and Logoff 9M4S

Table 17. Report & Summaries Menu Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Reports and Summaries -main menu 9M5SL

Current Summary Report 9M5S1S1S+$
Monthly Summary Report 9M5S1S2S+$
33-Day Energy Report 9M5S1S2S+$
12-Month Energy Report 9M5S1S4S+$
12-Month Meter Report 9M5S1S5S+$
7-Day Override Time Report 9M5S1S6S+$
Monthly Override Time Report 9M5S1S7S+$
7-Day Temperature Report 9M5S1S8S+$
12-Month Degree Days Report 9M5S1S9S+$
SCP Chiller 12 Month Summaries 9M5S1S10SL
Trend Log Report 9M5S1S11SL
Totalizing Report 9M5S1S12S+$

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 421
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

Table 17. Report & Summaries Menu Macros (Continued)

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

RTA-RTW Chiller Report 9M5S1S13SL

Custom Reports – Monthly 9M5S1S14S1SL
Custom Reports – 12 Month 9M5S1S14S2SL

Table 18. Building Control Menu Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Building Control Menu 9M6S

Building Control On/Off 9M6S1S
Zone Setpoints 9M6S2S
Time of Day 9M6S3S
Duty Cycle 9M6S4S
Timed Override 9M6S5S
Demand Limiting 9M6S6S
Trend Log 9M6S7S
Air Balance 9M6S8S
Boolean Processing 9M6S9S
Run Time/Maintenance 9M6S10S
Expanded Message 9M6S11S
Process Control Language 9M6S12S
DDC 9M6S13S
Priority Control 9M6S14S
Totalizing 9M6S15S
Chiller Sequencing 9M6S16S
Custom Reports 9M6S17S

Table 19. Keyboard Timed Override Menu Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Keyboard Timed Override 9M7S

422 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 List of Predefined Keystroke Macros

Table 20. System Setup Menu Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Building Control On/Off 9M8S1S

Time and Dates 9M8S2S
Input/Output Data 9M8S3S
System Expansion 9M8S4S4S
System Configuration 9M8S5S
System Security 9M8S6S
ICS Equip Local Programming 9M8S7S
Status Display Definition 9M8S8S
Link A – ICS Equip Address 9M8S9S1S
Link B – ICS Equip Address 9M8S9S2S
Link C – ICS Equip Address 9M8S9S3S

Tracker Predefined Keyboard Macros

Table 21 lists keyboard macros that only run on Tracker panels.

Table 21. Tracker Macros

Node Name Keystroke Sequence

Alarm Log 9M8S1S

Bldg Equip – Varitrac II CCP 9M8S2S
Bldg Equip – TCM 9M8S3S
Bldg Equip – Slave TCM 9M8S4S4S
Bldg Equip – Voyager Rooftop 9M8S5S
Demand Limiting Status (Stat16) 9M8S6S
Trend Log Status 9M8S7S
Current Day Energy Log (Stat16) 9M8S8S
35 Day Energy Log (Stat16) 9M8S9S1S
Operator Logon/Logoff 9M8S9S2S

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 423
Connecting to Tracer 100 and Tracker EMTK Panels

424 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 28

Using the Trend Viewer

The Trend Viewer provides one of the easiest methods for viewing and
graphing trended data. With a few clicks of the mouse button on a
graphic, you can display trended data on a graph. The graph can also dis-
play icons for alarms and events to represent activity changes in the sys-
tem. This gives you a clear and easy-to-use picture of what is happening
in your automation system and when those changes occurred. The activ-
ity of live, trended and untrended data is viewed in a Trend Viewer win-
dow.
Whether you need to determine the temperatures in a room for a short
period of time or watch an air handler’s output temperature over a long
period of time, the Trend Viewer gives you the flexibility to view data in
the way that best fits your needs.
With the Trend Viewer you can:
• View live untrended data
• Plot overrides, alarms, and events related to the trended point
• Plot audit trail data
• View up to 10 properties
• Save trend data in graphical format or as a CVS file
• Print out data
• View multiple graphs at one time
This chapter covers the following topics:
• “Setting up the Trend Viewer” on page 426
• “Creating a Trend Viewer” on page 431
• “Opening a Trend Viewer” on page 434
• “Saving a New Trend Viewer” on page 438
• “Adding to a Trend Viewer” on page 439
• “Historical Trends in the Audit Trail Database” on page 447

Note:
To set up the Trend Viewer you must have security access
rights. For further information, see your Site Security Adminis-
trator.

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 425
Using the Trend Viewer

Setting up the Trend Viewer

1. From the Site Security editor select the Objects tab (see Figure 361).
2. In the Access column, click the Trend Viewer checkbox.
3. Click Save.

Figure 361. Objects Tab

Trend Viewer
checkbox

426 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Setting up the Trend Viewer

4. Click the Applications tab (see Figure 362).

5. Select the View Only or View/Edit checkbox for the Trend Viewer.
6. Click Save.
7. Click Close.

Figure 362. Applications Tab

Trend Viewer
checkbox

8. From the Menu bar select Setup, and then select Trends. The Select
Trend dialog displays (see Figure 363).

Figure 363. Select Trend Dialog Box

9. Select a trend from the Name list.

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 427
Using the Trend Viewer

10. Click OK. The Trend Editor displays (see Figure 364).
11. Click the Members tab.
12. Check the Harvest Data for this trend checkbox.
13. Check the Enable Historical Trending box (not shown in Figure 364;
this only applies to Tracer Summit CCS and Enterprise users).
14. Click Save.
15. Click Close.

Figure 364. Members Tab

428 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Setting up the Trend Viewer

16. From the menu bar click Tools, and then select Options. The Systems
Options screen displays (see Figure 365).

Figure 365. Systems Options Screen–General tab

17. In the Harvested Trend area, click the arrow to display the drop-down
list. Select a time frame.

Notes:
• Harvested trends only affect the Trend Viewer database,
not the Audit Trail database.
• Data in harvested trends is scheduled to be deleted after a
certain number of years.

18. Click Save.

19. Click Close.

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 429
Using the Trend Viewer

Setting up Properties from Pop-up Menus in a Graphic

In order to display a pop-up window with the Open Trend Viewer option
available as shown in Figure 366, a property within a graphic must meet
the following conditions:
The property must be trendable
And:
The property must be one of five status points:
• Status text
• Analog in 5 color
• Binary text
• Animation
• Slider
Or one of three control point types:
• Setpoint control
• Binary checkbox control
• Selection list control

Figure 366. Displaying a Pop-up Window from a Graphic

430 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Creating a Trend Viewer

Creating a Trend Viewer

You can create a Trend Viewer from the following:
• The Setup menu
• A property in a graphic

Creating a Trend Viewer From the Setup Menu

1. From the Setup menu, select Trend Viewer. The Select Trend Viewer
Object dialog box displays (see Figure 367).

Figure 367. Select Trend Viewer Object Dialog Box

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 431
Using the Trend Viewer

2. Click New. The Trend Viewer Member Editor displays (See

Figure 368).

Figure 368. Trend Viewer Member Editor

3. In the Type box, select an object type. Your selection determines

which object name will display in the Name box.
4. Select an object name from the Name box. Your selection determines
which properties will display in the Property box.
5. Select the properties from the Property box you want to add to the
members list. Up to 10 members can reside in a Trend Viewer object.

Note:
Only properties that are already members of a harvested trend
will appear in this list.

6. Click Add to add the selected properties to the Current Members list
box. (see Figure 369).

Figure 369. Adding members to the Trend Viewer Member Editor

432 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Creating a Trend Viewer

7. Click OK. The Trend Viewer displays (see Figure 370).

Figure 370. Trend Viewer

Creating a Trend Viewer from a Property in a Graphic

Note:
You must be online to create a Trend Viewer through a property
in a graphic.

1. Right-click on a property in graphic.

2. From the pop-up menu, click Create Trend Viewer.
3. A new Trend Viewer displays.

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 433
Using the Trend Viewer

Opening a Trend Viewer

There are several ways you can open a Trend Viewer:
• The Setup menu
• A graphic (pop-up windows)
• The toolbar

Opening a Trend Viewer from the Setup Menu

1. From the Setup menu, select Trend Viewer (see Figure 371). The
Select Trend Viewer Object dialog box displays (see Figure 372).

Figure 371. Opening a Trend Viewer from The Setup Menu

Figure 372. Select Trend Viewer Object dialog box

2. Select the trend object you want to display in the Trend Viewer.

434 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Opening a Trend Viewer

3. Click OK. The Trend Viewer displays (seeFigure 373).

Figure 373. Trend Viewer

Opening a Trend Viewer from a Graphic

1. Right-click on a property in a graphic to display the pop-up menu
(see Figure 374).

Figure 374. Pop-up Menu in a Graphic

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 435
Using the Trend Viewer

2. From the pop-up menu, select Open Trend Viewer. The Select Trend
Viewer dialog displays (see Figure 375).

Note:
The Select Trend Viewer dialog box will not display if the prop-
erty is a member of only one Trend Viewer object. In this case,
the Trend Viewer will display immediately.

Figure 375. Select Trend Viewer Dialog Box

3. From the drop-down list select a Trend Viewer.

4. Click OK. The Trend Viewer displays (see Figure 373 on page 435).

436 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Opening a Trend Viewer

Opening a Trend Viewer from the Toolbar

1. Click the Harvested Trend Viewer toolbar icon in the Tracer Summit
task bar (see Figure 376). The Select Trend Viewer Object dialog box
displays.
2. Click the trend viewer object you want to display.
3. Click OK. The Trend Viewer displays (see Figure 373 on page 435).

Figure 376. Tracer Summit Task Bar

Harvested Trend Viewer Icon

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 437
Using the Trend Viewer

Saving a New Trend Viewer

1. After the new Trend Viewer displays, click Save. The New Trending
Names dialog box displays (see Figure 377).

Figure 377. The New Trending Names Dialog Box

2. In the New Trend Viewer Name field you can type in a name for the
Trend Viewer object, or keep the default name.
3. In the New Trend Name field, you can type in a name of the new
trend object or you can keep the default name.
4. In the Sampling Interval drop-down list, select how fast you want the
trend object to collect samples. The default time is one minute.
5. Click OK.

438 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Adding to a Trend Viewer

Adding to a Trend Viewer

You can add a property to a Trend Viewer by clicking on a property in a
graphic.
1. Right-click on a property in a graphic. A pop-up menu displays.
2. From the pop-up menu, select Add to Trend Viewer. The Select Trend
Viewer dialog displays, which lists all of the Trend Viewer objects
that the property is not a member of (see Figure 378).

Figure 378. Select Trend Viewer Dialog Box

3. Select the Trend Viewer object you want to add the property to.
4. Click OK. The Trend Viewer displays (see Figure 373 on page 435).
5. Click Close. The Save Changes dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes.

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 439
Using the Trend Viewer

Working with the Trend Viewer

The Trend Viewer plots trend data on a graph. When you are online, data
is displayed in the live mode with the ability to show historical data.
When you are offline, data is viewed in the historical mode only.
The Trend Viewer consists of three main components (see Figure 379):
• The “Trend Viewer Toolbar” on page 441
• The “Trend Viewer Chart” on page 442
• The “Trend Viewer Main Control Buttons” on page 445

Figure 379. Components of the Trend Viewer Window

Toolbar

Chart

Main control buttons

440 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Working with the Trend Viewer

Trend Viewer Toolbar

Table 22 describes the functions of the buttons on the Trend Viewer
toolbar.

Table 22. Trend Viewer Toolbar Functions

Button1 Description

The scroll (axes) button lets you move the x or y-axis.

Drag the pointing finger horizontally to move the x-axis
and vertically to move the y-axis.
The zoom (axes) button lets you compress or expand
the display range of the x or y-axis. Drag the arrow hori-
zontally along the x-axis and vertically along the y-axis.
The zoom out all axes button lets you zoom out both
the x and y-axes. Each time you click this button the axes
zooms out two times its previous view.
The zoom in all axes button lets you zoom in both the x
and y-axes. Each time you click this button the axes
zooms in two times its previous view.
The select button lets you see details related to the
icons and markers in the Trend Viewer chart. Move the
pointer over the icon and click the pointing finger to see
details.
The zoom box button lets you zoom in anywhere in the
chart. Click this button and place the arrow at the point
where you want to zoom in. Then, click and drag the
arrow.
The tracer line button lets you display a vertical line in
the chart to see the date, time stamp, and value for a
point. Click on a point in the legend or click on a different
plot in the chart to change which plot the vertical line is
showing data for.
The save to file button lets you save the current view to
a BMP, JPEG, or PNG formatted file. To save the data to a
comma separated value file (CSV), select this format
from the File menu.*
The print button lets you print the current graphical
view to a printer.

* A CSV file is a basic industry format used for opening up a

text file into any application (for example, Microsoft Excel).

1 The selected button transforms into a pointing finger

when you hover over an object in the Trend Viewer.
When clicked on, the object reveals further details.

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 441
Using the Trend Viewer

Trend Viewer Chart

A Trend Viewer chart consists of the legend, icons, data markers, and grid
(see Figure 380).

Figure 380. Trend Viewer Chart

Legend

Gridlines Data marker

Icon

442 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Working with the Trend Viewer

Viewing the Legend

The legend represents members of a trend object. They are displayed in a
Trend Viewer chart as data markers.
1. Right-click on a member of the legend. The Settings dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 381 on page 443).
2. If desired, make changes using the checkboxes.
3. Click OK.

Note:
You can also hide or show the legend by selecting Hide/View
Legend from the Edit menu.

Changing the Legend Member Name

You can change the name of the legend member by using the Settings
Dialog box.
1. In the Display Name field, delete the current legend member name
(see Figure 381 on page 443).
2. Type in a new legend member name.
3. Click OK.

Note:
The Display Name field is disabled when the audit trail is used
on the system.

Figure 381. The Settings Dialog Box

Display Name field

Tool Palette

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 443
Using the Trend Viewer

Icons
Icons represent event log activity such as alarms, manual overrides, and
events.
X Click on the icon to display a dialog box that contains details about
the event (see Figure 382).

Figure 382. Event Dialog Box (manual override example)

Changing Data Marker Settings

Data markers are visual representations of legend members within the
trend object. Each data marker is displayed as a different color inside the
chart. To change the color:
1. Right-click on a data marker. The Settings dialog box displays (see
Figure 381 on page 443).
2. Click on the Tool Palette.
3. The Color Palette dialog box opens. Select a color.
4. Click OK. The data marker displays in the selected color.

Grid
The grid is made up of gridlines that help you read the chart. You can
choose to view or hide the grid.
1. Right-click in the chart’s background. A pop-up menu displays.
2. Click on Hide Grid to hide the gridlines, or click on View Grid to show
the gridlines.

444 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Working with the Trend Viewer

Trend Viewer Main Control Buttons

The Trend Viewer main control buttons allow you to control and adjust
the chart. It puts the chart into live mode and allows you to select the
date range, move the chart forward or backward, and save current and
new trend objects. Table 23 describes the functions of the Trend Viewer
main control buttons.

Table 23. Functions of the Trend Viewer Main Control Buttons

Button Description

The back button moves the displayed data backward

half the displayed date range. (The button is disabled if
the view is in live mode).

The play button puts the chart into live mode and
allows you to track the data as it enters the database
source for existing members. For new members, the
data is plotted every 30 seconds.
The pause mode button temporarily stops the chart
from updating with new data. This button only displays
after the play button has been depressed.

The forward button moves the displayed data forward

half the displayed date range. (This button is disabled if
the user is in live mode).

The Select Range button displays the Date Range to

Display dialog box (see Figure 383 on page 446). Use
this dialog to select the date-range of data to load into
the chart.
The Close button exits the Trend Viewer and returns to
the previous window.

The Save button saves changes made in the Trend

Viewer. If the point cannot be saved because communi-
cation to the device is down, reconnect and then try
again.
The Open Another button allows you to view another
Trend Viewer object without closing the existing one.

Click on the Help button for more information about the

Trend Viewer.

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 445
Using the Trend Viewer

Selecting a Date Range

The Date Range to Display dialog box displays when you click on the
Select Range control button (see Figure 383).
The Available Range field shows the range of time that data is available
for members of the Trend Viewer.
1. In the From field select a date and time from the drop-down lists.
2. In the To field select a date and time from the drop-down lists.
3. Click OK. The Trend Viewer displays the data from the selected data
range.

Figure 383. The Date Range to Display Dialog Box

446 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Historical Trends in the Audit Trail Database

Historical Trends in the Audit Trail

Database
Historical trending is used to display data from the Audit Trail database
in a Trend Viewer. It is enabled in the Trend editor by checking the
Enable Historical Trending checkbox.

Note:
Historical trending is only available if you are registered to use
either the Tracer Summit CCS or Enterprise packages. For
more information about historical trends, refer to the Tracer
Summit CCS System Programming guide.

Viewing Historical Trends

1. From the Status menu, Select the Audit Trail Trend Viewer. The
Select Historical Trends dialog box displays (see Figure 384).

Note:
You must be online to use the Audit Trail.

Figure 384. Select Historical Trends Dialog Box

BMTX-SVU01B-EN 447
Using the Trend Viewer

2. In the Database Source list, select a database:

• Audit Trail SQL Database—displays current data
• Archived Audit Trail SQL Database—displays historical data
• Previously Archived Audit Trail SQL Database—displays histori-
cal data.
3. In the Select Historical Trends list, select up to 10 historical trends.
4. In the Select Range drop-down list, specify a date and time range you
want displayed in the Trend Viewer.
5. Click OK. The Trend Viewer displays.

448 BMTX-SVU01B-EN
 Chapter 29

Trending Data

A trend (or trend object) is a historical sampling of data stored from spe-
cific objects and properties taken at a specified sampling frequency.
Trends can be stored in the BCU or as an option on the PC workstation.
To upload trends from a BCU, you can run a standard or custom trend
report (see Chapter 32, “Designing Reports”). These trends provide infor-
mation necessary to make decisions about building management issues,
including utility costs, equipment efficiency, and tenant billings.
Use the Trend editor to define the data you want sampled and stored in
the BCU. This trend information can then be compiled and presented in a
trend report at a later time.
Each trend object contains a list of members. These members are the
properties that the trend will sample. You set up and maintain the list of
members using the Trend editor.
With Tracer Summit’s Trend editor, you can:
• Create a new trend object or edit an existing one
• Add or remove members for a trend object
• Determine the trend interval
• Determine how or when sampling will start and stop
• Delay sampling during startup to allow the system to stabilize before
trending occurs
• Specify the number of samples you will allow the BCU to store in
memory, and clear any accumulated samples
• Set up a trigger and notification class for a snapshot, as well as reset
a snapshot after it has been taken
• Harvest trends for the Trend Viewer or Audit Trail databases
• Set up security classes for a trend object

Note:
Trends can be easily viewed and created in Tracer Summit by
right-clicking on a graphic and creating a Trend Viewer object.
The trends are then viewed in graphical format. (See Chapter
28, “Using the Trend Viewer.”)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 449
Trending Data

Accessing the Trend Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Trends. The Select Trend dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 385).

Figure 385. Select Trend Dialog Box

2. Select the name of the trend you want to edit.

3. Click OK. The Trend editor displays (see Figure 386.)

Figure 386. Trend Editor

450 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New Trend

Creating a New Trend

To create a new trend, you complete these tasks:
• Set security access for the trend (see “Setting Security Access for a
Trend” on page 458)
• Open and name the new trend object (as described in this section)
• Add members to the trend object (see “Setting the Members of a
Trend” on page 453)
• Set up the trend, including determining when sampling will start and
stop (see “Setting Up Trend Sampling” on page 454)
• Save the trend object (see “Saving a Trend Object to a BCU” on
page 460)
To create a new trend:
1. From the Setup menu, select Trends. The Select Trend dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 387).

Figure 387. Select Trend Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Trend Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 388).

Figure 388. New Trend Name Dialog Box

3. In the Trend Name field, enter the name you want to give this trend.
The name can be up to 32 characters long.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 451
Trending Data

4. Click OK. The Status screen of the Trend editor displays (see
Figure 389).

Figure 389. Trend Editor—New Trend

5. Complete the remaining trend information as described in the follow-

ing sections.

452 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting the Members of a Trend

Setting the Members of a Trend

Members are sampled properties that will be monitored by a trend object.
The Members screen of the Trend editor allows you to add, delete and
view members of the trend object.
To set the members of a trend:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 390).

Figure 390. Trend Editor Members Screen

2. In the Type list box, select the object type for the object whose prop-
erty you want this trend to sample. The Name list box automatically
displays a list of object names for this object type.
3. In the Name list box, select the name of the object whose property you
want this trend to sample.
4. In the Type of Property list box, select the type of property you want
this trend to sample. This list is filtered to show only properties of the
type in the Property list box.
5. In the Property list box, select the property then click Add to add it to
the Member List box.
6. Repeat steps 2–5 above to add other properties to the list of members,
as necessary.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 453
Trending Data

7. To remove a member from the Member List, select the member in the
Member List box, then click Remove to delete it from the list. Or, click
Remove All to clear the entire list.

Note:
Trend objects may contain up to 64 members. Because of BCU
memory limitations, however, the more members you include,
the fewer samples you can take. If taking large numbers of
samples is a priority for you, consider creating multiple Trend
objects with limited membership to accomplish this. You can
later combine the Trend objects in a single report for compari-
son. (See Table 24 on page 455 to understand the relationship
between number of members and number of possible samples.)

Setting Up Trend Sampling

When setting up a trend, you need to configure the sampling parameters
and sampling interval of the trend object. You can set up trend sampling
at the Trend editor’s Setup screen. At this screen you can also change the
name of the trend.
To set up trend sampling:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 391).

Figure 391. Trend Editor Setup Screen

2. If you want to change the trend’s name, in the Trend Name field,
enter a new name for this trend.
3. In the Sampling Enable referencer edit control, select a method for
determining whether sampling should occur. Select Enabled to turn
on sampling manually. Select Disabled to turn off sampling manually.

454 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Trend Sampling

Select Referencer if you want sampling to be activated or deactivated

by the state of a referenced binary property.
4. If you selected Referencer in the Sampling Enable field, then the On
Delay for Referencer field becomes active. Type the minimum number
of minutes the binary property must be in On state before sampling
occurs. You can enter a number between 0 and 60. This feature allows
the system to stabilize before trending occurs.
5. In the Number of Samples field, select the number of samples you
want the BCU to retain in its memory. This number is limited by the
number of members you want the trend to sample. (See Table 24 to
understand the relationship between the number of members in this
trend and the number of samples it is possible to store.)
Table 24. Limits on Numbers of Samples Stored in BCU Memory

Number of Members Maximum Samples Stored

1 244
2 169
3 129
4 104
5 88
6 75
7 66
8 59
9 53
10 48
11 44
12 41
13 38
14 36
15 33
16 31
17 30
18 28
19 27
20 25
21 24
22 23
23 22
24 21
25–26 20
27 19
28–29 18

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 455
Trending Data

Table 24. Limits on Numbers of Samples Stored in BCU Memory

Number of Members Maximum Samples Stored

30–31 17
32–33 16
34–35 15
36–38 14
39–41 13
42–44 12
45–48 11
49–53 10
54–59 9
60–64 8

6. In the Interval field, select the frequency with which you want the
members to be sampled. You can choose 1 Minute, 5 Minutes, 15 Min-
utes, 1 Hour, 8 Hours, 1 Day, 7 Days, or Billing Period.
7. If you selected 8 Hours or 1 Day in the Interval field, the Collect Sam-
ple at Time field displays. Enter in this field the time of day you want
sampling to begin.
8. If you selected 7 Days in the Interval field, the Collect Sample at
Time field and the Collect Sample on Day field are displayed. Com-
plete these fields with the time of day you want sampling to begin,
and the day of the week you want sampling to begin, respectively.
9. If you selected Billing Period in the Interval field, the following but-
tons are displayed:
• Use Last Day of Month, which directs the system to sample at
11:59 p.m. on the last day of every month.
• Define Day of Month, which directs the system to sample at 11:59
p.m. on the day of the month you specify in the related field.
• Use Billing Periods.
The last button is available only if you have set up billing periods in
Site Configuration. You can select to sample at the end of any one of
up to three billing periods, which you specify in the related field.

456 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Harvesting Trend Objects for the Trend Viewer or the Audit Trail Databases

Harvesting Trend Objects for the Trend

Viewer or the Audit Trail Databases
Use the Trend editor to set up a trend as a harvesting or historical trend
object. These trends can be easily viewed in Tracer Summit by right-click-
ing on a graphic and creating a Trend Viewer object. The trends are then
viewed in graphical format in the Trend Viewer. (See Chapter 28, “Using
the Trend Viewer.”)
To set up harvesting and historical trends:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 392).
• For the Trend Viewer, check the Harvest Data for this trend dia-
log box.
• For Audit Trail databases, check the Enable Historical Trending
box (not shown). This only applies to Tracer CCS and Enterprise
users.
2. Click Save.

Figure 392. Trend Editor Members Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 457
Trending Data

Setting Security Access for a Trend

The Trend editor’s Classes screen allows you to define the security class
setup for this trend. You also set up trend snapshots on this screen.
To set security access:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Classes tab to display the Classes
screen (see Figure 393).

Figure 393. Trend Editor Classes Screen

2. If you wish to use the Snapshot Trends feature, click Enable Snap-
shot. When a snapshot is taken, sampling is disabled until the snap-
shot is reset. This allows you to analyze the data leading up to the
point in time when the snapshot occurred.
3. If you selected Enable Snapshot, the Trigger On referencer edit con-
trol becomes active. In this field, specify the binary input referencer
or event state of an analog input object that serves as a trigger for a
snapshot to be taken. If you reference a binary property, that property
is monitored every minute, and if the state transitions from 0 to 1 for
more than two minutes, a snapshot is triggered.
If you reference the event state of an analog input object, that prop-
erty is monitored every minute. If the analog input object goes into a
Low Alarm or High Alarm for more than two minutes, a snapshot is
triggered (make sure the analog input object is not in an alarm state
when you initially assign the referencer). If you don’t make a selection
here, no snapshot is taken.
4. If you selected Enable Snapshot, the Snapshot Notification Class field
becomes active. In this field, specify which Event Class will receive a
message of the snapshot occurrence when a snapshot actually hap-
pens.
5. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog
box (see Figure 394 on page 459).

458 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Viewing the Status Screen

Figure 394. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

6. For each security class, click to insert a check mark if you want users
of this class to have security access to this trend object.
7. Click OK to return to the Classes screen.

Viewing the Status Screen

The Trend editor’s Status screen displays information about past and
present data sampling, and provides some controls for managing this
data. This screen displays when you first access the Trend editor.
To view the status screen:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Status tab to display the Status
screen (see Figure 386 on page 450).
2. View the Sampling Enabled field. Yes indicates that the system col-
lects samples regularly for this trend. (Click Report to view the sam-
ples.)
3. Click Clear Samples if you want to erase all accumulated data for this
trend.
4. View the Snapshot Taken field. Yes indicates that a change in state of
the referenced property triggered a snapshot, and that sampling has
been suspended.
5. Click Reset Snapshot to resume sampling and to prepare the system
for the next snapshot event. This button is available only if the Snap-
shot Taken field contains a Yes.
6. View the remaining fields on this screen. These fields display:
• How frequently this trend is currently set up to take samples, the
number of samples stored in BCU memory

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 459
Trending Data

• The current number of members

• The percentage of BCU memory allocated to this trend object that
sample storage currently occupies
You can also identify the BCU name and the status of communica-
tions.
7. Click Report to generate a standard trend report automatically.

Saving a Trend Object to a BCU

To access trends with the Trend editor or to save trends, Tracer Summit
must be communicating with a BCU.
New or existing trend objects cannot be saved to a BCU unless that BCU
is currently communicating with the PC Workstation. You can access an
existing trend to edit it only when your PC Workstation is online with the
BCU where the trend is saved. For new trends, you can access the editor
if there is at least one BCU online.

Archiving Trend Data

The BCU that is running the trend will not automatically archive trend
data to a PC Workstation’s hard drive. To accomplish this, you must use
Tracer Summit software to access the data accumulated in the BCU and
archive it to the workstation’s hard drive.
To manually archive trend data to the PC Workstation:
1. Access the Trend editor Status screen for the trend object whose data
you want to archive.
2. Click Report to access the Tracer Summit Report Viewer and auto-
matically run the standard trend report.
3. After the report has been run, you can save it to the workstation’s
hard drive.
To automatically archive trend data to the PC Workstation:
◆ See the section about scheduling reports in Chapter 32, “Designing
Reports.”

460 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 30

Using the Graphics Editor

One of the most powerful tools available in Tracer Summit for Windows is
the Graphics editor, which allows you to create and customize graphics
(also called graphic objects) for your system with specialized tools and
menus. Graphics in Tracer Summit are the primary way in which daily
operators check system status and perform operator overrides.
Operators rely on the graphics you create to display information quickly
and clearly. You can create graphics to:
• Provide real-time status information about a particular object, or
about the system
• Give users the ability to change an object’s state or setpoint
• Display an animated image
As an advanced user, you can build and adapt graphics to be displayed
when an item is clicked on the navigation tree, when a target is clicked
within a graphic, and when the Graphic button is clicked in a UCM editor.
Using Tracer Summit’s Graphics editor, you can:
• Edit the standard graphics provided with Tracer Summit to use on
one or more sites as custom graphics
• Create new graphics
• Customize the background, font, size and appearance of fields on a
graphic, as well as the background of the graphic itself
• Create expanded messages
• Create runtime graphs for either live properties or trended objects
• Create links to external sources
For descriptions and information about specific fields, toolbar buttons,
dialog boxes, and palette buttons in the Graphics editor, see Tracer Sum-
mit online help.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 461
Using the Graphics Editor

About Graphics
In Tracer Summit, you can create a graphic by adding graphic elements,
such as text (static or dynamic), images, target links to other graphics,
and controls, to a background image. A background image might be a
solid color or a floor plan of a site. You place layers of these graphic ele-
ments (also called fields) on the background to create a composite graphic.
You can also layer an animated image on top of another image, or place a
static text label on top of a control. Target fields layer over other images
to create links to other graphic objects. You can move intersecting layers
of images and other fields behind or in front of other layers. Figure 395
shows an example graphic.

Note:
• A graphic is linked to an object by its name. If you change
the name of an object that is referenced by a field on a
graphic, the graphic will be unable to display data for the
object. Instead, “Object Unavailable” will be displayed.
• All references to Windows folder names in this chapter
refer to subdirectories of the location where Tracer Sum-
mit is installed on your PC Workstation, which is typically
C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit. Subdirectories within
this folder include Graphics\Standard, Graphics\Custom
and Graphics\site name (where site name is the name of
the current site).

Figure 395. Example of a Graphic in the Graphics Editor

Target
Image

Target
Buttons

Static
Fields Layered Background
Text
Over an Image With Grid On
Field

462 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Accessing the Graphics Editor

Accessing the Graphics Editor

1. Display the graphic you want to edit.
2. From the Setup menu, select Graphics editor. The displayed graphic
view is transformed.

Using the Graphics Editor Tools

When the Graphics editor is open, two groups of tools display: a graphics
toolbar and a floating tool palette that you can move around the screen
using the mouse. Figure 396 shows these tools.

Figure 396. Graphics Editor Toolbar and Tool Palette

The Graphics editor palette allows you to select from among 17 types of
fields to insert. Table 25 on page 464 shows the types of fields that are
available for insertion and configuration. When you click a palette button
or select a field for editing, an editor displays that provides configuration
options for the corresponding field type. More information about these
editors is available in Tracer Summit online help.
Use the graphical status control to create geometric shapes or designs
(such as a thermometer) and display them on an analog property.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 463
Using the Graphics Editor

Table 25. Graphic Field Types and Palette Buttons

Field Type Field Name Palette Description

Button

Status Status text Inserts text drawn from the property you specify.
Fields

Analog in 5 color Inserts a field that shows the viewer a color-coded update of
the alarm state of an analog property you specify.

Binary Inserts text drawn from the binary property you specify.

Animation Inserts images to create animation from multiple image files

that run when a binary or an analog property is in a state
you specify.

Graphical Status Inserts geometric shapes or designs (such as a thermome-

ter) on an analog property. In runtime view, users can add
the maximum and minimum values and a caption.

Control Override control Inserts a button with a text label you provide. In the runtime
Fields view, clicking the resulting button displays the Override dia-
log box, allowing users to alter the system via the graphic.

Setpoint control Inserts a numeric text field. In the runtime view, the field
allows users to change settings of numerical data.

Binary Check Box control Inserts an unchecked check box. In the runtime view, users
can check the check box to change the state of the property
you specify.

Selection List control Inserts a drop-down list that contains entries linked to a
property. In the runtime view, users can select from this list
to change the state of the associated property.

Text or
Static text Inserts text that you specify.
Image
Fields

Image Inserts a graphic image (any BMP, GIF, or JPG file).

AVI movie Inserts an AVI movie that runs for as long as the graphic is
displayed or until the movie ends.

464 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Graphics Editor Tools

Table 25. Graphic Field Types and Palette Buttons (Continued)

Field Type Field Name Palette Description

Button

Target
Target text Inserts a line of text that links to another graphic.
Fields

Target image Inserts a graphic image that links to another graphic.

Target button Inserts a button that links to another graphic.

Target External Inserts a button that links to a Web site, a file, or an applica-
tion outside of Tracer Summit.

Graph field
Graphing Inserts a graph on the graphic.

Cursor
Default cursor Changes the cursor from an insertion point back to a selec-
tion cursor.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 465
Using the Graphics Editor

Using the Graphics Pop-Up Menu

In the Graphics editor, you can select options from the menu bar or select
options from a pop-up menu. To display a pop-up menu, right-click on a
graphic field or on the graphic background. You can then click a selection.
If the mouse button is positioned over a field, the pop-up menu items are
specific to the field. Otherwise, the pop-up menu is specific to the entire
graphic.

Using the Grid to Organize Fields

When you edit a graphic in the Graphics editor, you can display a default
grid pattern of colored dots to assist in aligning graphic elements. You can
change the default settings of grid color (black) and spacing in pixels (15).
When the grid is on, an optional Snap to Grid feature automatically
aligns fields to the grid when you insert or move them.

Displaying the Grid on a Graphic

1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, from the Layout
menu, select Grid Options. The Grid Options sub-menu displays.
2. Click the On option to display the grid, which appears as a matrix of
dots (see Figure 397). To hide the grid, click the On option again.
When you save the graphic, the grid settings are saved with it.

Figure 397. Graphic with Grid On

466 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Graphics Editor Tools

Changing the Grid Color on a Graphic

The Graphics editor automatically chooses a contrasting grid color where
the grid overlaps any image.
To select a different color:
1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, make sure the grid
is turned on (see “Displaying the Grid on a Graphic” on page 466).
2. From the Layout menu, click Grid Options. The Grid Options sub-
menu displays.
3. Select Color and from the Color sub-menu, select Red, Blue, Green or
Black.
The grid options are saved with each graphic. The next time this graphic
is edited with the grid on, selections default to the same grid options.

Using the Snap To Grid Feature on a Graphic

The Graphics editor automatically enables the Snap To Grid feature
when the grid is turned on. This feature causes the upper left-hand cor-
ner of any field that is added to or moved on the graphic to be aligned
with the nearest upper left-hand grid intersection.
To disable the feature:
1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, make sure the grid
is turned on (see “Displaying the Grid on a Graphic” on page 466).
2. From the Layout menu, select Grid Options to display the Grid
Options sub-menu.
3. Click Snap To Grid.
To enable the feature:
◆ Repeat the steps above. When you click Snap To Grid and it has no
check mark, Tracer Summit inserts a check mark and re-enables the
feature.
The grid options are saved with each graphic. The next time this graphic
is edited with the grid on, the Snap To Grid selection defaults to the set-
ting you chose.

Configuring Grid Spacing

1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, make sure the grid
is turned on (see “Displaying the Grid on a Graphic” on page 466.)
2. From the Layout menu, select Grid Options to display the Grid
Options sub-menu.
3. Click Grid Spacing. The Grid Spacing dialog box displays (see
Figure 398 on page 468).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 467
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 398. Grid Spacing Dialog Box

4. Enter a number between 2 and 100. This is the number of pixels

between intersection points on the grid.
5. Click OK to display the Graphics editor and the grid with the spacing
you specified.
The grid configuration is saved with each graphic. The next time this
graphic is edited with the grid on, it defaults to the configuration you set
up.

Editing Graphic Properties

While you are in the Graphics editor, you can edit the following graphic
properties: the background image of the graphic, the security access to
the graphic, and the graphic’s context object (filters that set the site
name, object type and context of the object when it is launched). All these
properties are edited at the Graphic Properties dialog box. You can also
view the location and HTML file name of the graphic.

Changing the Background of a Graphic

1. Display the graphic whose background you want to change in the
Graphics editor. Do not select any fields.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays (see Figure 399 on page 469).

Note:
While you are in the Graphics editor, you can also access the
Graphic Properties dialog box from the graphics pop-up menu.
Move the mouse cursor so that it is not positioned over any
fields, then right-click to display the pop-up menu and select
Edit Properties.

468 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Editing Graphic Properties

Figure 399. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Background Image Screen

3. Click Browse to display the Locate Image dialog box (see Figure 400).

Figure 400. Locate Image Dialog Box

4. Select an image (see “Using the Locate Image Dialog Box” below).
5. Click OK to return to the Graphic Properties dialog box.
6. Click OK to return to the Graphics editor window.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 469
Using the Graphics Editor

Using the Locate Image Dialog Box

1. Click Browse in the Graphic Properties dialog box or in the Setup
screen of the Insert Image dialog box. The Locate Image dialog box
displays (see Figure 400).
2. Select either Global Images or Current Site Images. If you select Glo-
bal Images, you can select an image available for the system. If you
select Current Site images, you can select only an image associated
with this particular site where you are logged in. The Image Files
field lists graphics according to the current check box selections.
3. If you selected Global Images, select either Standard or Custom to
specify the type of images you want this dialog box to list. Standard
images are included with Tracer Summit. Custom images are created
by editing a standard image or by starting with a blank image.
Images specified as Global Images are available to all sites on the sys-
tem.
4. Click the GIF, JPG, or BMP check box to display a particular graphic
file type in the Image Files field.
5. Select the image file name you want. The Sample field displays a pre-
view of the image. The Path text line identifies its location.
6. Click OK to insert the selected image in the current graphic.

Note:
If images are not displaying properly in the Graphics editor,
your workstation’s Display settings in Windows might need cor-
rection. Your workstation must be set up for a minimum of 16-
bit colors. To check display settings, click the Windows Start
button. Click Settings, then Control Panel. From the Control
Panel, select Display.

Viewing a Graphic’s File Name and Location

Sometimes you need to know the file name and location of a graphic, if,
for example, you want to copy or delete the graphic using Windows
Explorer.
To view a graphic’s file name and location:
1. Display the graphic in the Graphics editor. Make sure no fields are
selected.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Graphic Information tab (see Figure 401). The graphic’s file
name and location displays in the HTML Path field.

470 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Editing Graphic Properties

Figure 401. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Graphic Information Screen

Setting Up Security for a Graphic

You can specify whether users have access to a graphic.
To set up security for a graphic:
1. Display the graphic in the Graphics editor. Make sure no fields are
selected.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Graphic Information tab (see Figure 402).

Figure 402. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Graphic Information Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 471
Using the Graphics Editor

4. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 403).

Figure 403. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

5. Click the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
6. Click OK to display the Classes screen.
7. Click Save.

Selecting the Context Object for a Graphic

When you create a new graphic object, you may give the graphic a con-
text. For example, if you have created a graphic of a floor plan, you might
specify its site and the area object that controls the floor displayed by the
graphic. When the floor plan graphic is displayed, the context allows the
user to display the appropriate schedule or report for the area entered as
the current object of the floor plan.

Note:
The context object also will be used to fill in template fields on a
graphic when it is displayed. For more information on template
graphics, see “Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template
Fields” on page 510.

To select the context object:

1. Display the graphic in the Graphics editor. Make sure no fields are
selected.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Context Object tab (see Figure 404).

472 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Editing Graphic Properties

Figure 404. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Context Object Screen

4. In the Site Name field, select the site. To select the active site, select
<default>.
• If you select <default> for the site name, the Object Type and
Object Name fields display <default> also.
• If you choose a specific site name, the Object Type and Object
Name fields display the first type and name defined on the site.
5. In the Object Type field, select from the list of object types defined for
the site you specified.
6. In the Object Name field, select from the list of objects defined for the
site and object type you specified.
7. Click OK.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 473
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

You may want to customize graphic objects for specific sites by adding
fields, changing the name displayed for fields, or by moving fields to dif-
ferent locations on the graphic background. (The changes are not saved to
the standard graphic; instead, your edited graphic is saved in the Graph-
ics/ Custom folder.)

Inserting a Graphic Field

1. In the Graphics editor, display the graphic in which you want to
insert the field.
2. Click the palette button associated with the type of field you want to
insert (see Table 25 on page 464). The cursor turns into an insert
prompt (see Figure 405).

Figure 405. Insert Prompt

3. Position the insert prompt at the location on the graphic where you
want to insert the field. Drag the prompt to define the shape and size
you want the field to be. The field is inserted and an editor appropri-
ate for the field type you selected displays.

Note:
For images and AVI movies, you can let Tracer Summit deter-
mine the field size based on the image size and proportion. Sim-
ply click once on the graphic to insert the field (rather than
dragging to define the field size). The field’s editor displays.

4. Complete the fields on the editor screens.

5. Click OK to return to the Graphics editor. (For field types that refer-
ence a specific property, the OK button is not available until you spec-
ify a property in the Property field.)

474 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Accessing the Graphic Field Editor

1. Click the field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field to show that it is being edited (see Figure 406).

Figure 406. Field with Cross-Hatched Border

2. Click the right mouse button to display a pop-up menu, then select
Edit Properties. An editor displays that corresponds to this field type.
3. Make changes to the information as necessary. Your edits take effect
when you click OK.

Selecting a Property Reference for Graphic Fields

On the Property screen, you can specify the site name, object type, object
name, and property for the graphic.
To select a property reference for a graphic field:
1. Display the graphic field editor for the field:
• When you insert a new field, the editor automatically displays.
• For existing fields, position the mouse pointer over the field, then
click the right mouse button and select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu.
2. In the Site Name field, select the name of the site.
3. In the Object Type field, select an object type from the list of those
defined for the specified site. The selection will filter the Object Name
field to display only those property types and instances defined in the
site.
4. In the Object Name field, select the name of the object from the list of
those available.
5. In the Property Name field, select the property from the list of those
available. (You must complete this field to exit the screen.)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 475
Using the Graphics Editor

Editing Setup Information for a Graphic Field

The setup information for a graphic field gives a name to the field for ref-
erence while you are in the Graphics editor. The name displays on the
graphic field for Static Text, Target Text, Target button fields, and Target
External button fields, but does not display on the graphic for other fields.
The Setup screen for other fields requires additional information (see
“Setup Information for Graphic Fields” on page 477 and “Creating
Graphic Links to External Sources” on page 488).
To edit a field’s setup information:
1. Click the field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a pop-up menu, then select
Edit Properties. The graphic field editor for this field displays.
3. Click the Setup tab. Figure 407 shows the Setup screen for a status
text field.

Figure 407. Status Text Editor—Setup Screen

4. Edit the information as necessary. Refer to “Setup Information for

Graphic Fields” on page 477.
5. Click OK.

476 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Setup Information for Graphic Fields

The Setup screen of the graphic field editor changes based on the field
type selected. The following sections give detailed information on the
setup information for specific field types.

Setup Information for Status Text, Setpoint Control, Static Text,

and Target Text Fields, and Target Buttons
Setup information for Status text, Setpoint control, Static text, and Tar-
get text fields, as well as for target button fields, is similar. When you dis-
play the field’s editor and select the Setup tab, you can edit the Editor
Text field. This field indicates the text that displays on the graphic for
static text, target text, and target buttons. (For Target External setup
information, see “Creating Graphic Links to External Sources” on
page 488. When you display the Target External editor, select the Desti-
nation tab to edit the Display Text field.)
Figure 408 shows the Setup screen for a status text field.

Figure 408. Status Text Editor—Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 477
Using the Graphics Editor

Setup Information for Analog in 5 Color Fields

Figure 409 shows the Setup screen of the Analog in 5 Color editor.

Figure 409. Analog in 5 Color Editor—Setup Screen

Setup options include the following:

• For an analog input object, the alarm limit default settings are dis-
played. For other analog values, edit the alarm and warning settings
as desired.
• Click with the right mouse button on the field labels to change the col-
ors that display for each warning, if desired.

478 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Setup Information for Binary Text Fields

Figure 410 shows the Setup screen of the Binary Text editor.

Figure 410. Binary Text Editor—Setup Screen

:

Setup options include the following:

• Type a label for the graphic field in the Editor Text field. (This label
will not display on the graphic.)
• Edit the text displayed when the property is active in the Active Text
field, if desired.
• Edit the text displayed when the property is inactive in the Inactive
Text field, if desired.
• Click the Change button to select a different color displayed for the
Active Text and Inactive Text, if desired.
• Click the Change button to select a different background color behind
the text, if desired.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 479
Using the Graphics Editor

Setup Information for Graphical Status Fields

The Graphical Status editor lets you create geometric shapes or designs
(such as a thermometer) and display them for an analog property.
Figure 411 shows the Setup screen of the Graphical Status editor.

Figure 411. Graphica Status Editor—Setup Screen

To create a graphical status field:

1. Select a template from the list. (You can use the templates that ship
with Tracer Summit or create your own.)
2. Type a minimum and maximum value.
3. Type a caption (text displays on graphic).
4. Click the Digital Value field to display the current value of the prop-
erty. (If the template is not set up for a digital value this field will not
be available.)

480 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Setup Information for Animation Fields

Figure 412 shows the Setup screen of the Animation editor for a binary
property. Figure 413 shows the Setup screen for the analog property.

Figure 412. Animation Editor—Binary Setup Screen

Figure 413. Animation Editor—Anlog Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 481
Using the Graphics Editor

Setup options include the following:

• Change to analog or binary (defaults to the type of property that is
selected)
• Select whether you want to display the images for Active State or
Inactive State (binary property).
• Click the Add button for each state to select the image(s) needed to
create the animation from the Locate Image dialog box (see Figure
400 on page 469).

Note:
You can not change the state an image represents after it has
been added. If you add an image in one state and want to
change it to the other state, delete the image. Select the state
you want it added to, then add the image.

• Click the up or down arrow button to change the order the frames are
displayed, as desired.
• In the In the Frame Delay field, specify the number of milliseconds
you want the frames to display. (This number applies to all of the
images for a binary animation. A lower number makes the animation
appear faster.) (binary property)
• In the Analog Range fields, select the Low and High limits to start
and stop the animation (analog property).
• To test the effect of the animation, click the Test Animation button
(binaryproperty).

482 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Setup Information for Images, Target Images, and AVI Movies

Setup information for image fields and AVI movie fields is similar.
Figure 414 shows the editor Setup screen for an image field.

Figure 414. Image Editor—Setup Screen

To select an image, click the Browse button and select one from the
Locate Image dialog box (see Figure 400 on page 469).
After you have selected an image, a sample displays on the Setup screen.

Editing Text Styles and Borders for Graphic Fields

For any graphic fields with text, including status text, setpoint, static
text, and target text fields, you can modify the text styles or borders of the
fields.
To edit text styles or borders:
1. Display the graphic field editor for the field:
• When you insert a new field, the editor automatically displays.
• For existing fields, position the mouse pointer over the field, then
click the right mouse button and select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu.
2. Click the Style tab. Figure 415 on page 484 shows the Style screen for
a status text field. A preview of the font displays in the Font area.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 483
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 415. Status Text Editor—Style Screen

3. In the Font field, select a font for the text.

Note:
Font styles and sizes vary by PC. You must ensure that the PC
Workstation that the graphic will be displayed on has the corre-
sponding font.

4. In the Size field, select a font size.

5. Check the appropriate boxes (if any) for bold or italic text.
6. To change the color of the text, in the Foreground Color field, click the
Change button and select a color.
7. To change the color of the text background, in the Background Color
field, click the Change button and select a color.
8. To change the number of decimal places for numbers, select a value in
the Digits Right of Decimal field.

Note:
The number you enter here will take effect only if the graphic
field will display numeric information.

9. Click the Border tab. Figure 416 on page 485 shows the Border screen
for a status text field.

484 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Figure 416. Status Text Editor—Border Screen

10. In the Width field, select the width of the border (in pixels).
11. In the Style field, select the border’s style (such as solid, dotted or
dashed).
12. To change the color of the border from black, in the Color field, click
the Change button and select a color.
13. Click OK when you are finished.

Selecting the Destination for Target Fields

One navigation method you can provide to daily operators is a target
field, which can be Target text, a Target image, a Target button, or a Tar-
get External button. When the user passes the mouse pointer over a tar-
get field, the pointer changes into a pointing finger. When the user clicks
on the target field, the view links to another graphic (called the target
field’s destination). By inserting target fields, you can provide access to
other graphics in the site—you can even insert target fields that link to
graphics at other sites. Target External buttons allow you to link to exter-
nal file sources (see “Creating Graphic Links to External Sources” on
page 488).
When you create the target field, you can choose whether you want the
destination graphic to replace the launching graphic or to appear in a sep-
arate window. The user is able to return to the launching graphic by click-
ing the Back button, or by closing the window containing the second
graphic (if displayed in a separate window).
If the user does not have access to the destination graphic, the cursor does
not change into a pointing finger.
To select the destination:
1. In the Graphics editor, display the graphic that has the target field
you want to edit.
2. Click on the target field to select it.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 485
Using the Graphics Editor

3. Click the right mouse button, then select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu. The graphic field editor displays for that target field.
Figure 417 shows the Target Text editor.

Figure 417. Target Text Editor—Destination Screen

4. At the Destination screen, click UCM/Application Objects or Graphic

Objects, depending on which graphic you want users to see after they
click this target field. The UCM or application destination displays a
graphic that is associated with the object.

Note:
If you select UCM/Application Objects, the context is supplied,
so the fields of the Context Object screen are not available. If
you select Graphic Objects, you need to select the context. See
“Selecting the Context Object for a Graphic” on page 472. On
the Context Object screen, make selections for the Site Name
and Object Name fields.

5. In the Site Name field, select the site that contains the UCM/Applica-
tion object or graphic you want users to see after they click this target
field in the current graphic.
6. In the Object Name field, select the name of the UCM or graphic you
want users to see after they click this target in the current graphic.

Note:
If you selected Graphic Objects in step 4, the Object Name field
changes to the Graphic Name field.

7. In the Editor Text field, select whether you want the target field to
display the destination object name or custom text.
8. If you want the second graphic to display in a separate window that
appears over the current graphic after the target field is clicked, click

486 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Open New Window. (Some users may not be able to make the selec-
tion to open a second graphic window due to their security level.)
9. Click OK when you are finished completing all the editor screens.

Selecting the Context Object for Target Fields

When you link to another graphic using a target field, the context infor-
mation is passed on to the Report and Scheduling editors, and to the new
graphic for use in template fields. See “Creating and Modifying Graphics
with Template Fields” on page 510.
To select the context object for a target field:
1. Display the graphic field editor for the field:
• When you insert a new field, the editor automatically displays.
• For existing fields, position the mouse pointer over the field, then
click the right mouse button and select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu.
2. Click the Context Object tab. Figure 418 shows the Context Object
screen for a target text field.

Figure 418. Target Text Editor—Context Object Screen

3. In Site Name field, select <default>.

4. In the Site Name field, select the site. To select the active site, select
<default>.
• If you select <default> for the site name, the Object Type and
Object Name fields display <default> also.
• If you choose a specific site name, the Object Type and Object
Name fields display the first type and name defined on the site.
5. In the Object Type field, select from the list of object types defined for
the site you specified.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 487
Using the Graphics Editor

6. In the Object Name field, select from the list of objects defined for the
site and object type you specified.
7. Click OK.

Creating Graphic Links to External Sources

You can create graphic links to external sources using the Target Exter-
nal button. The Target External button behaves similarly to a shortcut
icon on a workstation desktop. It links the graphic to a source outside of
Tracer Summit, such as a Microsoft Word document, an Adobe Acrobat
file, or a Web site through Internet Explorer. The external application
opens in a separate window and runs independently of the Tracer Sum-
mit application.
The Target External button allows you to:
• Launch an application outside of Tracer Summit
• Open a file using an application outside of Tracer Summit, provided
the file is associated with an application
• Opens to a Web site using Internet Explorer
To create a graphic link to an external file:
1. In the Graphics editor, click the Target External button on the tool
palette. The cursor turns into an insert prompt.
2. Position the insert prompt at the location on the graphic where you
want the button to appear. Click to display the Target External editor.
Figure 419 shows the destination screen of the Target External editor.
3. In the Display Text field, enter the label you want the button to dis-
play.
4. In the Target field, create a link to an external application or file by
either typing the target path or clicking the Browse button to select
the application or file.
To create a link to a Web site, either type in the Web address or open
Internet Explorer and browse to select the site. Copy the Web site
address and paste it into the Display Text field.
The selected path or address will display in the Target field, as shown
in Figure 419 on page 489.

488 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Figure 419. Target External Editor—Destination Screen

5. Use the Style tab if you want to change the appearance of the button
(see “Editing Text Styles and Borders for Graphic Fields” on
page 483).
6. Click OK when you are finished completing the editor screens. The
Target External button will appear at the point where you positioned
the insert prompt (see step 2).
7. To edit the button, right-click on the button and select Edit Properties
from the pop-up menu.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 489
Using the Graphics Editor

Organizing Graphic Fields

When you are creating new graphic fields or modifying existing fields, you
may want to:
• Move one or more fields to a different location on the graphic
• Resize one or more fields to be the same size
• Copy (or cut) fields and paste them on another graphic
• Align several fields along their top, bottom, left, or right edges

Selecting a Graphic Field

◆ Click once over the field. A cross-hatched border displays around the
field.

Selecting Multiple Fields at Once

1. Click the first field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field to show that it is the primary field.
When you perform actions requiring fields to match position, or size,
or alignment, this primary field is used as a model for the other fields.
(If you do not want this field to be the primary field, click Default Cur-
sor on the palette, then make a different selection.)
2. Holding down the Ctrl key, click one or more additional fields on the
same graphic. Fields do not need to be of the same type to be selected
at the same time.
A striped border displays around these subsequent items you select to
show that they are secondary fields (see Figure 420). When you per-
form actions requiring fields to match position, or size, or alignment,
these fields change to match the primary field.

Figure 420. Primary and Secondary Fields

Primary field with
cross-hatched border

Secondary fields with

striped borders

490 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Organizing Graphic Fields

Moving a Graphic Field

1. Click the field you want to move. (You can also move multiple selected
fields at once. See “Selecting Multiple Fields at Once” on page 490.)
After you select the field, the cursor turns into a movement cursor
(see Figure 421).

Figure 421. Movement Cursor

2. Drag the field to a new location within the graphic. All fields selected
with this field also move.
To move the field just one pixel at a time, press the left, right, up or
down arrow keys on your keyboard while the movement cursor is dis-
played.
When you release the mouse button, the default cursor returns.

Resizing a Graphic Field

1. Click the field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field.
2. Use the mouse to grab one of the edges or corners of the field. The cur-
sor changes to directional arrows showing the direction in which the
field dimension can be changed.
3. Drag the field in the direction of the arrows to increase or decrease its
size. When you release the mouse button, the default cursor returns.

Cutting and Pasting a Graphic Field

1. Click the field you want to cut. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field. (You can also select multiple fields to cut simulta-
neously. See “Selecting Multiple Fields at Once” on page 490.)
2. Click Cut Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar to remove
the field from the graphic (see Figure 422).

Figure 422. Cut Selected Field(s) Button

3. Place the cursor at the location where you want to paste the field you
removed. This can be a location on the same graphic or on a different
graphic.
4. Click Paste Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar to insert
the field in the new location (see Figure 423). The field is inserted at
the new location.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 491
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 423. Paste Selected Field(s) Button

Copying a Graphic Field

1. Use the default cursor to click the field you want to edit. A cross-
hatched border displays around the field. (You can also select multiple
fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Multiple Fields at Once”
on page 490.)
2. Click Copy Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar (see
Figure 424).

Figure 424. Copy Selected Field(s) Button

3. Place the cursor at the location within the graphic where you want to
paste the field you copied. This can be a location on the same graphic
or on a different graphic.
4. Click Paste Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar to insert
the field in the additional location (see Figure 423).
5. If additional configuration is required to distinguish the copied field
from the original field, complete this configuration.

Aligning Graphic Fields

You can use the Align buttons on the Graphics editor toolbar to align sec-
ondary graphic fields with the primary field you select.
To align graphic fields:
1. Click the field to which you want to align the other fields. A cross-
hatched border displays around this primary field.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the other fields that you want to
align to the primary field. A striped border displays around these sec-
ondary fields.
3. On the Graphics editor toolbar, click one of the following:
• Align Left, to align all of the secondary fields along the left of the
primary field
• Align Right, to align all of the secondary fields along the right of
the primary field
• Align Top, to align all of the secondary fields along the top of the
primary field
• Align Bottom, to align all of the secondary fields along the bottom
of the primary field
See Figure 425 on page 493.

492 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Organizing Graphic Fields

Figure 425. Align Buttons

Align
Left, Right, Top, Bottom

Making Graphic Fields the Same Size

You can use the Make Same buttons of the Graphic editor toolbar to make
several fields the same size as a primary field that you select.
To make graphic fields the same size:
1. Click the field which you want to use for the size of all selected fields.
A cross-hatched border displays around this primary field.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the other fields that you want to
make the same size as the primary field. A striped border displays
around these secondary fields.
3. On the Graphics editor toolbar, click one of the following:
• Make Same Height, to make all of the secondary fields the same
height as the primary field
• Make Same Width to make all of the secondary fields the same
width as the primary field
• Make Same Size to make all of the secondary fields the same size
as the primary field
See Figure 426.

Figure 426. Make Same Buttons

Make Same
Height, Width, Size

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 493
Using the Graphics Editor

Moving Graphic Field Layers Forward or Back

When you add graphic fields, they are layered on the background in the
order created. For example, if you create a Static Text label first, then add
a Target Image field, the Target Image will be a layer on (or in front of)
the label. You may want to move the label on top of the image.
For an example of fields layered over an image, see Figure 395 on page
462.
To move graphic field layers forward or back:
1. Select any field(s) you want to move forward or back (see “Selecting
Multiple Fields at Once” on page 490).
2. Click the right mouse button. From the pop-up menu, make a selec-
tion:
• Select Move Back by 1 to move the currently selected field(s)
behind one field.
• Select Move Forward by 1 to move the currently selected field(s)
forward one field.
• Select Move to Back to move the currently selected field(s) all the
way to the back. (You can also select the Move to Back button on
the Graphics editor toolbar.)
• Select Move to Front to move the currently selected field(s) in
front of other fields. (You can also select the Move to Front button
on the Graphics editor toolbar.)

Deleting a Graphic Field

1. Select all the fields you want to delete (see “Selecting Multiple Fields
at Once” on page 490).
2. From the Edit menu, select Delete. The selected fields are deleted.

494 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Saving Graphics

Saving Graphics
You can save a graphic using the Save Graphic button on the Graphics
editor toolbar or using the Save Graphic command from the File menu.
When saving a graphic, keep in mind the following:
• For custom graphics, your changes overwrite the current graphic file.
• For standard graphics, your changes do not overwrite the original
standard graphic. Instead, they are saved into a graphic file of the
same name in the Graphics\Custom folder, which will override the
standard graphic.
• To save a graphic file to a new name or a different location, you can
use the Save Graphic As command. For custom graphics, refer to
“Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File Name” below.
For standard graphics, refer to “Saving Edited Standard Graphics” on
page 496.
• The first time you save a custom graphic you created from a blank
graphic, you must specify the name and location of the graphic file.
Refer to “Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File Name”
below.
To save a graphic:
◆ On the Graphics editor toolbar, click Save (see Figure 427). The
graphic file is updated with your changes.

Figure 427. Save Button

Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File

Name
To save a custom graphic to a new name or location, you can use the Save
Graphic As command. The steps are the same for the first time you save a
custom graphic created from a blank graphic, because you need to specify
the name and location of the graphic file.
To save a custom graphic to a new location or file name:
1. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. If this is your first time
saving a graphic, select Save Graphic. The Save As Graphic dialog
box displays (see Figure 428 on page 497).
2. In the Graphic Object Name field, enter a name for this graphic. The
name appears in the list of custom graphic objects and, possibly, on
the navigation tree. Do not use an object name that is already in the
system.
3. In the HTML File Name field, enter an HTML name for the graphic
file. Tracer Summit uses this file name to locate the graphic. Do not
use an HTM file name that is already in use. (If you do not type the
.HTM extension, Tracer Summit automatically adds it.)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 495
Using the Graphics Editor

4. Select either Global Graphics or Site Graphics. If you select Global

Graphics, this graphic is saved to the Graphics\Custom folder and is
available for assignment to any site. If you select Site Graphics, you
must also identify the particular site to which you want to assign this
graphic. This graphic is saved in the Graphics\site name folder and
cannot be used for any other site. If you are saving an existing site
graphic, you cannot change it to a global graphic or change to another
site.
5. To change the security access for this graphic, click the Security
Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog box.
6. At the Save As Graphic dialog box, click OK to create the graphic
object in the location you specified.
If the graphic has no template fields, it is added as a node on the
Tracer Summit root node (if you selected Global Graphics in step 4) or
below the site you identified (if you selected Site Graphics in step 4).

Saving Edited Standard Graphics

When you edit a standard graphic and use the Save Graphic command to
save it, the edited standard graphic is stored in the Graphics\Custom
folder (which makes the graphic a global graphic available to all sites).
Tracer Summit automatically displays this edited standard graphic when
you select its associated object. The next section “How Tracer Summit
Searches for and Displays Standard Graphics” explains how this works.
If you want to make the edited standard graphic a site graphic that is
available only to the current site, you need to use the Save Graphic As
command to save the edited graphic to the Graphics\site name folder.
Refer to “Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Site Graphic” on
page 497.
For information on saving an edited standard graphic to a new name (as a
custom graphic), refer to “Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Cus-
tom Graphic” on page 498.

How Tracer Summit Searches for and Displays Standard Graphics

When you click on an object in the navigation tree, Tracer Summit follows
a search sequence to locate the object’s graphic file. To have Tracer Sum-
mit use an edited version of a standard graphic, it is helpful to know how
Tracer Summit searches for standard graphics. The program looks for the
HTML file that matches the name of the original standard graphic and
searches in this order:
1. The Graphics\site name folder for the current site.
2. The Graphics\Custom folder.
3. The Graphics\Standard folder where graphics originally included
with Tracer Summit are stored.
Knowing this search sequence allows you to store graphics in locations
and with names so that Tracer Summit first finds the one you want to
display.

496 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Saving Graphics

For example, the original standard graphic for an area is called area.htm
and is stored in the Graphics\Standard folder. Let’s say you open this
graphic and modify it, then use the Save Graphic command to save it.
Tracer Summit automatically saves the modified graphic to a file called
area.htm (the same name) in the Graphics\Custom folder. Now, when you
display the standard graphic for an area on any site, Tracer Summit dis-
plays the modified version of the graphic because it looks in the Graph-
ics\Custom folder before it looks in the Graphics\Standard folder.
To save a modified standard graphic in the Graphics\site name folder,
you need to use the Save Graphic As command (as described in the next
section).

Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Site Graphic

1. Display the standard graphic in the Graphics editor and make the
necessary edits.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 428).
The Graphic Object Name and HTML File Name fields already con-
tain the appropriate names for the standard graphic. Do not change
the names or Tracer Summit will not locate the modified graphic’s file
at runtime.

Figure 428. Save As Graphic Dialog Box

3. Select either Global Graphics or Site Graphics:

• If you select Global Graphics, this graphic is saved to the Graph-
ics\Custom folder and is available for assignment to any site.
(Selecting Global Graphics at the Save Graphic As dialog box has
the same effect as using the Save Graphic command.)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 497
Using the Graphics Editor

• If you select Site Graphics, you must also identify the particular
site to which you want to assign this graphic. This graphic then
cannot be used for any other site.
4. To change the security access for this graphic, click the Security
Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog box.
5. At the Save As Graphic dialog box, click OK to save the graphic object
in the location you specified. (Do not check the Fill in Template Fields
check box.)

Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Custom Graphic

To create a custom graphic, you can edit a standard graphic (rather than
starting with a blank graphic). To save an edited standard graphic as a
custom graphic, you simply use the Save Graphic As command to change
its object and HTML file name. When you change the name of the edited
standard graphic, the graphic is no longer the standard graphic for the
specified object. The graphic can be used as a modified standard graphic
(it won’t appear in the navigation tree) or saved with no template fields (it
will appear as a node on the tree).
To save an edited standard graphic as a custom graphic:
1. In the Graphics editor, display the standard graphic for the UCM,
application, or site object and make the necessary edits.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 428 on page 497).
3. In the Graphic Object Name field, specify the name of the object. This
name may appear on the navigation tree.
4. In the HTML File name field, enter a new name for the custom
graphic.
5. Select either Global Graphics or Site Graphics:
• If you select Global Graphics, this graphic is saved to the Graph-
ics\Custom folder and is available for assignment in any site.
• If you select Site Graphics, you must also identify the particular
site to which you want to assign this graphic. This graphic will be
saved to the Graphics\site name folder for the selected site and
cannot be used for any other site.
6. To change the security access for this graphic, click the Security
Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog box.
7. At the Save As Graphic dialog box, click OK to save the custom
graphic in the location you specified.
• If the graphic is to be used as a modified standard graphic, do not
check the Fill in Template Fields check box.

498 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Restoring an Original Standard Graphic

• If the graphic is to be used with no template fields, then check the

Fill in Template Fields check box.
If the graphic has no template fields, it is added as a node on the
Tracer Summit root node (if you selected Global Graphics in step 5) or
below the site you identified (if you selected Site Graphics in step 5).

Note:
When you save a graphic that contains template fields, the
graphic is not included on the navigation tree. See “Creating
and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields” on page 510 for
more information about template fields.

Restoring an Original Standard Graphic

A set of standard graphics are shipped with Tracer Summit. These origi-
nal standard graphics are stored in the Graphics\Standard folder. By
default, these standard graphics display when you click an item on the
navigation tree or click the Graphic button in a UCM editor.
When you edit a standard graphic, the edited version is automatically
saved as a global graphic in the Graphics\Custom folder, unless you use
the Save Graphic As command to save it as a site graphic in the
Graphics\site name folder specific to the current site. The file name is the
same as the original standard graphic.
As described in “How Tracer Summit Searches for and Displays Standard
Graphics” on page 496, Tracer Summit first looks for an object’s graphic
in the Graphics\site name folder, then in the Graphics\Custom folder,
and finally in the Graphics\Standard folder.
If you want to return to using an original standard graphic rather than
your edited version, you simply have to delete the edited versions in the
Graphics\site name and Graphics\Custom folders.
To restore an original standard graphic, you first identify the location of
the custom HTML file and then delete it.
To restore an original standard graphic:
1. In the Graphics editor, display the edited standard graphic that you
no longer want to use the object’s standard graphic.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Graphic Information tab of the Graphic Properties dialog
box (see Figure 429 on page 500).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 499
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 429. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Graphic Information Screen

4. Note the file name and path to the file.

5. Using Windows Explorer, locate and delete the file.

Note:
You can also rename the HTML file, which has the same effect
as deleting the file because Tracer Summit will not be able to
locate it. You should rename a graphic file when you are not
sure whether you may need the custom graphic again in the
future.

6. In Tracer Summit, display the graphic for the object.

You may need to repeat these steps again if there was a copy of the
graphic file in both the Graphics\Custom and the
Graphics\site name folders. When the Graphics Information screen of
the Graphics Properties dialog box displays the graphic’s folder as
\Program Files\Tracer Summit\Graphics\Standard, then you have
restored the original standard graphic.

500 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 About Site and Global Graphics

About Site and Global Graphics

Tracer Summit classifies most graphics into two categories:
• Site graphics are specific to a site and are not available to be assigned
to other sites. These graphics are objects that reside in the site data-
base and initially have their corresponding HTML file stored in the
Graphics\site name folder.
• Global graphics are available to all sites. These graphics are objects
stored in the system site database and initially have their correspond-
ing HTML files stored in the Graphics\Custom folder.
Many customers have only one site on their Tracer Summit system and so
will usually save their custom graphics as site graphics.
Global graphics are most useful when you have multiple sites within your
Tracer Summit system and want to set up your own standard graphics or
have graphics appear above sites as group of sites nodes on the naviga-
tion tree. Group of sites nodes help you navigate when you have multiple
sites.
All graphics in a system are set up as either global graphics or site-spe-
cific graphics. If a graphic is set up to be a global graphic, it is stored at
the system site and is available for use at one or more additional sites. All
global graphics can be selected from the Open Graphic or Edit Graphic
dialog box with any active site. If a graphic is associated with a specific
site, then it may be accessed and edited only when you are logged onto the
appropriate site.
Within global graphics, there are two categories of existing graphics that
you may access using the Graphics editor: standard graphics and custom
graphics. All graphic objects have corresponding HTML files. Whenever
you save a graphic or save it under a new name, you create or update the
associated HTML file as well.
A standard graphic is a graphic that is shipped with Tracer Summit.
Tracer Summit provides these ready-made graphics stored in the system
site for many UCMs and applications. These standard graphics are for
your convenience, if you do not have the time or resources to invest in cre-
ating all new graphics for your system. Standard graphic HTML files are
always stored in the Graphics\Standard folder for the system. If a stan-
dard graphic is modified, the modified HTML file is stored in the Graph-
ics\Custom or Graphics\site name folder, depending upon the location
you choose in the Save As Graphic dialog box.
A custom graphic is a graphic that you have previously created in the
Graphics editor, or which you have created based on a standard graphic.
Custom graphic objects can be stored in either the global site or a specific
site. The corresponding HTML file is saved in the Graphics\Custom
folder (for the global location) or the Graphics\site name folder for the
site-specific location.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 501
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating Images for Use in Graphics

Using the Graphics editor, you can import images you create in other soft-
ware applications into graphics used in Tracer Summit. The file types
that Tracer Summit can import include the following:
• Graphics Interchange format (GIF)—version 89a is recommended
because version 87a does not support transparent colors
• JPEG File Interchange (JPG)—Hoffman compressed and progression
encoding
• Bitmap (BMP)—RGB encoded, RLE encoded
• Audio-Video Interleave (AVI)
To create these image files, you can use a variety of graphics packages,
including Paintshop Pro versions 5 and 6, AutoCAD, CorelDRAW, or Win-
dows Paint.

Saving Image Files

For optimal performance, save each image file in the same directory as
the HTML file that use the image. For site-specific images (used by only
one site), store the image files in the Graphics\site name folder. For
images used by more than one site, store the image files in the Graph-
ics\Custom folder.
Name image files using up to 32 characters. Choose a name that is as spe-
cific and informative as possible, especially if you may use this image sev-
eral times within a site or for other sites.

502 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Images for Use in Graphics

Window and Image Sizes

Table 26 lists window sizes for different window options within Tracer
Summit. This information is helpful if you are designing images that you
want to cover the entire screen (such as background images). If you have
a background image set to the indicated height and width for the given
window display options, then no information will be hidden and require
scrolling to see.

Table 26. Image Sizes for Different Window Options

(Based on 800 x 600 display settings)

Window Display Options

Window or
Image Size Windows
(Width x Height Navigation Summit
Status Bar Task Bar
in Pixels) Tree Task Bar
Displayed? Auto Hide
Displayed? Displayed? Enabled?

594 x 452 Yes Yes Yes No

594 x 480 Yes Yes Yes Yes
594 x 512 Yes Yes No No
594 x 540 Yes Yes No Yes
594 x 470 Yes No Yes No
594 x 498 Yes No Yes Yes
594 x 530 Yes No No No
594 x 558 Yes No No Yes
780 x 452 No Yes Yes No
780 x 480 No Yes Yes Yes
780 x 512 No Yes No No
780 x 540 No Yes No Yes
780 x 470 No No Yes No
780 x 498 No No Yes Yes
780 x 530 No No No No
780 x 558 No No No Yes

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 503
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating a Custom Graphic from a

Blank Graphic
One way to create a custom graphic is to edit an existing graphic, then
use the Save Graphic As command to save it under a new name (see “Sav-
ing Graphics” on page 495).
Another way to create a custom graphic is to start with a blank graphic.
You may wish to do this if there is no standard graphic for the object you
want to illustrate, or if the standard graphic is so different from what you
need that it is more efficient to start with a blank graphic.
To create a custom graphic from a blank graphic, you must open the
blank graphic, build the custom graphic, then save it.

Opening a Blank Graphic

You can open a blank graphic from the Tracer Summit main menu or
from the Graphics editor.

Opening a Blank Graphic from the Main Menu

1. If your system includes multiple sites, make sure you are logged onto
the correct Tracer Summit site (so that graphics are saved to the
appropriate site).
2. From the Setup menu, select Graphics editor. The Edit Graphic dialog
box displays (see Figure 430).

Figure 430. Edit Graphic Dialog Box

3. Click New to display a blank graphic in the Graphics editor (see Fig-
ure 431 on page 505).

504 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Custom Graphic from a Blank Graphic

Figure 431. Graphics Editor—New Graphic Window

4. Insert fields, images and background as described in “Building a Cus-

tom Graphic” on page 505.

Opening a Blank Graphic from the Graphics Editor

◆ On the Graphics editor toolbar, click New Graphic (see Figure 432) to
display a blank graphic (see Figure 431).

Figure 432. New Graphic Button

Building a Custom Graphic

The first step in creating a new graphic is to add the main image(s) over
which you will add fields. There can be more than one image per graphic
object. For example, this image could be a floor plan or a drawing of a
chiller, or both.

Selecting the Background Image

The background image is an image that fills the entire graphic window.
Often, you may want to select the same background image for all custom
graphics you create to provide a standard look for all graphics. Typically,
this background image is simply a solid color screen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 505
Using the Graphics Editor

To select a background image, refer to “Changing the Background of a

Graphic” on page 468.

Note:
This is the only image a grid displays over.

Inserting Other Images

1. Use a third-party graphics creation tool to generate a graphic in GIF,
JPG, or BMP format.
2. Save the image in the Graphics\Custom or Graphics\site name
folder.
3. With your custom graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, on the
Graphics editor palette, click Image (see Figure 433). The cursor
becomes an insert prompt.

Figure 433. Image Button

4. Make a selection:
• To create an image that keeps its proportion (or aspect ratio) the
same as you created it, click once on the graphic at the approxi-
mate place you want to insert the image.
• To create an image of a specific size, drag the insert cursor to cre-
ate a box where you will insert the image. Choosing this option
may distort the image’s aspect ratio (the image, for example, may
be stretched wider than it was when you created it). This may
adversely affect the quality of the image.
When you release the mouse button, the Image dialog box displays
(see Figure 434).

Figure 434. Image Dialog Box

506 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a Custom Graphic from a Blank Graphic

5. Click Browse to select a file name and path of the image from the
Locate Image dialog box (see “Using the Locate Image Dialog Box” on
page 470).
6. At the Image dialog box, click OK. The graphic displays with the new
image inserted.
7. Change the size or position of the image as necessary. Follow the
directions for moving or sizing fields (see “Moving a Graphic Field” on
page 491 or “Resizing a Graphic Field” on page 491).

Inserting Fields
The task of inserting and configuring fields on a new custom graphic is
the same as on an existing standard graphic (see “Inserting a Graphic
Field” on page 474).

Saving Custom Graphics

Graphic objects in Tracer Summit are stored with corresponding HTML
files. You can save custom graphics as either global graphics or site
graphics:
• To make a graphic a site graphic that is available only to the current
site, choose the site as the location to save the graphic.
• To make a graphic a global graphic that you can assign to any site,
choose the global location to save the graphic.
Use the Save Graphic command or the Save Graphic As command to save
the graphic. For more information, refer to “Saving Graphics” on
page 495.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 507
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating Expanded Messages

An expanded message is a graphic object that you can assign an analog or
binary input. When the input goes into alarm, the alarm is displayed in
the event log with a small envelope to indicate it has an expanded mes-
sage. Users can click on the envelope to view the expanded message. You
can use an expanded message to give operators detailed information
about an alarm and show (in text or images) an action they should take.
To create an expanded message, you create a graphic with text and
images, just as you would for any graphic. When you save it, you save it
as an expanded message (an option at the Save Graphic As dialog box).
When you save the graphic with the expanded message option, Tracer
Summit saves both the HTML file for the graphic and an expanded mes-
sage object that links back to the graphic object. This graphic then dis-
plays when the expanded message object is viewed.
After you have created an expanded message, the expanded message
object is available to be assigned in the analog or binary input editors for
alarming and viewing in the event log.

Note:
A graphic that has template fields cannot be an expanded message.

You can use the same steps for creating an expanded message whether
you are working with a new graphic or an existing graphic.
To create an expanded message:
1. Display the Graphics editor and make a selection:
• Open an existing graphic that you want to use as an expanded
message.
• Create a graphic to use as the expanded message. Include text
fields and images as appropriate. You can create a custom graphic
from a blank graphic or edit a standard graphic.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. If you are saving the
graphic for the first time, select Save Graphic. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 435 on page 509).

508 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Expanded Messages

Figure 435. Save As Graphic Dialog Box—Expanded Message

3. Click the Create Expanded Message dialog box.

4. Complete the other fields as appropriate (for more information, see
“Saving Graphics” on page 495).
5. Click OK. The graphic file is saved and the expanded message object
is created.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 509
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating and Modifying Graphics with

Template Fields
Template fields allow you to create your own standard graphics. They
look at the context of the graphic for the necessary information to display
data in the field. Because graphics containing template fields do not have
a fixed context object, they do not automatically appear on the navigation
tree. From within the Graphics editor, you can recognize a template field
because the Site Name and Object Name properties to which it refers are
listed as <default>.
Because template fields do not have a fixed context object, you can use
graphics with template fields in several places on the same site or on
other sites. The standard graphics included with Tracer Summit use tem-
plate fields.
Fields that can be used as template fields are:
• Graphical status
• Status text
• Analog in 5 color
• Binary text
• Animation
• Target text
• Target image
• Target button
• Setpoint control
• Override control
• Binary check box control
• Selection list control
A target field set up as a template field will pass the context object of the
current graphic to the graphic being opened. Graphics with template
fields being launched from a target on another graphic must have the
appropriate context object passed via the target. For example, the system
will display “no such property” for all template fields on a graphic if those
templates were for VAV II/III/IV and the target context object was for an
IntelliPak Rooftop.

Note:
Graphics that were on the tree and were modified to include
template fields will no longer appear on the navigation tree.

To assign a graphic with template fields to a UCM or an application, use

the Navigation Tree editor (see Chapter 26, “Using the Navigation Tree”).

510 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields

Inserting a Template Field on a Graphic

1. Display the graphic to which you want to add a template field.
2. Make a selection:
• To insert a new field, click the appropriate button on the Graphics
editor palette and then click on the graphic (see “Inserting a
Graphic Field” on page 474). The editor for that field displays.
• To change an existing field into a template field, click on the field
and then click the right mouse button. Select Edit Properties from
the pop-up menu. The editor for that field displays.
3. Display the Property screen or the Context Object screen as appropri-
ate. Figure 436 shows the Property screen for the Status Text editor
and Figure 437 shows the Context Object screen for the Target Text
editor.

Figure 436. Status Text Editor—Property Screen

Figure 437. Target Text Editor—Context Object Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 511
Using the Graphics Editor

4. In the Site Name field, select <default>.

Note:
For the Property screen, the Object Name field is automatically
assigned a value of <default>. For the Context Object screen,
the Object Type and Object Name fields are assigned a value of
<default>.

5. Edit the information on the other screens as desired.

6. Click OK. The specified graphic field is created.

Saving a Graphic with Template Fields

Saving a graphic with template fields is the same as saving any graphic.
Use the Save Graphic or Save Graphic As command on the File menu. At
the Save Graphic As dialog box, make sure you do not select the Fill In
Templates check box, which hard codes the information and changes the
template fields back to regular fields. For detailed information on saving
graphics, refer to “Saving Graphics” on page 495.
When you save a graphic with template fields, the graphic object does not
appear on the navigation tree or in the Open Graphic dialog box. You can
assign the graphic to a UCM, application or site node on the navigation
tree using the Navigation Tree editor.
To edit a graphic with template fields, you must follow the steps in “Edit-
ing a Graphic With Template Fields” on page 513.

512 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields

Editing a Graphic With Template Fields

If you have assigned a graphic with template fields to a UCM or applica-
tion using the navigation tree, then you can open the graphic for editing
as you would other graphics. See “Accessing the Graphics Editor” on
page 463.
If you have not assigned the graphic to the navigation tree, you must open
it from the Edit Graphic dialog box, as described in the following steps.
To edit a graphic with template fields:
1. From the Setup menu, select Graphics editor.
• If you have a graphic currently displayed, then that graphic is
opened for editing. From the File menu, select Open Graphic. The
Edit Graphic dialog box displays.
• If no graphic was displayed, then the Edit Graphic dialog box dis-
plays.
See Figure 438.

Figure 438. Edit Graphic Dialog Box

2. Click the Template Graphics check box. The list updates to include all
template graphics.
3. Click the name of the graphic, then click Edit. The selected graphic
displays in the Graphics editor.
4. Edit and save the graphic.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 513
Using the Graphics Editor

Putting Permanent Information into Template Fields on

a Graphic
You may decide you no longer want a graphic to have template fields.
Instead, you want it to contain permanent information. You can have
Tracer Summit fill in the information based on the context from which
you launch the graphic.
To put permanent information into a graphic’s template fields:
1. Open the graphic that has template fields in the Graphics editor.
Make sure you choose the appropriate context from which to launch
the graphic:
• To launch from an object on the navigation tree, click on the object
in the navigation tree to display the graphic, then on the Setup
menu select Graphics editor.
• To launch from a UCM editor, display the editor for the associated
UCM (on the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers, then the UCM
type). At the UCM editor Status screen, click Graphic to display
the graphic. Then on the Setup menu, select Graphics editor.
• To launch from a target field on other graphic, click on the target
field to display the associated graphic with template fields. Then
on the Setup menu, select Graphics editor.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 439).

Figure 439. Save As Graphic Dialog Box—Fill In Template Fields

3. Complete the Object Name and HTML File Name fields with different
names for standard graphic objects. (Overriding a standard graphic
object with permanent information for template fields will do so for
all objects that use the same standard graphic object.)

514 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting a Graphic

4. Click the Fill In Template check box.

5. Click OK. The graphic is saved with the object name and HTML file
name provided. All of the template fields are hard-coded to the con-
text object of the graphic you launched in step 1. Because the graphic
no longer has template fields, Tracer Summit assigns it to the naviga-
tion tree. The graphic is also available at the Open Graphic dialog
box.
If the name of the graphic object was changed, you must use the Nav-
igation Tree editor to assign the new graphic to a UCM, application or
site node on the tree.

Deleting a Graphic
There are two steps to deleting a graphic:
• Deleting the graphic object
• Deleting the HTML file associated with it
To delete a graphic object:
Use the Delete Object utility on the Tools menu. See Chapter 39, “Delet-
ing Objects and Sites.”
To delete an HTML file associated with a file:
In Windows Explorer, use standard procedures to delete the associated
HTML file from the Graphics\site name folder or from Graphics\Custom
folder. When displaying the object, Tracer Summit will revert to the
graphic stored in the Graphics\Standard folder, if there is one. (If there is
no standard graphic file, the user will see an error message indicating
that the file does not exist or cannot be found.)

Note:
Renaming a graphic file to a name that is not called by Tracer
Summit has the same effect as deleting the HTML file. Tracer
Summit cannot find this file. Rename a graphic file only when
you are not sure whether you may need a custom graphic again
in the future.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 515
Using the Graphics Editor

Using the Graphing Control Editor

From the Graphing Control editor, you can create graphs for either live
properties or historical data trends from Tracer Summit. You can have as
many graphs on a graphic that you want and plot up to four properties
per graph.

Note:
The Trend viewer provides an easier method for creating and
viewing graphs for live or historical trend data (see Chapter 28,
“Using the Trend Viewer”).

Live Property Graphs

A live property graph shows the value of any property in Tracer Summit
in real time. The sampling of data starts when the graphic is opened and
stops when the graphic is closed. Using a right-mouse-click, you can
choose to start and stop sampling, as well as, change the style of the
graph or print it out. Live graphs are valuable for monitoring building
conditions in real time.

Historical Graphs
A historical graph shows values that have been stored by the BCU in a
trend object. Graphs that display trend objects are static since the data is
historical. Using a right-mouse-click, you can refresh the data, change the
style of the graph, or print it out.

Accessing the Graphing Control Editor

With the Graphics Control editor open, click the graphing symbol button
on the tool palette, then click anywhere in the Graphics editor. The
Graphing Control editor displays (see Figure 440).

516 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Graphing Control Editor

Figure 440. Graphing Control Editor—Members Tab

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 517
Using the Graphics Editor

Selecting Graph Members

From the Graphing Control Members tab, you can add items to the Graph
Members tree to create a live property or single trend object graph (see
Figure 441).

Figure 441. Graphing Control—Selecting Live Property members

To set the graph members for live properties:

1. With the Graphics Control editor open, click the graphing symbol but-
ton on the tool palette, then click anywhere in the Graphics editor.
The Graphing Control editor displays with the Members tab active.
2. In the Site box, select the site name. Once the name is selected, the
Type, Name, and Property fields are filtered to only display those
objects defined in the site.
3. In the Type list box, select the object type for the graph.
4. In the Name list box, select the name of the object.
5. In the Property list box, select the property to be sampled.
6. Click Add to add the selected property to the Graph Members tree.

Note:
You are only allowed to add up to four properties to the tree.
Then the Add button is not available. Clicking on the plus (+)
sign, expands the list to show the selected graph properties.

518 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Graphing Control Editor

7. Repeat steps 2-6 above to add other properties to the list of members,
as necessary.
8. To remove properties from the Graph Members tree, highlight the
selection and click Remove.
9. To add a Trend member and select graph plot properties, see the fol-
lowing sections.
10. Click OK to create the graph and return to the Graphics editor’s main
screen, where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 443 on
page 520).
To set the graph members for a single Trend object:
1. In the Site box, select the site name.
2. In the Type list box, select a Trend (see Figure 442).

Figure 442. Graphing Control—Selecting Trend Object Members

3. In the Name list box, select the name of the object.

4. In the Property list box, select the property to be sampled. Only mem-
bers of the selected trend can be added to the graph.
5. Click Add to add the selected property to the Graph Members tree.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 above to add other properties to the list of members,
as necessary.
7. To remove properties from the Graph Members tree, highlight the
selection and click Remove.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 519
Using the Graphics Editor

8. To select graph plot properties, see “To select graph plot properties:”
on page 520
9. Click OK to create the graph and return to the Graphics editor’s main
screen, where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 443).

Figure 443. Graph Field

To select graph plot properties:

1. In the Graph Members tree, highlight the graph member property
name to assign color, Y1/Y2, and legend text.
2. In the Color list box, select a color for the graph and legend text. You
should select different colors for each item graphed. For pie and bar
charts, an automatic color generation is used to color each of the sam-
ples on the plot.
3. The Y1-axis is the default selection. Use Y1 for single trend items and
similarly grouped items. Use Y2 for dissimilar items that you need to
show resolution on.

Note:
Y2 items will always be a line drawn on the graph, except for
Area (3D). In Area (3D), Y2 selections are graphed against the
Y1-axis.

4. Click OK to save the information and return to the Graphics editor,

where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 443).

Selecting the Graph Type

Select the graph type on the Graph Settings tab. There are six graph
types to choose from (line, pie, area, scatter, and bar).

Note:
All except the line graph can be viewed in two or three dimen-
sions.

520 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Graphing Control Editor

To choose a graph type:

1. Open the Graphing Control editor.
2. Click the Graph Settings tab to display the graph types (see
Figure 444).
3. In the Graph Title field, type the title you want to appear above the
graph.

Figure 444. Graphing Control—Graph Settings Screen

4. In the Background Color field, select the background color that the
graph title, plot, and time stamps will appear on.
5. In the Refresh Rate field, select the sampling rate for the graphed
properties. The selected and plotted properties are all sampled at this
rate. The time stamp appears in military time.
6. Click OK to save the information and return to the Graphics editor,
where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 443 on page 520).

Note:
This tab can be accessed at any time in the runtime mode from
a pop-up menu item by right-clicking on the graph. This allows
you to quickly change graph types, while keeping the graphic
field open.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 521
Using the Graphics Editor

Setting up Graph Samples

When setting up a graph, you can also set the axis labels of the object.
The default is to place ticks and time stamps on the graph once per sam-
ple. At this screen you can also assign a title to the X/Y-axis.
To assign titles and set up graph samples:
1. Open the Graphing Control editor.
2. Click the Axis tab to display the Axis screen (see Figure 445)

Figure 445. Graphing Control—Axis Screen

3. In the Y1 Title field type a title. The title is automatically centered to

the left of this axis. If you are also using the Y2-axis, type a title. The
title is automatically centered to the right of this axis.
4. In the X-axis Title field, type a title. The title is automatically cen-
tered below the X-axis.
5. In the Ticks Every field, type the number of samples to be counted
before a tick is placed on the graph.
6. In the Labels Every field, type the number of samples to be counted
before a label is placed on the graph. Labels are the sampled time
stamps in HH.MM.SS format.
7. Click OK to save the information and return to the Graphics editor,
where the Graphic field is displayed (see Figure 443 on page 520).

522 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 31

Using the Calculations Editor

You can create calculation objects that perform calculations based on

selected system data, such as the information provided in property refer-
encer edit controls. Calculations can be performed and saved for a time
period that you define. The resulting calculated data can then be used in
trends, graphic displays, and alarms.
You create and edit calculations using the Calculations editor. The follow-
ing section describes the calculation types and their formulas.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 523
Using the Calculations Editor

About Calculation Types

Tracer Summit includes the following calculation types:
• Average
• Cool Flow Rate
• Heat Flow Rate
• Maximum
• Minimum
• Meter Totalization
• Peak for X Minute Intervals (X = 5, 15, 30, or 60)
• Total Cooling Degree Days
• Total Heating Degree Days
• Total Run Hours/Starts
These calculation types and their respective calculation formulas are
defined as in the sections that follow.

Average
The Average calculation returns the average value for the current day
and the current billing period.
Today’s Avg = A / N

A = Running total
N = Counter for number of samples
Today’s Avg = New Average

Processing: Once per minute. If the enable referencer is on, the refer-
enced analog value is added to the running total (A), and the counter (N)
is incremented. The running total (A) is divided by the counter (N) to
obtain the average. Calculated values are saved for the current and previ-
ous day, and for the current and previous billing period.

Cool Flow Rate

The Cool Flow Rate calculation typically measures the total energy
required to provide cooling to a building or area. This calculation looks at
two factors: the flow rate of the fluid (air or water) and the temperature
differential across the process.
Total = Total + (Flow Rate x Conv x (Temp 2 - Temp 1))

Flow Rate = Measured Flow Rate

Conv = Edited Conversion Factor
Temp 2 = Entering Temperature
Temp 1 = Leaving Temperature

524 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 About Calculation Types

Note:
The Cool Flow Rate calculation requires a conversion factor to
scale the flow measurement device and account for the heat
content of the fluid. If the calculation is for a constant volume
process, you must assign an analog output with a default value
of the volume for the Flow Rate referencer.

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and temperature 2 (Temp 2) is

greater than temperature 1 (Temp 1), the cool flow value (Flow Rate x
Conv x [Temp 2 - Temp 1]) is added to the total cool flow value (Total). The
calculation is evaluated each minute, provided the temperature differen-
tial (Temp 2 - Temp 1) remains positive. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Application: You can use Cool Flow Rate calculations to accu-
mulate the BTU output of chillers, VAV boxes, fan coils, air handling
units, and so on. You can use the calculated results for energy reports or
tenant billing. The following illustrations demonstrate some typical appli-
cations.

For air flowing through a Coil

coil:
Air Flow
Temp 2 = 1 1 4

Temp 1 = 4

For coil water: 2 3

Temp 2 = 3
Temp 1 = 2 Water
Flow

For condenser water:

Temp 2 = 3 From
4 3
To
Tower Tower
Temp 1 = 4

For chilled water:

Temp 2 = 1 From
1 2
To
Load Load
Temp 1 = 2

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 525
Using the Calculations Editor

Heat Flow Rate

The Heat Flow Rate calculation typically measures the total energy
required to provide heating to a building or area. This calculation looks at
two factors: the flow rate of the fluid (air, water, or steam) and the tem-
perature differential across the process.
Total = Total + (Flow Rate x Conv x (Temp 1 - Temp 2)

Flow Rate = Measured Flow Rate

Conv = Edited Conversion Factor
Temp 2 = Entering Temperature
Temp 1 = Leaving Temperature

Note:
The Heat Flow Rate calculation requires a conversion factor to
scale the flow measurement device and account for the heat
content of the fluid. If the calculation is for a constant volume
process, you should assign an analog output with a default
value of the volume for the Flow Rate referencer.

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and temperature 1 (Temp 1) is

greater than temperature 2 (Temp 2), the heat flow value (Flow Rate x
Conv x [Temp 1 - Temp 2) is added to the total heat flow value (Total). The
calculation is evaluated each minute, provided the temperature differen-
tial (Temp 1 - Temp 2) remains positive. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Application: You can use Heat Flow Rate calculations to accu-
mulate the BTU output of boilers, fan coils, or air handling units. You can
use the calculated results can be used for energy reports or tenant billing.
The following illustrations demonstrate some typical applications.
For air flowing through a Coil
coil:
Air Flow
Temp 2 = 1 1 4

Temp 1 = 4

For coil water: 2 3

Temp 2 = 3
Temp 1 = 2 Water
Flow

For a boiler:
Temp 2 = 1
Temp 1 = 2 Return Boiler Supply
Hot Water 1 2 Hot Water

526 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 About Calculation Types

Maximum
The Maximum calculation returns the highest value for the current day
and current billing period.
Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the current analog value is
compared to the present maximum value. If the current analog value is
greater than the present maximum value, then the current analog value
is saved as the new maximum value. Calculated values are saved for the
current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing period.

Note:
If the current analog value is equal to the present maximum
value, the current value is not saved as the new maximum
value.

Typical Application: The Maximum calculation typically determines

the highest space temperature that has occurred in a tenant space.

Minimum
The Minimum calculation returns the lowest values that have occurred
during the current day and current billing period.
Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the current analog value is
compared to the present minimum value. If the current analog value is
less than the present minimum value, the current analog value is saved
as the new minimum value. Calculated values are saved for the current
and previous day, and for the current and previous billing period.

Note:
If the current analog value is equal to the present minimum
value, the current value is not saved as the new minimum
value.

Typical Application: The Minimum calculation typically determines

the lowest temperature that has occurred in a space overnight.

Meter Totalization
The Meter Totalization calculation totals metered flow rates, such as gas,
electric, and water.
Total = Total + (Meter Value x Conv)

Total = Meter Total

Meter Value = Referenced Value
Conv = Edited Conversion Factor

Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the meter value conversion

factor (Meter Value x Conv) is added to the meter total (Total). The refer-
enced value (Meter Value) is added to the total (Total) each minute. Calcu-

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 527
Using the Calculations Editor

lated values are saved for the current and previous day and the current
and previous billing period.

Note:
To set up this calculation, you must connect a metered input
(pulse or analog) to a BCU I/O Module, PCM, UPCM, or MP580/
581. You need to know the operating specifics, such as type or
scaling for the selected meter, to determine the appropriate con-
version factor (Conv). A typical pulse meter input, for example,
is attached to a PCM binary input and configured to measure
electrical usage in KW. This rate (in KW) is stored in the PCM
object as a Pulse Accumulator property and is referenced by the
Meter Totalization calculation object. To total this in KW, the
conversion factor is 0.01667, or KW/60 samples per hour.

Typical Application: The Meter Totalization calculation typically totals

quantities that are metered by utilities, such as gas, electric, or water.

Peak for X Minute Interval

The Peak for X Minute Interval calculations combine a maximum and an
average to determine the highest value that has occurred over a specified
interval. An average value is collected over the specified time interval and
compared to an existing maximum. If the sampled average is greater
than the existing maximum, it becomes the new peak value. Peaks are
calculated for the current day and current billing period.
Temp Peak = Sum X - Sum X + New Value
X
X

X = Number of Minutes in the Selected Interval

Sum X = Sum of Last X Values
New Value = New Value To Be Averaged
Temp Peak = Temporary Peak Value

Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the temporary peak (Temp

Peak) calculation is performed. If the calculated temporary peak value
(Temp Peak) is greater than the present peak value, the peak value is set
equal to the temporary peak value (Temp Peak). If the temporary peak
value (Temp Peak) is less than or equal to the peak value, the peak value
retains its current value and is not reset. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Application: Peak calculations typically record the maximum
electrical usage in kilowatts. The logic used in the Peak calculation mim-
ics the logic that electrical utilities use to bill customers for electrical
usage over a shifting time frame.

Note:
Electrical meters are typically pulse meters. If brought into a
PCM, UPCM, or MP580/581, the controller can calculate a
KWH rate that the calculation object can reference.

528 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 About Calculation Types

Total Cooling Degree Days (CDD)

Cooling degree days indicate the external environmental conditions and
measure the amount of time in a day that the outside air temperature
was warmer than the base temperature. The Total Cooling Degree Days
calculation compares the outside air temperature to a base temperature
each minute and increments the cooling degree days value when the out-
side air temperature is above that base temperature. Typically, 65°F is
the base temperature, but the break-even temperature of the building
may be a better value for calculating cooling degree days.
OAT - Base Temp
CDD = Deg Total + 24 Hours x 60 Min

Deg Total = Total Degrees Cool Today

Base Temp = Edited Base Temperature
OAT = Outside Air Temperature

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and the base temperature

(Base Temp) is less than the outdoor air temperature (OAT), the differ-
ence of the outdoor air temperature and base temperature (OAT - Base
Temp) is divided by the total cooling minutes (24 Hours x 60 Min). The
resulting value is then added to the degree total (Deg Total) for that day
and the degree total for the billing period. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Applications: Cooling Degree Day calculations compare
weather conditions. They are valuable as a means of accounting for
changes in the cooling load from one year to the next.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 529
Using the Calculations Editor

Total Heating Degree Days (HDD)

Heating degree days indicate the external environmental conditions and
measure the amount of time that the outside air temperature was cooler
than the base temperature. The Total Heating Degree Days calculation
compares the outside air temperature to a base temperature each minute
and increments the heating degree day value when the outside air tem-
perature is below that base temperature. Typically, 65°F is the base tem-
perature, but the break-even temperature of the building may be a better
value for calculating heating degree days.
Base Temp - OAT
HDD = Deg Total + 24 Hours x 60 Min

Deg Total = Total Degrees Heat Today

Base Temp = Edited Base Temperature
OAT = Outside Air Temperature

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and the value of the outdoor

air temperature (OAT) is less than the base temperature (Base Temp), the
difference of the base temperature and outdoor air temperature (Base
Temp - OAT) is divided by the total heating minutes (24 Hours x 60 Min).
The resulting value is then added to the degree total (Deg Total) for that
day. Calculated values are saved for the current and previous day, and for
the current and previous billing period.
Typical Applications: Heating Degree Day calculations compare
weather conditions. They are valuable in energy reporting to account for
changes in the heating load from one year to the next.

530 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 About Calculation Types

Total Run Hours/Starts

The Total Run Hours/Starts calculation monitors the value of a binary
referencer and accumulates Run time when the referenced input is on.
Whenever the referenced input changes from off to on, a Start is accumu-
lated.
N=N+1
T = T + 1/60

N = Number of Starts
T = Total Number of Run Hours

Processing for Starts: If the enable referencer is on and the binary ref-
erencer transitions from Off to On, the number of starts (N) is incre-
mented. Calculated values are saved for the current and previous day,
and for the current and previous billing period.
Processing for Run Hours: If the enable referencer is on and the prop-
erty referencer is on, the total number of run hours (T) is incremented.
Calculated values are saved for the current and previous day, and for the
current and previous billing period.
Typical Application 1: Run hours and starts typically determine equip-
ment maintenance schedule.

Note:
For typical application 1, you should not clear run hour and
start calculations at the end of the billing period. These calcula-
tions typically reference an analog input, which generates an
alarm when a defined run hour limit or starts limit has been
exceeded. For example, a chiller might be set to generate an
alarm when it has run for 100 hours, or when it has more than
200 starts.

Typical Application 2: Use the Run hours calculation to determine how

many hours an area has been in timed override. For this application the
property reference should be “Timed Override In Control” for an area.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 531
Using the Calculations Editor

Accessing the Calculations Editor

1. From the Setup menu, click Calculations. The Select Calculation dia-
log box displays (see Figure 446).

Figure 446. Select Calculation Dialog Box

2. Click the desired calculation object.

3. Click OK. The Calculations editor Status screen displays. Figure 447
shows the editor for the Heat Flow Rate calculation.

Figure 447. Calculations Editor for Heat Flow Rate

532 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New Calculation Object

Creating a New Calculation Object

To create a new calculation object, you must:
• Open and name a new calculation object and choose a calculation type
(as described in this section)
• Set up the calculation object, including choosing whether the calcula-
tion will be controlled by a referencer and choosing whether to reset
the calculation at the end of the billing period (see “Setting Up a Cal-
culation Object” on page 535)
• Define security access (see “Setting Security Access for a Calculation
Object” on page 538)
• Save the calculation object
To create a new calculation object:
1. From the Setup menu, select Calculations. The Select Calculation
dialog box displays.
2. Click New. The New Calculation Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 448).

Figure 448: New Calculation Name Dialog Box

3. In the Calculation Name field, enter a name. Use a maximum of 32

characters.

Note:
You must enter a name before you can save the new calculation
object. You can modify the name from the Setup screen of the
Calculations editor.

4. Click OK. The Select Calculation Type dialog box displays (see
Figure 449 on page 534).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 533
Using the Calculations Editor

Figure 449. Select Calculation Type Dialog Box

5. Select the type of calculation you want to create.

6. Click OK. The Calculations editor displays.
7. To set up the calculation, follow the steps in “Setting Up a Calculation
Object” on page 535.

534 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up a Calculation Object

Setting Up a Calculation Object

When you set up a calculation object, you must select a property for each
referencer field. (For detailed information on using referencers, see Chap-
ter 3, Using Referencer Edit Controls).
To set up a calculation object:
1. From the Calculation editor, click the Setup tab to display the Setup
screen. Figure 450 shows the Calculation editor Setup screen for the
Heat Flow Rate calculation.

Figure 450. Calculation Editor Setup Screen

2. For each referencer field, click the referencer button (...) to the right of
the field. The Select Property Reference dialog box displays (see Fig-
ure 451 on page 536).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 535
Using the Calculations Editor

Figure 451. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

3. In the Type field, select the type of object.

4. In the Name field, select the object’s name.
5. In the Property field, select an analog property.
6. Click OK to return to the Setup screen. The referencer field now dis-
plays the name and property of the chosen referencer. The status of
the referenced property is now displayed.
7. In the Conversion Factor field, keep the default value or enter a new
conversion factor value for the calculation.
8. In the Enable field, choose whether the calculation will be enabled,
disabled, or controlled by a referencer.
To enable the calculation process:
• Select Enabled to allow the calculation process to continue.
To discontinue the calculation process:
• Select Disabled to stop the calculation process.
To control the calculation process by a referencer:
• Click the Mode button to the left of the Enabled/Disabled field.
The referencer field changes to “???.”
• To select a property referencer, click the referencer button (...).
The Select Property Reference dialog box displays. Select a binary
property and click OK.
• In the On Delay for Referencer field, specify the amount of time
the referencer must be on before analog property referencer data
is included in the calculation.
9. To reset the calculation object at the end of the billing period, select
the Reset at End of Billing Period check box.
10. In the Units field, select the units to display for the calculation.
11. Click Save.

536 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Clearing Calculation Data

Clearing Calculation Data

You should clear the historical information stored in a calculation object
after any property on the Setup screen is changed. The historical informa-
tion displays in the History group of the Status screen. The Status
screen’s Clear button is available whenever non-zero data is displayed.
To clear calculation data:
1. From the Calculations editor, click the Status tab to display the Sta-
tus screen.
2. Click Clear. The Clear Calculation Data dialog box displays (see
Figure 452).

Figure 452. Clear Calculation Data Dialog Box

3. Click the check box next to the quantities you want to clear.
4. Click OK to save and reset the quantities to 0.000.

Note:
Clearing of data occurs the next time the calculation is run.
This may occur as much as one minute following the clearing of
data.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 537
Using the Calculations Editor

Setting Security Access for a

Calculation Object
1. From the Calculations editor, click the Classes tab to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 453).

Figure 453. Calculations Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes. The Change Security Classes dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 454).

Figure 454. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.
5. Click Save.

Deleting a Calculation Object

You cannot delete a calculation object from the Calculations editor. Use
the Delete Object function from the Tools menu to delete a calculation
object (see Chapter 39, “Deleting Objects and Sites”).

538 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 32

Designing Reports

The ability to create reports that are tailored to your facility is a key ben-
efit of the Tracer Summit system. Reports provide the information you
need to make decisions about building operations. Reports help you man-
age utility costs, equipment efficiency, and tenant billings.
The Report editor allows you to design easy-to-run, easy-to-read reports.
You can use any information available in Tracer Summit to create a
report. You can define report elements such as titles, footers, fonts, and
page orientation. You can also instruct the system to automatically gener-
ate custom reports at regular intervals. Automatically generated reports
can be printed and stored to disk for data archiving.
Use reports for:
• Record keeping and documentation
• Energy monitoring
• Troubleshooting
You run reports using the Reports Viewer, which is accessed from the Sta-
tus menu or from the Reports button on the toolbar. For instructions on
running reports, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily Operations guide.

Note:
For Tracer 100 sites, you can only use the Reports Viewer to see
the Diagnostic Report for the site. You cannot use the Reports
editor to create a report. Tracker sites do not have reports to
view or edit.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 539
Designing Reports

Report Types
Tracer Summit supports two types of reports—live and trend.
• Live Reports. Live reports display selected values at a particular
point in time (see Figure 455 on page 541).
• Trend Reports. Trend reports use trend objects to display historical
data obtained over a period of time (see Figure 456 on page 542).

Live Reports
Live reports display values of selected properties at the time the report is
run. Each line in a live report contains a row heading, followed by the cur-
rent value(s) for the property. A live report can display three types of
members:
• Any single displayable property in the system
• A calculation object with predefined properties
• A blank row
When a calculation object is used in a live report, the report displays data
based on the calculation type it is performing. The current value, today’s
value, yesterday’s value, current billing period’s value, and last billing
period’s value are displayed on the same row. See Figure 455 on page 541.

540 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Live Reports

Figure 455. Sample Live Report

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 541
Designing Reports

Trend Reports
Trend reports allow you to view, print, and save the historical data col-
lected in trend objects (see Figure 456). For information about setting up
a trend object, see Chapter 29, “Trending Data”.

Figure 456. Sample Trend Report

A trend report can display data collected over multiple time periods, such
as a trend of space temperatures and relative humidity. It can also dis-
play multiple properties over the same time period, such as a 12-month
chiller summary report. A custom trend report may contain information
from multiple trend objects, even at different intervals.
A trend report displays the date and time in the left column, and values
from the selected trends in subsequent columns. You can use as many
trend members as you would like in a report. If a sample does not exist for
an object and property for a given time, the data cell is blank. For exam-
ple, a custom report contains a trend object with a five-minute interval,
and a trend object with a 30-minute interval. The trend object with the
five-minute interval displays data for each five-minute interval. The
trend object with the 30-minute interval displays data only at half-hour
intervals. The rows that contain five-minute intervals contain blank
areas. If a trend sample was unable to be collected, the report will display
“???”.

542 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Running a Report

Standard Reports
Tracer Summit includes a set of predefined standard live and standard
trend reports.
Standard live reports provide status information for a single object. Most
objects in the system have at least one associated standard live report.
You can create your own standard live reports. You can also edit pre-
defined standard live reports.
Standard trend reports (known as quick trend reports in previous ver-
sions of Tracer Summit) display a pre-formatted trend report containing
all the trend members in a trend object. Standard trend objects cannot be
edited. You can, however, create your own custom trend reports.

Running a Report
You run a report using the Report Viewer, which you can access by click-
ing the Reports button on the toolbar or selecting Reports from the Status
menu. You can also run a standard report from a UCM or application edi-
tor by clicking the Report button on the editor’s Status screen.
After you run the report, you can print it, saved it to a Report (.rpt) file, or
export it to a tab delimited text file (.TXT). For more information about
running a report, see the Tracer Summit Daily Operations guide.

Note:
For Tracer 100 sites, you can only use the Reports Viewer to see
the Diagnostic Report for the site. You cannot use the Reports
editor to create a report. Tracker sites do not have reports to
view or edit.

Accessing the Report Editor

When you design a new report or edit an existing report, Tracer Summit
allows you to select from three report types—standard live, custom live,
or custom trend. When you select a report type, you have access to all
existing reports of that type. You can open an existing report to edit it.
You can also use an existing report as a template for a new report or open
a blank report.
The procedures for selecting a standard live report and for selecting a cus-
tom live or custom trend report are slightly different. After you select the
report, the Report editor displays.

Note:
For Tracer 100 sites, you can only use the Reports Viewer to see
the Diagnostic Report for the site. You cannot use the Reports
editor to create a report. Tracker sites do not have reports to
view or edit.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 543
Designing Reports

Selecting a Standard Live Report

1. From the Setup menu, select Report editor. The Select Report to View
dialog box displays (see Figure 457).

Note:
If you need help with reports, click the Tutorial button to open
the Tracer Summit Daily Operations Tutorial.

Figure 457. Select Report to View Dialog Box

2. Click the Standard Live option.

3. Click OK to display the Select Standard Live Report dialog box (see
Figure 458).

Figure 458. Select Standard Live Report Dialog Box

4. Click the arrow to the right of the Standard Report Type field to
select a report type. The available reports that match the selected
type appear in the Report Name list.
5. In the Units field, select the units of measure (either Inch-Pound or
International System) for the report. The default selection is the units
of measure defined for the site in site configuration.

544 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Accessing the Report Editor

6. If you wish to open a blank report containing default selections, click

New to display the Report editor.
7. If you wish to edit an existing report or use an existing report as a
template for a new report, click the name of the report you wish use in
the Report Name list.
8. Click OK to display the Report editor for the selected report.
To edit the report, follow the instructions in “Designing or Editing a
Report” on page 548.

Selecting a Standard Trend or Custom Report

1. From the Setup menu, select Report editor. The Select Report to View
dialog box displays (see Figure 459).

Figure 459. Select Report Type Dialog Box

2. Click the Standard trend or Standard Trend option.

3. Click OK to display the Select Report dialog box (see Figure 460).

Figure 460. Select Report Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 545
Designing Reports

4. If you want to create a new report containing default selections, click

New to display the Report editor.
5. If you wish to edit an existing report or use an existing report as a
template for a new report, click the name of the report you wish to
use.
6. Click OK to display the Report editor for the selected report. To edit
the report, follow the instructions in “Designing or Editing a Report”
on page 548.

Opening a Saved Report

1. From the Setup menu, select Report editor. The Select Report to View
dialog box displays (see Figure 461).

Figure 461. Select Report to View Dialog Box

2. Click the Open a Saved Report option.

3. Click OK to open the Reports folder (see Figure 462 on page 547).

546 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Accessing the Report Editor

Figure 462. Reports folder

4. Highlight the report you want, and then click the Open button to dis-
play the report in the Reports editor.

Opening a Previously Viewed Report

1. From the Setup menu, select Report editor. The Select Report to View
dialog box displays (see Figure 463).

Figure 463. Select Report to View Dialog Box

2. Click the Recent Reports option.

3. Click the arrow to the right of the field to select a report.
4. OK to display the Report Editor for the selected report.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 547
Designing Reports

Designing or Editing a Report

When designing or editing a report, you can:
• Edit the report’s name or page orientation (see “Editing the Name or
Orientation of the Report” below.)
• Define the members to be included in the report (see “Defining Report
Members” on page 548)
• Format the layout of the report (see “Entering Titles and Formatting
the Report” on page 552)
• Specify when the report will run (see “Scheduling a Report” on
page 554)

Editing the Name or Orientation of the

Report
1. From the Report editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 464).

Figure 464. Report Editor Setup Screen

2. Enter a name for the report in the Report Name field. Make the name
as informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 alphanumeric char-
acters.
3. Choose the report’s page orientation (portrait or landscape).

Defining Report Members

The information presented in the body of the report is defined in the
Members screen of the Report editor. You select the type of data and the
specific properties of the data that you want to include in the report. Your
selections become the report members. You define the row (for a live
report) or column headings (for a trend object), and the order in which the
data is displayed. You can also add blank rows between report members.
Blank rows add space between the data rows and make the report more
readable. Blank rows may also contain row headings, which are generally
used for section titles.

548 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Defining Report Members

The procedures for defining the body of the report vary for a standard live
report, a custom live report, and a custom trend report.

Note:
There are a few membership rules unique to the standard live
report type. When you run a standard live report, you should
understand these rules:
• Standard live reports may contain properties from a single
object type.
• If a new report is created, the Type field will be available
until the first report member is defined.
• Subsequent report members must be the same object type.

Defining the Members of a Standard Live Report

1. From the Report editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 465).

Figure 465. Report Editor Members Screen

2. To insert a property to the Report Member list, click the member

immediately above where you want to add the new member.
3. Click the name of the property you wish to add in the Property list.
4. Click Add to add your selection to the Report Members list.
5. With the member you just added highlighted in the Report Members
list, enter the label you want the report to display for that member in
the Row Heading field. You can enter one or two row headings.
6. Continue to define the report members, repeating steps 2 through 5
for each member you wish to add.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 549
Designing Reports

Defining the Members of a Custom Live Report

1. From the Report editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 466).

Figure 466. Report Editor Members Screen

2. Click the object type in the Type list. Available objects of the selected
type are displayed in the Name list.
3. Click the object name in the Name list. Available properties of the
selected object are displayed in the Property list.
4. Click the name of the property in the Property list.
5. Click Add to add your selection to the Report Members list.
6. With the member you just added highlighted in the Report Members
list, enter the label you want the report to display for that member in
the Row Heading field. You can enter one or two row headings.
7. Continue to define the report members, repeating steps 2 through 6
for each member.
8. To add a calculation object to the Report Members, click Add Calcula-
tion.

550 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Defining Report Members

Defining the Members of a Custom Trend Report

1. From the Report editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 467).

Figure 467. Report Editor Members Screen

2. Click the name of the trend in the Trend list. Available Trend mem-
bers for the selected trend are displayed in the Trend Members list.
3. Click the name of the member in the Trend Members list.
4. Click Add to add your selection to the Report Members list.
5. With the member you just added highlighted in the Report Members
list, enter the label you want the report to display for that member in
the Column Heading field. You can enter one or two column headings.
6. Continue to define the report members, repeating steps 2 through 5
for each member.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 551
Designing Reports

Changing the Report Member Order

When you run a report, the body of the report will display the member
data in the order that they appear in the Report Members list. You can
change the order using the Order arrow keys.
To change the report member order:
1. From the Report editor’s Members screen, click the member name you
wish to move in the Report Members list.
2. Click the up arrow in the Order field to move the member up one row.
Click the down arrow to move the member down one row.

Adding a Blank Row in the Report

1. From the Report editor’s Member screen, click the member name in
the Report Members list immediately before where you wish to add a
blank row.
2. Click Add Blank Row.
3. Provide a row heading for the blank row, if you wish.

Entering Titles and Formatting the

Report
Use the Layout screen of the Report editor to format the report, and to
prepare the report for display and printing. The Layout screen allows you
to enter titles, headings, and footers and format the fonts used in the
report. You can use special functions to insert the date, page number,
time, and security information in the report (see Table 27). You can enter
these functions in any cell in the Header, Column Headings, and Footer
fields of the Layout screen.

Table 27. Entering Date, Page, Time, and Security Functions in a Report

To Do This: Enter This:

Insert the current Date $D

Insert current report page $P
Insert total number of pages in $N
the report
Inserts the current time $T
Inserts the Security Information $S
(Site Name, User Name, and Job
Title

If you are editing an existing report or using an existing report as a tem-

plate, the current titles will appear in the Layout screen when you open
it. If you are creating a new report, the Tracer Summit default layout

552 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Entering Titles and Formatting the Report

selections will appear in the Layout screen. To change the existing set-
tings, select the cell contents and enter a new entry.
To set the page orientation (portrait or landscape) of the report, refer to
“Editing the Name or Orientation of the Report” on page 548.

Entering and Formatting the Report Titles

1. From the Report editor, click the Layout tab (see Figure 468).

Figure 468. Report Editor Layout Screen

2. Click the desired cells in the Header section and enter the titles you
want to display in the report.
3. To change the font for a cell, select the cell and click the Font button
to the right of the Header section. The Font dialog box displays.
4. Select the font, font styles, and size.
5. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Entering and Formatting the Column Headings

1. Display the Report editor’s Layout screen.
2. Click the desired cells in the Column Headings section and enter the
column headings you want to display in the report.

Note:
Column headings 2 through 5—which are Today, Yesterday,
Last billing period, and Current billing period—only appear in
a custom live report that contains calculation report members.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 553
Designing Reports

3. To change the font for a cell, select the cell and click the Font button
to the right of the Column Headings section. The Font dialog box dis-
plays.
4. Select the font, font style, and size.
5. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Formatting the Body Text

1. Display the Report editor’s Layout screen.
2. To change the font for the body text in the report, click the Font but-
ton to the right of the Body section. The Font dialog box displays.
3. Select the font, font style, and size.
4. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Entering and Formatting the Report Footer

1. Display the Report editor’s Layout screen.
2. Click the desired cells in the Footer section and enter the footer text
you want to display in the report.
3. To change the font for a cell, select the cell and click the Font button
to the right of the Footer section. The Font dialog box displays.
4. Select the font, font style, and size.
5. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Scheduling a Report
Tracer Summit allows you to instruct the system to run custom live and
custom trend reports automatically at specific times. You can schedule a
report to run daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. You schedule a report in
the Schedule screen of the Report editor.

Selecting a Reporting Interval

1. From the Report editor, click the Schedule tab. The Schedule screen
displays.
2. Click the Enable Auto Reporting check box. The rest of the fields on
the screen become active.

554 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Scheduling a Report

Setting Up Daily Reports

1. Click Daily in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the right
of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the time for
daily reports (see Figure 469).

Figure 469. Report Editor Daily Schedule Options

2. Click the arrows to the right of the Time 1 field to set a time for the
first daily report.
3. If you want to schedule times for more than one daily report, check
the associated check box and set a time in the Time 2, Time 3, and/or
Time 4 fields.

Setting Up Weekly Reports

1. Click Weekly in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the
right of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the
time for weekly reports (see Figure 470).

Figure 470. Report Editor Weekly Schedule Options

2. Click the arrows to the right of the Time field to set a time for the
weekly report.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 555
Designing Reports

3. Click the arrow to the right of the Day field to set a day for the weekly
report.

Setting Up Monthly Reports

1. Click Monthly in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the
right of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the
time for monthly reports (see Figure 471).

Figure 471. Report Editor Monthly Schedule Options

2. Click Use Last Day of Month or Define Day of Month.

3. If you select Define Day of Month, click the arrow to the right of the
day field to set a day for the monthly report.
4. Click the arrow to the right of the Time field to set a time for the
monthly report.

556 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Scheduling a Report

Setting Up Annual Reports

1. Click Annually in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the
right of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the
time for annual reports (see Figure 472).

Figure 472. Report Editor Annual Schedule Options

2. Click the arrows to the right of the Month field to set a month for the
annual report.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Day of Month field to set a day for
the annual report.
4. Click the arrow to the right of the Time field to set a time for the
annual report.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 557
Designing Reports

Setting Output Options for a Report

1. From the Report editor’s Schedule screen, click the Output To button.
The Output To dialog box displays (see Figure 473).

Figure 473. Output To Dialog Box

2. To direct the system to print the report automatically when it is run,

check Printer. The Printer Name field becomes active. The report will
be printed to the default Windows printer shown below the Printer
Name box.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Printer Name to select a different
printer.
4. To direct the system to save the report automatically when it is run,
check Output to File. The remaining Output to File fields become
active.
5. To change the default save directory, click Browse to display the
Browse for Folder dialog box.
6. Select the folder where you want the file saved and click OK. The
Output To dialog box displays again.
7. In the File Name field, select Auto Generated or Specified. Auto Gen-
erated report files are stored in the format YYMMDD0X, where YY is
the year, MM is the month, DD is the day, and 0X is the counter for
the report. For example, the first report generated on March 23, 1999,
is saved to the file name 99032301.
8. If you select Specified, enter the file name you want the system to
assign to the report in the field to the right of the Specified field. This
file is overwritten each time the scheduled report is generated.

558 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Saving the Report

9. To add a report to the end of a previous report, select Append to File.

10. To change the file type, select a new type in the Save as Type field.
11. Click OK to close the Output To dialog box and display the Schedule
screen.

Saving the Report

To save a report:
◆ To save your report, click Save at the bottom of the Report editor, or
select Save Report from the File menu.
To copy a report to a new report name:
◆ With the new report open in the Report editor, select Save Report As
from the File menu.

Deleting Reports
Occasionally, you may want to delete reports from the Tracer Summit sys-
tem. For example, you may want to delete specific reports you created for
site setup and troubleshooting.

Note:
After you delete reports from the system, you cannot recover
them unless you have a report backup file. Before deleting
reports, we recommend backing up all reports that you may
want to use again. See the Tracer Summit Daily Operations
Guide for information on backing up reports, or see Chapter 38,
“Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation”, of this guide
for information on restoring reports.

To delete reports:
1. Display the Report editor (see “Accessing the Report Editor” on
page 543).
2. From the File menu, select Delete Reports. The Delete Reports -
Select Site dialog box displays.
3. Select the site that contains the report you want to delete and click
OK. The Delete Reports dialog box displays.
4. In the Type field, select the type of the report you want to delete. You
can delete custom reports or user-defined standard reports. (Pre-
defined standard reports included with Tracer Summit may be edited,
but cannot be deleted.)
5. In the Existing Reports list, select the report names you want to
delete.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 559
Designing Reports

6. Click the Add button. The reports display in the Selected Reports to
Delete list. You can also click Add All to add all reports of the selected
type to the list of reports to delete.
7. To remove any reports from the Selected Reports to Delete list, select
the report name and click Remove. You can also click Remove All to
clear the list.
8. Click the Delete button. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
9. Click Yes. The selected reports are deleted.

560 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 33

Setting System Options

The System Options editor allows you to customize or change screen, file,
and print options to fit your preferences. The selected options affect only
the PC Workstation you are working on. Event log capacity settings, how-
ever, might affect the performance of multiple workstations in a shared
database.
The System Options editor allows you to
• Select the home graphic, (screen that displays when you click Home)
• Display override status from an override button on a graphic
• Display category alarms icons in the toolbar
• Display Alarm pop-up dialogs for event category alarms
• Select the event log printer and alarm options
• Change the default file directories
• Change the workstation device ID for event routing
• Select whether object and property IDs are displayed throughout the
Tracer Summit system
• Set up basic e-mail message forwarding services
• Configure connection options for the navigation tree
• Change e-mail profile
• Configure how long to store harvested trend data on the workstation

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 561
Setting System Options

Changing the Home Graphic

The home graphic displays when you click Home in the Tracer Summit
toolbar.
To change the home graphic:
1. From the Tools menu, select Options to display the System Options
editor General screen (see Figure 474).

Figure 474. System Options Editor—General Screen

562 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Changing the Home Graphic

2. Click Change button to the right of the Home Graphic field to display
the Select Home Graphic dialog box (see Figure 475).

Figure 475. Select Home Graphic Dialog Box

3. In the Graphic Object Name list, click the name of the graphic you
wish to select.

Note:
The Select Home Graphic dialog box lists all available system
graphics stored in the C:\Program Files\Tracer
Summit\Graphics\Custom directory.

4. Click OK to select the graphic and display the General screen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 563
Setting System Options

Displaying Override Status

You can enable a “hand” icon to display on an override button when the
object has been manually overriden (see Figure 476).

Figure 476. Hand icon—displaying override status

Object in manual
override

To display override status:

1. Click on Tools from the menu bar, then select Options. The Systems
Options screen displays. with the General tab open (see Figure 477).
2. Check the Display Override Status dialog box.
3. Click Save.

Figure 477. Override Status Checkbox

Display override
status checkbox

564 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Configuring Category Alarm Buttons and Pop-up Dialog Boxes

Configuring Category Alarm Buttons

and Pop-up Dialog Boxes
Use the Events table to configure the category alarm buttons on the tool
bar and alarm pop-up dialogs for event categories (see Figure 478).

Note:
Alarm categories are set up in Site Configuration. For more
information, refer to Chapter 6, Systems Programming guide,
“Setting up Event Classes.”

Figure 478. Events table

To configure category alarms:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options to display the System Options
editor General screen (see Figure 474 on page 562).
2. To display alarm categories on the toolbar, check the toolbar checkbox
next to the category. Figure 479 shows an example of category icons
displayed on the toolbar.

Figure 479. Category Alarms Displayed on Toolbar

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 565
Setting System Options

To configure alarm pop-up dialog boxes:

1. To set up the workstation to display a pop-up dialog box when an
alarm comes into the system, edit the Max Popup field. (see
Figure 478 on page 565). Figure 480 shows an example of a category
alarm popup.
2. In the Events table, type the number of alarm pop-up dialog boxes
you want to display for incoming alarms.

Note:
If the Max Popups field is zero (0), no popups will display.

Figure 480. Category Alarm Pop-up Dialog Box

Using the Category Alarms on the Toolbar

Use the category alarms to quickly filter and view problem alarms.
1. From the first drop-down list, click the down arrow to select whether
to show all alarms in a site, only unacknowledge alarms, or no alarm
count. Figure 481 shows no alarm count for category alarms.

Figure 481. Category alarms by alarm count

566 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Configuring Category Alarm Buttons and Pop-up Dialog Boxes

2. From the second drop-down list, select to show category alarms for all
sites, current site, or a particular site (see Figure 482).

Figure 482. Category alarms by site or group

3. To quickly view all alarms in an alarm category, click an alarm cate-

gory button.The alarm category (1–5) appears when you move the
cursor over the button (see Figure 483). The Event log displays show-
ing only alarms for that alarm category (see Figure 484).

Figure 483. Category Alarm number

Figure 484. Event Log Displaying Category Alarms

Category 1
alarm

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 567
Setting System Options

Viewing Alarm Pop-up Dialog Boxes from the Event

Log
Incoming alarms can be configured to display in a pop-up dialog box (see
configuring pop-up alarms on page 566). An alternate way to access
alarm pop-up dialogs is from the event log (see Figure 484 on page 567).
1. From the event log, righ-click anywhere in the event row, a pop-up
menu displays (see Figure 485).
2. Click View Popup. The alarm pop-up dialog box displays.

Note:
You can also view the alarm pop-up dialog box by double-click-
ing anywhere in the event row.

Figure 485. Popup Menu

Figure 486. Category Alarm Pop-up Dialog Box

568 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log Settings

Setting Up the Events Printer, Message

Forwarding, and Event Log Settings
When Tracer Summit BCUs or Tracer 100 and Tracker panels generate
alarms and events, you can have those alarms and events sent to a
printer as well as updated in the alarm and event log. Tracer Summit
uses printers installed in the Windows operating system to print events.
The System Options editor allows you to select a default printer and
change settings related to event printing. The editor also allows you to
specify who should receive an alarm or event by means of e-mail or e-mail
enabled cell phone/pager. Through the editor, you can also modify the size
of the event log.
For more information about alarms and events, refer to the Tracer Sum-
mit Daily Operations guide.

Setting Up the Events Printer

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays (see Figure 487).

Figure 487. System Options Editor—General Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 569
Setting System Options

2. To change the events printer, in the Events group click the Change
button (see Figure 488). The Print Setup dialog box displays (see
Figure 489).

Note:
The Print Setup dialog box varies depending upon the printer
selected.

Figure 488. System Options Editor

Figure 489. Print Setup Dialog Box

3. In the Name field, select the printer that Tracer Summit will use to
print events and alarms.

Note:
• Tracer Summit sends alarm and event information to the
printer one line at a time. A tractor-feed (or line-feed)
printer works best as the events printer so that you can
view the events as they are generated and printed. If you
select a sheet-feed printer (such as a laser printer), you do
not see the events until a complete page is printed.
• Typically, the events printer is connected directly to the PC
Workstation (on the LPT1: port).

4. Select additional printer setup options as necessary. For more infor-

mation on setting printer options, see the instructions provided with
Microsoft Windows or with your printer.
5. Click OK. The System Options editor General tab displays.

570 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log Settings

6. To have events print to the printer, make sure Enable Event Printing
is selected.
7. If you want to be able to connect to a remote site when an incoming
alarm is received, select Show Connection Dialog on Incoming
Alarms.
8. If you want to have incoming alarms be silent (rather than sounding a
beep), select Disable Workstation Alarm.

IMPORTANT
Selecting Disable Workstation Alarm keeps the workstation from beep-
ing when an alarm comes in, regardless of how Alarm and Message
Routing is setup.

Setting up Message Forwarding

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays (see Figure 488 on page 570).
2. Select the alarm class from the list, and type an e-mail address in the
To email address field (see Figure 490).
When you select and save the Forward Alarm Class and To e-mail
address fields, alarms that match the selected alarm class from all
sites in the database are e-mailed. Also, all Tracer 100 critical (prior-
ity 2) and Tracker alarms are automatically e-mailed if your worksta-
tion receives such alarms from Tracer 100 and Tracker sites.

Figure 490. Forward Alarms Fields

IMPORTANT
Your workstation must be set up as an event receiver in BCU sites, with
a telephone number defined in Tracer 100 and Tracker sites, and other
requirements for alarms must be satisfied, as described in Chapter 6,
“Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”

Setting Up Automatic Refresh

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays (see Figure 488 on page 570).
2. Click the Enable Auto Refresh check box (see Figure 491). Select the
refresh rate from the list.
For performance tuning, you can select a custom auto refresh inter-
val. This interval can range from 30 seconds to 5 minutes (see
Figure 491). If you are expecting a lot of alarms, set the refresh rate
to a higher value. If you are troubleshooting one piece of hardware,

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 571
Setting System Options

and these are the only alarms you expect to see, set the refresh rate to
a lower value.

Note:
If you set the refresh rate value too low, the user may experi-
ence what appear to be screen lockups.

Figure 491. Enable Auto Refresh Rate Fields

Note:
• The BCU event log and the error log viewers cannot be
automatically refreshed. Selecting Enable Auto Refresh has
no effect on these viewers.
• In a shared SQL database, workstations do not share this
setting. Each workstation has its own setting.
• If you change the database source from SQL to an existing
Microsoft Access Tracer Summit database, the refresh rate
is restored to its previous value. However, when you change
the database source from SQL to a blank Microsoft Access
Tracer Summit database, the refresh rate is reset to its
default Microsoft Access value when Tracer Summit starts
up.

3. Select the event log capacity from the Event Log Capacity list.
For system performance and manageability, you can modify the stor-
age capacity of the event log with your selection of the Event Log
Capacity. The Tracer Summit software will not allow the number of
events saved in the database to exceed this limit.
If you do insert a new event in the database that exceeds this limit,
the Tracer Summit software deletes the oldest events in the database
until the number of events in the database comes within the limit.

572 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log Settings

The type of database that you are using determines the maximum
limits

Note:
• If the new event log capacity value is less than the number
of existing events in the log, the following warning message
appears: You will lose events from your Event Log! It is rec-
ommended that you cancel and first back up the Event Log.
Continue with save and lose events? <Yes> <No>.
• If you click Yes, the new capacity value is saved, and the
log is truncated to the new value when a new event is
inserted in the log.
• If you click No, changes are not saved, and the capacity
is restored to the original value.
• In a shared SQL database, workstations share this setting.
Each workstation cannot have its own setting because the
database is shared.
• If you change the database source from SQL to an existing
Microsoft Access Tracer Summit database, the event log
capacity value is restored to its previous value. However,
when you change the database source from SQL to a blank
Microsoft Access Tracer Summit database, the event log
capacity value is reset to its default Microsoft Access value
when Tracer Summit starts up.

4. From the BCU Event Log Capacity list, select the record size and
change it to the appropriate value.
When the new value is less than the number of existing records in the
log, a warning appears, as described in the note for step 3.
5. From the Error Log Capacity list, select the record size and change it
to the appropriate value.
When the new value is less than the number of existing records in the
log, a warning appears, as described in the note for step 3.
6. Click Save.

Harvested Trend Data Field

This field determines how long Tracer Summit should keep the data in
the Trend Viewer database (see Figure 492). Any data that is older than
the selected number of years will be purged from the Trend Viewer data-
base. This applies for both Access database users and SQL database
users. The purge process occurs once a month. (So, technically, the data-
base retains no more than x years + one month.) For example, if this field
is set to keep harvested trend data for 1 year starting January 1st, 2007,
then the first purge of data will occur Feburary 1st, 2008.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 573
Setting System Options

Figure 492. Harvested Trend Field

To set the purge date:

◆ Click the down arrow and select the number of years to keep the data
before it is automatically purged.

Changing Default File Directories

Tracer Summit uses many directories or folders to store files. Typically,
you will want to accept the system defaults. You can modify the default
locations to store graphic files on a common file server, for example.

IMPORTANT
When you are using a shared SQL database, you might have to store
these files in a shared folder on your LAN. This is to ensure that all
Tracer Summit users can access these files.

To change default directories:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays.
2. Click the File Locations tab. The File Locations screen displays (see
Figure 493).

Figure 493. System Options Editor File Locations Screen

3. Click the file type whose location you wish to modify in the File Types
list.

574 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Changing Advanced Settings

4. Click Modify to display the Browse for Folder dialog box (see Figure
494 on page 575).

Figure 494. Browse for Folder Dialog Box

5. Select a new location in which to save files.

6. Click OK to select the location and display the File Locations screen.

Changing Advanced Settings

The System Options editor allows you to change the workstation device
ID and to set options for how objects and properties are displayed. These
options are most often used when doing advanced troubleshooting. Use
these options only if you are an advanced user.

Changing the Workstation Device ID

The workstation device ID identifies the workstation to the rest of the
Tracer Summit system, primarily for the purposes of alarm and message
routing, notification, and acknowledgment. Take care when you change
the device ID. Changing the ID can result in intercepting messages

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 575
Setting System Options

meant for another workstation or not receiving messages intended for the
workstation.

Note:
Tracer Summit provides a default workstation device ID that is
based on the number assigned during the software installation.
Generally, the first workstation created is ID 80. Each addi-
tional workstation number is increased in increments of one.
Typical workstation addressing is as follows:
• 80 – 100 for on-site workstations
• 101 – 120 for remote workstations
• 121 – 140 Trane-reserved addressing

To change the workstation device ID:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays.
2. Click the Advanced tab to display the Advanced screen (see
Figure 495).

Figure 495. System Options Editor Advanced Screen

3. In the Workstation Device ID field, click the Change button. The

Change Workstation Device ID dialog box displays (see Figure 496).

576 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Changing Advanced Settings

Figure 496. Change Workstation Device ID Dialog Box

4. In the New Device ID field, select a new ID number.

5. Click OK.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 577
Setting System Options

Selecting Whether Object and Device IDs Display

The Advanced screen of the System Options editor allows you to select
whether object and device identification numbers (IDs) are displayed
throughout the Tracer Summit system. If you select to display the IDs,
then whenever you select or view a UCM, area, device, object or property,
the item’s object and device IDs, as well as its name, are displayed.
This information is valuable for troubleshooting BACnet interface
projects. Most of the time, however, you do not need to display the object
and device IDs. For more information on BACnet interfaces, refer to
Chapter 37, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices”.
An example of where the object and device IDs display within Tracer
Summit is at the Object and Properties Selection dialog box (accessed
through the Status menu’s Object and Properties item). See Figure 497.

Figure 497. Objects and Properties Selection Dialog Box

To display device and object IDs:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays.
2. Click the Advanced tab to display the Advanced screen (see Figure
495 on page 576).
3. Check the Show Object and Device IDs check box to enable this
option. To disable the option, uncheck the check box.

578 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Changing Advanced Settings

Selecting an E-mail Profile for Message Forwarding

The e-mail profile is the one associated with the From e-mail address of
users which appears in the From field of e-mails that they send.
To select an e-mail profile:
1. From the Advanced tab in the System Option editor, click the Change
button in Message Forwarding E-Mail Profile (see Figure 498). The
Profile Select dialog box appears (see Figure 499). Existing e-mail
profiles display in the Profile list.

Figure 498. Change Profile Button

2. Select a profile. The Username and Password fields of the mailbox are
blank.
3. If required, type the correct username and password to access the
mailbox of the profile on the server. The password displays as a series
of asterisks (see Figure 499).

IMPORTANT
If no profiles display, contact your IS or system administrator for help in
creating a new e-mail profile for your PC.

Figure 499. Profile Select Dialog Box

4. Click OK to select the profile.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 579
Setting System Options

Setting Connection Features of the Navigation Tree

When you double-click a site node in the navigation tree, the Tracer Sum-
mit software can do one of three things:
• Connect immediately
• Prompt you whether you want to connect
• No immediate connection
The response to the double-click on a site node is determined by what you
set in system options. For more information about the navigation tree and
connecting to sites, see “Connecting to a Site from the Tree” on page 401.
To set connection features for the navigation tree:
◆ From the Advanced tab in the System Options editor (see Figure 495
on page 576), in the Double Clicks on Navigation Tree Nodes group:
• Click Connect Immediately if you want Tracer Summit to connect
immediately to a site after a double-click on a site node
• Click Prompt for Connection if you want Tracer Summit to
prompt the user with a dialog box that asks whether they want to
connect to the site after a double-click on a site node
• Click No Connection if you want Tracer Summit not to connect
immediately to a site after a double-click on a site node

580 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 34

The BCU Operator Display

The BCU operator display is a liquid crystal display (LCD) touch screen
that is installed in Tracer Summit BMTX or BMTW BCU as an option.
The operator display makes it possible for the occasional daily user to
perform most of the Tracer Summit daily activities at the BCU.
Initially, the Tracer Summit software and PC Workstation are needed to
set up the operator display for operations. After setup is complete, the
operator display can serve as a stand-alone operator interface between
the user and the building automation system (BAS) equipment.
At the PC Workstation, the following site objects are set up for monitoring
at the BCU operator display:
• Equipment and applications
• Time of day schedules
• Alarms and events
For information on using the operator display, see the Tracer Summit
BCU Operator Display Operations guide.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 581
The BCU Operator Display

Accessing the BCU Operator Display

Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Operator Display. A list of all the opera-
tor displays that have been set up in site configuration displays (see
Figure 500).
2. Select the name of the operator display that you want to edit.

Figure 500. Select Dialog Box

3. Click OK to display the Operator Display editor (see Figure 501). The
editor opens up to the Status tab. View this screen to see the number
of objects that has been selected for monitoring at the operator dis-
play.

Figure 501. Operator Display Editor—Status Screen

582 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New BCU Operator Display

Creating a New BCU Operator Display

To create a new BCU operator display object, you perform the following
tasks:
• Add an operator display object to the selected device (as described in
this section).
• Add a BCU event log object to the device (optional). Adding a BCU
event log object enables users to view and acknowledge system
alarms and events at the operator display (see “Adding a BCU Event
Log object” on page 60).
• Select objects for viewing and editing at the operator display (see
“Setting Up the BCU Operator Display” on page 586).
The following steps show you how to create a BCU operator display object
from the Site Configuration editor. You can create an operator display
object while configuring a site (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Sum-
mit BCU Sites”), or you can add it to a specified BCU (as described in this
section).

Note:
The operator display buttons are only available for BMTX and
BMTW BCUs.

To create a new operator display object:

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration.
2. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab to display
the Devices screen (see Figure 502).

Figure 502. Site Configuration — Devices Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 583
The BCU Operator Display

• If the appropriate BCU is listed, select it. Then click the Edit
Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 503).
• If the appropriate BCU is not listed, click the Create Device but-
ton to display the Create Device screen.

Figure 503. Site Configuration—Edit Device

3. Click the Operator Display Add button. The Create New Operator
Display dialog box displays (see Figure 504).

Figure 504. Create New Operator Display Dialog Box

584 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating a New BCU Operator Display

4. Type a name in the Operator Display Name field. Make the name as
informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.

Note:
You must enter a name before you can save the new operator
display object. You can modify the name at any time from the
Edit Operator Display dialog box. You can access the dialog box
from the Operator Display Edit button.

5. To change the default security access for the operator display, click
Security Classes (see “Setting Up Security—Tracer Summit System”
on page 135).
6. Click OK to close the Create New Operator Display dialog box.
7. From the Edit Device screen, click OK.
8. From the Devices screen, click Save. The operator display object is not
created until you save.
9. Click OK to return to the main screen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 585
The BCU Operator Display

Setting Up the BCU Operator Display

Setting up the operator display is as easy as selecting a device and cus-
tomizing the operator display home screen. To set up the operator display
for daily operations, perform the following tasks:
• Select a device from the Devices tab or select individual object types
and their members from the Object Types tab and Members tab.
• Use the Main Screen tab to customize the operator display home
screen.

Operator Display Options

To set up security for the operator display, or to enable custom screens,
see “Setup Options for the Operator Display” on page 593.

Selecting a Device
From the Devices screen, you can quickly select all of the objects residing
in a device. The objects will then be available at the operator display for
monitoring.
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Devices tab. The Devices
Screen displays (see Figure 505).

Figure 505. Operator Display Editor—Devices Screen

586 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Operator Display

2. From the Available Devices list, select the name of the device.
3. Click the Add button to add the device to the Selected Devices list.

Note:
The Tracer Summit software automatically moves all the object
types in that device to the Selected Objects list on the Object
Types screen (see Figure 506 on page 588). Also, the members
associated with those object types are automatically moved to
the Selected Objects list on the Members screen (see Figure 507
on page 589).

4. Click Save to save your changes.

Removing a Device
1. From the Selected Devices list, select the name of the device.
2. Click the Remove button to move the device back to the Available
Devices window.

Note:
The Tracer Summit software automatically moves all the object
types in that device back to the Available Objects list on the
Object Types tab. Also, the members associated with those
object types are automatically moved back to the Available
Objects list on the Members tab. All of the objects for that
device will no longer be available at the operator display for
monitoring.

3. Click Save to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 587
The BCU Operator Display

Selecting Individual Object Types

Use this screen to quickly select all of the members of an object type.
To select individual object types:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Object Types tab. The
Object Types screen displays (see Figure 506).

Figure 506. Operator Display Editor—Object Types Screen

2. From the Available Object Types list, select the name of the object.
3. Click the Add button to add the object to the Selected Object Types
list.

Note:
When you select objects from the Available Object Types list,
the Tracer Summit software automatically moves all of the
members belonging to that object type from the Available
Object list to the Selected Objects list on the Members screen
(see Figure 507 on page 589). Also, the software automatically
moves the associated device from the Available Devices list to
the Selected Devices list on the Devices screen (see Figure 505
on page 586).

4. Click Save to save your changes.

588 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Operator Display

Removing Individual Object Types

1. In the Selected Object Types list, select the name of the object you
want to remove.
2. Click the Remove button to move the object type back to the Available
Object Types list.

Note:
The Tracer Summit software automatically moves all of the
members belonging to that object type from the Selected
Objects list to the Available Objects list on the Members tab.
The members of the object type will no longer be available for
monitoring at the operator display.

3. Click Save to save your changes.

Selecting Members
Use this screen to quickly select and remove members of an object type
from the object lists.
To select members of an object type:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Members tab. The Mem-
bers screen displays (see Figure 507).

Figure 507. Operator Display Editor—Members Screen

2. From the Available Objects list, select the name of the member.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 589
The BCU Operator Display

3. Click the Add button to add the member to the Selected Objects list.

Note:
When you select objects from the Available Objects list, the
Tracer Summit software automatically moves the object type
associated with that member from the Available Object Types
list to the Selected Object Types list on the Object Types screen
(see Figure 506 on page 588). Also, the software automatically
moves the associated device from the Available Devices list to
the Selected Devices list on the Devices screen (Figure 505 on
page 586).

4. Click Save to save your changes.

Removing Members
1. In the Selected Objects list, select the name of the member you want
to remove.
2. Click the Remove button to move the member back to the Available
Objects list. That member will no longer be available for monitoring
at the operator display.

Note:
If you remove all of the members belonging to an object type,
the Tracer Summit software will automatically move the object
type back to the Available Object Types list on the Object Types
tab. The members of that object type will no longer be available
for monitoring at the operator display.

3. Click Save to save changes.

590 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Customizing the Operator Display Home Screen

Customizing the Operator Display

Home Screen
From the Main Screen you can customize the information on the operator
display home screen. Use this screen to add a title and custom data points
to the operator display (see Figure 508). Figure 509 on page 592 shows an
example of a customized home screen.

Figure 508. Operator Display Editor Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 591
The BCU Operator Display

Figure 509. Example of Customized Operator Display Home Screen

Title
Description of Custom
data point #1

Custom data
points

Description of Custom
data point #2

To customize the operator display home screen:

All fields on the Main Screen editor are optional and can be left blank
(refer to Figure 508 on page 591).
1. In the title field, type text that will display as the title of the home
screen. If this field is left blank, the title will default to the site name.
2. In the Line One Description field, type text that describes the custom
data point. If this field is left blank, no information will be displayed.
3. In the Object Type field, use the selection arrow to select the object
type from the list.
4. In the Object Name field, use the selection arrow to select the object
name from the list.
5. In the Property Name field, use the selection arrow to select the prop-
erty whose value will appear on line one as the first custom data
point.
6. Repeat steps 1-5 for adding the second custom data point to the oper-
ator display.
7. Click Save to save your changes.

592 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setup Options for the Operator Display

Setup Options for the Operator Display

The following tasks are optional when setting up the operator display:
• Setting up BCU operator display security access (see “Setting Up
Security for the Operator Display” on page 147)
• Enabling security for the BCU operator display (as described in this
section)
• Choosing operator display options (as described in this chapter)
• Creating custom screens (see Chapter 35, “Using the Custom Screen
Editor”)
• Setting up a custom screen (as described in this chapter)

Enabling Security at the Operator Display

Use the following procedure to set security at the operator display. When
security is enabled, users need a password and edit access to edit system
information. Passwords and edit access are set up in the Site Security edi-
tor (see “Setting Up Security for the Operator Display” on page 147).
To enable security at the operator display:
1. From the Setup menu, select Operator Display. The Select Operator
Display dialog box displays.
2. Select the operator display you want to set up security for and click
OK. The Operator Display editor displays.
3. Click the Setup tab. The Setup screen displays (see Figure 510).

Figure 510. Operator Display Editor—Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 593
The BCU Operator Display

4. Click the Enable Security checkbox to place a check in the box (see
Figure 511).

Note:
The software will automatically place a check in this box when
an operator display password is assigned in the Site Security
editor (see “Setting Up Security for the Operator Display” on
page 147).

Figure 511. Setup Screen—Enable Security

5. Click Save to save your changes.

Disabling Security at the Operator Display

1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 510
on page 593).
2. With the Enable Security checkbox checked, click the checkbox to
remove the check and disable security. With security disabled, users
have edit access to all functions at the operator display.
3. Click Save to save your changes.

Operator Display Options

From the Setup tab, you can enable or disable certain items on the opera-
tor display touch screen. These items are shown in Figure 512. A descrip-
tion and procedures for how to enable or disable each item follows.

Figure 512. Setup Screen—Operator Display Options

594 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setup Options for the Operator Display

Disabling Non-Critical Confirmation Screens

Confirmation screens display to confirm that you want to proceed with an
operation, for example, making a change to a schedule or set point.
To disable non-critical confirmation screens:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 510
on page 593).
2. Click the Disable Confirmation Screen checkbox to place a check in
the box. Only non-critical confirmation screens are disabled.
3. Click Save to save your changes.

Disable Audible Alarm

An audible alarm will beep when certain types of events and alarms are
received at the operator display. If the user exits the event log with an
unacknowledged alarm or event that has been set up to beep, the system
will reset the beep-timer to beep again in 60 minutes. If an unacknowl-
edged alarm or event exists, but that type of event does not beep, the
beep-timer will not reset. Alarms and events are set up to beep in Site
Configuration event routing (see “Setting Up Event Classes” on page 81).
To disable the audible alarm:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 510
on page 593).
2. Click the Disable Audible Alarm checkbox to place a check in the box.
3. Click Save to save your changes.

Enabling Custom Screens

This option is available when custom screens have been saved to the site
database. You must first create custom screens before they are available,
(see Chapter 35, “Using the Custom Screen Editor”).
To enable custom screens:
1. Click the Enable Custom Screens checkbox (see Figure 512 on page
594).
2. Click the selection arrow. The list expands to display all custom
screens saved to the site database.
3. Select a custom screen from the list. This screen will be the first cus-
tom main screen to display after the View button is pressed on the
operator display home screen (see Figure 509 on page 592).
4. Click Save to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 595
The BCU Operator Display

Enabling the Quick-Select Function

The quick-select function automatically adds members of a selected appli-
cation to the operator display object list. Figure 513 shows applications
that use the quick-select function.

Figure 513. Setup Screen—Applications that Use the Quick-select

Function

To enable the quick-select function:

1. Click the application for which you want to automatically add mem-
bers. A dialog box displays asking you to confirm your selection.
2. Click OK.
3. Click Save. From this point forward, when the application is selected
to be included in the operator display object list, the members of that
application will automatically be included in the object list.

Note:
When the quick-select function is disabled (checkbox not
checked), only the application will be moved in the operator dis-
play object list.

596 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setup Options for the Operator Display

Selecting Custom Screens

Use the following procedure to select custom screens for use at the opera-
tor display. Custom screens are created in the Custom Screens editor (see
Chapter 35, “Using the Custom Screen Editor”).
To add a custom screen:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Custom Screens tab. The
Custom Screens screen displays (see Figure 514).

Figure 514. Operator Display—Custom Screens Screen

2. In the Available Screens list, select one or more custom screens.

3. Click Add to add the custom screen. An asterisk appears behind the
name of the screen, indicating that it has been added but not saved to
the site database. You will need to save the custom screen in order for
it to be available at the operator display.
4. Click Save to save your changes.
To remove a custom screen:
1. In the operator display list, select the custom screen you want to
remove.

Note:
Only custom screens that have not been saved (an asterisk
appears after the name) are moved back to the Available
Screens list.

2. Click Save to save your changes.

To add all available custom screens:
1. Click the Add All button to add custom screens to the operator display
list.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 597
The BCU Operator Display

2. Click Save to save all custom screens to the site database.

To remove all unsaved custom screens:
1. Click the Remove All button. Only custom screens that have not been
saved (asterisk appears after the name) are moved back to the Avail-
able Screens list.
2. Click Save to save your changes.

Deleting Saved Custom Screens

◆ To delete saved custom screens from the operator display list, go to
the Tools menu and select Delete Objects.

598 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 35

Using the Custom Screen

Editor

The BCU Custom Screen editor enables you to create custom screens that
you can download to a BCU operator display. Using the Custom Screen
editor, you can develop screens that meet the unique needs of users and
sites.
Situations when you might create custom screens include those where
different levels of users access the operator display during daily opera-
tions. For example, at a site where the users are not advanced, you can
create a screen that fits their needs and uses. For sites where more
advanced users access the operator display, you can create more sophisti-
cated screens than the standard screens.
Custom screens often provide quick access to frequently used informa-
tion, as well as to information that is not available on standard operator
display screens. With custom screens, for example, you can insert a
graphic of your equipment and then apply graphic and text fields that
report the status of the equipment and let you perform overrides.
With custom screens, you can:
• Create a library of custom screens and navigation schemes that can
be used at multiple job sites
• Use a combination of custom and standard screens in the BCU opera-
tor display
• Navigate from a custom screen to a standard screen
• Create a monochrome bitmap unique to your site and import it and
display it
• Define custom reports to display
• Define which object/properties that you can view on text and graphic
screens
Creating custom screens for the operator display uses procedures similar
to those for creating other Tracer Summit graphics. For more information
about creating Tracer Summit graphics in general, see “Using the Graph-
ics Editor Tools” on page 463.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 599
Using the Custom Screen Editor

About Custom Screen Graphics

Custom screen graphics are similar to graphics created with the Tracer
Summit Graphics editor. With the Custom Screen editor, you can create a
site or equipment graphic that includes text, images, target links to other
graphics, and fields that display control values.
Each time you create a custom screen, you will see a custom graphic tem-
plate (see Figure 520 on page 604). Starting with this template you add
graphics or fields that display the information you need.
A custom screen graphic template always displays two icons: the Home
target and the Back target. The Home target takes you to the main screen
of the operator display (see Figure 509 on page 592). On the Home screen
you can access the View, Alarms, and Schedules buttons. The Back target
takes you to the last screen you viewed.
You add and delete custom screens to the operator display module using
the Operator Display editor (see “Enabling Custom Screens” on
page 595). In that editor, you can assign a custom screen as the first
screen that appears when the View button is pressed (see “Selecting Cus-
tom Screens” on page 597).
Access the custom screen graphic tools using the tool bar (see “The Cus-
tom Screen Toolbar and Palette” on page 605). The tool bar provides for-
matting buttons that delete, paste, align, snap items to the grid, etc. The
tool palette contains the buttons that you click to insert fields and other
graphics, including text fields, control value fields, or bitmaps.
If you are connected to the operator display while you are creating a cus-
tom screen, you can view what values will appear in the graphic fields.
Switch to run-time screen view (see “Switching to Run-Time (Live) Screen
View” on page 617) to see these real-time values.
The graphics in Figure 515 and Figure 516 on page 601 display the exam-
ple types of graphics and fields you can insert on custom screens.
Figure 515 shows an example of an equipment status custom screen,
while Figure 516 shows an example of a custom screen that was linked to
from the first custom screen (Figure 515).

600 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 About Custom Screen Graphics

Figure 515. Example Custom Screen

Static text field

Background with grid on

Bitmap image

Status text
Back Target

View equip-
Home Target ment Button

Custom screen name

Target Button

Figure 516. Example Linked Custom Screen

Binary text
Imported custom bitmaps Override
button

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 601
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Accessing the Operator Display Custom

Screen Editor
1. From the setup menu, select Operator Display Custom Screen. The
Select Custom Screen dialog box appears (see Figure 517).

Figure 517. Select Custom Screen Dialog Box

2. Select the screen you want to access.

3. Click OK to access the Custom Screen editor. The selected screen dis-
plays in the editor.

602 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Creating Custom Screens

Creating Custom Screens

1. From the Setup menu, select Operator Display Custom Screen. The
Select Custom Screen dialog box appears (see Figure 517 on page
602).
2. Click New. The New Operator Display Custom Screen Name dialog
box appears (see Figure 518).

Figure 518. New Operator Display Custom Screen Name Dialog Box

3. Type the name of the new custom screen.

4. Click OK. The Save Operator Display Custom Screen dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 519).

Figure 519. Save Operator Display Custom Screen Dialog Box

5. From the BCU Name list, select the BCU operator display that you
are creating the custom screen for.

Note:
Tracer Summit only allows you to assign the screen to a BCU
that already has an operator display created for it.

6. Click OK to display the custom screen template (see Figure 520 on

page 604).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 603
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Figure 520. Operator Display Custom Screen Editor Template

Creating a Custom Screen from Another Custom

Screen
You can create a custom screen based on one that you have already cre-
ated.
To create a custom screen from an existing custom screen:
1. From the File menu, select Save Custom Screen As. The New Opera-
tor display Custom Name dialog box appears (see Figure 518 on page
603).
2. Perform steps 3-6 of “Creating Custom Screens” on page 603.

604 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

When the Custom Screen editor is open, two groups of tools display (see
Figure 521): a graphics toolbar and a floating tool palette that you can
move around the screen using the mouse.
Table 28 lists the toolbar buttons and what they do. Table 29 on page 607
lists palette buttons and their functions.

Figure 521. Custom Screen Editor Toolbar and Tool Palette

Switch to Runtime View

Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete Undo, Redo Align: Make Same: Center: Move Field Tools:
Top, Right, Top Height, Width, Horizontally, to Front or Snap to Grid,
or Bottom or Size Vertically Back Set X/Y Snap.
Screen Name

Status text Binary text

Override control Setpoint control

Static text Bitmap

Target button Default cursor

The Custom Screen Toolbar and Palette

The toolbar and palette contain text and graphic design buttons that help
you create custom screens.

Table 28. Toolbar Buttons and Descriptions

Toolbar Button Description
Click to place the selected fields on the clipboard for use in this custom screen or
Cut Selected Field(s)
another custom screen.
Click to place the selected fields on the clipboard for use in this custom screen or
Copy Selected Field(s)
another custom screen without removing them from their current location.
Click to insert in the custom screen any fields that are currently held on the clip-
Paste Selected Field(s)
board.
Click to remove the field from the custom screen. The item is not placed on the cus-
Delete Selected Field(s)
tom screen clipboard.
Undo Click to undo the last modification to the custom screen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 605
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Table 28. Toolbar Buttons and Descriptions (Continued)

Toolbar Button Description
Redo Click to redo the last modification to the custom screen.
Click to align all selected fields along the left side of the primary field. The primary
Align Left field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
additional fields.
Click to align all selected fields along the right side of the primary field. The primary
field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
Align Right
additional fields. This menu selection has no effect on the y-coordinate of the
selected field.
Click to align all selected fields along the top of the primary field. The primary field is
Align Top the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more additional
fields.
Click to align all selected fields along the bottom of the primary field. The primary
Align Bottom field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
additional fields.
Click to make all selected fields the same height as the primary field. The primary
Make Same Height field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
additional fields. This menu selection has no effect on the width of the selected field.
Click to make all selected fields the same width as the primary field. The primary
field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
Make Same Width
additional fields. This menu selection has no effect on the height of the selected
field.
Click to make all selected fields the same dimensions as the primary field. The pri-
Make Same Size mary field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or
more additional fields.
Click to align the horizontal center of one or more fields with the horizontal center of
the screen. If you select only one field, its horizontal center coincides exactly with
Center Horizontally on
the horizontal center of the screen. If you select multiple fields, their average hori-
Screen
zontal center coincides exactly with the horizontal center of the screen. This menu
selection has no effect on the y-coordinate of the selected field.
Click to align the vertical center of one or more fields with the vertical center of the
screen. If you select only one field, its vertical center coincides exactly with the verti-
Center Vertically on Screen
cal center of the screen. If you select multiple fields, their average vertical center
coincides exactly with the vertical center of the screen.
Move Field to Front Click to place the selected field on top of any other fields that it overlaps.
Move Field to Back Click to place the selected field behind any other fields that it overlaps.
Click to quickly align fields in the custom screen. When the Snap To function is
enabled (see “Snapping a Bitmap or Field to the Grid” on page 617), the upper-left
corner of any field that is new, or has been repositioned, will be aligned with the
Snap to Grid nearest grid intersection.
The reference point is the upper left-hand corner of the field that is being positioned
on the screen. The snap-to function is activated when you release the mouse button
to insert the field onto the custom screen.
Click to modify the grid spacing to any value between 4 and 32 pixels. The default
Set X/Y Snap spacing is 8 pixels. You can select separate horizontal and vertical spacing for the
grid. They do not have to be the same.

606 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

Table 28. Toolbar Buttons and Descriptions (Continued)

Toolbar Button Description
Click to change the name of the custom screen object. This will change the name of
Screen Name
the custom screen in the Tracer Summit database.
Click to view the run-time version of the custom screen. Run-time view simulates
what the custom screen will look like when it is viewed at the BCU operator display.
View Live Screen The system will also validate the objects/properties that have been added to the cus-
tom screen. Warning messages display when items are not available at the site with
which the custom screen has been associated.

Table 29. Custom Screen Palette Buttons

Palette Description
Field Type Field Name Button

Status text Inserts text drawn from the property you specify.

Status
Fields
Binary Inserts text drawn from the binary property you specify.

Override control Inserts a button that can override the present value for vari-
ous objects within a Tracer Summit site.
Control
Fields
Setpoint control Inserts a numeric text field. The field allows users to change
settings of numerical data.

Static text Inserts text that you specify.

Text or
Image
Fields Bitmap Inserts a monochrome bitmap image, no larger than 320 x
240 pixels in size

Target Target button Inserts a button that links to another custom or standard
Fields screen.

Cursor Default cursor Changes the cursor from an insertion point back to a selec-
tion cursor.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 607
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Using the Custom Screens Pop-Up Menu

In the Custom Screens editor, you can select options from the menu bar or
select them from a pop-up menu. To display a pop-up menu, right-click on
a custom screen field or on the custom screen background. You can then
make a selection from the pop-up menu (see Figure 522).
If the mouse button is positioned over a field, the pop-up menu items are
specific to the field. Otherwise, the pop-up menu is specific to the custom
screen.

Figure 522. Custom Screen Pop-Up Menu

Displaying the Custom Screen Palette

Use the following procedure to display the custom screen palette (see Fig-
ure 521 on page 605).
To display the custom screens palette:
1. From the Custom Screen editor, select Palette from the Layout menu.
A submenu appears.
2. Select the palette mode you desire.
• Click Show to display the palette
• Click Hide to hide the palette

608 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

Configuring and Using the Grid

The Custom Screen editor has a grid that helps you place screen elements
precisely on the custom screen template. Use the following procedures to
configure the grid and snap to settings that help you lay out custom
screens.

Displaying the Grid

1. From the Layout menu, select Grid Options.
2. Select On from the Grid Options submenu. The grid appears on the
Custom Screen editor and enables the Grid Spacing and Snap To
menu items. A check mark appears next to the On menu item in the
Grid Options submenu of the Layout menu.
3. To remove the grid and remove the check mark next to the On menu
item, repeat steps 1 - 2.

Configure Grid Color

1. With the grid displayed on the Custom Screen editor, from the Layout
menu, select Grid Options.
2. Select Color from the Grid Options submenu.
3. Click the color that you want the grid to display.

Configuring Grid Spacing

1. With the grid actively displayed on the Custom Screen editor, from
the Layout menu, select Grid Options. The Tracer Summit software
displays the Grid Options submenu.
2. Click Spacing. The Snap Settings dialog box appears (see Figure 523).

Figure 523. Snapping Dialog Box

3. Scroll through the values in the Snap X Value list and/or click a new
value from the Snap Y Value list. The newly selected snap X value
and/or snap Y value displays in the corresponding fields of the dialog
box.
4. Click OK to redisplay the grid with the modified grid settings.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 609
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Adding Status Text, Binary Text, and Setpoint Control

Field(s)
Use the following procedure to add fields that can display information
from sensors or equipment installed at your site.
To add control value fields:
1. From a custom screen, click the palette button associated with the
type of field you want to insert (see Table 29 on page 607). The cursor
turns into an insert prompt (see Figure 524).

Figure 524. Insert Prompt

2. Position the cursor at the location on the graphic where you want to
insert the field and click. The field is inserted and an editor that is
appropriate for that field displays.
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Selecting Property Reference and Setup Information for Status Text,
Binary Text, and Setpoint Control Fields” below.

Selecting Property Reference and Setup Information for Status

Text, Binary Text, and Setpoint Control Fields
On the Property screen, you can specify the site name, object type, object
name, and property for the field.
• Status text displays information about a single selected property for a
specific UCM or for all UCMs of a specific object type that are
installed at a single site.
• Binary text displays a text view of the binary property of an object
that you specify. You can define which of the two logical states (0 and
1) will display.
• Setpoint control text is information that comes from a sensor or
HVAC unit. Inserting this field allows you to change the values in this
field at the operator display.
To select a property reference for these fields:
1. In the Object Type list, select an object type. The list displays only
those property types and instances that are defined for the site.
2. In the Object Name field, select the name of the object from the list.
3. In the Property Name list, select the property name. (You must com-
plete this field to exit the screen.)
4. Type or select the setup information for the field. After you enter this
information, the Editor Text field displays the values you enter.
• If you are entering Status text, use the arrow to select the right of
decimal value.

610 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

• If you are entering binary text, type the text that will appear
when the apparatus is in an inactive and/or active state.
• If you are entering setpoint information, type the minimum and
maximum value.

Note:
Using this field you can restrict the acceptable range of values.
For instance, a valid zone temperature setpoint might be
between 50 and 90°F. However, for either energy-conservation
or comfort reasons, you might want to restrict the setpoint that
can be entered from the BCU operator display to a range of
65–85°F.

5. Click OK to insert the information on the custom screen.

Inserting an Override Control Field

Use the following procedure to select one of the six preselected control
class names from the expanded selection list. The override field lets you
override the present value for various objects within a Tracer Summit
site.
To add an override control field:
1. From a custom screen, select the Override Control Field button (see
Table 29 on page 607). The cursor turns into an insert prompt (see
Figure 524 on page 610).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the graphic where you want to
insert the field and click. The field is inserted and the Override Con-
trol Field dialog box displays (see Figure 525 on page 612).
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Defining the Properties of an Override Control Field” on page 612.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 611
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Figure 525. Override Control Field Dialog Box

Defining the Properties of an Override Control Field

Note:
During daily operations, the user can override this value at the
operator display.

1. In the Object Type list, select the object type.

2. In the Object Name list, select the object name or list of objects. The
Editor Text displays the current value of the object in edit mode and
as it exists at the operator display.
• Select a specific object by its name if you want to display a
present value override control for a single unit control module
(UCM).
• Select <List Of> if you want to display a present value override
control for all UCMs of the selected object type. When you select
this value, an override button displays on the custom screen for
all UCMs configured at the BCU.
3. In the Current list, select the priority for the override control. The
BCU operator display uses pre-defined priority controls for overrides.

Note:
The default is control class 12.

When you press the override button at the operator display, the prior-
ity of the override is evaluated to see whether it cancels the priority
that is currently controlling the property.
Use the names in the Available on System list as a reference when
assigning the current control class for the override control. The list

612 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

displays the 16 control class names that were set up in site configura-
tion (see “Setting Up Control Priorities” on page 630).
4. Click OK to insert the information on the custom screen.

Inserting a Static Text Field

Use the following procedure to add a static text field. Static text is infor-
mation on the custom screen that does not change. Examples of static text
include a screen title, field title, or other item that adds information to
the screen and remains unchanged.
To add a static text field:
1. From a custom screen, click the Static Text palette button (see Table
29 on page 607). The cursor turns into an insert prompt (see Figure
524 on page 610).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the graphic where you want to
insert the Static Text field and click. The field is inserted and the
Static Text dialog box displays (see Figure 526).

Figure 526. Static Text Dialog Box

3. Type the text that you want displayed on the custom screen.
4. Click OK to add the text to the custom screen. The static text string
displays on the custom screen.

Inserting a Custom or Standard Bitmap

Use the following procedure to add a custom or standard bitmap to the
custom screen. Custom bitmaps are created using third-party graphics
packages and imported into Tracer Summit (see “Creating and Importing
Bitmaps” on page 620). Standard bitmaps are a set of standard equip-
ment images that ship with Tracer Summit.
To insert a bitmap:
1. From a custom screen, click the Bitmap palette button (see Table 29
on page 607). The cursor turns into an insert prompt (see Figure 524
on page 610).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the screen where you want to
insert the field and click. The Bitmap dialog box displays (see
Figure 527 on page 614).
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Selecting a Bitmap” described below. The field is inserted and the

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 613
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Override Control Field dialog box displays (see Figure 525 on page
612).
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Selecting a Bitmap” described below.

Figure 527. Standard Bitmap Dialog Box

Figure 528. Custom Bitmap Dialog Box

Selecting a Bitmap
1. Select the type of graphic you are entering:
• If you are inserting a custom bitmap that you have created and
saved in a directory, click the Custom button.
• If you are inserting a standard bitmap, click the Standard button.

614 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

2. Select the desired bitmap.

• If you are inserting a standard bitmap, select it from the bitmap
list (see Figure 527 on page 614).
• If you are inserting a custom bitmap, click the Browse button and
select the bitmap in the directory where you saved it (see
Figure 528 on page 614).
3. Click OK to add the bitmap to the custom screen. The bitmap displays
on the custom screen.

Linking a Target Button Field to a Custom or Standard

Screen
Use the following procedure to link a target button with a custom or stan-
dard screen. During run-time mode at the BCU operator display, the user
can press this target button and the LCD displays the custom screen that
is the button’s target.
To link a target button with a custom or standard screen:

1. From a custom screen, click the palette button associated with the
type of field you want to insert (see Table 29 on page 607). The cursor
turns into an insert prompt (see Figure 524 on page 610).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the screen where you want to
insert the field and click. The field is inserted and the Target Button
dialog box appears (see Figure 529).

Figure 529. Target Button Dialog Box

Defining the Properties of a Target Button

1. In the Button Text field, type the text that you want to display in the
button as it appears on the custom screen.
2. Select the button target custom screen.
• To link the field to a custom screen, click the Custom Screens but-
ton. In the Button Target list, all of the custom screens that are
available appear. Select the custom screen that you want to dis-
play when the button is pressed at the operator display.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 615
Using the Custom Screen Editor

• To link the field to a standard screen, click the Standard Screens

button. Selecting this button causes the Button Target selection
list to display only the standard screens to which the target but-
ton may be linked. At this time, you can only link to the Main
View standard screen. Selecting this target places the Main View
bitmap on the target button (see Figure 530).

Note:
Remember that if you want to use the standard screens to view
all the equipment at your site, include a target button with the
Main View on one of your custom screens. If you do not include
this button, you will only be able to access the custom screens
you set up in the Operator Display editor as the first screen to
display (“Enabling Custom Screens” on page 595), as well as
the Home, Alarms, and Schedule screens.

Figure 530. Main View Bitmap

3. If you are linking to a custom screen, from the Object Name/Type list,
select the type of object contained on the custom screen. Click None if
you are linking the target button to another custom screen that has
been developed for the site.
• Click the Object Name button to sort the Object/Name/Type by
the name of the object. The list orders the objects by alphanu-
meric name.
• Click the Type button to sort the Object Name/Type list by type of
object.
4. Click OK to insert the target button on the custom screen.

616 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Organizing Custom Screen Fields

Saving Custom Screens

◆ From the File menu, select Save Custom Screen to save your changes.

Note:
The custom screens are not added to the operator display until
you add them in the Operator Display editor and save them to
the database (“Selecting Custom Screens” on page 597).

Switching to Run-Time (Live) Screen View

Use the following procedure to see how the custom screen displays real-
time values in the fields you have added. You must be connected to the
operator display to access real-time values.
To switch to a live-screen view:
◆ Click Run-Time (Live) Screen View on the Custom Screen editor tool-
bar (see Figure 531). The editing mode is deactivated and you cannot
edit the custom screen while in live-screen mode.
• If the sensors or equipment are working correctly, their values
display. Otherwise, question marks (???) display, indicating that
the present value for the field is unknown.
• If the tools palette is active, the Tracer Summit software hides
the palette. The rest of the screen maintains the same appear-
ance.

Figure 531. Run-Time (Live) Screen View Button

Organizing Custom Screen Fields

Organizing fields includes such procedures as moving, copying and past-
ing, resizing, and related processes. For information on using the Custom
Screen editor tools, see “Organizing Graphic Fields” on page 490. The fol-
lowing procedures describe how to use tools that are unique to the Cus-
tom Screen editor.

Snapping a Bitmap or Field to the Grid

Use the following procedure when you want to precisely place bitmaps on
the grid, also called “snapping to grid.”
To snap a bitmap to the grid in the custom screen template:
1. Use the default cursor to click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A
cross-hatched border displays around the bitmap or field. (You can
also select multiple fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Mul-
tiple Fields at Once” on page 490.)

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 617
Using the Custom Screen Editor

2. Click Snap to Grid on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see

Figure 532). The upper left hand corner of the item is snapped verti-
cally and horizontally to the closest grid line.

Figure 532. Snap to Grid Button

Centering a Bitmap or Field Horizontally

1. Use the default cursor to click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A
cross-hatched border displays around the bitmap or field. (You can
also select multiple fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Mul-
tiple Fields at Once” on page 490.)
2. Click Center Horizontally on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see
Figure 533). The bitmap or field aligns horizontally in the template.

Figure 533. Center Horizontally

Centering a Bitmap or Field Vertically

1. Use the default cursor to click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A
cross-hatched border displays around the bitmap or field. (You can
also select multiple fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Mul-
tiple Fields at Once” on page 490.)
2. Click Center Vertically on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see
Figure 534). The bitmap or field aligns vertically in the template.

Figure 534. Center Vertically

Editing Custom Screens

Use the following procedures to select custom screens to edit and to select
graphic elements on those screens for editing.

Selecting a Custom Screen to Edit When You Have

Another Screen Open
1. With a custom screen open, from the File menu, select Open Another
Custom Screen. The select Custom Screen dialog box displays (see
“Select Custom Screen Dialog Box” on page 602).
When you have not yet saved the current custom screen, the Save
Changes dialog box gives you the option to save the screen.

618 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Editing Custom Screens

2. Select an available screen.

3. Click OK to edit the custom screen.

Selecting a Bitmap or Field to Edit

1. Click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border dis-
plays around the element.
2. Right-click the bitmap or field. The custom screen pop-up menu
appears (see Figure 535).

Figure 535. Example pop-up Menu with Edit Properties Selected

3. Select Edit Properties from the pop-up menu. The property dialog box
for the item appears.
• If you are editing a Status Text field, the Status Text property
dialog box appears.
• If you are editing a Binary Text field, the Binary Text property
dialog box appears.
• If you are editing an Override Control field, the Override Control
property dialog box appears (see “Defining the Properties of an
Override Control Field” on page 612).
• If you are editing a Setpoint Control field, the Setpoint Control
property dialog box appears.
• If you are editing a Static Text field, the Static Text property dia-
log box appears (see Figure 526 on page 613).
• If you are editing a Bitmap, the Bitmap property dialog box
appears (Figure 527 on page 614).
• If you are editing a Target Button, the Target Button property
dialog box appears (Figure 529 on page 615).
4. Change the properties as required.
5. From the File menu, select Save to store your changes in the data-
base.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 619
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Changing the Custom Screen Name

Use the following procedure to change the name of the custom screen.
This is the name of the custom screen as it appears beneath the custom
screen template and in the Operator Display editor.
To change the name of the custom screen:
1. Click Screen Name on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see
Figure 536). The Screen Name dialog box appears (see Figure 537).

Figure 536. Screen Name Button

Figure 537. Custom Screen Name Change Dialog Box

2. In the Screen name field, type the new name for the custom screen.
3. Click OK to change the name of the screen. The custom screen name
that appears beneath the custom screen template changes to the new
name.

Creating and Importing Bitmaps

Using the Custom Screen editor, you can import images you create in
other software applications into graphics used in the Custom Screen edi-
tor. Tracer Summit can import bitmap (BMP) images that have been
saved as monochrome and are no larger than 320x240 pixels.
To create these image files, you can use a variety of graphics packages,
including Paintshop Pro versions 5 and later, AutoCAD, CorelDRAW, or
Windows Paint.
Once you save the files to the appropriate directory, you can insert them
into your custom screens in the same way as graphic BMP images are
inserted (see “Inserting a Custom or Standard Bitmap” on page 613).

Closing a Custom Screen

1. With a custom screen actively displayed in the custom screen editor,
from the File menu, select Close Custom Screen.
2. When you have not yet saved the custom screen, the Save Changes
dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes to store your changes.

620 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 36

Using Rover in Tracer Summit

You can use the Rover Comm5 service tool within your Tracer Summit
software to configure unit controllers. There are two ways to do this:
• Start the full version of Rover from the Tracer Summit Tools menu
• Open Rover configuration screens from Tracer Summit UCM editors
You can use Rover to configure all supported Comm5 controllers through
Tracer Summit. The Rover Comm5 service tool must be purchased and
installed separately from Tracer Summit. Tracer Summit Version 15.0 or
higher and Rover Version 5.0 are required.

Note:
Rover Comm4, the Rover Flash Download application, and the
Air and Water Balancing application are not available through
Tracer Summit. All other Rover functions are available.

For more information, see “About Using Rover in Tracer Summit” on

page 623.

Starting Rover in Tracer Summit

Rover is available in Tracer Summit only when:
• Rover Comm5 Version 5.0 and Tracer Summit Version 15.0 or higher
are installed on your computer.
• The site security supervisor has granted you access to Rover (full
access).
To start Rover in Tracer Summit:
1. Connect locally or remotely to a Tracer Summit site.
2. From the Tools menu, select Rover. The BCU Selection dialog box
appears.
If the Rover menu item is not available, check the requirements
above.
3. Select the BCU that connects to the Comm5 link with the controllers
you want to configure.
4. Click Configure with Rover. Rover Comm5 starts.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 621
Using Rover in Tracer Summit

Accessing Rover Configuration Screens

from UCM Editors
Rover configuration screens are available in Tracer Summit only when:
• Rover Comm5 Version 5.0 and Tracer Summit Version 15.0 or higher
are installed on your computer.
• The site security supervisor has granted you access to Rover (configu-
ration only).
• The software plug-in for the unit controller is available in Rover.
• The UCM is communicating with the BCU.
To open Rover configuration screens:
1. Connect locally or remotely to a Tracer Summit site.
2. On the Setup menu, point to Unit Controllers, then select the type of
Comm5 controller you want to configure. The Select controller dialog
box appears.
You can use Rover to configure the following types of controllers: Dis-
charge Air Controller (DAC), Generic LonTalk Device (GLD), Tracer
MP580/581, and Space Comfort Controller (SCC).
3. Select the controller you want to configure, then click OK. The appro-
priate UCM editor appears.
4. On the Setup tab, click the Configure with Rover button. The Rover
Configuration dialog box appears.
If the Configure with Rover button is not available, check the require-
ments above.
5. Make changes as needed, then click the Download button to save your
changes to the controller.
6. Click Close.

622 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting up Security for Rover

Setting up Security for Rover

Because the Rover Comm5 service tool makes available all configuration
options for Comm5 controllers, you'll want to restrict access to qualified
technicians and operators. Only site security supervisors can add or
remove access to Rover.
To set up security for Rover:
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Security.
2. In the Select Security dialog box, select the user for whom you want to
grant access to Rover.
3. On the Functions tab, select the Rover (Configuration Only) check box
and/or the Rover (Full Access) check box.
The Configuration Only option grants access to configuration screens
only (from a UCM editor). The Full Access option grants access to the
complete Rover service tool so that bindings can be created between
controllers.
4. Click Save.
5. Click the Open Another button to add access for other users.
6. Click Close when you are finished.

About Using Rover in Tracer Summit

Why should I use Rover in Tracer Summit?
By using Rover in Tracer Summit, you can:
• Configure Comm5 controllers remotely on links with BCUs
• Create and view bindings remotely on links with BCUs
• Use Rover and Tracer Summit on the same computer

Do I need Rover to manage my building automation

system?
You probably don’t need Rover to manage your building automation sys-
tem on an ongoing basis. Rover is a configuration and troubleshooting tool
for individual controllers—it doesn’t have the sophisticated system-level
reporting or scheduling capabilities of Tracer Summit.
If you’re a Trane technician, using Rover in Tracer Summit makes it
much easier to work with Comm5 controllers on Tracer Summit sites. You
can connect your computer to a BCU locally or remotely and then use
Rover to set up and troubleshoot connected Comm5 controllers.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 623
Using Rover in Tracer Summit

Who can access Rover from Tracer Summit?

The site security supervisor must grant access to appropriate technicians
and operators before they can use Rover through Tracer Summit. There
are two levels of access:
• Rover (Configuration Only), which offers access only to Rover configu-
ration screens from UCM editors
• Rover (Full Access), which offers access to the full version of Rover,
including the ability to create bindings between controllers

Note:
An operator with full Rover access can configure all supported
Comm5 controllers, even if that operator does not have access
to certain types of Comm5 controllers in Tracer Summit.

624 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 37

Using BACnet for Non-Trane

Devices

BACnet (Building Automation Control network) is a standard communi-

cation protocol adopted by ASHRAE for sharing data between various
manufacturers’ equipment and building automation systems. Tracer
Summit uses the BACnet protocol for all communications between BCUs
and PC Workstations. BACnet protocol is also used to:
• Control and monitor non-Trane devices
• Communicate equipment information to a non-Trane control system
so that it can control and monitor the Trane equipment
Tracer Summit uses and supports many standard BACnet objects. Tracer
Summit also expands on BACnet by using Trane proprietary UCM
objects. Trane UCM objects follow the BACnet protocol structure, but are
not included in the BACnet standard. In order for non-Trane devices to
interpret UCM object data, you must create standard BACnet input or
output objects and reference them to UCM objects.
Connect a non-Trane device to a Trane BCU or PC Workstation through
Ethernet, ARCNET, BACnet/IP, or an EIA-232 (point-to-point) connec-
tion.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 625
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet

Devices
Tracer Summit can control and monitor a non-Trane device. To set up a
communication link with a device, you must create a BACnet object (non-
Trane device) in the Site Configuration editor and assign a device ID.
To set up a non-Trane device:
1. Install Trane device and non-Trane device hardware, communication
wiring, network cards, and software. (See the Tracer Summit Hard-
ware and Software Installation guide for instructions.)
2. If the site with the non-Trane device is not defined, follow the instruc-
tions in Chapter 6 “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites” to set up
the new site. After you have set up the site, continue to the next step.
3. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 538).

Figure 538. Select Site Dialog Box

4. Click the name of the site you want to display.

5. Click OK to display the Site Configuration editor (see Figure 539 on
page 627).

626 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet Devices

Figure 539. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

6. Click the Devices tab to display the Devices screen (see Figure 540).

Figure 540. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 627
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

7. Click Create Non-Trane BACnet Device to display the Create New

Non-Trane BACnet Device dialog box (see Figure 541).

Figure 541. Create New Non-Trane Device Dialog Box

8. Type the name and the device ID for the BACnet device.

Note:
The device ID is provided by the device manufacturer. Each
device on a network must have a unique device ID. Contact the
manufacturer for instructions, if necessary.

9. Select the object type from the Object Types field. The default selec-
tion is All Types.
10. Click the Scan button to display a list of all the available objects in
the non-Trane device.
11. From the Available Objects list, select the objects that you want to
view. Then, click the Add button to add the items to the Selected
Objects list.
12. Click Okay to save the changes and return to the Devices tab.
13. Click the Communications tab and check the Disable Automatic
Updates box (see Figure 542 on page 629).

628 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet Devices

Figure 542. Disable Automatic Update Checkbox

Note:
By checking this box, Tracer Summit will no longer scan non-
Trane BACnet devices for updated objects every 30 minutes.
However, Tracer Summit will get updates from the non-Trane
devices when objects are viewed in custom graphics or Objects
and Properties.

14. To set up control priorities, go to “Setting Up Control Priorities” on

page 630.

Offline Editing
When editing offline, you can add an object to a non-Trane device using
the Manually Add New Objects fields.
To manually add new objects:
1. Type the object type, instance, and name of each object.
2. Click the Add button.

Note:
If you manually add an object with the same type and instance
of a device already in the Selected Objects list, the object will be
replaced with the new name that you manually gave the object.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 629
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Setting Up Control Priorities

Control priorities identify the levels at which Tracer Summit applications
control an object.
Each control priority name is mapped to a control application. You can
change the default application for any control priority. You can also
change the control class name for some control classes.

Note:
Be careful when modifying BACnet default applications. If you
are using BACnet protocols to communicate with non-Trane
devices, you must make sure the names align for each control
class.

Selecting Control Priority Defaults

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Control Priorities tab
(see Figure 543).

Figure 543. Site Configuration Editor Control Priorities Screen

2. Click the Tracer Summit Defaults button or BACnet Defaults button

to select a set of defaults. The default names display in the Control
Priority Names list.

630 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Setting Up Control Priorities

Modifying the Control Application for a Class

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Control Priorities tab
(see Figure 543 on page 630).
2. Click the name of the control class you wish to modify in the Control
Priority Names list.
3. Click the name of the application you want to assign to the class in
the Available Control Applications list.
4. Click the right arrow to assign the application. The application name
displays in the Assigned Control Applications list.
5. To remove an application from the Assigned Control Applications list,
click the name to highlight it. Then click the left arrow to remove the
application.

Modifying the Name for a Priority Class

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Control Priorities tab
(see Figure 543 on page 630).
2. Click the Control Class Names button to display the Control Class
Names dialog box (see Figure 544).

Figure 544. Control Class Names Dialog Box

3. Click the field to the right of the control class number you wish to
modify. The control class names that cannot be modified are unavail-
able.
4. When you are done making changes to the class names, click OK to
close the dialog box.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 631
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Providing Information to Other Systems

A non-Trane system can control and monitor Trane equipment. To set up
communications to another system, create a BCU for the Trane device. If
you are using an EIA-232 point-to-point) connection with the BMTW you
must also create a modem object. The BMTX has an on-board EIA-232
connection. Then create BACnet analog and binary input and output
objects to reference Trane UCM properties.
After creating the BACnet input and output objects, you can print a list of
BACnet objects that exist on the site. The non-Trane device manufacturer
will use the list to configure the controlling device.
Trane provides listings (templates) of typical BACnet input/output points
for Trane equipment. Please contact Trane for more information.

Communication Flow Between Devices

Figure 545 on page 633 illustrates the communication flow between
Trane and non-Trane devices.

632 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Providing Information to Other Systems

Figure 545. BACnet Flow Diagram

1 Communicati 2 BACnet input and The non-Trane The BCU responds

3 4
on links gather output objects device requests that by sending the
data from Trane UCMs reference specific the present value of an requested present value
and store them in the properties of the UCMs. input or output object be to the required address.
sent to a specific address.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 633
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

To set up Tracer Summit to provide information to other systems:

1. Install Trane device hardware, communication wiring, network cards,
and software. (See the Tracer Summit Hardware and Software Instal-
lation guide for instructions).
2. Set up a site. (Follow the instructions in Chapter 6, “Configuring
Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”)
3. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab (see
Figure 546).

Figure 546. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

4. Click Create Device to display the Create New Device dialog box (see
Figure 547 on page 635).

634 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Providing Information to Other Systems

Figure 547. Create New BCU Dialog Box

5. Enter a name for the device in the Device Name field. Use up to 32
characters.
6. Type a number in the Device ID field.

Note:
All devices must have a unique device ID provided by the man-
ufacturer. Devices that share the same network must have
unique device numbers. Contact the device manufacturer for
instructions, if necessary.

7. Type a number in the Network Number field. The default value is 1.

Note:
Devices (BCUs and non-Trane devices) on a network must
share a network number. When you have multiple networks
(ARCNET, Ethernet, EIA-232) on a site, each network must
have a unique network number. For example, if you have a
BACnet interface using an EIA-232 connection between a BCU
and another vendor’s gateway, then the BCU must have a dif-
ferent network number than the other vendor’s gateway.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 635
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

8. From the Panel Type list box, select the device type: Enhanced BCU
(BMTX), modular BCU (BMTW) or BCU (BMTS). If the panel type is
a modular BCU (BMTW), the Capacity Cards field is available. For
high a capacity BCU, select 2. For a standard capacity BCU, select 1.
The BMTX has an on-board EIA-232 connection that does not require
configuration, skip the following steps for the BMTX.

9. To set up an EIA-232 connection, click Add Modem to display the Cre-

ate New Modem dialog box (see Figure 548).

Figure 548. Create New Modem Dialog Box

10. Enter a name for the modem in the Modem Name field. Use up to 32
characters. Assign a name that will help you identify the modem,
such as BACnet Connection or EIA-232 Connection.
11. Click OK to return to the Edit Devices screen.
12. To add a BCU I/O module to the site, see Chapter 18, “BCU Inputs
and Outputs” for instructions.

Note:
The BCU I/O module buttons are only selectable for Modular
BCUs (BMTW)

13. Click OK to display the Devices screen.

14. Click Save.

636 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Providing Information to Other Systems

Configuring the Modem for an EIA-232 Connection

Note:
This section only applies to the BMTS and the BMTW. The
BMTX is automatically set up.

1. To configure the modem for an EIA-232 connection, from the Setup

menu select Communications. Additional menu selections display.
2. Select BCU Modem. The Select BCU Modem dialog box displays (see
Figure 549).

Figure 549. Select Modem Dialog Box

3. Click the name of the modem you created for the EIA-232 Connection.
4. Click OK to display the Modem editor (see Figure 550).

Figure 550. BCU Modem Editor Status Screen

5. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 551 on
page 638).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 637
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Figure 551. BCU Modem Editor Configuration Screen

6. Click the arrow to the right of the Connect By field to display a list of
modem types.
7. Select Hardwired.

Defining Input/Output Points

1. Define a list of input/output reference points you will need.
Use the Trane provided list of typical BACnet input/output points for
Trane equipment to create your point list.
2. Using the Input/Output editor (accessed through the Setup menu),
create the analog inputs, analog outputs, binary inputs, or binary out-
puts you have defined. (For instructions, see Chapter 17, “Creating
Input/Output Objects.”)

Note:
As a BACnet input or output object is created, a BACnet ID is
automatically assigned to the object. Once you have created a
BACnet input or output object, do not delete the object. The
object address is only assigned once, and cannot be recreated
after it is deleted.

638 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Running a Report of BACnet Objects

Running a Report of BACnet Objects

1. From the Status menu, select Reports. The Select Report to View dia-
log box displays (see Figure 552).

Figure 552. Select Report to View Dialog Box

2. Click Standard Live to select a standard live report.

3. Click OK. The Select Standard Live Report dialog box displays (see
Figure 553).

Figure 553. Select Standard Live Report Dialog Box

4. Click the arrow to the right of the Standard Report Type field to dis-
play a list of report types.
5. Click Site Reports to display a list of site reports in the Report Name
field.
6. Click Site BACnet Report.
7. Click OK to display the Sort Report By dialog box (see Figure 554 on
page 640).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 639
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Figure 554. Sort Report By Dialog Box

8. Click Device ID to sort the report by the device ID; click Name to sort
the report by the device name.
9. Click OK to display the Site BACnet Report in the Report Viewer (see
Figure 555).

Figure 555. Site BACnet Report

10. To save the report in the default reports folder, click Save. For more
information on saving reports, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily Oper-
ations guide.

640 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Running a Report of BACnet Objects

11. To print the report on a printer, click Print to display the Print dialog
box (see Figure 556).

Figure 556. Print Dialog Box

12. Click OK to print the report. For instructions on changing the default
Print dialog box settings, see your Microsoft Windows or printer docu-
mentation.

Note:
Some manufacturers can input BACnet object data directly to
their system from an electronic file. You can use the Print to file
field in the Print dialog box to create an electronic file for this
purpose.

13. To print the report to a file, click the Print button in the Report
Viewer.
14. Click to select the Print to file check box.
15. Click OK to print to file. The print file will be saved in the default
report folder and will have a .PS file name extension.
16. Click Close to exit the Report Viewer.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 641
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

642 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 38

Restoring into the Tracer

Summit Workstation

After you have backed up site database files, Custom Programming Lan-
guage (CPL) files, graphics files and report files, you can restore these
files into the original PC workstation or a new PC workstation. For more
information on backing up Tracer Summit files, refer to the Tracer Sum-
mit Daily Operations guide.

Restoring a Site and CPL Files

You can restore backup site files and Custom Programming Language
(CPL) files to the original PC Workstation or a new PC Workstation.
To restore a site and CPL files:
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Site. The Restore Location dialog box displays (see Figure 557).
The Restore File Path field displays the default path and name of the
backup file to be restored.

Note:
If you need help restoring a site, click Tutorial to access The
Tracer Summit Operations Tutorial (tutorial button not
shown).

Figure 557. Site Restore Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 643
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

3. To change the Restore File Path, click Browse. The Select File to
Restore From dialog box displays (see Figure 558).

Figure 558. Select File to Restore From Dialog Box

4. Select the directory where the site backup file is saved from the file
list. The file list displays previously saved backup files.
5. Select the file name to restore from the backup file list.
6. Click Open. The Site Restore dialog box displays again. The new file
name and path display in the Restore File Path field.
7. Select the specific site or sites to be restored from the Available
Site(s) list box.
8. Use Add or Add All to copy the selected sites to the Selected Sites
window. Click Remove or Remove All to remove the sites from the
Selected Sites window.
9. Click Next to display the Restore CPL dialog box (see Figure 559 on
page 645).

644 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Restoring a Site and CPL Files

Figure 559. Restore CPL Dialog Box

10. To change the source path for the CPL backup files, click Browse next
to the CPL Source Path field. The Browse for Folder dialog box dis-
plays.
11. Select a CPL source path from the selection window.
12. Click OK. The Restore CPL dialog box displays the selected CPL files.
13. To change the location to restore CPL files to, click Browse next to the
CPL Destination Path field. The Browse for Folder dialog box dis-
plays.
14. Select a CPL destination path.
15. Click OK. The Restore CPL dialog box displays.
16. Select the CPL file(s) to be restored from the Available CPL File(s)
list box.
17. Click Add or Add All to copy the selected CPL files or sites to the
Selected CPL Files list box. Click Remove or Remove All to remove
the site from the Selected CPL Files list box.
18. Click Restore to begin the restoring process. The Site Restore dialog
box displays.

Note:
To over write all selected locations, check the Overwrite all
selected sites check box. Any sites that fail are listed at the end
of the restore process.

The selected site database backup file and selected CPL files are
restored to the locations you selected.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 645
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

Restoring Global Graphics

You can restore backup global graphic files and expanded message files to
the original PC Workstation or a new PC Workstation.
To restore global graphics:
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Graphics. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays (see
Figure 560).

Figure 560. Restore Graphic (Global Graphics) Dialog Box

3. To change the source path of the graphics, click Browse. The Browse
for Folder dialog box displays.
4. Select a file location path.
5. Click OK. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays.
6. Click Global Graphics to restore the graphics that are common to
multiple sites.
7. Select the graphics to be restored from the Details window. Click
Select All to select all global graphics.
8. Click OK to restore the selected graphics.

646 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Restoring Site Graphics

Restoring Site Graphics

You can restore backup site graphic files and expanded message files to
the original PC workstation or a new PC workstation.

Note:
The restore function for site graphics is required only for cre-
ation of a node on the Navigation Tree. Once this node is cre-
ated, it is no longer necessary (or possible) to restore. The
updated files (.GIF, .BMP, .JPG, .HTM, .AVI) can be copied via
Windows Explorer to the correct directory.

To restore a site graphic:

1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Graphics. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays (see
Figure 561).

Figure 561. Restore Graphic (Site Graphics) Dialog Box

3. To change the path where backup graphics are located, click Browse.
The Browse for Folder dialog box displays.
4. Select the directory location.
5. Click OK. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays.
6. Click Site Graphics to restore graphics specific to a site.
7. Select the site to restore from the drop-down list.
8. Select the graphics to be restored from the Details window. Click
Select All to select all site graphics.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 647
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

9. Click OK to restore the selected graphics.

Restoring a Report
You can restore backup report files to the original PC Workstation or a
new PC Workstation.
To restore a report:
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Reports. The Select Report Backup File dialog box displays (see
Figure 562).

Figure 562. Select Report Backup File Dialog Box

3. Select the file location of the backup report from the Look In field.
4. Select the report file to restore.
5. Click Open to restore the selected report. You are returned to the
Tracer Summit main window.
6. To view the restored reports, click Reports.

648 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Restoring Operator Display Custom Screens

Restoring Operator Display Custom

Screens
Use the following procedures to restore a custom screen.
To restore custom screens
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. A submenu appears.
2. Select Custom Screen from the Restore submenu. The Select File to
restore From dialog box appears.
3. Select the file that contains the custom screens.
4. Click OK. The Restore Custom Screens dialog box appears (see
Figure 563).

Figure 563. Restore Custom Screen Dialog Box

5. Click the Available Sites arrow to select the site whose custom
screens you want to restore.
6. Select the BCU from the Available BCUs list. The selected BCU dis-
plays in the Available BCUs field.
7. In the Custom Screens list, select the custom screens that you want to
restore.
8. Click Add to add the screens to the Selected Custom Screens list (see
Figure 563).
9. Click OK. The Tracer Summit software restores the selected custom
screens to the selected BCU.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 649
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

Restoring a Tracer 100 Site

Use the following procedures to restore a Tracer 100 site.

To Restore Into an Empty Tracer Summit Database

When you first configure Tracer Summit workstation, the database is
empty.
◆ To restore a Tracer 100 site into an empty database, follow the proce-
dure described in Chapter 6, “Restoring a Site from the Site Creation
Wizard.”

Restoring Into a Non-empty Database

This procedure assumes that a backup file of the Tracer 100 site was
already made. For more information about backing up a site, refer to the
Daily Operations guide. This backup file is a *.BDB backup file, not a
*.SAV file backup.
◆ Perform the steps described in “Restoring a Site and CPL Files” on
page 643.

650 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 39

Deleting Objects and Sites

From time to time you may need to delete an object or a site from the
database because:
• An object such as analog or binary input was created for troubleshoot-
ing purposes
• An object was placed in a database by mistake
• The database has grown and you want to reduce the number of
objects in it
• A site is no longer needed
Although you can delete either an object or a site, the procedure has some
built-in safeguards:
• If you are trying to delete an object that is referenced by other objects,
the references to the object you want to delete must be replaced with
references to other objects.

Note:
Object editing should not be done while a deletion is in process
(other than editing references to a object you want to delete).

• If any user is logged on to the site you want to delete, they must log
off before you can delete the site. You cannot be logged onto the site
you want to delete.

Note:
Only users with security access can delete objects or sites. For
more information, see Chapter 9, “Setting Up Security—Tracer
Summit System.”

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 651
Deleting Objects and Sites

Deleting Objects
The basic steps in deleting an object are:
1. Select the objects you want to delete (see “Selecting Objects to Delete”
on page 652).
2. Search to determine if other objects are dependent on (reference) that
object (see “Searching for Referencers” on page 653).
3. If other objects are referencing the object you want to delete, you
must edit those references (see “Opening and Editing the Referencing
Object Editor” on page 654). If no other objects reference the object
you want to delete, go to the next step.
4. Delete the objects (see “Deleting the Objects” on page 657).

Selecting Objects to Delete

1. From the Tools menu, select Delete Object. Tracer Summit displays
the Delete Objects dialog box (see Figure 564).

Figure 564. Delete Objects Dialog Box

2. Make a selection:
• To delete objects (UCMs, applications, input/output devices,
graphics, and so on) from the site you are currently logged onto,
click Current Site Objects.
• To delete graphics that have been saved as global, click Global
Site Objects.
3. Click OK. The Select Object(s) to Delete dialog box displays with a list
of the object types and all instances of that object (see Figure 565 on
page 653).

652 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting Objects

Figure 565. Select Object(s) to Delete Dialog Box

4. In the Select Object Type list box, scroll to the type of object you want
to delete. All of the objects of that type are displayed by name in the
Available Names list box.
5. Click on the names of the objects you plan to delete in the Available
Names list.
6. Click Add to add the selected names to the Selected Object Names
list.
7. Use Add, Add All, Remove, and Remove All to change the Selected
Object Names list. If you want to delete all objects of the same type,
use Add All. If you want to delete several—but not all—objects of the
same type, highlight and add them one at a time.
8. Click Search. (The Search button is available only if you have selected
at least one item to delete.)
9. Continue to the next section.

Searching for Referencers

After you click Search at the Select Object(s) to Delete dialog box, Tracer
Summit searches for objects that reference the object you want to delete
and displays the Search Results screen (see Figure 566 on page 654).
Search results for objects are divided into two types:
• Objects that have no references display in the Objects That Can Be
Deleted list box.
• Objects that have other objects referencing them display in the
Objects That Cannot Be Deleted list box.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 653
Deleting Objects and Sites

Figure 566. Delete Objects Search Results Screen

If there are objects that you want to delete listed in Objects That Cannot
Be Deleted list box, go to the section “Opening and Editing the Referenc-
ing Object Editor” on page 654.
Otherwise, finish deleting the objects (proceed to the section “Deleting the
Objects” on page 657).

Opening and Editing the Referencing Object Editor

To complete the process of deleting the object listed in the Objects That
Cannot Be Deleted list box, you must edit the other objects that reference
this object. These other objects are listed in the Object Is Referenced By
list box. This box displays the object name, the object or objects that have
references to the one you want to delete, and the property whose refer-
ence must be changed if you are to delete the object (see Figure 567 on
page 655).

654 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting Objects

Figure 567. Delete Objects Search Results Screen

To open and edit the referencing object editor:

1. Double click on the object you want to edit in the Object is Referenced
By list box. The editor for that object displays. The initial screen is
the Status screen. The Delete Object Search Results screen remains
open behind the object’s editor window.
2. Click the tab that contains the referencer edit control fields you want
to change.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 655
Deleting Objects and Sites

3. On the new screen, click the referencer button in the appropriate ref-
erencer edit control field (see Figure 568).

Figure 568. Referencer Edit Control Field

Referencer
button

Clicking the referencer button displays the Select Property Reference

dialog box (see Figure 569). The type, name, and specific property
defining the object you want to delete are displayed.

Figure 569. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

4. In the Select Property Reference dialog box, you must choose a differ-
ent object to replace the object you want to delete. Select a new object
with the Type or Name fields, then select the property you want that
is associated with that object.
5. Click OK. You return to the referencing object’s editor window.
6. If there are referencer changes in any other editor screen of this
object, click the tab for that screen.
7. Make the changes by repeating steps 3-6 for each property listed in
the Objects Is Referenced By list box, until no more fields reference
the object you wish to delete.
8. Click Save to save the changes in the object editor.
9. Click Close to close the object editor window and return to the Delete
Objects Search Results screen. The object for which you have changed
the references will now be able to be deleted and will be displayed in
the Objects That Can Be Deleted list box.
10. Proceed to the next section.

656 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting Objects

Deleting the Objects

If the search results show objects in the Objects That Can Be Deleted list
box, the Delete Object button on the Delete Objects Search Results screen
is active (see Figure 566 on page 654).
To delete objects in the Objects That Can Be Deleted list box:
1. Click Delete Object. A message tells you that all editors will be closed
(see Figure 570).

Figure 570. All Editors Will Be Closed Message

2. Click Yes. For each object listed in the Objects That Can Be Deleted
box, a confirmation prompt displays (see Figure 571).

Figure 571. Confirm Delete Object Dialog Box

3. Click Yes to All to continue the deletion process. All of the objects
listed in the Objects That Can Be Deleted list box are removed from
the database.
4. Click Finish. You are returned to the Tracer Summit main screen.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 657
Deleting Objects and Sites

Deleting a Site
The procedure for deleting sites is similar to the procedure for deleting
objects. The main difference is that Tracer Summit searches for security
rights that allow you to delete a site, not for references to the objects that
you want to delete.
To delete a site, you must follow these rules:
• You must be logged onto a site in order to delete another site.
• If only one site is available, you cannot delete a site.
• You cannot delete the site you are logged onto (see the next section for
steps in how to log off of the current site).

Note:
Deleting a site removes it from the PC Workstation, but not
from the BCUs.

IMPORTANT
Deleting a site removes all graphics. If you might want the data again,
then back up the site before deleting it.

Deleting a Site You Are Currently Logged Onto

If you want to delete a site you are currently logged onto, you must log off
and log onto another site. The steps for logging onto a different site are:
1. From the Connect menu, select Log On.
2. Select another site to log onto.
3. Proceed with the steps to delete a site.

Deleting a Site You Are Not Logged Onto

1. From the Tools menu, select Delete Object. The Delete Objects dialog
box displays (see Figure 572).

Figure 572. Delete Objects Dialog Box

2. Click Delete Entire Site.

658 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting a Site

3. Click OK. The Select Site(s) to Delete dialog box is displayed. The list
of sites is shown in the Available Sites list box (see Figure 573).

Figure 573. Select Site(s) to Delete Dialog Box

4. Click the sites you would like to delete.

5. Use Add or Add All to place the sites you want to delete into the
Selected Sites list box. You can use Remove and Remove All to move
sites back to the Available Sites list box if you need to.
6. When all the sites you wish to delete are listed in the Selected Sites
list box, click Search. Tracer Summit displays the results of the
search for sites to delete process on the Search Results screen (see
Figure 574 on page 660).

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 659
Deleting Objects and Sites

Figure 574. Site Deletion Search Results Screen

The Search Results screen shows:

• The Site(s) That Can Be Deleted list box listing sites that have no
users logged on to the system and are available for deleting.
When there are sites in this list box, the Delete Object button
becomes active.
• The Site(s) That Cannot Be Deleted list box, which contains sites
that currently have users logged on and cannot be deleted.

Note:
Sites that have users logged on cannot be deleted. If you are
currently logged on to the site you want to delete, it is unavail-
able for deleting. See “Deleting a Site You Are Currently
Logged Onto” on page 658.

7. Click Delete Object. A message tells you that all editors will be closed
(see Figure 575 on page 661).

660 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Deleting a Site

Figure 575. All Editors Will Be Closed Message

8. Click Yes. For each site listed in the Site(s) That Can Be Deleted box,
a confirmation prompt displays (see Figure 576).

Figure 576. Confirm Delete Site Dialog Box

9. Click Yes if you want to continue with the deletion. The site and all
associated objects, including graphics, are removed from the data-
base.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 661
Deleting Objects and Sites

662 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Chapter 40

Resetting a Device

The Tracer Summit System allows you to reset a BCU at four different
levels. In order of least to greatest impact on the BCU, the reset levels
are:
1. Reset
2. Clear BCU RAM and Reset
3. Clear Database, RAM, and Reset
4. Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset
For detailed information about reset levels, see Table 30 on page 667.
The reset procedures are typically done by selecting BCU Reset/Restore
from the Tools menu in Tracer Summit.

Software Method to Reset BCU

1. From the Tools menu, select BCU Reset/Restore.
2. The BCU Reset/Restore dialog box displays (see Figure 577).

Figure 577. BCU Reset/Restore Dialog Box

3. Click the BCUs you wish to reset in the Choose BCUs to Reset box. To
select all the BCUs, click Select All. To clear the current selections,
click Select None.
4. Click the desired level of reset in the Choose BCU Reset Level field.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 663
Resetting a Device

5. If you select Clear Code, Database, RAM and Reset, click the arrow to
the right of the Code Version field to select the version of code you
wish to download into the BCUs.
6. Click Reset to reset the selected BCUs. The Reset/Restore dialog box
closes, and you return to the previous screen.

Hardware Method for Resetting BCU

All of the “Clear. . . Reset” procedures can also be done at the BCU as
described in the following subsections.

Reset
To reset, cycle power to the BCU by unplugging and re-plugging the
24 Vac power connector at the top of the termination board.

Clear BCU RAM and Reset

The BCU normally preserves the content of RAM through power failure.
RAM contains the current status of all BCU object trend data, events, and
alarms. In most cases, this is desirable. However, there are circumstances
in which you may need to clear RAM. This is normally done from the PC
Workstation, as described in this guide. RAM can also be cleared at the
BCU as follows:
1. Turn off power to the BCU.
2. Set all DIP switches to on.
3. Turn on power.
4. The LED display should show 8, then 7, and then E with the decimal
point flashing.

CAUTION
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the BCU code and database may be
cleared as well as its RAM.

5. As soon as the LED display shows E with the decimal point flashing,
turn off power.
6. Set the DIP switch to its proper position.
7. Turn on power. The LED display should show the following sequence:
8, 7, 6, 4, 3, 2, H, –, “dancing dash”

664 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Clear Database, RAM, and Reset

Clear Database, RAM, and Reset

Database contains the user programmed data, which consists of all BCU
objects, such as areas, VAVs, I/O, UCMs, trends, CPL, etc.
In most cases, you will perform this operation from the PC Workstation,
as described in this guide. However, this can also be done at the BCU as
follows:
1. Change the DIP switch S1 position 8 to Off.
2. The LED display will show the following sequence:
J, 8, 7, 6, 4, 3, 2, H, –, –P
3. Change DIP switch S1 position 8 back to on.
4. The LED display will show the following sequence:
J, 8, 7, 6, 4, 3, 2, H, –, –P, Pd, “dancing dash”
When the BCU has code and detects a change in DIP switches at S1, the
BCU clears the current database and looks for a PC Workstation from
which to download a database that matches the new device ID (corre-
sponding to the settings at DIP switch S1).

Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset

Code consists of the BCU image software, which is similar to the operat-
ing system in a PC.
In most cases, you will force a BCU to accept new code from the PC Work-
station, as described in this chapter. However, this can also be done at the
BCU as follows:

Note:
You must have a PC Workstation connected, and that worksta-
tion must contain the appropriate version of BCU code. If the
PC Workstation is not connected, the procedure will have no
effect on the BCU.

1. Turn off power to the BCU.

2. Set all DIP switches to on.
3. Turn on power. The LED should display the following sequence:
8, 7, E (with decimal point flashing for about 10 seconds), 5, 4, 3, 2, –,
EC, Cd, –H, “dancing dash”

4. Turn off power and set the DIP switch to its proper position.
5. Turn on power and observe the following sequence: 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1,
-P,Pd, “dancing dash.”

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 665
Resetting a Device

Clear Comm5 database

In a BMTX BCU (or a high-capacity BMTW BCU), a Comm5 database
will be cleared if a BACnet database site name is loaded that does not
match the Comm5 database site name. To force the BCU to clear its
Comm5 database, perform the following actions:
1. Create dummy site with a different name than the existing Comm5
database in the BCU.
2. If the BCU is connected, you can clear the BACnet database from the
BCU by using the Tools menu and BCU Reset/Restore. Or you can
clear the database by using the DIP switches.
3. Immediately disconnect (either unplug Ethernet or use the Discon-
nect icon) so BACnet database does not automatically reload.
4. Select dummy site.
5. Reconnect to the BCU.
6. Download the dummy site to the BCU.
7. Once the BCU begins normal operation, you can clear the BACnet
database again from the BCU (using either the Tools menu and BCU
Reset/Restore, or the DIP switches).
8. Disconnect the BCU from the PC Workstation so the dummy data-
base is not automatically sent again.
9. Select the real site.
10. Establish connection again to the BCU to download the real BACnet
database.
11. The Comm5 database will be cleared and will need to be recon-
structed.
If the BACnet database already has assigned Neuron IDs, from the
main menu select Setup, and then Site Configuration. Choose the
Device tab and click the Assign Neuron ID button. Install the Comm5
link as described in “Comm5 Links” on page 93.

666 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Clear Comm5 database

Table 30. Reset level descriptions for the BMTX BCU

BCU reset/restore command Reasons to reset Notes

Reset (same as power cycle) • Initialize modem • Temporary loss of communication with
• Resets the processor on the selected • Initialize communication links the BCU
BCU
Clear RAM and reset • Update members in VAS (not applicable Same as reset plus:
• Clears the RAM from the BCU and resets for Comm5 VAS) • Loss of operator overrides. Values
the BCU processor return to Tracer Summit defaults
• If the BCU has a database intact, it auto- • Loss of pending alarms
matically reconstructs the RAM as • No loss of Comm5 database
needed and resumed processing
Clear database, RAM, and reset • Restore a backup database from the PC Same as Clear RAM and Reset plus:
• Clears both the database and RAM from workstation to the BCU. • Takes longer to regain communication
the selected BCU and resets the BCU • Replace a database in the BCU. with the BCU and UCMs than a clear
processor. RAM or reset does.
Note: To prevent download of database • If database is restoring from a backup of
from secondary workstations, discon- the site, current trend and calculation
nect them from LAN before proceeding. information is lost and reverts to infor-
• Clear the BCU database using the BCU mation stored in backup.
reset/restore command or using DIP
switch method.
• Then disconnect BCU from the LAN
either by removing the LAN cable or
using the Disconnect button on the Tool-
bar.
• Restore the new database to the PC
workstation.
• Reconnect the BCU.
• Database will be automatically sent to
the BCU.
Clear code, database, RAM, and reset • Required when upgrading Tracer Sum- Same as Clear Database, RAM, and Reset
• Clears all memory—code (image), data- mit BCU image plus:
base, and RAM—from the BCU and • Code will load to a BCU that does not
resets the BCU processor. have an address.
• If the PC workstation is online, it auto- • If a database with a different address or
matically downloads the code. site name is loaded to the BCU, the BCU
• Once the code is successfully down- Comm5 database will be cleared.
loaded, the PC workstation automati-
cally downloads a new database.
Clear Comm5 database • Used for troubleshooting problem links • Cannot be done from a PC Workstation
• Happens automatically when site name BCU Reset/Restore menu.
in BCU changes or BCU address
changes.
• If the PC workstation is online, it auto-
matically downloads the code.
• Once the code is successfully down-
loaded, the PC workstation automati-
cally downloads a new database.
Note: For detailed instructions for the DIP switch method, refer to “Hardware Method for Resetting BCU” on page 664.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 667
Resetting a Device

Restoring a Tracer 100 Panel

Use the following procedure to restore a Tracer 100 site. There are sev-
eral things you should remember before performing this procedure:
• The procedure only applies to Tracer 100 sites.
• You must be logged on with a username that has level 1 or level 2
security access.
• You must have created a .SAV file. You can create a .SAV file using
other Trane products such as Tracer Access, BMN, or PCL Edit. You
can also use Tracer Summit’s Task Manager (see “Specifying Where
to Save a Backup File” on page 229) or the Backup a Remote applica-
tion (see “Creating .SAV files for Tracer 100 Panels” on page 412).
• You can only restore .SAV files into panels for which they were
intended. In other words, you cannot restore a .SAV file from a Tracer
100i into a Tracer 100L, nor can you restore a .SAV file from Tracer
100 panel version 14.x, for example, into a Tracer 100 panel version
15.x.
• After you restore a Tracer 100 panel, the building control for the
panel is turned off. After the restore, you must turn it back on
through terminal emulation.
To restore a Tracer 100 panel:
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. A submenu appears.
2. Select Remote. The Restore a Remote dialog box appears (see
Figure 578).

Figure 578. Restore a Remote Dialog Box

When you restore a Tracer 100 site with several panels, the Remote
Unit to Restore list displays all of the site panels. The list is sorted by
ascending unit numbers, with unit 1 as the Tracer 100 COP.
3. Click the Browse button to find the .SAV file in the workstation data-
base.
4. From the Remote Unit to Restore list, select the panel that you want
to restore.
5. Click OK.
• If you are not currently connected to the site, Tracer Summit
automatically connects to the panel. The Restore in Progress dia-
log box appears. (The restore process can last as long as 15 min-
utes.)

668 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Restoring a Tracer 100 Panel

• If Tracer Summit automatically connects and restores the panel,

at the end of the process a dialog box appears. This dialog box
asks you whether you want to start a terminal emulation session
with the panel you just restored. Click OK.
6. Turn the building control back on.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 669
Resetting a Device

670 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

A Alarm
An audible or visual signal from a Building Management System that
warns of an abnormal and critical operating condition.

Analog
Data represented as a variable value, such as temperature control or flow.

Analog input (AIP)

A varying voltage, current, or resistive signal that can be converted to
engineering units of temperature, pressure, humidity, wattage, etc.

Analog output (AOP)

An analog output is a varying voltage or current signal used to change the
position of an external device such as an electric valve.

Application
A specific program or task to which a computer solution can be applied.

Application program
A computer program designed to meet specific user needs, such as a pro-
gram that controls or monitors a process. Examples: Time of Day Sched-
uling, Chiller Plant Control.

Array
A list of elements. In the case of Chiller Plant Control, a list of identical
properties used for each chiller identified as a member of the chiller
plant.

Auto refresh
Ability to view events in the Event Log viewer without manual interven-
tion. Any events normally seen by pushing the manual refresh button in
Tracer Summit version 12 can be seen automatically if auto refreshing is
enabled.

Auto Save
Process of saving the event log using the workstation Task Manager.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 671
Glossary

B Backup copy
One or more files that are copied onto a storage medium for safekeeping
in case the original gets damaged or lost.

BACnet
A standard communication protocol developed by the American Society of
Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers. It defines how
information will be packaged for transportation between building auto-
mation system (BAS) vendors.

BCU-ELO
Building Control Unit-Event Log Object.

BCU
Building control unit.

BCU Operator Display Object List

List of objects/properties existing at a single site that have been selected
for view at a BCU operator display. The Operator Display Setup editor is
used to define this list.

BCU Operator Display Override List

List of objects/properties existing at a single site that have been selected
to be allowed to be overridden at a BCU operator display. The Operator
Display Setup editor is used to define this list.

BCU sizing tool

A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet available in the TraneNet information sys-
tem that allows the BAS engineer to determine the number of building
control units (BCUs) that are required at a site.

Billing period
The period of time between consecutive readings of the utility company
meters for billing purposes.

Binary
• A number system with only two digits, 0 and 1, in which each symbol
represents a decimal power of two; or
• Any system that has only two possible states or levels, such as a
switch that is either on or off. (On is represented as 1 and off is repre-
sented as 0.); or
• The presence of voltage (equivalent to 1) or absence of voltage (equiv-
alent of 0) in a computer circuit.

Binary input (BIP)

An ON/OFF input to the processor to indicate status. Some typical exam-
ples are flow switches, limit switches, or other contacts.

672 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

Binary output (BOP)

An ON/OFF control output from the processor.

Building control unit (BCU)

An intelligent field panel that communicates with multiple Trane unit
control modules (UCMs).

Building automation system (BAS) or

Building management system (BMS)
A combination of controllers and other software products that communi-
cate with and control various mechanical systems to enable building
management. These include the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning
systems as well as lighting systems access control, and miscellaneous
other devices within a building.

Building Management Network (BMN)

A DOS-based product for managing multiple Tracer and Tracker sites.

C Calculated analog
A term synonymous with point type 11. Calculated analogs are logical or
software analog points that are similar to analog output and analog
inputs, except they are not associated with hardware. Calculated analogs
can be used in most Tracer 100 programs as analog inputs or outputs.
Calculated analogs are most frequently used as setpoints for direct digital
control (DDC) loops, and various types of ICS equipment such as SCP,
AHU, and TCM, etc. These calculated analog setpoints can be set by the
operator or calculated using the process control language (PCL) program.

Calculated binary
A term synonymous with point type 08. Calculated binaries are logical or
software binary points that are similar to binary outputs, except they are
not associated with hardware. Calculated binaries can be controlled by
any Tracer Building Control program, just like binary outputs (point type
05). You can use the on/off status of calculated binaries in other Tracer
Summit programs in place of binary inputs or binary outputs.

Capacity
The maximum output of the equipment. For example, “The chiller has a
capacity of 800 tons.”

CenTraVac
Trane’s registered name for the line of hermetic centrifugal refrigeration
machines that provide chilled water for comfort or industrial water cool-
ing installations. The CenTraVac chiller name has also been applied to
include certain models of Trane’s helical rotary chiller.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 673
Glossary

Chiller plant control

Tracer Summit application that allows the operator to optimally coordi-
nate multiple chillers and their related equipment to supply cold water to
the system.

Chiller sequencing
An integral part of the chiller plant control that sequences and automati-
cally rotates up to six chillers and their associated pumps to optimize
individual chiller runtime and system performance.

Code
A software program, running in the BCU, equivalent to the operating sys-
tem of a personal computer. It controls the physical operation of the BCU. It
is different from the CPL code that a technician would write.

Communication link
A set of wires connected from one device to another that is used to trans-
mit information between the devices. This link is typically a twisted pair
of wires for Trane building management systems.

Configuration
The functional arrangement of a system. Usually set by computer inter-
face or DIP switch settings.

Constant volume system

Air-distribution system that keeps the volume of air supplied to a system
constant to maintain acceptable conditions.

Context object
A UCM or an application object defined when a user launches a graphic
from the navigation tree, a graphic target, or from the UCM or applica-
tion editor.

COP Tracer
Communications Processor. A term applied to the lead Tracer 100 Series
panel in a unit-to-unit configuration. The COP panel uses address 1.
Communicating with unit-to-unit Tracer 100 panels can only occur as a
pass-through of the COP Tracer. The communications baud rate is limited
to 1200 baud.

Custom Programming Language (CPL)

Language used in Tracer Summit to write routines to accommodate con-
trol strategies. Routines are used to sequence equipment, calculate set-
points and values, and perform shutdown sequences.

Custom graphic
• A hard-coded graphic created by a user in Tracer Summit; or

674 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

• A standard graphic (template) that has been modified; or

• A site graphic available only to a specific site.

Custom screen
An operator display screen created by an installer/programmer. It always
has a Home button and might include a monochrome bitmap, data items,
and custom navigation buttons.

D DAC
Discharge Air Controller profile.

Database
A computer file that contains all site-specific information used by a BCU to
control site operation. This file is stored in the PC Workstation and in indi-
vidual BCUs on the network. In the PC Workstation, the file is named sum-
mit.mdb and is located in C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\Database
directory.

Demand limiting
A function that reduces electrical demand by measuring incoming electri-
cal power and either turning off specified loads or adjusting temperature
setpoints to keep energy usage below a prescribed level during the
demand interval.

Device
Computer hardware that performs some specific function. Input devices
such as a keyboard are used to get information into the CPU. Output
devices, such as a printer, are used to take information out of a computer
in some usable form. Input/output devices are able to perform both input
and output of information.

Diagnostic
A program that checks the operation of a device board or other component
for malfunctions and errors and reports its findings.

Diagnostic report
A form of standard live report for displaying diagnostics from the active
UCM status data location within Tracer 100 and Tracker panels. For
BCU sites, the upload is from UCMs and analog input and binary input
objects.

DIP switches
Configuration switches of various components of the building manage-
ment system. Placing each individual DIP switch either on or off config-
ures the address and the function of the miscellaneous control
components of the building management system.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 675
Glossary

Direct digital control (DDC)

A higher level of programming used by building management systems to
control variable outputs, such as valves or actuators. In industry, DDC
means direct control by a microprocessor controller, with no intermediate
devices.

Discovery
The process of finding all online controllers on a Comm5 link and display-
ing their Neuron IDs and Location Labels.

Display
In this document, the term display is used to refer to the touchscreen dis-
play device.

E Economizer control
The opening or closing of various HVAC dampers to cool a building with
outside air, usually when the outside air is 40ºF to 65ºF.

EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. An electronic chip
that can store information such as control set points, be reprogrammed in
the field, and maintain its memory during a power loss.

EIA-232
Interface standard used for communications between peripheral devices
and energy management systems.

E-mail profile
A group of settings that define how the mail server is set up for a particu-
lar user. For example, a profile may include access to a mailbox on
Microsoft Exchange Server and specify that the Outlook Address Book
appears in the Address Book dialog box.

E-mail recipient
In message forwarding, just an e-mail address. A forwarded alarm mes-
sage can be retrieved by a person using a client-side e-mail program such
as Microsoft Outlook or an e-mail-supported pager service provider, or
both.

Ethernet
Networking standards that transmit data at 10 Mbps using a specified
protocol. Ethernet is a popular LAN technology.

Event log
A listing of events such as alarms and control actions that can be viewed
by the building management system operator.

676 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

Event
Generated by an alarm, a diagnostic, a user operation such as controlling
a point or object, logging on/off, or acknowledging alarms. Typically, an
event turns into an alarm if it has been set up to beep and/or require
acknowledgement.From the point of view of the user, several types of
inputs to the control system generate an event.

Extranet
Proprietary Internet site for Trane personnel to access when not able to
get to TraneNet.

F Filtering
Filtering is used to display only the rows of events that meet user-speci-
fied criteria. In other words, rows that do not match the criteria are elim-
inated from the displayed list.

G Global change
A mechanism through which a user can change the setup of many objects
of the same type in one action, rather than having to open every object to
make the change.

Global graphic
A graphic that can be used to display information for any site. A graphic
object is created in the system site and is available for use by all sites con-
nected to the PC Workstation.

Global objects
Includes the workstation modem, global graphic, keyboard macros, group
security, group configuration, and message forwarding.

Graphic
A compilation of Summit-supplied information and images that form a
display of information on the PC. A graphic requires a graphic object in
the database, an HTML file, and one or more image files to be in a specific
file structure under the \Graphics subdirectory in Tracer Summit.
Graphics can be displayed from the navigation tree, from a UCM editor,
from a graphic target field, or from the main menu.

Group
• An organization of one or more devices under a single name; or
• A collection of sites or groups in the Tracer Summit database that
exist as an object in the system. The user can perform an action on a
group, which in turn will propagate that action to every site or group
of sites that belongs to the group

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 677
Glossary

H Hard-coded graphic
A graphic that contains no template fields. All the information that is
needed to display the data in the fields on the graphic is stored in the
HTML file for the graphic. This graphic does not require a context to dis-
play its information in the graphic fields. It can appear on the navigation
tree without having to be assigned by the navigation tree editor.

HTML file
A file that is written in Hypertext Markup Language, a standard coding
language used to create HyperText documents for use on the World Wide
Web or an intranet network. A file of this type is required for a graphic
object to be displayed. The file must be in the \Graphics directory under
the standard, custom, or site name subdirectories. The Tracer Summit
Graphics Editor creates the file along with the graphic object.
Information maintained in the file includes all graphic fields (types, prop-
erties, positions, size, and order of display) and image references (names,
type, position, size, and order of display). The file also keeps the necessary
information from the graphic object to take the object from one PC Work-
station to another. This file cannot be used in a Web Browser to display
Tracer Summit information.

HVAC
Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning. Building mechanical system
equipment.

I Image
File used by a graphic to display a photo or picture.

Internet service provider (ISP)

Services such as Microsoft Network, AOL, Compuserve, etc.

L LAN
Local Area Network

LCD
Liquid crystal display. The display screen that is an integral part of the
operator display.

Level 0
Security level at which the user can view the grouping structure from the
Group Setup dialog box but cannot access grouping functionality in Glo-
bal Changes, Task Manager, or Message Forwarding. User cannot access
Group Security.

Level 1
Security level at which the user can view the grouping structure from the
Group Setup dialog box but cannot edit group setup. User can access

678 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

grouping functionality in Global Changes, Task Manager and Message

Forwarding. User cannot access Group Security.

Level 2
Users have full group access. They can access and edit group security and
group setup. They can access grouping functionality in Global Changes,
Task Manager, and Message Forwarding.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 679
Glossary

M Macro
A key that is set up by the user to execute often-used keystroke sequences
on the PC.

MAPI
Messaging Application Programming Interface. A messaging architecture
and a client interface component for applications such as electronic mail,
scheduling, calendaring, and document management. As a messaging
architecture, MAPI provides a consistent interface for multiple applica-
tion programs to interact with multiple messaging systems across a vari-
ety of hardware platforms.
Source: The Free On-line Dictionary of Computing, © 1993-2001 Denis
Howe

N Navigation scheme
The way in which screens and graphics are linked together. It defines
what will happen next when the user touches a target on the BCU opera-
tor display.

Navigation tree
The panel on the left-hand side of the main Tracer Summit window that
displays all sites, buildings, areas, and HVAC equipment set up for the
system.

Night economize
Setting that uses cool, dry outside air during unoccupied periods to pre-
cool a building, thus minimizing the use of mechanical cooling.

Night heat/cool
Setting that provides mechanical heating/cooling during unoccupied peri-
ods to bring space temperature back to within a predefined range.

O Object
An element recognized by the Tracer Summit database. Objects may be
input and output points, UCMs or applications.

Object instance
At a site there may be many units of a particular object type installed:
Centrifugal Chillers, VAV II/IIIs, and Voyagers, etc. An object instance
refers to a unit installed on the link Chiller 1 or Voyager 12. Each object
instance will have a unique address used to identify it to the building
automation system.

Offline
The operational state of a device when not communicating on the net-
work.

680 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

Online
The operational state of a device when communicating on the network or
with a control device.

Operator display
A liquid crystal display (LCD) mounted on a modular BCU for basic oper-
ator functions including viewing a local BCU event log. The operator dis-
play consists of an LCD with a printed circuit to control the display.
Additional components include a time clock and external memory. The
operator display is equipped with a touch screen as a user input device.

Operator display object list

The list of objects/properties existing at a single site that have been
selected for viewing an operator display. The Operator Display editor is
used to define this list.

Optimal start
The process of efficiently starting HVAC equipment so that the occupied
setpoints will be achieved at the appropriate time. The Tracer Summit
system, for instance, may be programmed for occupied temperature at
6:00 a.m., but with optimal start, may start at 5:15 a.m. to enable temper-
ature control to be achieved by 6:00 a.m.

P Panel
A term generally used for Tracer 100 Series or Trackers units that are
monitored from a central location.

PC (Personal Computer) Workstation

The primary operator interface for the Tracer Summit system. The work-
station and the Tracer Summit software serve as a communication link
between the operator and the BCUs and other equipment. The worksta-
tion provides a graphical interface to system information.

Priority control
The ability to define custom control sequences that respond to alarm con-
ditions. Priority control sequences receive the highest priority; they over-
ride all other control sequences.

Programmable control module (PCM)

A Trane-based controller (DDC) that is fully programmable. It controls
and monitors a wide range of HVAC and other applications, including air-
handling equipment, pumps, cooling towers, boilers, and water chilling
units.

Property
One element of an object’s characteristic information. This information
element can be viewed, referenced, and applied throughout the Tracer
Summit system.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 681
Glossary

R RAM
A type of computer memory located on the BCU logic board that is used to
store temporary data such as operator overrides, UCM scan data, and CPL
saved values.

Referencer
An edit control in Tracer Summit editors that allows the value of one
property to be set equal to the value of another property.

Rover Comm5 service tool

Trane’s service tool for Comm5 unit controllers. The Rover software is
used to set up and troubleshoot controllers on Comm5 links. Rover is not
designed for daily management of building automation systems. With
Rover Version 5.0 and Tracer Summit Version 15.0, you can use Rover
within Tracer Summit to configure Comm5 controllers locally and
remotely.

Rover device plug-in

A software module that Rover uses to interact with a device, such as a
Tracer ZN510 zone controller. Each type of controller requires its own
software plug-in for Rover. You can download new and revised plug-ins
from TraneNet.

RS-232
(see EIA-232)

Runtime view
The presentation of a graphic in Tracer Summit with live, updated data.

S Scan
A connection to designated Tracer 100 panels that retrieves status infor-
mation, and downloads changes to schedules, holidays, and trends, etc.
Like BMN, Tracer Summit can scan Tracer 100 panels as well as BCU
sites.

SCC
Space Comfort Controller profile.

Structured Query Language (SQL)

Pronounced either see-kwell or as separate letters. SQL is a standardized
query language for requesting information from a database. SQL sup-
ports distributed databases (databases that are spread out over several
computer systems). This enables several users on a network to access the
same database simultaneously.

682 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

Setpoint
Typically a zone sensor or thermostat (STAT) heat/cool value to be main-
tained by the system.

Shared event log

An event log database, in SQL format, stored in a SQL server and
accessed by multiple Tracer Summit workstations.

Site
A logical grouping of equipment serving a single facility. The customer
defines the site as a logical grouping.

Site graphic
A graphic that is available only to a specific site (a custom site graphic).

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol defined in STD 10, RFC 821,
used to transfer electronic mail between computers, usually over Ether-
net. It is a server to server protocol, so other protocols are used to access
the messages. The SMTP dialog usually happens in the background
under the control of the message transport system, e.g. sendmail but it is
possible to interact with an SMTP server using telnet to connect to the
normal SMTP port, 25.
Source: The Free On-line Dictionary of Computing, © 1993-2001 Denis
Howe

Sorting
To arrange the information alphanumerically in a given column of a
table.

Standard screen
The menu-driven screens that allow the user to navigate within the BCU
operator display. Depending on the context, a standard screen will have
any combination of static text, live text, and/or icons.

Static text
Text that does not come from the Tracer Summit database. The only way
to change static text is by using the display setup editor. The title for a
custom graphic screen is an example of static text.

Status
An indication of a condition which may or may not be normal. An alarm
may be a response to an abnormal status, and may be recorded in an
event log.

Syntax
A set of rules for a programming language.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 683
Glossary

System security
A method of maintaining or restricting access to the building manage-
ment system. Typically, a four-digit code enables access to override or con-
trol the system.

T Target field
A graphic field that launches another graphic from within Tracer Summit
(either a Target field, a Target image, or a Target button) or a graphic
field that links to a source outside of Tracer Summit (a Target External
button).

Target link
A graphic field (a target field, target image, or target button) that is
linked to another graphic screen. When the user touches this target link,
the screen to which the target is linked displays.

Task
In the Task Manager application, an operation or series of operations that
are performed by a workstation. Examples of tasks include automatically
initiating communications to a site or performing a backup of a site data-
base.

Template graphic
A graphic that contains at least one field for which the information
required to display Tracer Summit data depends on the object for which
the graphic is being displayed. All standard graphics are template
graphics.

Terminal emulation session

A personal computer with a central processing unit disabled so that the
keyboard and the display screen can be used to communicate with and
program another device either directly or through a modem connection.

Time of day scheduling (TOD)

The process of assigning the times during the day for defined actions to
occur for various components of the building management system. These
include typical on or off commands.

Timed override (TOV)

An operator function to override equipment operation from unoccupied
control to occupied control.

Touch
The user/operator touches a target on the BCU Operator Display. This is
the touch screen equivalent to a keyboard or mouse input at the worksta-
tion.

684 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

Touch screen
A transparent overlay on an LCD or computer screen that is sensitive to
touch by a finger or stylus.

Tracer Graphical Programming (TGP) language

The language that technicians will use to write programs to control the
Tracer MP580/581 programmable controller.

Tracer MP580/581 Controller

A multi-purpose programmable controller that offers direct digital control
and monitoring of applications through the use of generic inputs and out-
puts. Often used on air-handlers, pumps, cooling towers, boilers, water
chilling units, and non-HVAC applications.

Tracer 100 series panel

The Tracer product line of building management systems. Tracers pro-
vide building automation and energy management by monitoring and
controlling HVAC equipment, providing the user with management infor-
mation, and networking with Tracer systems. Panels in this series
include the Tracer 100, Tracer 100i, and Tracer chiller plant manager.

Tracer remote
A term generally used for Tracer 100 Series panels (also referred to sim-
ply as panel, remote, remote unit, and remote panel, etc.) that are moni-
tored from a central location.

Tracer Summit
Trane’s premier building management system that allows facility manag-
ers to operate a building in an optimized and efficient manner. Tracer
Summit gives the facility operator control of temperature, humidity,
scheduling, lighting, energy, and much more. All of these building control
capabilities can be programmed and managed as a single system through
Tracer Summit.

Tracer VV550 VAV Controller

The Tracer VV550 (factory-installed) and Tracer 551 (field-installed) con-
trollers provide digital control for variable air volume (VAV) boxes and
communicate with a Tracer Summit BAS by using Comm5, Trane’s
implementation of LonTalk® communications protocol.

Tracker
The Tracker building automation system is Trane’s building management
system for small, light commercial buildings. It consists of an operator
display on the Tracker controller and a menu-driven interface program in
the embedded software.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 685
Glossary

Trane Data Link (TDL)

A file type used in place of the UDL (Universal Data Link) file type so the
user is limited to setting up only the information necessary to run Tracer
Summit.

TraneNet
Proprietary internal intranet site for Trane offices.

Trend log
Retains a historical record of values for specified points.

U Unit control module (UCM)

A factory-mounted microelectronic circuit board that is typically used for
control of HVAC equipment and linking to an integrated comfort system.

Unit control panel (UCP)

The factory mounted, microprocessor-based unit controller of the Trane
CenTraVac chiller for unit process control, load control and equipment
safety protection.

Unit-to-unit
The Tracer 100 Series system that has models capable of being configured
with a COP Tracer with up to seven slave Tracers connected to it over an
18 AWG twisted, shielded-pair wire LAN. The Tracer Summit system
communicates to the slave Tracer 100 through the modem on the COP
Tracer.

Universal Data Link (UDL)

A Microsoft database management tool for configuring database connec-
tions and security.

Universal programmable control module (UPCM)

Programmable ICS controller that provides direct digital control and
monitoring for a wide range of HVAC and other applications.

W Wizard
An application utility that helps you step through a particular task
related to the application. For example, the Site Connection Wizard in
Tracer Summit leads you through the steps of connecting to various sites
using different communication media.

Workstation
Refers to a personal computer, either a laptop or a desktop, that is loaded
with the Tracer Summit software and the Setup editor software.

686 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Glossary

V Variable air volume (VAV)

Air distribution system that varies the volume of air supplied to a system
to maintain acceptable space comfort conditions.

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 687
Glossary

Z Zone
The smallest area of control in an HVAC system. It is characterized by
having a single thermostat or zone temperature sensor. A room served by
a single VAV box is an example of a zone. Several rooms served by the
same VAV box also constitute a zone.

Zone control system

System that provides individual temperature control to each area in a
building using the same single zone heating/cooling unit.

688 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Index

Symbols Enabling and disabling for binary

input, 258
Advanced override Forwarding alarms from groups of
Overriding an Area, 316 sites, 245
* in password field, 139 Message forwarding and call
. . . button, 21 center, 237
Archiving event log, Task manager, Message forwarding and call
228 center, and, 231, 245
/// or // in CPL comment lines, 374 Overriding at workstation, 571
??? value, 13, 20, 22, 542 Printing, 150
Routing for UCM, 197
Routing of a binary input, 258
A Routing of an analog input, 253
Setting options, 569
Accessing, 174 Showing and hiding connection
Accessing alarm popups from event dialog, 571
log, 568 Telephone notification, 163
Accessing the Simplified Override Trend snapshots, 458
Dialog Box, 174 Ambient temperature lockout,
Accessing the trend viewer through a selecting, 293
graphic, 432 Analog in 5 color field, setup
Acknowledgment of alarms information for, 478
Requiring operators to provide, 82 Analog input
Advanced override, 314 Alarm scenarios, 252
Overriding a UCM, 195–197 Analog input editor, 251, 282
Overriding an area, 314–317 Analog, definition, 671
Overriding the present value, 273, Assigning expanded message, 508
314, 316 Creating, 250, 280
Advanced overrides Defining referencer for, 250
Changing for analog output Definition, 250, 671
Present value, 273 Expanded message for, 253
Changing for binary values, 273 Naming, 250
Advanced settings, changing, 575 Present value of, 252
Advanced Systems Override, 187 Routing of alarm, 253
Advanced systems override, 187 Analog output
Air handler Analog output editor, 260
Selecting for a Comm3/Comm4 Analog, definition, 671
VAS, 336 Calculated, 212
Selecting for a Comm5 VAS, 322 Class, entering, 263
Air temperature sensors, setting, 308 Creating, 259
Airflow drive max, 339 Defining referencer for, 259
Airflow valve Definition, 259, 671
Balancing, 330 Global references, setting up, 268
Alarm buttons on toolbar, configuring, Globally change, 211
565 Modifying the present value, 209
Alarm popups, accessing from event Naming, 259
log, 568 Annual report, setting up, 557
Alarm popups, configuring, 566 Application
Alarms and events Application program, definition,
Alarm, definition, 671 671
Analog input, setting up, 252 Assigning access to, 140, 141
Binary input, setting up, 257 Definition, 671
Enabling and disabling for analog Denying access to, 140
input, 252

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 689
Index

Non-Trane device, See Non- AVI movie, 502 clear code, database, RAM, and
Trane device Autoselecting size, 474 reset procedure, 665
Setting up for Tracer Summit, 8 Inserting, 464 clear Comm5 database, 666
Unavailability of offline testing Setup information for, 483 clear database, RAM, and reset
for, 13 procedure, 665
View only access to application, clear RAM and reset procedure,
140, 141 B 664
View/edit access to application, Connection, programming
140, 141 Back button, 485 without, See Offline
Viewing properties of, 27 Background programming
Area Changing for a graphic, 468 Creating for a site, 57
Adding members, 306 Locating image for, 470 Definition, 673
Advanced overrides Backing up, 643 Deleting from a site, 65
Overriding present value, Backing up function Deleting modem from, 64
314 and groups of sites, 219 Deleting when contains objects,
Overriding the present value, Backup function, 643 65, 68, 72
316 Backup copy, definition, 672 Device ID, assigning, 58
Creating, 305 Backup during site setup, 7 Device ID, default, 58
Definition, 301 Restoring from a backup, 643 Editing in a site, 61
Making a timed override Task manager, and Modem, See BCU modem
request, 314 Backing up BCU sites, 218 Operator display, and, 581
Security access to, 312 Tracer 100 backups, 219 Pagers and, See Pager
See also Area control See also Task manager Required for site creation, 57
Area control BACnet Resetting, See Reset function
Air temperature sensors, 308 BACnet ID, 638 Role in BACnet setup, 633
Area control editor, 304 Communications flow, 633 Role in online programming, 11
Cancel timed override (TOV) Control priorities, 630 Selecting for CPL program, 388
request, 316 Creating input/output object for, Version, selecting, 78
Capabilities, 301 638 Viewing memory for trend
Definition, 301 Definition, 625, 672 sampling, 460
Enabling and disabling night Electronic file, 641 BCU I/O Module Object
economizing, 311 Input/output objects for, 632, Analog inputs, setting up, 284
Enabling and disabling timed 638 Binary inputs, setting up, 285
override, 310 Input/output points, 638 Calculating the pulse multiplier,
Membership rules, 307 Protocol, uses in Tracer Summit, 284
Operating modes, standard 625 Creating, 280, 583
behavior, 302 Providing information to other Pulse metered inputs, setting
Security access to an area, 313 systems, 632 up, 284
Start timed override (TOV) Running report of objects, 639 BCU modem
request, 316 Troubleshooting, 578 Configuring, 162
Area node, 399 Using for non-Trane devices, Creating new, 161
Array 625 Editor, accessing, 160
Definition, 671 BACnet device(s) Phone book, managing, 163
Using in CPL text file, 382 Creating in a site, 70 Redialing, 161
Audit Trail databases Default device ID, 70 Security access to, 166
Harvesting trend objects, 457 Deleting from a site, 72 Setting up, 161
Audit trail databases Editing in a site, 71 BCU object
Setting up historical trend Name, dependent on device ID, Viewing and modifying, 207
objects, 457 70 BCU objects
Auto log off BACnet protocols Present value, modifying, 207
Minutes for, 140 See BACnet device(s) Uploading and downloading,
Security option, 140 BACnet/IP 207
AutoCAD, 502, 620 Site connection for, 37, 38 BDB files, 219, 412, 650
Autocommissioning VAVs in VAS Balancing, system, 330 Task manager site backups, 218
Comm5, 332 BAS (building automation system), Beep
Automatic connection of sites, from definition, 673 Causing when event message
navigation tree, 580 Base chiller, 296 received, 82
Automatic remote connection BBMD IP address, 39 Preventing at workstation, 571
security option, 140 BCU Billing period
Autoselecting image size, 474 Adding modem for, 60 Defining, 79
Average calculation, 524 Definition, 672

690 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Index

Scheduling calculations around, C Normal sequence, 296

531 Peak sequence, 296
Used as a sampling interval, 456 Calculated analog and binary Security access to, 298
Binary animation field, setup objects, 212 Sequence types, 296
information for, 481 Accessing the editor, 213 Sequencing, definition, 674
Binary input Terminal emulation, and, 212 Startup settings, 293
Alarm scenarios, 257 Uploading and downloading, Subtract settings, 294
Alarm state, cause of, 257 207, 212 Swing sequence, 296
Assigning expanded message, Calculation System setup, 292
508 Adding to a report, 550 See also Chiller
Binary input editor, 256 Average, 524 Chiller plant editor, 289
Binary, definition, 672 Billing periods, scheduling Accessing, 290, 346
BMTX, 277 around, 531 Code
Class, entering, 258 Cool Flow Rate, 524 Writing in CPL, 369
Creating, 255 Defining billing period for, 79 Column heading, entering for
Defining referencer for, 255 Editor, accessing, 531 reports, 553
Definition, 255, 672 Enabling, 536 Comment, adding, 374
Expanded message for, 258 Heat Flow Rate, 526 Common space
In CPL routine, 270 Maximum, 527 VAVs, 324
Naming, 255 Meter Totalization, 527 Communication link
Routing of alarm, 258 Minimum, 527 Changing once created, 63
Binary output Object, See Calculation object Definition, 674
Binary output editor, 266 Peak for X Minute Interval, 528 In non-Trane setup, 632
Binary, definition, 672 Pulse meter input, 278 Communications port
Calculated, 212 Total Cooling Degree Days, 529 PC workstation modem, 158
Class, entering, 267 Total Heating Degree Days, 530 Tracer 100 or Tracker panels, 410
Creating, 265 Total Run Hours/Starts, 531 Compile function, 386
Defining referencer for, 265 Types, list of, 524 Compile report, 386
Definition, 265, 673 Using in live reports, 540 Failure, 387
Global references, setting up, Calculation object Viewing errors in source files,
268 Clearing data from, 537 387
Globally change, 211 Creating, 533 Configuration, definition, 674
Modifying the present value, Deleting, 538 Configuring alarm popups, 566
209 Security access to, 538 Configuring category alarm buttons
Naming, 265 Setting up, 535 and popups, 565–567
Saving, 267 See also Calculation Configuring category alarm
Standard behavior in an area, Calling card, 164 buttonsAlarm buttons,
302 Capacity, definition, 673 configuring, 565
Binary text field, setup information Category alarms Configuring communication
for, 479 assigning, 83 settings, 77
Custom screen editor, and, 610 CCD, See Total Cooling Degree BCU sites, 155
Blank row Days Tracer 100 or Tracker panels, 124
Adding to a report, 552 CenTraVac, definition, 673 Tracer 100 or Tracker sites, 156
Purpose in a report, 548 Changeover voting, 342 Connecting to a site from the
BMP file format, 470, 502, 506 Changing for output objects navigation tree, 401
Custom screen editor, and, 613 Present value, 273 Connection
BMS (building management Chiller Non-Trane devices, types of
system), definition, 673 CenTraVac, definition, 673 connections for, 625
Body text Failure, 289 Connection status
Formatting for reports, 554 Setting up UCM for, 298 ARCNET status, 31
Report members displayed in, Units, 298 BACnet/IP, 31
552 See also Chiller plant Determining, 30
Boolean, 380, 381 Chiller plant EIA-232, 31
Border, editing for graphic fields, Adding members, 295 Ethernet, 31
483 Base sequence, 296 Not Connected status, 31
Break in CPL program, 392 Chiller object settings, 295, 297 Constant mode in referencers, 20
Building automation control Control capabilities, 289, 345 Constant volume system,
network, See BACnet Creating new, 291, 347 definition, 674
Creating new objects for, 291 Context for a graphic, 472
Definition, 674 Target fields, 487
Duplicate chiller types, 296 See also Template field

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 691
Index

Control application Need for same name as text file, Custom programming routines,
Assigning, 631 388 See Routines
Modifying, 631 Outputs, inhibiting, 392 Custom screen editor, 599
Control class, 631 Replacing existing, 389 About custom screen graphics,
In VAS Comm3/Comm4, 343 Running manually to debug, 600
Control mode in referencers, 20 392 Accessing the operator display
Control priorities Testing, 391 custom screen editor, 602
BACnet and, 630 CPL program, See CPL text file or Creating and importing
Defaults, selecting, 630 CPL object bitmaps, 620
Definition, 86, 272, 315, 630 CPL text file, 369 Creating custom screens, 603
Setting up, 86 Adding an object and property Custom screen template, 600,
Setting up for BACnet Devices, reference, 378 604
630 Adding an object reference, 376 Editing custom screens, 618
Conversion factor Adding comments, 374 Organizing custom screen
For a Cool Flow Rate Adding functions, 375 fields, 617
calculation, 525 Adding statements, 374 Restoring operator display
For a Heat Flow Rate Array, 382 custom screens, 649
calculation, 526 Assigning an object, 376 Using the custom screen editor
For a Peak X Minute Interval Assigning enumerations, 379 tools, 605
calculation, 528 Compiling into a CPL object, 386 Adding fields, 610
Cool Flow Rate calculation, 524 Creating, 371 Displaying the custom
COP panel, 128 Creating as a database object, screen palette, 608
Creating, 128 387 Using the custom screens
Definition, 128 Creating from existing file, 371 pop-up menu, 608
See also Tracer 100 or Tracker Creating from template, 371 See also Operator Display
sites Creating new from blank text Enabling custom screens,
Copy a site window, 374 595
BCU, 54 Example of array, 382 Operator display options,
Objects not copied Example of saved value, 385 594
Tracer 100 or Tracker sites, Example, after enumeration Custom screen editor palette, 605
122 assigned, 381 Custom site graphic node, 399
Objects not copied, BCU sites, Example, before enumeration Custom trend report
54 assigned, 380 Members, adding, 551
Tracer 100 or Tracker site, 122 Locating errors in, 386 See also Report
CorelDRAW, 502, 620 Naming objects and properties,
CPL, 369 376
Definition, 674 Naming restrictions, 373 D
Error codes, 394 Referencing an object and
How area control affects, 302 property indirectly, 378 Daily report, setting up, 555
Library of sample programs, Referencing an object indirectly, Database
369, 371 376 Characteristics of Tracer
Syntax, 373, 376 Saving, 373 Summit’s, 11
Syntax, definition, 683 Structure, 371 Importance of updating before
Templates, 371 Cross-hatched border on graphic programming offline, 14
Using CPL editor to reference field, 475, 476, 490 Setup using offline
objects and properties, 376 Custom global graphic node, 399 programming, 13
See also Programming Custom graphic Database Sync status field, 30
CPL editor Creating from blank graphic, Date
Closing, 370 504 Inserting into report, 552
Opening, 370 Definition, 501, 674 See also Time and date
CPL files Inserting main image, 505 Daylight savings, 88
Backing up, 643 Location, 501 Debugging, See CPL program,
Restoring from a backup, 644 Opening blank graphic, 504 testing
CPL object Saving, 495, 507 Decimal point in graphics, 484
Compiling from a CPL text file, Custom live report Default file directories, changing,
386 Members, adding, 550 574
Creating new, 388 See also Report Default site, 55
Downloading to BCU offline, Custom profile, 138–142 DEFDBL statement, 378
389 Custom programming language, DEFFLT statement, 378
Downloading to BCU online, See CPL DEFINT statement, 378, 380
389 DEFLNG statement, 378

692 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Index

DEFOBJ statement, 377 EIA-232 connection Saving archive as text or Excel

Delete event option, using, 360 Configuring modem object for, file, 228
Deleting Tracer Summit items, 651 637 Settings, changing, 569
Object, deleting, 652 Creating modem object for, 636 Viewing alarm popups, 568
Report, deleting, 559 Definition, 682 See also Task manager
Restrictions, 651, 658, 660 Modem object setup required, Events in a schedule, See
Site, deleting, 658 632 Scheduling, 351
Demand limiting, definition, 675 Electronic file, using to input Events printer
Destination, 485 BACnet data, 641 Definition, 150
Device Electronic library, 25 Setting up and selecting, 150
Creating for use with non-Trane Ellipsis button, 21 Exception in a schedule, 351
server, 634 Archiving event log, Task Exceptions
Definition, 675 manager, 228 Adding to time of day reports,
Device ID for PC workstation, 67, See also ... button, 21 368
576 Ellipsis, See Referencer button Expanded message
Options, advanced, 578 END statement, 373 Backing up, 643
Viewing for a site, 61 Energy conservation Creating, 508
Device ID Accomplishing with chiller plant Definition, 508
Assigning for non-Trane device, control, 289 Restoring from a backup, 646,
626 Monitoring pulse meter input, 647
For BCU, 58 278 Selecting for analog input
Need for unique, 635 Enumeration alarm, 253
Obtaining for non-Trane device, Assigning in CPL text file, 379 Selecting for binary input alarm,
628 Defining for priority shutdown, 258
Showing, 578 380
Workstation, changing, 575 Definition, 379
Device, operator display, adding Example, after assignment, 381 F
and deleting, 586–587 Example, before assignment,
See also Operator display 380 Feedback reference
Device, Tracer 100 or Tracker panel, Error codes in CPL, interpreting, Definition, 257
125 394 Selecting, 258
Diagnostic, definition, 675 Error-30 through Error-307, 394 Field in a graphic, See Graphic field
Dialing prefix, 164 Ethernet, definition, 676 File directories, changing default,
Differential Event 574
Definition, 309 Adding, 358 File format
For MWU, 340 Changing event time, 359 Event log archive, 228
Setting, 309 Removing, 360 as .SAV, 228
DIP switch, definition, 675 Event class as .TXT, 228
Direct digital control, definition, 676 Example user-defined classes, as Excel file, 228
Directory 82 File name
Changing default for files, 574 Labels for, 82 Auto generating for reports, 558
For storing graphics, 496 Predefined classes, 81 Specifying for a report, 558
Disconnect remote connection Recommended notifications, 81 Fill in template option, 515
security option, 140 Trend snapshots and, 458 Folder, see Directory
Displaying manual override status Event Classes Fonts in a graphic, 484
Hand icon, 564 Assigning for present value, 312 Footer, entering for reports, 554
Displaying Override Status, 172 Assigning for timed override For more information about Tracer
Drive max airflow, 343 (TOV), 312 Summit, 5
Duct pressure optimization in VAS Category alarms, 83 Frequency of running CPL program,
Comm5, 327 Setting up, 81–83 setting, 388
Duty cycle, Tracer 100, 358 Event log Frequency of trend sampling, See
Dynamic values, appearance of Adding a BCU event log object, Interval
when offline, 13 60 Function
Archiving, 218, 221 Adding in CPL text file, 375
Creating expanded message for Assigning access to, 140
E a graphic, 508
Definition, 676
Economizer control, definition, 676 New features, 2 G
Edit level of security, definition, 135 Printer selection, 569
EEPROM, definition, 676 Printing, 150 GIF file format, 470, 502, 506
Effective period of a schedule, 363 Global changes, 203

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 693
Index

Calculated analog and binary Security access to, 471 Accessing, 463
objects, 212 Setup, allocating workstations Capabilities, 461
Globally changing sites for, 13 Using, 461
Applying changes to a single Site-specific, definition, 501 Graphics editor palette, 464
site, 204 Standard, definition, 501 Graphing control editor
Applying changes to Template field, See Template Creating a single trend object
multiple sites, 205 field graph, 519
Groups, and, 201 Uses of, 461 Creating live property graphs,
Modifying BCU objects, 207 See also Custom screen editor 518
Object types you can change, Graphic field Using historical graphs, 516
203 Aligning multiple, 492 Using live property graphs, 516
Offline programming, and, 18 Analog in 5 color field, 464 Graphs, See Graphing control
Task manager, and, 217 AVI movie field, 464 editor
Global graphic Binary animation field, 464 Grid
Backing up, 643 Binary check box field, 464 Color, changing, 467
Definition, 501, 677 Border, editing, 483 Displaying on a graphic, 466
Effect of selecting save option, Border, significance of cross- Snap to grid, disabling, 467
497, 498 hatching, 475, 476, 490 Snap to grid, enabling, 467
Navigation tree, and, 405 Border, significance of stripes, Spacing, configuring, 467
Restoring from a backup, 646 490 Using to organize fields, 466
Global references Copying, 492 See also Custom screen editor
Setting up for analog or binary Cutting and pasting, 491 Group of sites node, 399
outputs, 268 Deleting, 494 Group security, 144
Setting up for VAS Comm5 Editing, 474, 475 Group, definition, 677
members, 328 External file sources, 488 Grouping sites, 199
Graphic Identifying type of, 475 Creating a group, 200
Background, changing, 468 Image field, 464 Creating call centers for groups
Basics, 462 Inserting, 474 of sites, 202
Blank, 504 Making the same size, 493 Creating scan tasks for groups,
Context for, 472, 487 Moving, 491 202
Custom, See Custom graphic Moving by one pixel, 491 Forwarding alarms from groups
Definition, 677 Moving forward or back, 494 of sites through e-mail, 245
Deleting, 515 Organizing with the grid, 466 Task manager, and, 226
Deleting, renaming as Override control field, 464, 607 Using groups to make global
alternative to, 500, 515 Primary field, 490 changes, 201
Displaying for UCM when Property references for, 475
offline, 13 Resizing, 491
Editing, 463 Secondary field, 490 H
Editor,See Graphics editor Selecting multiple, 490
Expanded message, See Selection list control field, 464 Hand icon
Expanded message Setpoint control field, 464, 607 displaying for manual override,
Field,See Graphic field Setup information, 476, 477 564
File formats for images, 470 Static text field, 464, 607 Harvesting trend objects, setting
File name, 470 Status text field, 464, 607 up, 457
Folders, 462 Target button field, 465, 607 HDD, See Total Heating Degree
Global, definition, 501 Target External button field, 476, Days
Grid, See Grid 488 Header .cpl file, 371
Hard-coded graphic, definition, Target fields, 485 Heat Flow Rate calculation, 526
678 Target image field, 465 Heat Pump Loop Control (HPLC)
Home, changing, 562 Target text field, 465 Loop controller member,
Inserting images, 506 Template field, See Template assigning, 349
Jumping to, See Target field field Need-to-run threshold, 345, 348
Location, 470 Text style, editing, 483 Need-to-run votes, 347
Location search order, 496 Types of, 464 Night Heat/Cool operation, 345
Options, 461 See also Custom screen editor WSHP compressor referencer,
Palette, See Graphics editor Adding control value fields, 349
palette 610 WSHP member, assigning, 349
Properties, editing, 468 Graphic object, see Graphic Heat/cool
Renaming, 500, 515 Graphical status field, setup Night heat/cool, See Night
Restoring, 499, 646, 647 information for, 480 heat/cool
Saving, 495–496 Graphics editor VAV air system control, 339

694 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Index

Historical trend objects, setting up, Insert prompt, 474 Standard, membership rules
457 Interval for, 549
Holiday, 351 Sampling interval for trend, 456 See also Report
Adding to time of day schedule Selecting for reporting, 554 Local area network, See LAN
reports, 368 IP subnet, 37, 45 Logging onto multiple sites, 139
Holiday schedules, setting I-P units, 56
Message forwarding and call
centers, 242 M
Home graphic, changing, 562 J
HTML file Macro
Definition, 678 JPG file format, 470, 502, 506 See Keyboard macros
Name, 495 Macro node, 400
Role in deleting graphic, 515 Main control buttons, Trend Viewer,
Search sequence, 496 K 446
HVAC equipment Main image of a custom graphic,
Controlling with a schedule, 351 Keyboard macros 505
Definition, 678 Accessing the macro editor, 414 Manual override status, displaying,
During site setup, 8 Creating a macro, 415 564
Editing from the navigation tree, Manually adding objects
407 Non-Trane device, 629
I Macro node icon, 400 Master workstation, 12
Selecting predefined macros, Maximum calculation, 527
I/O, See Input/output object 416 Member of a report
Image Tracer 100 predefined macros, Changing order of, 552
Autoselecting size, 474 418 Defining, 548
Changing state assignment, 482 Tracker predefined macros, 423 Member of a schedule, 361
Creating for a graphic, 502 See also Navigation tree, 407 Member of a trend
Definition, 678 Adding, 453
File formats, 470, 502 Definition, 453
Inserting in a graphic, 506 L Editing, 453
Locating, 470 Including in a report, 542
Saving, 502 Labels, for event classes, 82 Limited number allowed, 454
Setup information for, 483 LAN Member of an area, adding, 306
Sizes available, 503 Connection, programming Member of an object type, operator
Inch-pound units, 56 without, See Offline display, adding and deleting,
Input programming 589–590
Metering for use in calculations, Layout See also Operator display
528 Changing in reports, 552 Message forwarding and call
See also Input object Codes for reports, 552 centers, 231
Input object LEDs Accessing the editor, 236
Analog input, 250, 280 clear code, database, RAM, and Alarms, forwarding, 244
Binary input, 255 reset procedure, 665 Background considerations, 232
Definition, 249 clear Comm5 database, 666 Call center, definition, 232
Naming, 270 clear database, RAM, and reset Creating a message forwarding
See also Input/output object procedure, 665 schedule, 241
Input/output object clear RAM and reset procedure, Issues to consider before
Creating, 249, 277 664 creating a call center, 234
Creating for BACnet, 638 Library Selecting a site/group from
Modifying, 270 CPL examples, 369 which alarms are sent, 245
Naming, 270 Electronic reference, 25 Selecting alarm event classes,
Role in BACnet setup, 633 Lighting, how area control affects, 246
Security classes, 274 302 Setting holiday schedules, 242
Types of, 249, 280 Line-feed printer, 150 Setting up call centers and
Using during site setup, 8 Live report message forwarding, 237
Using in BACnet, 632 Calculation, using in report, 540 Creating a call center, 238
Viewing properties for, 27 Custom, selecting, 545 Registering e-mail profiles,
See also Input object or Output Defining row for, 548 237
object Definition, 540 Scheduling when recipients
Input/output points for BACnet, 638 Member types, 540 receive e-mails, 239
Input/output, See Input/output Sample, 541 Test e-mail forwarding, 240
object Standard, 543 Meter Totalization calculation, 527

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 695
Index

Microsoft Windows Network number, need for unique Referencing a property of, 22
Modem for PC workstation, in BACnet, 635 Referencing indirectly in CPL
adding, 152 New text file, 376, 378
Printer setup, 150 Site, 34 Security access for, 90, 286
Microsoft Windows Paint, 502, 620 UCM, 191 Security, assigning access, 142
Minimum calculation, 527 User, setting up, 136 Showing object ID, 578
Mode button, 19 NIC, See Adapter Object types, operator display,
Options, 20 Night economize adding and deleting, 588–589
Modem Area mode settings, 303 See also Operator display
Adding a Tracer 100 or Tracker Definition, 680 Occupied mode, in VAS
modem, 156 How area control affects, 301 Comm3/Comm4, 340
Adding for a site BCU, 60, 161 Setting up, 311, 356 Occupy, area mode settings, 303
Adding for a workstation, 152 Tracer 100 schedules, and, 358 Off Alarm Limits field
Adding object for EIA-232 Night heat/cool requirements, 253
connection, 636 Area mode settings, 303 Offline Editing
BCU modem setup, 160 Definition, 680 Non-Trane device, 629
Configuring object for EIA-232 How area control affects, 301 Offline programming
connection, 637 No access level of security, Database requirement, 14
Deleting from BCU, 64 definition, 135 Global changes, and, 18
PC workstation modem setup, No Such Property message, 510 Information flow in Tracer
151 Nobody Logged On Summit, 11
Security access to, 166 Need for user name, 143 Of existing site, 14
Setting up, 151 Setting up user profile, 143 Of new site, 12
Monthly report, setting up, 556 Node Offline, definition, 680
Morning warm up, See MWU Definition, 397 Task manager, and, 217
settings Types of, 399 Tracer 100 sites, 17
Movement cursor, 491 See also Individual node types UCM type required, 13
MWU settings, 338 Non-Trane device Ways to use, 12
MWU differential, 340 Communication flow between Offset, setting for schedule
MWU setpoint, 340 devices, 632 members, 362
Selecting, 340 Connection types, 625 On Alarm Limits field requirements,
Interfacing to, 626 253
Network, need for unique Online programming, 12
N number, 635 Information flow in Tracer
Offline Editing, 629 Summit, 11
Name Providing information to other Online, definition, 681
Site, inability to modify, 35 systems, 632 Terminal emulation, and, 411
Navigation tree Role in BACnet setup, 633 Tracer 100 sites, 17
Connecting to a site from the Using BACnet for, 625 Opening, 434
tree, 401 See also BACnet device(s) Operator display, 581
Creating nodes, 402 Normal chiller, 296 Accessing the editor, 582
Assigning graphics to, 405 Normal day, 351 Adding event log, 60
Basic considerations, 402 Not used mode, 22 Creating a new BCU operator
Creating nodes inside site Numeric Only paging protocol, 169 display, 583
nodes, 403 Enabling custom screens, 595
Cutting and pasting, 403 Home screen, 591
Finding a node, 404 O Selecting custom screens, 597
Grouping nodes, 404 Setting up security, 147
Definition, 397, 680 Object Setting up the BCU operator
Different types of nodes, 399 And property reference, 378, display, 586
Editing macros from, 407 578 Selecting a device, 586
Navigation tree, capabilities, Assigning in CPL text file, 376 Selecting members, 589
397 Definition, 680 Setup options for the operator
Using the navigation tree, 400 Deleting, 651, 652, 657 display, 593
The tree menu and pop-up Grouping into security classes, Enabling security at the
menus, 400 274 operator display, 593
See also System options Name in template field, 510 Operator levels, See Security, 135
Setting connection features, Options, advanced, 578 Optimal start/stop, 351, 356
580 Properties, viewing, 27 Area mode settings, 303
Network adapter, See Adapter References to an object, How area control affects, 301
locating, 653 Optimal start, definition, 681

696 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Index

Optimization features for VAS Setting up, 167, 169 Point-to-point connection, See EIA-
Comm5, 327 Paintshop Pro, 502, 620 232 connection
Options, system, See System Palette, See Graphics editor palette Pre-defined profile, 138
options Panel node, 399 Pre-selected access for, 136
Output object Password Pre-defined user, deleting after
Analog output, 259 Assigning, 139 setup, 135
Binary output, 265 Before security established, 135 Prefix for phone numbers, 164
Definition, 249 Showing and hiding, 139 Present value
Naming, 270 Pause in dialing, code for, 164 Advanced overrides, 273
See also Input/output object PC modem, See Modem, 33 Role in changeover voting, 342
Output of reports, controlling, 558 PC workstation Using advanced overrides, 195,
Output, See Output object Creating in a site, 66 316
Over-pressurization of ducts, VAVs, Default device ID, 67, 576 Votes in VAS, 344
324 Definition, 681 Previously viewed report
Override Deleting from a site, 68 Opening, 547
Button names associated with, Deleting last from site, 68 Primary field, 490
171 Destination for restore function, Printer
VAVs in VAS Comm3/Comm4, 646, 647 Adding in Windows, 150
342 Device ID, assigning, 67, 576 Events, 150
VAVs in VAS Comm5, 330 Device ID, changing, 575 Line-feed, 150
Override status, displaying hand Editing in a site, 67 Operating system, 8
icon, 564 Enabling and disabling alarm, Page, 150
Overrides 571 Recommended for event log,
Overriding analog and binary Master workstation, 12 150, 570
values, 271–273 Modem, See PC workstation Selecting, 150
Overrides, advanced, 187 modem Selecting for event log, 569
Overriding a Binary Output, 182 Need for additional, 13 Setting up for reports, 558
Non-Trane, 183 Offline, 11 Setup sequence, 8
Overriding a Multi-State Analog Online, 11 Tracer Summit, 8
Output, 180 Required for site creation, 57, 66 Tractor-feed, 150
Overriding a Multi-State Output Requirements for remote Printing
Non-Trane, 181 communication, 7 Alarms and events, 150
Overriding a UCM or Application, Role in archiving trends, 460 Electronic file, creating for
185 Setting up, 7 BACnet, 641
Overriding an Analog Output, 177 Synchronization among Priority class, modifying name of,
Non-Trane, 179 multiple, 90 631
Overriding an Area, 314 Time and zone, setting up, 86 Priority control, definition, 681
Overriding other values PC workstation modem Priority shutdown
Using the advanced override, Adding in Windows, 152 Area mode settings, 303
197 Configuring for BCU sites, 155 Defining an enumeration for,
Overriding the present value Configuring for Tracer 100 or 380
Using the advanced override, Tracker sites, 156 Profile
314 Creating new, 153 Assigning pre-defined to a user,
Overwriting settings, prevention of Editor, accessing, 151 138
when offline, 14 Name, assigning, 154 Copying for a user, 138
Object, creating, 154 Nobody Logged On, modifying,
Phone book, managing, 163 143
P Security access to, 166 Of user, 136
Setting up, 157 Setting up, 136
Page count, inserting into report, PCX files, 13 Programmable control module,
552 Peak chiller, 296 definition, 681
Page number, inserting into report, Peak for X Minute Interval Programming
552 calculation, 528 Definition, 11
Page printing, 150 Phone book In CPL, See CPL
Pager Adding for Tracer 100 or Tracker Offline, See Offline
Editor, accessing, 167 panels, 124 programming
Message forwarding, call Adding phone numbers, 164 Online, See Online
centers, and, 231, 233, 234 Editing phone numbers, 163 programming
Object, creating, 168 Removing phone numbers, 165 Order checklist, 7
Protocol, selecting, 169 Setting up, 163 Setup sequence, 7
Security access to, 169 PIN for pager, 169 Property

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 697
Index

And object reference, 378 Footer, entering, 554 S

Definition, 681 Formatting, 552
Editing graphic properties, 468 Layout codes, 552 Sampling
Printing out an object’s Member order, changing, 552 Clearing samples, 459
properties, 28 Members, defining, 548 Controlling by reference, 454
Reference for analog input, 253 Naming, 548 Delaying, 455
Reference for analog output, Opening a previously viewed Determining whether
261 report, 547 suspended, 459
Reference for binary input, 257, Opening a saved report, 546 Disabled after snapshot, 458
258 Orientation, 548 In trend reports, 542
Reference for binary output, 266 Output options, 558 Interval, 456
Referencing when offline, 22 Page count, inserting into Limits on, 454
Selecting for reference, 22 report, 552 Members of a trend, 453
Selecting references for graphic Page number, inserting into Number of samples, 455
fields, 475 report, 552 Resuming, 459
Viewing an object’s properties, Printer, setting up for reports, Setup for trend, 454
27 558 Viewing samples, 459
Pulse meter input, 278 Purpose of reporting, 539 SAV files
Report editor, 539 Creating with Backup a remote
Restoring from a backup, 648 function, 412
Q Running, 543 Restoring a Tracer 100 panel
Running for BACnet objects, 639 with, 668
Quick trend report, See Trend Saving, 559 Task manager panel backup, 219
report, Standard Scheduling, 554–557 Task manager, group of sites
Selecting, 543 task, 226
Standard reports, 543 Task manager, immediate scan,
R Title, entering, 553 221
Trend, 460, 542 Task manager, single site task,
RAM Types of reports, 540 224
Definition, 682 Report viewer, 543 Saved Report
Random access memory, See RAM Reports Opening, 546
Redialing, 161 For time of day schedules, 366 Saved value in CPL text file, 383
Reference information in library, 25 Time of day schedules, 368 Definition, 383
Referencer edit control fields, see Reset function Example, 385
Referencers Resetting a BCU, 663 Reading, 384
Referencers Restore function Writing, 384
Definition, 19, 682 Global graphics, restoring, 646 Scanning sites, 218
Failure of, 22 Reports, restoring, 648 Immediate scan, 221
Locating for an object to be Site graphics, restoring, 647 Schedules
deleted, 653 Sites, restoring, 643 Creating time of day reports,
Mode button, 19 Restoring a Tracer 100 panel, 668 366
Not used mode, 22 Restoring an original graphic, 499 Scheduling
Referencer button, 21 Restoring custom screens, 649 Creating a daily schedule, 353
Referencer mode, 21 Right of decimal, 484 Interval for reporting, 554
Releasing control back to the Right-click capabilities, 466 Reports, 554–557
system, 186 Routines Save events as a normal
Remote unit Editing text files of, 13 schedule to weekdays,
Tracer 100 sites, 125 Testing, 13 weekends, and holidays, 364
Report Routing Schedule, definition, 351
Auto generating file name, 558 Alarm for a binary output, 267 Screen, accessing, 352
Backing up, 643 Alarm for an analog input, 253 Using Tracer 100 schedules, 364
Blank row, adding, 552 Alarm for an analog output, 263 Second dial tone, code for, 164
Body text, formatting, 554 Alarm for an binary input, 258 Second window for graphic, 487
Calculation, using in report, 540 Alarm for analog input, 253 Secondary field, 490
Column headings, entering, 553 For chiller plant event class, 298 Security
Date, inserting, 552 For UCMs, 197 Classes, assigning for a site, 142
Deleting, 559 Overriding, 571 Group security, 144
Designing, 548 Rover service tool, 621–623 Message forwarding and call
Editing, 543, 548 RPT file format, 543 centers, and, 235
File format, 543 Runtime version Operator display, 147
File name, 558 Runtime view, definition, 682 Profiles, managing, 138

698 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Index

Security editor, 135 Occupied, purpose for, 309 Restoring a Tracer 100 or
Supervisor, 135 Setting, 309 Tracker site, 650
System security, definition, 684 Unoccupied, purpose for, 309 Restoring from a backup, 643,
Security access Setpoint field, setup information 644
Auto log off option, 140 for, 477 Security access, setting up, 90,
Auto remote connection option, Setting up the Trend Viewer, ??–430 286
140 Setup Segmenting by security class,
Changing, 90 Graphics, allocating 274
Choosing options, 140 workstations for, 13 Selecting to configure, 55
Disconnect remote option, 140 Testing, 13 Setting up, 7
Edit level, 135 See also Programming Single site setup, 33
For a chiller plant, 298 Show connection dialog, 571 Time and date, setting, 86
For an area, 312 SI units, 56 Tracer 100 or Tracker, 120
For analog inputs, 253 Simplified override dialog box UCM(s), managing, 74
For analog outputs, 263 Accessing, 174 Site configuration editor
For binary inputs, 258 Overriding system objects, Accessing, 55
For binary outputs, 267 177–186 Accessing, Tracer 100 or Tracker
For calculation objects, 538 Setting up, 172 panels, 124
For graphics, 471 Using, 177 Capabilities, 33
For modems, 166 Site Tracer 100 or Tracker panels,
For objects, 90, 286 Backing up, 643 119
For pagers, 169 Task manager, BCU, 218 Site Connection
For trends, 458 Task manager, Tracer 100, configuring a site by Modem or
For UCMs, 197 219 Hardwired, 40
For VAS Comm3/Comm4, 343 BACnet device, 69 Site connection wizard
For VAS Comm5, 329 BCUs, managing, 57 Site connection process, 35, 45
Levels of, 136 Billing periods, defining, 79 Site connection process, Tracer
Match upper and lower case Configuration editor, See Site 100 or Tracker sites, 121
option, 140 configuration editor Site creation wizard
No access level, 135 Configuring, 56 Restoring a site from, 53
Nobody logged on, 143 Tracer 100 or Tracker, 124 Site creation process, 34
Operator display, 147 Configuring by Modem or Site creation process, Tracer 100
Operator levels, 136 Hardwired, 40 or Tracker sites, 120
Required for uploading site, 42 Configuring via offline Site graphic
Security supervisor option, 140 programming, 13 Backing up, 643
Setting for a UCM, 198 Connecting from navigation Definition, 683
Setting for an area, 313 tree, 401 Effect of selecting save option,
Setting for input/output object, Control priorities, 7 498
274 Copying a site Restoring from a backup, 647
To a class, 142 BCU site, 54 Site modem editor, See Modem
To a function, 140 Tracer 100 or Tracker, 122 editor
To an application, 141 Creating, 34 Site Name status field, 30
To an object, 142 Tracer 100 or Tracker, 120 Snap to grid feature, 467
View only level, 135 Default site, 55 Custom screen editor, 617
Security class Definition, 33, 683 Snapshot
Assigning access to, 142 Deleting when currently logged Effect on sampling, 458
Definition, 274 on, 658 Enabling and disabling, 458
For input/output objects, 274 Deleting when not logged on, Referencing a trigger, 458
Naming, 80 658 Resetting, 459
Read only access, 142 Devices, listing, 61 Space comfort controller (SCC),
Read/write access, 142 Devices, synchronization of, 89 345, 349
Security supervisor Devices, Tracer 100 or Tracker, Spacing on grid, configuring, 467
Security option, 140 125 Custom screen editor, 609
Select, 496 Logging onto multiple, 139 Standard graphic
Selecting a data range, 446 Multiple sites, managing, 33 Definition, 499, 501
Setpoint Grouping sites, and, 199 Location, 501
Definition, 683 Task manager, and, 217 Replacing, 496
Modifying for VAS Name, inability to modify, 35 Restoring original, 499
Comm3/Comm4, 341 Naming, 35 Saving, 495
Modifying for VAS Comm5, PC workstation(s), managing, 66 Saving as custom graphic, 498
326–327 Programming offline, 12, 14 Saving as site graphic, 497

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 699
Index

Saving edits to, 496 T Saving report as, 543

Standard international units, 56 Text style, editing for graphic fields,
Standard live report Target field, 485 483
Definition, 543 Context object for, 487 Time
Members, adding, 549 Definition, 485, 684 Automatic synchronization of,
Membership rules, 549 Destination, 485 90
Selecting, 544 Displaying graphic in second Changing, 88
Using to report on BACnet window, 487 Synchronization for devices, 89
objects, 639 Inserting, 485 See also Time and zone
See also Report Setup information for, 477 Time and date, setting for a site, 86
Standard time, 88 Target External button, 476, 488 Time and zone, setting up, 86
Standard trend report Target image setup information, Time of day schedule reports, 366
Definition, 543 483 Adding event information, 368
Role in extracting Trends, 449 Using with template field, 510 Time of day scheduling, 351
Running automatically, 460 See also Custom screen editor Adding a member to a schedule,
Start debug option, 391 Task manager, 217 361
Statement, adding to CPL text files, Accessing the Task manager Adding event, 358
374 schedule screen, 220 Changing a schedule’s name,
Static text field, set up information Archiving event log, 218 360
for Backing up a BCU site, 218 Changing effective period, 363
Custom screen editor, 613 Backup file location, 229 Creating a daily schedule, 353
Static text field, setup information Creating a task for groups of Creating a time of day report,
for, 477 sites, 226 351
Status icon, locating on main Creating a task for single site, Creating a time of day schedule
window, 29 222 report, 366
Status text field, setup information Four task types, 218 Definition, 684
for, 477 Run immediate scan on single During site setup, 8
Custom screen editor, 610 site, 221 Offsets, setting for members,
Status, definition, 683 Saving the event log as a text or 362
Striped border on graphic field, 490 Excel file, 228 Removing a member from a
Supervisor of security, setting up, scanning sites, 218 schedule, 362
135 Tracer 100 panel backup, 219 Removing event, 360
Swing chiller, 296 Telephone numbers, See Phone Setting up day of the week, 357
Switch for billing period, 79 book Tracer 100 schedules, 364
Switching to run-time view, Custom Template field Timed override
screen editor, 617 Context for, 472, 487, 514 Assign to event classes, 312
Synchronization Context object, definition, 674 Binary trigger, BMTX, 277
Automatic, 90 Definition, 510 Cancel timed override request,
Of device time in site, 89 Effect on display of navigation 316
Syntax of CPL, See CPL tree, 499 Definition, 684
System node, 399 Eligible field types, 510 How area control affects, 302
System options Filling in with permanent Initiating TOV functionality for
Advanced, 578 information, 514 area members, 307
Advanced settings, 575 Inserting, 511 Setting up, 310
Alarm settings, 569 Object name in, 510 Start timed override request,
Changing event log settings, Opening a graphic containing, 316
569 513 Title, entering for reports, 553
Changing home graphic, 562 Removing from a graphic, 514 to, 268
Changing workstation device ID, Site name in, 510 Tool bar, Trend Viewer, 441
575 Template graphic, definition, Toolbar alarms, configuring, 565
Editing, 561 684 Total Cooling Degree Days
Selecting an e-mail profile for Using with target field, 510 calculation, 529
message forwarding, 579 Template, custom screen, 603 Total Heating Degree Days
Selecting event log printer, 569 Tend Viewer calculation, 530
Setting, 561 Adding a property, 439 Total Run Hours/Starts calculation,
Setting connection features of Terminal emulation, Tracer 100 or 531
the navigation tree, 580 Tracker, 411 Tracer 100 or Tracker panels, 409
Viewing system status, 29 Test message Altering panel memory, 411
System values e-mail forwarding, 240 Background, 410
Overriding, 171 Text file Configuring a Tracer 100 panel,
System, see Tracer Summit For CPL, See CPL text file 124

700 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Index

Configuring a Tracker panel, 127 Trend object, See Trend Variables have wrong values,
Configuring ports, 410 Trend objects 391
Creating keyboard macros, 413 Harvesting for Audit Trail TXT file format, 543
Predefined macros, 418 databases, 457
Creating Tracer 100 .SAV files, Harvesting for Trend Viewer,
412 457 U
Interfacing with the navigation Trend report, 460
tree, 411 Custom, selecting, 545 UCM
Terminal emulation, 411 Defining column heading for, Accessing information offline,
See also Keyboard macros 548 13
Tracer 100 or Tracker sites Definition, 540 Advanced override, 195–197
Configuring Tracer 100 or Sample of, 542 Advanced overrides
Tracker panels, 124 Sampling in, 542 Overriding the present value,
Copying, 122 Standard, 543 195
Creating, 120 See also Report Releasing control of, 196
Defining, 119 Trend Viewer Chiller, setting up, 298
Editing a Tracer 100 keyboard adding to, 433 Configuring, 194
macro from the navigation Chart elements, 442–444 Creating in a site, 74
tree, 407 data markers, 444 Creating new, 191
Restoring, 650 grid, 444 Definition, 686
Setting up a modem for, 156 icons, 444 Deleting from a site, 76
Tracer 100 sites with multiple legend, 443 Editor, accessing, 189
panels, 128 Creating, 431–433 Graphic display when offline, 13
Adding panels, 130 Creating from a graphic, 433 Members, standard behavior,
See also COP panel Different ways to open, 434–437 302
Using Tracer 100 schedules, 364 Displaying from popup menu Naming multiple UCMs in a site,
See also Tracer 100 or Tracker on a graphic, 430 75
panels Graphic, opening from, 435 Overriding other values, 197
Tracer 100 site node, 399 Harvesting trend objects, 457 Role of in a site, 74
Tracer loop controller, 345, 347, 348, Historical trending, 447 Security access to, 197
349 Main control buttons, 445, 446 Setting up, 193
Tracer Summit Saving, 434 Viewing properties of, 27
Backing up, 643 Setting up, 426–430 UCM node, 400
CD, 7 Setting up harvesting trend UCP (unit control panel), definition,
Database, 11 objects, 457 686
Definition, 685 Setup menu, opening from, 434 UCP1,See Chiller
Deleting items, 651 Toolbar, 441 UCP2,See Chiller
Optional packages, 1 toolbar, opeining from, 437 UDP port number, 38, 46, 48
Restoring, See Restore function Working with, 440–448 Unacknowledged Alarms status
Window sizes available, 503 Troubleshooting field, 30
Tracer Summit BCU site node, 399 BACnet, 578 Unit control module, See UCM, 33
Tracker site node, 399 Chiller marked as failed, 298 Unit Controllers menu option, 189
Tractor-feed printer, 150 CPL routines affected when Units of measure
Trend input/output renamed, 270 Need for consistency in chillers,
Archiving, 460 Failure of compile function, 387 298
Communication requirements, Images not displaying properly Selecting for a new site, 56
460 in graphics editor, 470 Unoccupied mode
Creating, 451 Incomplete database, 30 Area mode settings, 303
Definition, 449 Interpreting CPL error codes, In VAS Comm3/Comm4, 340
Interval of sampling, 456 394 UPCM (universal programmable
Member, See Member of a trend Limited BCU memory for trend control module), definition, 686
Naming, 454 samples, 454 Uploading
Renaming, 454 Messages sent to wrong Calculated analog and binary
Report, See Trend report workstation, 575 objects, 212
Samples, See Sampling Referencer failure, 22 Uploading and downloading
Saving, 460 Runtime errors halt CPL BCU objects, 207
Security access to, 458 program, 391 Upper and lower case
Snapshot, See Snapshot System cannot locate graphic, Security option, 140
Trend editor, capabilities, 449 497 User
Trend log, definition, 686 System cannot locate object, Entering information for, 137
Using in a report, 542 462 Modifying information for, 143

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 701
Index

Nobody Logged On, 143 Ventilation optimization, 327

Operator levels, 136 VAV air system
Setting up, 136 Variable air volume, definition,
User name 687
Before security established, 135 VAV air system, see VAS
Deleting pre-defined user, 135 Comm3/Comm4, VAS Comm5
Nobody Logged On, need for, VAV I, 337, 339, 341
143 VAV II, 337, 339
VAV III, 337, 339
VAV IV, 337, 339
V Ventilation optimization in VAS
Comm5, 327
Variable, 380, 383, 391 Ventilation, how area control
Using to reference an object, affects, 301
377 See also HVAC equipment
Using to reference an object Version of BCU, selecting to
and property, 378 download, 78
Viewing, 392 View only level of security,
Variable air volume (VAV) boxes, definition, 135
333
Variable air volume air system, see
VAS Comm3/Comm4, VAS W
Comm5
VAS Comm3/Comm4, 333–344 WAIT statement, 391
Accessing the VAS Waterflow valve
Comm3/Comm4 editor, 334 Balancing, 330
Air handler, selecting, 336 Weekly report, setting up, 555
Airflow drive max, 339 Window sizes in Tracer Summit,
Alarms, 343 503
Assigning members, 336 Windows 98, 7
Capabilities, 333 Windows NT, 7
Components, 333 Workstation alarm, enabling and
Creating object, 335 disabling, 571
Drive VAVs to max flow, 343 Workstation, See PC workstation
Heat/cool decisions, 339
Minimum flow value, 338
Modifying, 338 Z
MWU settings, See MWU
settings Zone
Naming, 335 Definition, 688
Security access to, 343 Setting up, 86
Setpoints, modifying, 341 Zone control system, definition,
Setting up, 338 688
Voting for present value, 344 See also Time and zone
Voting setpoints, 342
VAS Comm5, 319–332
Accessing the VAS Comm5
editor, 320
Assigning members, 322–325
Autocommissioning VAVs, 332
Balancing air and water flow,
330
Common space VAVs, 324–325
Creating the object, 321–322
Duct pressure optimization, 327
Global references, 328
Security access to, 329
Setting up, 326–327
Supported controllers, 319
VAV auxiliary heat at night, 327
VAV calibration, 327

702 BMTX-SVP01B-EN
 Reader 1. In a word, how would you describe this guide?
________________________

Response 2. Using the following scale, rate the overall quality of this guide:
(Use the following scale.)
Form 1 2 3 4 5
Dreadful Terrific

3. How do you use this guide? (Choose one.)

Our goal is to provide accurate a. I read it from beginning to end.
and efficient information
b. I read only the sections that pertain to my immediate needs.
to our customers. Please use
this form to help us improve c. I read only the sections that pertain to my job.
the quality and usability
of this guide. Make copies of 4. How easily can you find information in this guide?
this form if needed. 1 2 3 4 5
Not easy at all Moderately Very easy
—very difficult easy

5. When you actually try the instructions described in this guide, how
easily can you follow them?
1 2 3 4 5
I can’t Occasionally With
follow the the content great
instructions is confusing ease
at all.

6. How well did you understand the product before reading this guide?
1 2 3 4 5
Not at all Somewhat Thoroughly

7. How well did you understand the product after reading the guide?
1 2 3 4 5
Not at all Somewhat Thoroughly

Please send this form 8. The best aspect of this guide is __________________________________
by fax or mail to:
_______________________________________________________________
Trane GCC
Product Communications
4833 White Bear Parkway 9. If we were to change one aspect of this guide, it should be _________
St. Paul, MN 55110
_______________________________________________________________
(fax) 651-407-4198
10. Name, e-mail address: (optional) _________________________________
_______________________________________________________________

BMTX-SVP01B-EN 672
Reader Response Form

673 BMTX-SVP01B-EN